No preview available
HomeMy WebLinkAboutRenton Pavilion Project Manual r • MITHIJN _ - ti • PROJECT MAN UAL • L • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,.WASH I NGTON Issue For Construction January 28, 2003 ./_I L Project No.,02373.00 L Ref-e. REGISTERS ARCHfiE • STATE OF WASH NGT�O • Pier 56, 1201 Alaskan Way, Suite 200 Seattle,WA 98101 TEL(206) 623-3344 FAX (206) 623-7005 C Mithun.Inc RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 00005 TABLE OF CONTENTS . BIDDING, NEGOTIATION AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 00020 SYNOPSIS OF BIDDING INFORMATION 00030 INVITATION TO BID 00035 PLAN CENTER LIST ( 00040. • BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS AIA DOCUMENT A701 00200 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT AIA DOCUMENT A305 00300 BID FORM-FORM OF PROPOSAL 00310 BID BOND FORM 00400 NON-COLLUSION, ANTI-TRUST, &MINIMUM WAGE FORM 00480 LISTING OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS 00500 CONTRACT AIA DOCUMENT A101 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS AIA DOCUMENT A201 00800 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 00810 INSURANCE CONDITIONS DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 SUMMARY 01230 ALTERNATES 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION • 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES . 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01421 STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01630 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS { 01631 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01735 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES DIVISION 2-SITE CONSTRUCTION 02300 EARTHWORK 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 02530 SANITARY SEWER 02630 STORM DRAINAGE 02751 CONCRETE CURBS AND SIDEWALKS 02810 IRRIGATION 02870 SITE FURNISHINGS 02930 PLANTING DIVISION 3-CONCRETE 03300 CONCRETE 03545 CEMENT BASED UNDERLAYMENT DIVISION 4-MASONRY NOT USED • ( 02373.00 TOC-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 00005 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 5- METALS 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05310 STEEL DECK 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05500 . METAL FABRICATIONS • 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06150 WOOD DECKING 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07162 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07412 METAL WALL PANELS 07552 SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07840 FIRESTOPPING 07920 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 8- DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08310 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08361 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08415 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08800 GLAZING 08900 GLAZED ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEMS DIVISION 9- FINISHES 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09310 TILE 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE 09775 REINFORCED PLASTIC PANEL WALL COVERING 09900 PAINTING DIVISION 10 -SPECIALTIES yi 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS . • '10270 ACCESS FLOORING 10525 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10705 FIXED SUNSCREENS 10810 TOILET ACCESSORIES DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT NOT USED • DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS NOT USED DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT USED 02373.00 TOC-2 01/28/03 1 • RENTON PAVILION ' L RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 00005 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15055 MOTORS 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15071 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15081 DUCT INSULATION 15082 EQUIPMENT INSULATION 15083 PIPE INSULATION 15110 VALVES 15121 PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS 15122 METERS AND GAGES 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING 15185 HYDRONIC PUMPS 15189 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 15194 FUEL GAS PIPING 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15486 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15513 CONDENSING BOILERS 15628 MECHANICAL CHILLER 15641 OPEN-CIRCUIT, MECHANICAL-DRAFT COOLING TOWERS 15721 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME(VAV)AIR HANDLING UNITS 15761 AIR COILS 15767 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS 15815 METAL DUCTS 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES 15837 CENTRIFUGAL FANS 15840 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS,AND GRILLES 15890 AIR DUCT CLEANING 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15940 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS • 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 15960 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16050 BASIC MATERIALS&METHODS 16052 EXISTING SYSTEMS 16060 TESTING 16110 RACEWAYS 16120 WIRE AND CABLES SECONDARY VOLTAGES 16130 OUTLET&PULL BOXES 16140 WIRING DEVICES&PLATES 16160 PANELBOARDS 16170 DISCONNECTS &FUSED SWITCHES 16450 GROUNDING 16500 LIGHTING FIXTURES 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16930 LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS • • - END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 02373.00 TOC-3 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00020 SYNOPSIS OF BIDDING INFORMATION A. PROJECT: Renton Pavilion Project Location: 233 Burnett Avenue South Renton,WA 98055 B. OWNER: City of Renton 1055 South Grady Way Renton, WA 98055 C. OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE: Dennis Culp, Director, Facilities Division 1055 South Grady Way Renton, WA 98055 Phone(425)430-6606 FAX(425)430-6603 D. ARCHITECT: Mithun Architect+Designers+Planners 1201 Alaskan Way Suite 200 Seattle, WA 98101 Phone(206)623-3344 FAX(206)623-7005 E. PLANS AVAILABLE: DATE: January 28, 2003 Complete plan sets can be purchased at(name the reproduction company here)for$(recover reproduction costs) per set. Bidding contractors will have their funds returned. Alternatively, plans can be viewed at area plan centers. F. BIDS DUE: Wednesday,. ebruary 18, 2003, at 2:30 p.m. at Renton City Hall, "ConTerence Room 521,1055 South Grady Way, Renton, WA. G. NOTICE TO PROCEED: Approximately, March 3, 2003 • H. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION: Ninety(90)calendar days. Liquidated damages thereafter at one hundred fifty dollars ($150) per day. • I. BID SECURITY: Minimum 5%of bid submitted as cash, certified check, bid bond, or cashiers check. J. PERFORMANCE BOND&PAYMENT BOND: 100%of contract amount. 02373.00 00020-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00020 SYNOPSIS OF BIDDING INFORMATION K. WAGES: Pay state prevailing wages rates. L. TYPE OF CONTRACT: Single contract encompassing all construction work and including general, mechanical, electrical,civil engineering foundation system, landscaping, , • irrigation system,and sprinkler system. M PRE-BID MEETING A PRE-BID MEETING WILL BE HELD IN THE council Chambers,7th floor, Renton City Hall, 1055 South Grady Way, Renton,WA on Monday, February 3, at 9 am. The purpose of the meeting is to review the submittal requirements and answer and questions from prospective ! �' bidders. Afterwards there will be a site orientation at the Pavilion building. END OF SECTION • • 02373.00 00020-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00030 INVITATION TO BID NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS The City of Renton plans to renovate an existing automotive repair shop, located at 233 Burnett Avenue South in downtown Renton, Washington, into future retail, restaurant, and assembly uses. Future uses Will be tenant improvements and are not part of this work. Sealed bids for a general construction contract for the parking garage project will be received, either by mail or by hand, at the office of the City Clerk, Renton City Hall (7th Floor), 1055 S. Grady Way, Renton, Washington 98055. Form of Proposal (Bid) (Section 00300) will be received and time stamped, until 2:30 P.M. (PST) on Wednesday)February 18,2003. Bids for will then be opened and publicly read aloud at 2:45 P.M. of same day Bids are received in the 5th Floor Conference Room (#521)of City Hall. Bid requests for Part 2 Alternates are included for portions of Work, and which will be priced separately, are included in the Work at Owner's option. General Contractors shall be properly licensed for this Work. It is the Owner's intent to enter into an Agreement with a Contractor on or before Friday, March 3, 2003, following City Council approval on or before February 24th, 2003. COMPLETION The Work to be performed under this Contract will be substantially complete on or before June 3,2003. PRE-BID MEETING A pre-bid meeting will be held in the Council Chambers, 7th Floor, Renton City Hall, 1055 S. Grady Way, Renton, Washington on Monday, February 3, 2003 at 10:00 AM. The purpose of this meeting is to review the submittal requirements,and answer any questions from prospective bidders. Afterwards there will be a site orientation at the garage location. PROCUREMENT OF DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents, Project plans and specifications, may be examined at the Plan Centers located in Document 00035. The Contract Documents, Project plans and specifications, may be obtained at the Reprographics Northwest Inc., located at, 616 - 8th Avenue South, Seattle, WA. 98104; (206) 624-2040. Upon Bidder request to printer, document sets may be picked up at the Bellevue branch, located at 13029 Northup Way Ste. 3. Registered copies of the Contract Documents may be obtained starting, Tuesday, January 28, 2003 at 8:00 A.M. by bona fide, licensed, Contractors who bid the work for a refundable deposit of$200.00 per set, up to two(2)sets per Contractor. Checks shall be made payable to Owner, City of Renton. Portions of Contract Documents may be obtained at the cost of reproduction. However, addenda and other such communications will be sent only to holders of registered numbered sets. Holders of partial or unregistered sets of documents will be entirely responsible for informing themselves of addenda and other notifications. To receive refunds, complete document sets must be returned in good condition within 10 days after the date set for the opening of bids. Deposits on complete registered sets of documents from bona fide bidders will be refunded by mail within 14 from date of receipt of said documents. 02373.00 00030-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00030 INVITATION TO BID BID SECURITY A surety company Bid Bond On AIA Document A310, or other State of Washington approved form, a cashier's check or a certified check drawn on a State of Washington Bank acceptable to the Owner will be required as stated in the Bidders Instructions. CONTACT FOR QUESTIONS ` Questions should be directed to Lynn Robbins, Project Manager, at Mithun Inc., (206)623-3344. BID WITHDRAWAL No bidder may withdraw its Bid after the hour set for the opening thereof, unless the award of the contract is delayed for period exceeding thirty(30)days. • The City reserves the right to reject any and all bids and waive any informalities or irregularities in the bids received.A City's bond is required. The C' s fair practices/non-discrimination policies and State Prevailing Wage performance Rates apply to this project. Bonnie Walton, City Clerk Dates of Publication: January 28 and January 30,2003 Seattle Daily Journal of Commerce • • 02373.00 00030-2 01 /28/03 /28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00035 PLAN CENTER LIST Associated Sub-Contractors 3312 S Union Tacoma, WA 98409-3138 (253) 383-4591, fax(253)383-2859 Builders Exchange of Washington* 2607 Wetmore Avenue Everett, WA 98201-2926 (425)258-1303, fax(425)259-3832 cheri@bxwa.com Construction Data Plan Center Building C3, Suite 1 13010 Northup Way Bellevue, WA 98005 (425) 881-5071,fax(425)881-0644 Construction Data/AGC Plan Center 800 South Michigan • Seattle,WA 98108 (206)223-0320, fax(206)621-0451 Construction Data Plan Center 4803 Pacific Highway E, Suite 3 Tacoma, WA 98424 (253) 922-7172, fax(253)922-3430 Construction Market Data. 500 SW 7th Street, Ste. 105 (98055) PO Box 9002 (98057-9002) Renton,WA (800) 854-4033, fax(800)854-4346 (425)277-4645, fax(425)277-5036 Construction Market Data 10504 NE 37th Circle, Building 7 ( Kirkland,WA 98033 (425) 827-9313, fax(425) 822-9666 Daily Journal of Commerce Plan Center 2374 NW Vaughn Portland, OR 97210 (503)274-0624,fax(503)274-2616 PO Box 10127 Portland, OR 97210 • 02373.00 00035-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00035 PLAN CENTER LIST Oregon Contractor Plan Center 14625 SE 82nd Drive ; PO Box 477 Clackamas, OR 97015 (503)650-0148, fax(503)650-8273 Southwest Washington Contractors Association 7017 NE Highway 99, Suite 110 Vancouver,WA 98665 (360)694-7922, fax(360)694-0188 Valley Plan Center* 1819 S Central Ave., Suite 84 Kent,WA 98032 (253)852-1090, fax(253)852-3424 *MBE or WBF Owned Plan Center END OF SECTION • • • 02373.00 00035-2 01/28/03 i RENTON PAVILION • RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00040 BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST The following items are required to be submitted for the Bid. Other forms not listed below but included in these Specifications are for informational purposes and need only be executed by the successful Contractor. LIST OF REQUIRED SUBMITTALS • ❑ Bid Proposal Form (Section 00300) 0 Bid Bond Form (Section 00310) ❑ Listing of Proposed Subcontractors(Section 00480) ❑ Combined Affidavit and Certification Form (Section 00400) ❑ Contractor's Qualification Statement(Section 00200) • • • • 02373.00 00040-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.01 STANDARD FORM Incorporate by this reference the Instructions to Bidders, 1997,AIA Document A701, as follows.Articles 1 through 8 inclusive are included as a part of this contract. The Bidders, Contractor and all Subcontractors shall read and be governed by them. 1.02 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS A. A Bid Bond in the amount of five percent(5%)of the total amount of each bid must accompany each bid. The successful bidder shall enter into a contract in accordance with the bid and shall furnish a Performance Bond in the amount of 100%bid. B. The City's fair practices and non-discrimination policies, and State Prevailing Wage Rates apply to this project. D. A Notice To Proceed shall be given after the building permit is approved,the City Council, City Attorney, Risk Manager approves the Contract, and the Contract is signed by the Mayor. E. Upon Notification of Intent to Award Contract,the following documents must be submitted prior to commencement of the Work and no later than 10 days after receipt of Notification of Intent To Award Contract: Standard Form of Agreement(Section 00500) • Bond To The City Of Renton (Section 00610) City of Renton Business License(Section 01130) Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages(Section 01130) • Certificate of Liability Insurance(Section 00820); naming the City of Renton as additional insured. F. Project Time of Completion and amount of Liquid Damages are stated in the Form Of Proposal. G. Progress Payments will be subject to retainage of 5%as stated in the Standard Form of • Agreement Owner and Contractor(Section 00500). 1.03 BIDDER SELECTION CRITERIA 02373.00 00100-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. Contractor's Qualifications Statement", Section 00220 will be the basis of establishing bidder's responsiveness, and ability to perform the work for this project. B. The Cityreserves the right to reject anyand all bids and waive any informalities or irregularities in bids received. Attachment: 6 pages of AIA document A701 follows. END OF SECTION • • • 02373.00 00100-2 01/28/03 1997 Edition -Electronic Format AIA Document A701 - 1997 Instructions to Bidders TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. DEFINITIONS THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 2. BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH 1 BIDDING DOCUMENTS RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 4. BIDDING PROCEDURES DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. 5. CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6. POST-BID INFORMATION • 7. PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8. FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders,Supplementary Instructions to Bidders,the bid form,and other sample bidding and contract forms. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A2oi,or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. mien 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, t •+,14�.� r. clarifications or corrections. 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated f" "f therein,submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. A1997 AIA® 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work AIA DOCUMENT A701-1997 described in the Bidding Documents as the base,to which Work may be added or from which INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. The American Institute of Architects 1.6 An Alternate Bid(or Alternate)is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work,as described in the Washington,D.C.20006-5292 Bidding Documents,is accepted. © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, O 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject he violator to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a701— 11/19/2002. AIA License Number 1027208,which expires on 1/31/2003. 1 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents. 1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials,equipment or labor for a portion of the Work. { ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that: THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 2.1.1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents, CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH to the extent that such documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted,and AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH for other portions of the Project,if any,being bid concurrently or presently under construction. RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF 2.1.2 The Bid is made in compliance with the Bidding Documents. THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become-familiar with local conditions under which the DOCUMENT D401. Work is to be performed and has correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1 COPIES 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum,if any, stated therein. The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids.The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit.A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder's deposit will be refunded. 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid,or in supplementary instructions to bidders. 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 3.1.4 The Owner and Architect may make copies of the Bidding Documents available on + t` the above terms for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work. No license or grant of use is �►� � �► conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding Documents. m 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 01997 AIA® 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each AIA DOCUMENT A701-1997 other,and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, shall examine the site and local The American Institute of Architects conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. discovered. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 • 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. P © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, © 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject he violator to legal prosecution.WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a701—11/19/2002. AIA License Number 1027208,which expires on 1/31/2003. 2 � I 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding,and Bidders shall not rely upon'them. 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 3.3.1 The materials,products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function,dimension,appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. I ' 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall include the name q of the material or equipment for which it is to be THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement AN ATTORNEY 1S ENCOURAGED WITH setting forth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Work, including RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF require, shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or`disapproval of a proposed DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA substitution shall be final. DOCUMENT D401. 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum.Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract Documents. 3.4 ADDENDA 3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. 3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. 3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued,and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. MO , ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES ..r 4.1 PREPARATION OF BIDS 'I' lt 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with the Bidding Documents. ;! • mom 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed in a non-erasable medium. 01997 AIA® 4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and figures.In case of discrepancy,the amount MA DOCUMENT A701-1997 written in words shall govern. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 4.1.4 Interlineations,alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. The New American Avenue, of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change." © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, O 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject he violator to legal prosecution.WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a701—11/19/2002. AIA License Number 1027208,which expires on 1/31/2003. 3 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested,the Bidder may,without forfeiture of the bid security,state the Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder.The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name of the Bidder and the nature of legal form of the Bidder. The Bidder shall provide evidence of legal authority to perform within the jurisdiction of the Work.Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder. 4.2 BID SECURITY THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required if so CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders.The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and will,if required,furnish bonds covering the faithful RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required,the amount THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages,not as a penalty.The DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to DOCUMENT D401. comply with Paragraph 6.2. 4.2.2 If a surety bond is required, it shall be written on AIA Document A3io, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents, and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either(a) the Contract has been executed and bonds,if required,have been furnished, or(b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn or(c) all Bids have been rejected. 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid,the bid security,if any,and any other documents required to be • submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address and,if applicable,the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail,the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation"SEALED BID ENCLOSED"on the face thereof. 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location •.' designated for receipt of Bids. , • , 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, facsimile or other electronically transmitted bids will 11.11m. not be considered. ®1997 AIA® 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID AIA DOCUMENT A701 97 BIDDER INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS —. 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified,withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids,and each Bidder so The American Institute of Architects agrees in submitting a Bid. 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 4.4.2 Prior to 'the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder.Written confirmation O 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 0 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject he violator to legal prosecution.WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a701—11/19/2002. AIA License Number 1027208,which expires on 1/31/2003. 4 over the signature of the Bidder shall be received,and date-and time-stamped by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids.A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the { receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. 4.4.4 Bid security,if required,shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 5.1 OPENING OF BIDS At the discretion of the Owner, if stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL properly identified Bids received on time will be publicly opened and will be read aloud. An CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH abstract of the Bids may be made available to Bidders. AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids.A Bid not accompanied by a required THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents,or a Bid which is in any way DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA incomplete or irregular is subject to rejection. DOCUMENT D401. 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which,in the Owner's judgment,is in the Owner's own best interests. 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION 6.1 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request,a properly executed AIA Document A3o5,Contractor's Qualification Statement, • unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents. 6.2 OWNER'S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY The Owner shall, at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids,furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to -;.•f ,11 fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and tt, • •, Contractor. iimms 6.3 SUBMITTALS 6.3.1 The Bidder shall, as soon aspracticable or as stipulated in the BiddingDocuments, 07�7 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A701-1997 after notification of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Architect in writing: .1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces; The American Institute of Architects .2 names of the manufacturers, products, and the suppliers of principal items or 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work;and Washington,D.C.20006-5292 .3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work. 'I. © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, O 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject he violator to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a701 — 11,19/2002. AIA License Number 1027208,which expires on 1/31/2003. 5 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents. 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect,after due investigation,has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder.If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity,the Bidder may,at the Bidder's option, (i)withdraw the Bid or(2)submit an • acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder.In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH µ N have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed REASPECT ITS COMPLETION OR WITH and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect. MODIFICATION.TO ITS ETIA AUTHENTICATION OF , THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS DOCUMENT D401. 7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources. 7.1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents,the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the cost of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. 7.1.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder's usual sources,changes in cost will be adjusted-as provided in the Contract Documents. 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract. If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent,the Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work,submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Subparagraph 7.2.i. 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the mom, Contract Sum. L!Lf 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on ;: behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. 01997 AIA® ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR AIA DOCUMENT A701-1997 Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents, the Agreement for the Work will be INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS written on AIA Document Aioi,Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum. The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 0 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 0 1997 by The American Institute ot Architects. Reproduction ot the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject he violator to legal prosecution.WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your • license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a701— 11/19/2002. AIA License Number 1027208,which expires on 1/31/2003. 6 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00200 • CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT 1.01 • STANDARD FORM A. The"Contractor's Qualification Statement", 1986,AIA Document A305 follows and a d is included as part of this contract. The Bidders, Contractor and all Subcontractors shall read and be governed by them. Attachment: 4 pages of AIA document A305 follows. END OF SECTION • • 02373.00 00200-1 01/28/03 AIA Document A3o5-Electronic Format Contractor's Qualification Statement 1986 EDITION THIS DOCUMENT,HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES: CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D4ot. This form is approved and recommended by The American Institute of Architects (AIA) and The Associated General Contractors of American (AGC) for use in evaluating the qualifications of contractors. No endorsement of the submitting party or verification of the information is made by AIA or AGC. Copyright 1964,1969,1979,©1986 by The American Institute of Architects,1735 New York Avenue N.W,Washington D.C.20006-5292. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecution. The Undersigned certifies under oath that the information provided herein is true and sufficiently complete so as not to be misleading. SUBMITTED TO: ADDRESS: SUBMITTED BY: Corporation Q NAME: Partnership Q ADDRESS: Individual Q PRINCIPAL OFFICE: Joint Venture Q I Other NAME OF PROJECT(if applicable): TYPE OF WORK(file separate form for each Classification of Work): General Construction HVAC Plumbing Electrical Other(please specify) 1. ORGANIZATION • 1.1 How many years has your organization been in business as a Contractor? • 1.2 How many years has your organization been in business under its present business name? 1.2.1 Under what other or former names has your organization operated? 1.3 If your organization is a corporation,answer the following: 1.3.1 Date of incorporation: 1.3.2 State of incorporation: 1.3.3 President's name: 1.3.4 Vice-president's name(s) 1.3.5 Secretary's name: 1.3.6 Treasurer's name: - © 1986 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. AIA DOCUMENT A305 - CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT- 1986 EDITION -AIA® -WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: a305mast—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. Electronic Format A305-1986 1 1.4 If your organization is a partnership,answer the following: 1.4.1 Date of organization: 1.4.2 Type of partnership(if applicable): 1.4.3 Name(s)of general partner(s) 1.5 If your organization is individually owned,answer the following: 1.5.1 Date of organization: 1.5.2 Name of owner: • 1.6 If the form of your organization is other than those listed above,describe it and name the principals: 2. LICENSING 2.1 List jurisdictions and trade categories in which your organization is legally qualified to do business,and indicate registration or license numbers,if applicable. 2.2 List jurisdictions in which your organization's partnership or trade name is filed. 3. EXPERIENCE 3.1 List the categories of work that your organization normally performs with its own forces. 3.2 Claims and Suits. (If the answer to any of the questions below is yes,please attach details.) 3.2.1 Has your organization ever failed to complete any work awarded to it? 3.2.2 Are there any judgments,claims,arbitration proceedings or suits pending or outstanding against your organization or its officers? 3.2.3 Has your organization filed any law suits or requested arbitration with regard to construction contracts within the last five years? 3.3 Within the last five years, has any officer or principal of your organization ever been an officer or principal of another organization when it failed to complete a construction contract? (If the answer is yes,please attach details.) 3.4 On a separate sheet, list major construction projects your organization has in progress, giving the name of project, owner, architect,contract amount,percent complete and scheduled completion date.• 3.4.1 State total worth of work in progress and under contract: 3.5 On a separate sheet,list the major projects your organization has completed in the past five years,giving the name of project, _ _ owner,architect,contract amount,date of completion and percentage of the cost of the work performed with your own forces. I ,I 3.5.1 State average annual amount of construction work performed during the past five years: 3.6 On a separate sheet,list the construction experience and present commitments of the key individuals of your organization. 4. REFERENCES ® 1986 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. AIA DOCUMENT A305 - • z CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT - 1986 EDITION -AIA® -WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:a305mast— 11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 3_ Electronic Format A305-1986 2 y ' 4.1 Trade References: . 4.2 Bank References: 4.3 Surety: 4.3.1 Name of bonding company: 4.3.2 Name and address of agent: 5. FINANCING 5.1 Financial Statement. 5.1.1 Attach a financial statement, preferably audited, including your organization's latest balance sheet and income statement showing the following items: Current Assets (e.g., cash, joint venture accounts, accounts receivable, notes receivable, accrued income, deposits,materials inventory and prepaid expenses); Net Fixed Assets; Other Assets; Current Liabilities (e.g., accounts payable, notes payable, accrued expenses, provision for income taxes, advances,accrued salaries and accrued payroll taxes); Other Liabilities(e.g.,capital,capital stock,authorized and outstanding shares par values,earned surplus and retained earnings). 5.1.2 Name and address of firm preparing attached financial statement,and date thereof: 5.1.3 Is the attached financial statement for the identical organization named on page one? 5.1.4 If not, explain the relationship and financial responsibility of the organization whose financial statement is provided (e.g.,parent-subsidiary). 5.2 Will the organization whose financial statement is attached act as guarantor of the contract for construction? 6. SIGNATURE 6.1 Dated,at this day of . Name of Organization: By: Title: 6.2 • M being duly sworn deposes and says that the information provided herein is true and sufficiently complete so as not to be misleading. O 1986 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. AIA DOCUMENT A305 - CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT - 1986 EDITION - AIA® -WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted.below. User Document:a305mast—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. Electronic Format A305-1986 • 3 Subscribed and sworn before me this day of zo Notary Public: My Commission Expires: ' I h :.AJ @ 1986 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. AIA DOCUMENT A305 - a, CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT - 1986 EDITION -AIA® -WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: a305mast—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. Electronic Format A305-1986 4 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DPCUMENT 00300 BID FORM FORM OF PROPOSAL ( BID ) for the RENTON PAVILION RENOVATION 233 Burnett Avenue Renton, Washington Bids Due: 2:30 P.M. Wednesday, February 18, 2003 To: City Clerk, Room#728 Seventh Floor of City Hall 1055 South Grady Way Renton,WA 98055 The undersigned hereby certifies that they have carefully examined the Contract Documents as defined in the General Conditions entitled "Renton Pavilion Renovation", 233 Burnett Avenue, Renton,WA and have examined the site of the work and the location where said work is to be done, and fully understands the manner in which payment is proposed to be made for the cost thereof, hereby proposes to furnish all materials and to perform all labor which may be required to complete said work within the time fixed, and upon the terms and conditions provided in said Contract Documents for consideration of the following amount: A. BASE BID For all work shown in the Contract Documents,the sum of:$ Washington State Sales Tax: $ Grand Total Base Bid: $ B. ALTERNATE BIDS ALTERNATE NUMBER AND DESCRIPTION: ALTERNATE#1:Access Flooring ADD / DEDUCT: $ Circle One Washington State Sales Tax: $ Total Alternate#1: $ ALTERNATE#2: Curtainwall at Gable Ends. ADD / DEDUCT: $ • Circle One 02373.00 00300-1 01/28/03 Washington State Sales Tax: $ Total Alternate#2: $ • ALTERNATE#3: Mechanical Air Conditioning. ADD / DEDUCT: $ Circle One • Washington State Sales Tax: $ Total Alternate#3: $ ALTERNATE#4: Extend Construction Schedule. ADD / DEDUCT: $ Circle One Washington State Sales Tax: $ Total Alternate#4: $ li ALTERNATE#5: Sunscreen. ADD / DEDUCT: $ Circle One Washington State Sales Tax: $ Total Alternate#5: $ If the contract contains any work that requires trenching exceeding a depth of four feet, all costs for adequate trench safetysystems shall be identified as acompliance with separate bid item in q Chapter 39.04 of the Revised Code of Washington.This is to ensure that the bidder agrees to comply with the trench safety requirements of the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act, Chapter 49.17 of the Revised Code of Washington. This bid amount shall be considered as part of the total base bid set forth above. Bidder must include a lump sum dollar amount in the blank below(even if the value is$0.00)to be responsive. Trench Excavation Safety Provisions Only: $ y B. CONDITIONS OF PROPOSAL • ;.�_ 1. Determination of Low Bidder: The owner reserves the right to'Award a Contract'based on the Contractor's Proposal Amounts for Base Bid and/or Breakdown, in whatever manner is in the Owner's best . interest. 2. Overhead and Profit: All of the above Bid Prices shall include overhead and profit. 3. Sales Tax: All of the above Bid Prices shall include Washington State Sales Tax. 00300.2 BID FORM C. PERIOD OF BID VALIDITY/ACCEPTANCE OF BID 1. BASE BID The undersigned hereby agrees that this BID as described in paragraph "A"shall be a valid and firm offering for the period of sixty(60) days from closing time for the"Receipt Of Bids." Acceptance of Bid: Within sixty(60)days afterthe opening of Form Of Proposal,the City will act either to accept the Proposal from the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder, or to reject all Bids. The City reserves the right to request extensions of such Bid acceptance period. The acceptance of a Bid will be evidenced by a written Notice of Intent to Award Contract to the Bidder whose Bid is under consideration for acceptance, together with a request to furnish a bond (if required),evidence of insurance to execute the agreement set forth in the Contract Documents, and other designated documents. D. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT If written "Notice of Intent to Award Contract"is mailed,telegraphed,facsimile, or delivered to the undersigned within the"period of Bid Validity" noted above, or any time thereafter before this Bid is withdrawn,the undersigned will, within ten (10) days after the date of such notification,execute a Contract in the form of the AIA Document A101 "STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR-STIPULATED • SUM", 1997 edition. E. TIME FOR COMPLETION • The undersigned hereby agrees to"FINAL COMPLETION"of all Work outlined in the Contract Documents by February 16, 2001. F. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES If the Contractor fails to complete the Work by the FINAL COMPLETION DATE (or such extension of that date which might be granted by the Owner), he agrees to abide by all provisions of the Contract. In addition, Liquidated Damages in the amount of Five Hundred Dollars($500.00)will be assessed for each calendar day that the Contractor exceeds the"FINAL COMPLETION DATE.". G. ADDENDA RECEIPT Receipt of the following"ADDENDA"to the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS is acknowledged: Addendum No. Date Addendum No. Date Addendum No. Date 00300-3 BID FORM H. EXECUTION OF PROPOSAL Name of Firm State License Registration No. Address -I City State Zip Code Telephone ( ) FAX ( ) The undersigned designates the above as the firm and address to which "NOTICE OF CONTRACT AWARD"may be mailed, hand delivered or delivered via facsimile. NOTE: If a Bidder is a corporation,write state of incorporation; and if a partnership, give full names and addresses of all partners below: The undersigned certifies that the above is a firm and valid BID to accomplish all Work and comply with all requirements of the Contract Documents. Date Signature Name &Title END OF BID FORM • 00300-4 . BID FORM RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00310 BID BOND FORM Herewith find deposit in the form of a certified check,cashier's check,cash, or bid bond in the amount of L 1 $ ,which amount is not less than five percent of the total bid. Sign here: rl —' Know All Men by These Presents: That we, , as Principal, and as Surety, are held and firmly bound until the City of Renton, as Obligee, in the penal sum of Dollars,for the payment of which the Principal and the Surety bind themselves,their heirs, executors, administrators,successors and assigns,jointly and severally, by these presents. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Obligee shall make any award to the Principal for according to the terms of the proposal or bid made by the Principal therefor, and the Principal shall duly make and enter into a contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of said proposal or bid and award and shall give bond for the faithful performance thereof,with Surety or Sureties approved by the Obligee;or if the Principal shall, in case of failure to do so, pay and forfeit to the Obligee the penal amount of the deposit specified in the call for bids, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect and the Surety shall forthwith pay and forfeit to the Obligee, as penalty and liquidated damages,the amount of this bond. SIGNED,SEALED AND DATED THIS DAY OF ,20 Principal Surety • 02373.00 00310-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00310 • BID BOND FORM .Received return of deposit in the sum of$ 1 • is 02373.00 00310-2 01/28/03 . RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00400 NON-COLLUSION,ANTI-TRUST, AND MINIMUM WAGE FORM NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT - • Being duly sworn,deposes and says,that he is the identical person who submitted the forgoing proposal or bid,and that such bid is genuine and not sham or collusive or made in the interest or on behalf of any person not therein named,and further,that the deponent has not directly induced or solicited any other Bidder on the foregoing work or equipment to put in a sham bid,or any other person or corporation to refrain from bidding,and that deponent has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure to himself or to any other person any advantage over the other Bidder or Bidders.. AND CERTIFICATION RE:ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER Vendor and purchaser recognize that in actual economic practice overcharges resulting from anti-trust violations are • in fact usually borne by the purchaser. Therefore,vendor hereby assigns to purchaser any and all claims for such overcharges as to goods and materials purchased in connection with this order or contract,except as to overcharges resulting from anti-trust violations commencing after the date of the bid,quotation,or other event establishing the price under this order or contract. In addition,vendor warrants and represents that such of his suppliers and subcontractors shall assign any and all such claims to purchaser,subject to the aforementioned exception. AND • MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT FORM • I,the undersigned,having been duly sworn,deposed,say and certify that in connection with the performance of the work of this project, I will pay each classification of laborer,workman,or mechanic employed in the performance of such work;not less than the prevailing rate of wage or not less than the minimum rate of wages as specified in the principal contract:that I have read the above and foregoing statement and certificate,know the contents thereof and the substance as set forth therein is true to my knowledge and belief. FOR: NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT,ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT Name of Project Name of Bidder's Firm Signature of Authorized Representative of Bidder Subscribed and sworn to before me on this day of ,20 Notary Public in and for the State of Washington Residing at 02373.00 00400-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00480 • SUBCONTRACTORS LISTING OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS (for construction projects valued at$1,000,000 or more) RCW 39.30.060 The following information is submitted which gives the name and business address for each subcontractor listed below with whom the bidder will directly subcontract for performance of the following work, if the bidder is awarded the contract. If the bidder intends to perform the work with its own firm,the bidder must enter its name for the category of work designated. THE NAMES OF ALL SUBCONTRACTORS PERFORMING THE WORK LISTED BELOW MUST BE SUBMITTED ON THIS FORM AS A PART OF THE BID,OR WITHIN ONE(1)HOUR AFTER THE PUBLISHED BID SUBMITTAL TIME FOR THE BID TO BE DEEMED RESPONSIVE. Only one subcontractor can be listed for each category of work. _ • Portion of work Firm name Business Address Heating,Ventilating &Air Conditioning (HVAC) Plumbing Electrical • Signature of Bidder 02373.00 00480-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00500 CONTRACT 1-1 101 STANDARD FORM The Standard Form of Agreement Between the Owner and the Contractor Where the Basis of Payment is a Stipulated Sum, 1997,AIA Document A-101, as follows,Articles 1 through 9 inclusive. They are included as part of the contract. The Contractor and all subcontractors shall read and be governed by them,with enclosed modifications. 5 pages of AIA document A-101 follows • 02373.00 00500-1 01/28/03 • 1997 Edition -Electronic Format AIA Document A101-1997 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM • AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year of THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL (In words,indicate day,month and year) CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH BETWEEN the Owner: RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR (Name,address and otherinformation) MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA `" and the Contractor: DOCUMENT D401. (Name,address and other information) AIA Document A201-1997,General Conditions of the Contract for The Project is: Construction,is adopted in this document (Name and location) by reference.Do not use with other general conditions unless this document is modified. - The Architect is: (Name,address and other information) • This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. The Owner and Contractor agree as follows. ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS - The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement;these form the Contr act,and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents,other than Modifications,appears in Article 8. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except.to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ;..• ���.;, 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be.the date of this Agreement unless a '•••( I - different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. "% (Insert the date of commencement ifit differs from the date of this Agreement or,ifapplicable,state that the date will be fixed in a notice to proceed.) 01997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A101-1997 If, prior to the commencement of the Work, the Owner requires time to file mortgages, OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT mechanic's liens and other security interests,the Owner's time requirement shall be as follows: The American Institute of Architects • 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 • © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, © 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates US copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and • can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a101-11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208,which expires on 1/31/2003. 1 • 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement. 3.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than days from the date of commencement,or as follows: (Insert number of calendar days. Alternatively, a calendar date may be used when coordinated with the date of commencement. Unless stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents,insert any requirements for earlier Substantial Completion ofcertain portions of the Work.) • ,subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. (Insert provisions,if any,for liquidated damages relating to failure to complete on time or for bonus payments for THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL early completion of the Work.) CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION Or THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA Contractor's performance of the Contract.The Contract Sum shall be Dollars($ ),subject to DOCUMENT D401. additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201-1997,General 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any,which are described Conditions of the Contract for in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: Construction,is adopted in this document (State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates.If decisions on other alternates are to be made by the by reference.Do not use with other Owner subsequent to the execution of this Agreement,attach a schedule ofsuch other alternates showing the amount general conditions unless this document is for each and the dale when that amount expires) modified. This document has been approved and 4.3 Unit prices,if any,are as follows: endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS 5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect,the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month,or as follows: 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month,the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor not later than the day of the month.If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date mom ---- fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values �,. , submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of ! kw values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its 01997 Am® accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect,shall AIA DOCUMENT A101-1997 be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion The American Institute of Architects of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 O 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987,O 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates US copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a101—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208,which expires on 1/31/2003. 2 5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents,the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: .1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values, less retainage of percent ( %). Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work,amounts not in dispute shall be included as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.8 of AIA Document A201-1997• THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL _ .2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment.CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH construction(or,if approved in advance by the Owner,suitably stored off the site at a RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR location agreed upon in writing),less retainage of percent(%); MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA .3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner,and DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. .4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a AIA Document A201-1997,General • Certificate for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.5 of AIA Document A2o1-1997. Conditions of the Contract for Construction,is adopted in this document 5.1.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Subparagraph 5.1.6 by reference.Do not use with other shall be further modified under the following circumstances: general conditions unless this document is modified. .1 Add,upon Substantial Completion of the Work,a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to the full amount of the Contract Sum,less such amounts as the Architect This document has been approved and shall determine for incomplete Work,retainage applicable to such work and unsettled endorsed by The Associated General claims;and Contractors of America. (Subparagraph 9.8.5 of AIA Document A2o1a157requires release of applicable retainage upon Substantial Completion of Work with consent ofsurety,ifany.) .2 Add,if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.3 of AIA Document A2o1-1997. 5.1.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage,if any,shall be as follows: (If it is intended,prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work,to reduce or limit the retainage resulting from the percentages inserted in Clauses 51.6.1 and 5.1.6.2 above, and this is not explained elsewhere in the Contract Documents,insert here provisions forsuch reduction or limitation.) 5.1.9 Except with the Owner's prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site. 5.2 FINAL PAYMENT 5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum,shall be ,fSIJ�f"f made by the Owner to the Contractor when: ,, r .1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor's mom responsibility to correct Work as provided in Subparagraph 12.2.2 of AIA Document A2o1-1997, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final 01997 AIA® • payment;and AIA DOCUMENT A1O1-1997 OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT .2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. 5.2.2 The Owner's final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 3o days after Washington,D.C.20006-5292 the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment,or as follows: O 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 0 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal -- prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates US copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a101—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208,which expires on 1/31/2003. 3 ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 6.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A2o1-1997. 6.2 The Work maybe suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A2o1.-1997. ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A2o1-1997 or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH 7.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFIpayment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing THIS ELCARONIAULHENTICAEIONOF from time to time at theplace where the Project is located. DOCUM NT MAY E ADE BYD AIA DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AIA (Insert rate ofinterest agreed upon,ifany.) DOCUMENT D401. Usury laws and requirements under the Federal Truth in Lending Act,similar state and local consumer credit laws and AM Document A101-1997,General other regulations at the Owner's and Contractor's principal placesofbusiness,the location of the Project and elsewhere Conditions of the Contract for may affect the validity of this provision. Legal advice should be obtained with respect to deletions or modifications, Construction,is adopted in this document and also regarding requirements such as written disclosures or waivers.) by reference.Do not use with other general conditions unless this document is 7.3 The Owner's representative is: modified. (Name,address and other information) This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General 7.4 The Contractor's representative is: Contractors of America. (Name,address and other information) 7.5 Neither the Owner's nor the Contractor's representative shall be changed without ten days written notice to the other party. 7.6 Other provisions: , 1 ARTICLE 8 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 8.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement,are enumerated as follows: • 8.1.1 The Agreement is this executed 1997 edition of the Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor,AIA Document Aim-1997. �_ff 8.1.2 The General Conditions are the 1997 edition of the General Conditions of the ��F Contract for Construction,AIA Document A2o1-1997. .4ti. • IP.. • •.f 8.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the 45=7. Project Manual dated ,and are as follows: Document Title Pages 01997 AIM) g AIA DOCUMENT A101-1997 OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT The American Institute of Architects 8.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Subparagraph 8.1.3,and are as.follows: Washington,D.C.20006-5292 (Either list the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) O 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987,O 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written 1. permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates US copyright laws and will subject the P PY 8subject violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a101—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208,which expires on 1/31/2003. 4 Section Title Pages 8.1.5 The Drawings are as follows,and are dated unless a different date is shown below: (Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) • Number Title Date THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 8.1.6 The Addenda,if any,are as follows: CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH Number Date Pages RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents DOCUMENT D401. unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 8. AIA Document A201-1997,General 8.1.7 Other documents,if any,forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows: Conditions of the Contract for (List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents.AIA Document A2o1- Construction,is adopted in this document 1997 provides that bidding requirements such as advertisement or invitation to bid,Instructions to Bidders,sample by reference.Do not use with other forms and the Contractor's bid are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. They general conditions unless this document is should be listed here onlyifintended to be part of the Contract Documents.) modified. This document has been approved and This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in at endorsed by The Associated General least three original copies, of which one is to be delivered to the Contractor, one to the Contractors of America. Architect for use in the administration of the Contract,and the remainder to the Owner. OWNER(Signature) CONTRACTOR (Signature) (Printed name and title) (Printed name and title) • mem 4• [. 16% r a MEM 01997 A1A® AIA DOCUMENT A101-1997 OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT The American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 0 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 0 1997 by The American Institute of I Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates US copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a101-11/192002.AIA License Number 1027208,which expires on 1/31/2003. 5 PUGET SOUND ENERGY CORPORATE EXECUTIVE OFFICES BELLEVUE,WASHINGTON SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 -GENERAL A. The"General Conditions of the Contract for Construction",AIA Document A201, dated 1997, is hereby made a part of this Agreement except as modified herein. They are included as part of the contract. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION • • • • 02383.00 00700-1 01/28/03 1997 Edition Electronic Format AIA Document A201 - 1997 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 2. OWNER THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN 3. CONTRACTOR ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 5. SUBCONTRACTORS DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK Contractors of America. • 8. TIME 9.. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK - 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT INDEX Addenda Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 1.1.1,3.11 9.6.6,9.9.3,12.3 Additional Costs,Claims for mow Acceptance of Work 4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1,10.3 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9•10.1,9.10.3,12.3 Additional Inspections and Testing ���;�•:;r Access to Work 9.8.3.12.2.1,13.5 � • i 3.16,6.2.1,12.1 Additional Time,Claims for -E. . Accident Prevention 4.3.4,4•3.7,8.3.2 �JP'+ •1" 4-2.3,10 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT Acts and Omissions 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 - 3.2,3.3.2,312.8,3•i8,41.3,4.3.8,4.4.1,8.3.1, Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 01997 Ain® G 9-5.1,10.2.5,13.4.2,13.7,14.1 1.1.1 DOCUMENT A201 1997 GENERALOF CONDITIONS THE CONTRACT MR CONSTRUCTION O Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 1 Aesthetic Effect 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6,9.6.3,9-6.4,11.4.7 4.2.13,4.5.1 Architect's Representations Allowances 9.4.2,9.5.i,9.10.1 3.8 Architect's Site Visits All-risk Insurance 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2, 11.4.1.1 9.10.1,13.5 Applications for Payment Asbestos 4.2.5,7.3.8,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1,9.8.5, 10.3.1 9.10,11.1.3,14.2.4,14.4.3 Attorneys'Fees Approvals 3.18.1,9.10.2,10.3.3 2.4,3.1.3,3.5,3.10.2,3.12,4.2-7,9.3.2,13.4.2, Award of Separate Contracts 13.5 6.1.1,6.1.2 Arbitration Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for 4.3.3,4.4,4-5.1,4.5.2,4.6,8.3.1,9.7.1,11.4.9, Portions of the Work u.4.10 5.2 Architect Basic Definitions THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL ", 4.1 1.1 CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN Architect,Defmition of Bidding Requirements ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH 4.1.1 1.1.1,1.1.7,5.2.1,u.5.1 RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR Architect,Extent of Authority Boiler and Machinery Insurance MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS 2.4,3.12.7,4.2,4.3.6,4.4,5.2,6.3,7.1-2,7.3.6, u.4.2 ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 7.4,9.2,9.3.1,9.4,9.5,9.8.3,9.10.1, 9.10.3,12.1, Bonds,Lien DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. 12.2.1,13.5.1,13.5.2,14.2.2,14.2.4 9.10.2 Architect,Limitations of Authority and Bonds,Performance,and Payment This document has been approved and Responsibility 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3,11.4.9,11.5 endorsed by The Associated General 2.1.1,3.3.3,3.12.4,3.12.8,3.12.10,4.1.2,4.2.1, Building Permit Contractors of America. 4.2.2,4.2.3,4.2.6,4.2.7,4-2.10,4.2.12,4.2.13, 3.7.1 _' 4.4,5.2.1,7.4,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.6 Capitalization Architect's Additional Services and Expenses 1.3 2.4,1.1.4.1.1,12.2.1,13.5.2,13.5.3,14.2.4 Certificate of Substantial Completion Architect's Administration of the Contract 9.8.3,9.8.4,9.8.5 3.1.3,4.2,4.3.4,4.4,9.4,9.5 Certificates for Payment Architect's Approvals 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1, 2.4,3.1.3,3.5.1,3.10-2,4.2.7 9.1o.i,9.10.3,13.7,14.1.1.3,14.2.4 Architect's Authority to Reject Work Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval - 3.5.1,4.2.6,12.1.2,12.2.1 13.5.4 Architect's Copyright Certificates of Insurance 1.6 9.10.2,11.1.3 Architect's Decisions Change Orders 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.n,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.3.4,4.4.1, 1.1.1,2.4.1,3.4.2,3.8.2.3,3.11.1,3.12.8,4.2.8, 4.4.5,4.4.6,4.5,6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2, 4.3.4,4.3.9,5.2.3,7.1,7.2,7.3,8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 9.4,9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1,13.5.2,14.2.2,14.2.4 9.10.3,11.4.1.2,11.4.4,11.4.9,12.1.2 Architect's Inspections Change Orders,Definition of 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1,13.5 7.2.1 Architect's Instructions CHANGES IN THE WORK 1 3.2.3,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.8,7.4.1,12.1,13.5.2 3.u,4.2.8,7,8.3.1,9.3.1.1,u.4.9 Architect's Interpretations Nom 4 2.u,4.2.12,4.3.6 Claim,Definition of Architect's Project Representative 4.3.1 . I j 4.2.10 Claims and Disputes • . 4*,�;Ff'; Architect's Relationship with Contractor 3.2.3,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.1.1,6.3,7.3.8,9.3.3, :,-3 ., 1.1.2,1.6,3.1.3,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.4.2, 9.10.4,10.3.3 �� .i;. ,i 3.5.1,3.7.3,3.1o,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.i8,4.1.2,4.1.3, Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 4.2,4.3.4,4.4.1,4.47,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2, 4.6.5 „__ 9.3,9.4,9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6,10.3,11.3, Claims for Additional Cost 01997 AIA® 11•4.7,12,13.4.2,13.5. 3.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1,7.3.8,10.3.2 AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors Claims for Additional Time GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE 1 CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ,..- © Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The The American Institute of Architects American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 S _ copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 2 3.2.3,4-3.4,4.3.7,6.1.1,8.3.2,10.3.2 1.1.2 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR 4.3.4 SUSPENSION OF THE Claims for Damages 5.4.1.1,n.4.9,14 3.2.3,3.18,4.3.1o,6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7,10.3.3, Contract Administration 11.1.1, 1.4.5,11.4.7,14.1.3,14.2.4 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 Claims Subject to Arbitration Contract Award and Execution,Conditions• 4.4.1,4.5.1,4.6.1 Relating to Cleaning Up 3.7.1,3.10,5.2,6.1,11.1.3,11.4.6,n.5.1 3.15,6.3 Contract Documents,The Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period 1.1,1.2 13.7 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use Commencement of the Work,Conditions of Relating to 1.6,2.2.5,5.3 2.2.1,3.2.1,3.4.1,3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6,4.3.5,5.2.1, Contract Documents,Defmition of THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 5.2.3,6.2.2,8.1.2,8.2.2,8.3.1,11.1, 11.4.1,11.4.6, 1.1.1 CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN 11.5.1 Contract Sum ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH Commencement of the Work,Definition of 3.8,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2,7.3,7.4,9.1, RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR 8.1.2 9.4.2,9.5.1.4,9.6.7,9.7,10.3.2,n.4.1, 14.2.4, MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS Communications Facilitating Contract 14.3.2 ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA Administration - Contract Sum,Definition of DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA 3.9.1,4.2.4 9.1 DOCUMENT D401. Completion,Conditions Relating to Contract Time 1.6.1,3.4.1,3-11,3.15,4.2.2,4.2.9,8.2,9.4.2,9.8, 4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1.3,7.3,7.4,8.1.1, This document has been approved and 9.9.1,9.10,12.2,13.7,14.1.2 8.2,8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7,10.3.2,12.1.1, 14.3.2 endorsed by The Associated General COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND Contract Time,Definition of Contractors of America. 9 8.1.1 Completion,Substantial CONTRACTOR 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9-i,9.10.3, 3 9.10.4.2,12.2,13.7 Contractor,Definition of Compliance with Laws 3.1,6.1.2 1.6.1,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8, Contractor's Construction Schedules 4.6.4,4.6.6,9.6.4,10.2.2,11.1,11.4,13.1,13.4, 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.i,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 13.5.1,13.5.2,13.6,14.1.1,14.2.1.3 Contractor's Employees Concealed or Unknown Conditions 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.i8.2,4.2.3,4.2.6,10.2, 1 4.3.4,8.3.1,10.3 10.3,11.1.1,11.4.7,14.1,14.2.1.1, Conditions of the Contract Contractor's Liability Insurance 1.1.1,1.1.7,6.1.1,6.1.4 11.1 Consent,Written Contractor's Relationship with Separate 1.6,3.4.2,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2, Contractors and Owner's Forces 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,1L4.1, 13.2,13.4.2 3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,6,11.4.7,12.1.2,12.2.4 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.18.1,3.18.2,5,9.6.2,9.6.7,9.10.2, 1.1.4,6 11.41.2,11.4.7,11.4.8 Construction Change Directive,Definition of Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 7.3.1 1.1.2,1.6,3.1.3,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.2-3,3.3.1,3.4.2, Nomin Construction Change Directives 3.5.1,3.7.3,3.1o,3.n,3.12,3.16,3.18, 4.1.2,4.1.3, 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.28,4-3.9,7.1,7.3,9.3.1.1 4.2,4.3.4,44.1,44.7,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2, 4 ���f,'? Construction Schedules,Contractor's 9-3,9.4,9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6,10.3,11.3, 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3-7.2,6.1.3 11.47,i2,13-4-2,13.5 f Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts Contractors Representations Jr Nip lb. 5.4,142.2.2 1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2 iii Continuing Contract Performance Contractor's Responsibility for Those 4.3.3 - Performing the Work 01997 AIA® Contract,Definition of 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 l0 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 0 Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201— 11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 3 1 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.n,4.2.12,42.13,4.3.4,4.4.1, 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3 4.4.5,4.46,4.5,6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2, Contractor's Right to Stop the Work 9.4,9.5.1,9.8.4,9-9.1,13.5.2,14.2-2,14.2.4 9.7 Decisions to Withhold Certification Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 9.4.1,9.5,9-7,14.1.1.3 4.3.10,14.1 Defective or Nonconforming Work,Acceptance, Contractor's Submittals Rejection and Correction of 3.1o,3.11,3.12,42.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,9.2,9.3, 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.5.2,9.6.6, 9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, n1.3,11.5.2 9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4,12.2.1,13.7.1.3 Contractor's Superintendent Defective Work,Definition of 3.9,10.2.6 3.5.1 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Definitions ` 1 Procedures 1.1,2.1.1,3.1,3.5.1,3.12.1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1, -, 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, 4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.3.6,.8.1, 9.1,9.8.1 6.2.4,7.1.3,7.3.4,7.3.6,8.2,10,12,14 Delays and Extensions of Time d Contractual Liability Insurance 3.2.3,4.3.1,43.4,43.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1, THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 11.1.1.8,11.2,n.3 7.4.1,7.5.1,8.3,9.51,9.7.1,10.3.2, 10.6.1,14.3.2 CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN Coordination and Correlation Disputes ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH 1.2,1.5.2,3.3.1,3.10,3.12.6,6.1.3,6.2.1 4.1.4,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.3,7.3.8 RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR Copies Furnished of Drawings and Documents and Samples at the Site MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS Specifications ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 1.6,2ion 3.n 3'11 DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA f Drawings,gs,Definition of DOCUMENT D401. 1.1.5 N' 1.6,3.17 Drawings and Specifications,Use and This document has been approved and Correction of Work Ownership of endorsed by The Associated General 2.3,2.4,3.7.4,4.2.1,9.4.2,9.8•2,9.8.3,9.9.1, 11.1,1.3,2.2.5,3•11,5.3 Contractors of America. 12.1.2,12.2,13.7.1.3 Effective Date of Insurance Correlation and Intent of the Contract • Documents 8.2.2,11.1.2 1.2 Emergencies Cost,Definition of 4.3.5,10.6,141.1.2 _ 7.3.6 Employees,Contractor's Costs 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6,10.2, , 2.4,3.2.3,3-74,3.8.2,3.15.2,4.3,5.4.2,6.1.1, 10.3,1111,11.4.7,14.1,14.2.11 Equipment,Labor,Materials and , 6.2.3,7.3.3.3,7.3.6,7.3.7,7.3.8,9•10.2,1o.3.z, ''11.3,1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, 10.5,1.1.3,11-4,12.1,12.21,12.2.4,13.5,14 4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.21,7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3, Cutting and Patching 6.2.5,3.14 9-5.1.3,9.10.2,10.2.1,10.2.4,14.2.1.2 Execution and Progress of the Work ;.x Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate 1.1.3,1.2.1,1.2.2,2.2.3,2.2.5,3.1,3.3,3.4,3.5,3.7, Contractors 3.14.2,6.2 4,9.2.1.5,10.2.1.2,10.2.5,to.6,u1, 310,3.12,3.14,4.2.2,42 3,4.3.3,6.2.2,7.1.3, 7.3.4,8.2,9-5,9.9.1,10.2,10.3,12.2,14.2,14.3 11'4,12-2.4 Extensions of Time _, Damage to the Work 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4-4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3, 3.14.2,9.9.1,10.2.1.2,10.2.5,10.6,11.4,12.2.4 7.41,9.5.1,9.7a,10.3.2,10.6.1,14.3.2 Damages,Claims for Failure of Payment 3.2.3,3.18,4.3.10,6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7,10.3.3, 43.6,9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2,14.1.1.3,14.2.1.2,13.6 n.1.1,u.4.5,n-4.7,141.3,14.2.4 Faulty Work s Damages for Delay (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7,1o.3s Date of Commencement of the Work, Final Completion and Final Payment 'fk •;,' Definition of 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10,11.1.2,n.1.3,n.4.1, `. . i 8.1.2 n•4.5,12.3.1,13.7,14.2.4,14.4.3 .., • •.. Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of Financial Arrangements,Owner's liwilliir minor r 8.1.3 2.2.1,13.2.2,14.1.1.5 Day,Definition of Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance 11.4 01997 AIA® 8.1.4AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 Decisions of the Architect GENERAL PROVISIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE . CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ri 0 Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 „ 3- copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 4 I ; 1 13.6 Governing Law Interpretation 13.1 1.2.3,1.4,4.1.1,4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,8.1.4 Guarantees(See Warranty) Interpretations,Written Hazardous Materials 4.2.n,4.2.12,4.3.6 10.2.4,10.3,10.5 Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required - Identification of Contract Documents 4.6.4 1.5.1 Judgment on Final Award Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 4.6.6 5.2.1 Labor and Materials,Equipment Indemnification 1.1.3,1a.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13, 3.17,3.18,9.10.2,10.3.3,10.5,11.4.1.2,11.4.7 3.15.1,42.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3, • Information and Services Required of the Owner 9.5.1.3,9.10.2,10.2.1,10.2.4,14.2.1.2 • 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.1o,4.2-7,4.3.3,6.1.3, Labor Disputes 6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2, 9.10.3, 8.3.1 THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 10.3.3,11.2,11.4,13•5.1,13-5.2,14.1.1.4,14.1.4 Laws and Regulations CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN Injury or Damage to Person or Property 1.6,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH 4.3.8,10.2,10.6 9.6.4,9.9.1,10.2.2,11.1,11.4,13.1, 13.4,13.5.1, RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR Inspections 13.5.2,13.6,14 MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS 3.1.3,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.2, Liens ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1,12.2.1,13.5 2.1.2,4.4.8,8.2.2,9.3.3,9.10 DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA Instructions to Bidders Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder DOCUMENT D4Ol. 1.1.1 4.6.4 Instructions to the Contractor Limitations,Statutes of This document has been approved and j r 3.2.3,3.3.1,3.8.1,4.2.8,5.2.1,7,12,8.2.2,13.5.2 4.6.3,12.2.6,13.7 endorsed by The Associated General _'; Insurance Limitations of Liability Contractors of America. 3.18.1,6.1.1,7.3.6,8.2.1,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1, 2.3,3.2.1,3.5.1,3.7.3,3.12.8,3.12.10,3.17,3.18, 9.10.2, 9.10.5,11 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.12,6.2.2,9.42,9.6.4, 9.6.7, tl + Insurance,Boiler and Machinery 9.10.4,10.3.3,10.2.5,11.1.2,11.2.1,11.4.7,12.2.5, 11.4.2 13.4.2 Insurance,Contractor's Liability Limitations of Time 11.1 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1, Insurance,Effective Date of 4.2.7,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3, 5.4,6.2.4,7.3, } 8.2.2,11.1.2 7.4,8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8, . Insurance,Loss of Use 9.9,9.10,11.1.3,11.4.1.5,11.4.6,11.4.10,12.2,13.5, 11.4.3 13.7,14 Insurance,Owner's Liability Loss of Use Insurance 11.2 11.4.3 Insurance,Project Management Protective Material Suppliers Liability 1.6,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2-6,5.2.1,9.3,9-4.2,9.6, , 11.3 9.10.5 Insurance,Property Materials,Hazardous 10.2.5,11.4 10.2.4,10.3,10.5 Insurance,Stored Materials Materials,Labor,Equipment and 9.3.2,u.4a.4 1.1.3,1.1.6,1.6.1,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.23,3.12,3.13, INSURANCE AND BONDS 3.15.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1, 7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3, 11 9.5.1.3,9.10.2,10.2.1,10.2.4,14.2.1.2 Means,Methods,Techniques,Sequences and Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial - 1 P Procedures of Construction ,I I. .'/ Occu� u.4.1.5 3.3.1,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 t:. ti. . ft,� Insurance Companies,Settlement with Mechanic's Lien s 448 ..•. • - ■IMP . 11.4.10 mum - Intent of the Contract Documents Mediation 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.212,4.213,7.4 441,4-4•5,4•4.6,4•4.8,4.5,4.6.1,4.6.2,8.3.1, 01997 AIA® Interest 10.5 AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 Minor Changes in the Work GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 0 Copyright 1911; 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 5 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.6,7.1,7.4 11.2 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Owner's Loss of Use Insurance 13 11.4.3 Modifications,Definition of Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors , 1.1.1 1.1.2,5.2,5.3,5.4,9.6.4,9.10.2,14.2.2 Modifications to the Contract Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work Ida,1.1.2,3.7.3,3.u,4.1.2,4.2.1,5.2.3,7,8.3.1, 2.4,12.2.4.14.2.2.2 9.7,10.3.2,11.4.1 Owner's Right to Clean Up Mutual Responsibility 6.3 6.2 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of Award Separate Contracts 9.6.6,9.9.3,12.3 6.1 Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Owner's Right to Stop the Work Correction of • 2.3 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3, Owner's Right to Suspend the Work THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 9.10.4,12.2.1,13.7.1.3 14.3 CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN Notice Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH 2.2.1,2-3,2.4,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.7.2,3.7.4,312.9,4.3, 14.2 RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR r 1 4.4.8,4.6.5,5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.1o,10.2.2,11.1.3, Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS 11.4.6,12.2.2,12.2.4,13.3,13.5.1,13.5.2,14.1,14.2 and Other Instruments of Service • ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA Notice,Written 1.1.1, 1.6,22.5,3.2.1,3.11.1,3.17.1,4.2.12,5.3 DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA 1 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8, Partial Occupancy or Use DOCUMENT D401. 4.6.5,5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10,10.2.2,10.3, 11.1.3, 9.6.6,9.9,11.4.1.5 This document has been approved and 11.4.6,12.22,12.2.4,13.3,14 Patching,Cutting and endorsed by The Associated General Notice of Testing and Inspections 3.14,6.2.5 Contractors of America. 13.5.1,13.5.2 Patents Notice to Proceed 3.17 8.2.2 Payment,Applications for Notices,Permits,Fees and 2.2.2,3.7.3.13,7.3.6.4,10.2.2 4.2.5,7.3.8,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1, Observations,Contractor's 9.8.5,9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.5,11.1.3,14.2.4,14.4.3 Payment,Certificates for 1.5.2,3.2,3•7•3,43.4 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1, Occupancy 2.2.2,9.6.6,9.8,u.4.1.5 9.10.1,9.10.3,13.7,14.1.1.3,14.2.4 ,-_ Orders,Written Payment,Failure of 1.i.1,2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2,11.4.9,12.1,12.2, 4.3.6,9.5.1.3, 9.7,9.10.2,14.1.1.3,14.2.1.2,13.E 13.5.2,14 31 Payment,Final OWNER 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10,11.1.2,11.1.3,11.4.1, ,— 2 11.4.5,12.3.1,13.7,14.2.4,14.4.3 Owner,Definition of Payment Bond,Performance Bond and • • 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3,11-4.9,11.5 2. Owner,Information and Services Required of Payments,Progress the 4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3,13.6,14.2.3 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2-7,4.3.3,6.1-3, PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9 6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, Payments to Subcontractors 10.3.3,11.2,11.4,13.5.1,13.5.2,14.1.1.4,14.1.4 Owner's Authority 5.4.2,9.5.1.3,9.6.2,9.6.3,9.6.4,9.6.7,11.4.8, 1.6,21.1,2.3,2.4,3-4.2,3.8.1,3.12.10,3.14.2, 14.2.1.2 f J�•.+' 4.1.2,4.1.3,424,42.9,4.3.6,44.7, 5.2.1,5.2.4, PCB f' - 5.4.1,6.1,6.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,8.2.2,8.3.1,9.3.1,9.3.2, 10.3.1 •.., a 41, Performance Bond and Payment Bond ;;:. . : 9.5.1,9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.3.2,11.1.3,n.3.1,11.4.3, i 11.4.10,12.2.2,12.3.1,13.2.2,14-3,14.4 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3,11.4.9,11.5 Owner's Financial Capability Permits,Fees and Notices 2.2.1,13.2.2,14.1.1.5 22.2,3.7,3.13,7.3.6.4,10.2.2 01997 AIA0 Owner's Liability Insurance PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 0 Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue;N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U:S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 r copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a201 —11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 6 I I . OF Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data and 10 Samples by Contractor 1 Polychlorinated Biphenyl 3.12 10 3 1 Rights and Remedies Product Data,Definition of 1.1.2,2.3,2.4,3.5.1,3.15.2,4.2.6,4.3.4,4.5,4.6, 3.12.2 5.3,5.4,6.1,6.3,7.3.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, 10.2.5,10.3, Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings 12.2.2,12.2.4, 13.4,14 311,3.12,4.2.7 Royalties,Patents and Copyrights Progress and Completion 3.17 4.2.2,4.3.3,8.2,9.8,9.9.1,14.1.4 Rules and Notices for Arbitration Progress Payments 4.6.2 4-3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3,13.6,14.2.3 Safety of Persons and Property Project,Definition of the 10.2,10.E 1.1.4 Safety Precautions and Programs Project Management Protective Liability . 3.3.1,4.2.2,4.2.7,5.3.1,10.1,10.2,10.E THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL Insurance Samples,Definition of. CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN 11.3 3-12'3 ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH Project Manual,Definition of the Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR 1.1.7 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS Project Manuals Samples at the Site,Documents and ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 2.2.5 3.11 DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA Project Representatives Schedule of Values DOCUMENT D401. 4.2.10 9.2,9.3.1 This document has been approved and Property Insurance Schedules,Construction j 10.2.5, 11.4 1.4.1.2,3.1o,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 endorsedonttby fAhe merici. General ,PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND Separate Contracts and Contractors Contractors of America. PROPERTY 1.1.4,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,4.2-7,4.6.4,6,8.3.1, ' 10 n.4.7, 12.1.2,12.2.5 Shop Drawings,Definition of Regulations and Laws 1.6,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.1o,3.13r 4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, 3.1z 1 9.6.4,9.9.1,10.2.2,n.1,11.4,13.1, 13.4,13.5.1, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples 13.5.2,13.6,14 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 L Rejection of Work Site,Use of 3.5.1,4.2.6,12.2.1 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Releases and Waivers of Liens Site Inspections 9.10.2 1.2.2,3.2.1,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.10.1, (;Representations 13.5 Site Visits,Architect's 1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1, 9.8.2,9.10.1 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1,13.5 . Representatives Special Inspections and Testing 2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9,4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.10,5.1.1,5.1.2, 4.2.6,12.2.1,13.5 13.2.1 Specifications,Definition of the - Resolution of Claims and1.1.6 Disputes 4.4,4.5,4.6 Specifications,The Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 1.1.1,1.1.6,1.1.7,1.2.2,1.6,3.11,3.12.10,3.17 3.3.2,318,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, Statute of Limitations 10 4.6.3,12.2.6,13.7 Retainage Stopping the Work - • Ii 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 2.3,4-3.6,9.7,10.3,14.1 : . tf-e-' Review of Contract Documents and Field Stoied Materials a Conditions by Contractor 6.2.1,9-3.2,10.21.2,10.2.4,n.4.1.4 +54; ;'r 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3,3.12.7,6.1.3 Subcontractor,Definition ofMINIM ' Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and 5.1.1 Architect SUBCONTRACTORS 01997 AIA® 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.u,3.12,4.2,5.2,6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2 5 AIA DOCUMENT 1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 0 Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The - American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial'The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 7 I ' , a Subcontractors,Work by TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.1,4.2.3,5.2.3,5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2, CONTRACT 9.6.7 Subcontractual Relations 14 5.3,5-4,9.3.1.2,9.6,9.10 10.2.1,11.4.7,11.4.8, Tests and Inspections 14.1,14.2.1,14.3.2 3.1.3,3.3.3,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9` Submittals 8.3,9.9.2, 1 9.10.1,10.3.2,11.4.1.1,12.2.1,13.5 1.6,3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,9.2, TIME �.a 9.3,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,11.1.3 8 Subrogation,Waivers of Time,Delays and Extensions of 6.1.1,11.4.5,11.4.7 3.2-3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2-3,7.2.1,7.3.1, Substantial Completion 7-4.1,7.5.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1,10.3.2, m.6.1,14.3.2 `m Time Limits 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3-7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1, • 9.10.4.2,12.2,13.7 • 1 Substantial Completion,Definition of 4.2,4.3,4.4,4.5,4-6,5.2,5.3,5.4, 6.2.4,7.3, 9.8.1 7.4,8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8, THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL ,,, Substitution of Subcontractors 9.9,9-10,11.1.3,u.4.1.5, 11.4.6,11.4.10,12.2,13.5, CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN 5.2.3,5.2 4 13.7,14 ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH Substitution of Architect Time Limits on Claims RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR 4.1.3 4.3.2,4.3.4,4.3.8,4.4,4.5,4.6MODIFICATION AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA Substitutions of Materials Title to Work DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA 3.4.2,3.5.1,7.3.7 9.3.2,9.3.3 DOCUMENT D401. Sub-subcontractor,Definition of UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF - 5.1.2 WORK This document has been approved and Subsurface Conditions 12 endorsed by The Associated General 4.3.4 Uncovering of Work Contractors of America. 1 Successors and Assigns 12.1 , 13.2 Unforeseen Conditions • Superintendent 4.3.4,8.3a,io.3 3.9,10.2.6 Unit Prices Supervision and Construction Procedures 4.3.9,7.3.3.2 1.2.2, 3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, Use of Documents —1 6.2.4,7.1.3,7.3.6,8.2,8.3.1,9.4.2,10, 12,14 1.1.1,1.6,2.2.5,3.12.6,5.3 Surety Use of Site - 4.4.7,5.4.1.2,9.8.5,9.10.2,9.10.3,14.2.2 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Surety,Consent of Values,Schedule of 9.10.2,9.10.3 9.2,9.3.1 Surveys Waiver of Claims by the Architect 2.2.3 3 1 .4.2 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 14.4 4.3.10,9.10.5,11.4.7,13.4.2 Suspension of the Work Waiver of Claims by the Owner 5.4.2,14.3 4.3.10,9.9.3,9.10.3,9.10.4,u.4.3,11.4.5,11.4.7, Suspension or Termination of the Contract 12.2.2.1,13.4.2,14.2.4 4.3.6,5.4.1.1,11.4.9,14 Waiver of Consequential Damages `a Taxes 4.3.10,14.2..4 3.6,3.8.2.1,7.3.6.4 Waiver of Liens Termination by the Contractor 9.10.2,9.10.4 •. . 1-I I:4 3.10, 14.1 Waivers of Subrogation ; 'ti f', 4.,.. Termination by the Owner for Cause 6.1.1,n.4.5,11.4.7 S. . •,�IF. 4.3.10,54.1.1,14.2 Warranty ",r,;l,'eh x Termination of the Architect 3.5,4.2.9,4-3.5.3,9.3.3,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.4, EINI 1 4.1.3 12.2.2,13.7.1.3 d.'a Termination of the Contractor Weather Delays 01997 AIA® 14.2.2 4.3.7.2 AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION , m Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a201-11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/312003. 8 Work,Definition of 4.6.5,5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10,10.2.2,10.3, 1.1.3 11.4.6,12.2.2,12.2.4,13.3,14 • Written Consent Written Orders 1.6,3.4.2,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2, 1.1.1,2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2,11.4.9,12.1,12.2, • 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,n.4.1, 13.2,13.4.2 13.5.2,14.3.1 Written Interpretations 4.2.n,4.2.12,4.3.6 Written Notice - 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8, ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS THIS DOCUMENT HAS iMPORTANT LEGAL The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH • Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS Contract.A Modification is(1)a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties,(2) ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA a Change Order,(3) a Construction Change Directive or(4)a written order for a minor change DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the DOCUMENT D401. Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid,Instructions to Bidders,sample forms,the Contractor's bid This document has been approved and or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements). endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the • entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind(1)between the Architect and Contractor,(2)between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, (3)between the Owner and Architect or(4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. 1.1.3 THE WORK The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract • Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. ICI 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the -s '14 design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details,schedules and diagrams. Immo 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS 01997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION O Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The - American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. 'States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 'copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced , with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 9 The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials,equipment,systems,standards and workmanship for the Work,and performance of related services. 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements,sample forms,Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are ,177 complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and ATTOYIS CONSEQUENCES.N ENCOCOURAGED WITHATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH 4 arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ° ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance DOCUMENT D401. with such recognized meanings. This document has been approved and 1.3 CAPITALIZATION endorsed by The Associated General 1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are(i) specifically Contractors of America. defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles and identified references to Paragraphs, Subparagraphs and Clauses in the document or(3)the titles of other documents published by :.—.I the American Institute of Architects. 1.4 INTERPRETATION 1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. 1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor. If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request. 1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site,become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS,SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE 1.6.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic � ' 11 form, prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service f,; ,;i' through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may t>_ retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings,Specifications 01997 AIA® and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and unless AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION : 0 Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 10 tl them and will retain all common law,statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyrights. All copies of Instruments of Service, except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect,on request,upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub- subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect's consultants.The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice,if any,shown on the Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this is not to be g ry Q P rp ProjectTHIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants'copyrights CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN or other reserved rights. ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR ARTICLE 2 OWNER MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS 2.1 GENERAL ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AIA 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred DOCUMENT D401. to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all This document has been approved and matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in endorsed by The Associated General Subparagraph 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority.The term "Owner"means the Contractors of America. Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate,give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights.Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located,usually referred to as the site, and the Owner's interest therein. 1 - 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 The Owner shall,at the written request of the Contractor,prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that fmancial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work. After such evidence has been furnished, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees,including those required under Subparagraph 3.7a,which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents,the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals,easements,assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. IMMO 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The :. � ��:i. Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but .or roeprecautions relating tothe shall exercisep p r twig safe performance of the Work. ..,•. . _ ..w. s+illri ti 2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness. Any other information or services 01997 AIA® relevant to the Cpntractor's performance of the Work under the Owner's control shall be AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION © Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 11 furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such information or services. 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be A furnished, free of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work. 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the cause for such order has been eliminated;however,the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity,except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY 1S ENCOURAGED WITH 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS the Owner to commence and continue correction,of such default or neglect with diligence and ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA promptness,the Owner may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a second written DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA notice to correct such deficiencies within a three-day period. If the Contractor within such DOCUMENT D401. three-day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, This document has been approved and correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting endorsed by The Associated General from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such Contractors of America. deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 GENERAL 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor"means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance ;, with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract,or by tests,inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR I! 3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary,before starting each portion of the :••i;\. �.;j ' Work, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work,as well as the information furnished f, -.4 by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it.These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor 01997 AlA® and are not for the purpose of discovering errors,omissions,or inconsistencies in the Contract AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 Documents; however, any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION O Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201 — 11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 12 shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. I ! 3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the Architect,but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless I % otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances,building codes,and rules and regulations,but any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect. 3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Subparagraphs 3.2a and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.6 and 4.3.7. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Subparagraphs 3.2.i and 3.2.2,the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performedobligations.such obli ations.The CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences between field RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS such error, inconsistency, omission or difference and knowingly failed to report it to the ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA gY P DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA Architect. DOCUMENT D401. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES This document has been approved and 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,using the Contractor's best skill endorsed by The Associated General and attention.The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction Contractors of America. means,methods,techniques,sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe,the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor,the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting Ioss or damage. 2The Contractor shall be responsible tothe Ow ner 3. p Own r for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees,Subcontractors and their agents and employees,and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide . 4 ��;� ,,, and pay for labor,materials, equipment, tools,construction equipment and machinery,water, f '1 heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution ; + and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not M incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work 01997 AtA® 3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 0 Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects ;quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 13 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. 3.5 WARRANTY 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents,that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents.Work not conforming to these requirements,including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN 3.6 TAXES ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer,use and similar taxes for the Work provided MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS =-- by the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure This document has been approved and endoand payfor the building permit and otherpermits andgovernmental fees, licenses and Contractorsracd by The Associated General g of America. inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations concluded. 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws,ordinances,rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations. However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith,the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances,building codes,and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner,the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct,but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. . .ti ,��Fi h 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: ',i 47111.441.;" 1.1111 .1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes,less applicable trade discounts; 01997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION _ _ © Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American.Institute of Architects - - quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 14 .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site,labor,installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances,the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Clause 3.8.2.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.2. 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work. 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be. in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH request in each case. RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR • MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED NA 3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract,shall prepare and submit DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. DOCUMENT D401. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be This document has been approved and revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project,shall be endorsed by The Associated General related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall Contractors of America. provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings,Specifications,Addenda,Change Orders and other Modifications,in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selections made during construction, and one record copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. pia • 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, ti ;f' brochures,diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials t, or equipment for some portion of the Work. � 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials,equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 01997 AlA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE • CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 9 Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The - American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 15 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph _ 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. -i 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar CONSFQUENCES.CONSULTATIONWITHAN submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified RESPATTORNEY O I S COUPAGED OR RH materials,field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so,and MODIFICATION. TII N COMPLETIA MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS "'' has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA • DOCUMENT D401. 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data,Samples or similar This document has been approved and submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. 1 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor ' shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract - Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (i) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or , similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop . Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals,to revisions other than those requested 1,, by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means,methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide T professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or law certifications by a design professional related to systems,materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will .:,ti*iI';1:// specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.The Contractor shall •„ -s .r , s cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, f. + .. whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings,calculations,specifications,certifications, " .. Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional,if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner A A7DOCUMENT A201-1997 and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy,accuracy and completeness of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ,,Lv 0 Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201 —11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 16 services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Subparagraph 3.12.1o, the Architect will review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. 3.13 USE OF SITE 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances,permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING • 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor;such consent shall not be unreasonably DOCUMENT D401. withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General 3.15 CLEANING UP Contractors of America. 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools,construction equipment,machinery and surplus materials. 3.15.2. If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. • 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof,but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings,Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However,if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design,process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. �/.• 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION f 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or "a14111(1 expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Paragraph n.3, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold 01997 AuA® harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION O Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The -.American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 17 attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage,loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property(other than the Work itself),but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,regardless of whether or not such claim,damage,loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate,abridge,or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph r' 3.18. 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor,a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Subparagraph 3.18.i shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts,disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH 4.1 ARCHITECT RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF TH1S 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The term"Architect"means the DOCUMENT D401. Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. This document has been approved and 4.1.2' Duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the endorsed by The Associated General Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of Contractors of America. the Owner,Contractor and Architect.Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a new Architect against whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the _ Contract Documents shall be that of the former Architect. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be an Owner's representative (i) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence,from time to time during the one-year period for correction of Work described in Paragraph 12.2.The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. 4.2.2 The Architect, as a representative of the Owner, will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the Contractor's operations (i) to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and(3)to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or I • charge of, nor be responsible for, the construction means, methods,techniques,sequences or ..r'ti. procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since s ,,,■ these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Subparagraph 3.3.i. mom 4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work 01997 AIA® in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.The Architect will not have AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION @ Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until - the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 18 Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized,the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract.Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,the Architect will review and'certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject'Work that does not conform to the THIS DOCUMENT MS IMPORTANT LEGAL Contract Documents.Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable,the Architect CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with RESPATTORNEY ITSENCOURAGEDCOMPLETION OR RH Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3,whether or not such Work is fabricated,installed or completed. MODIFICATION. TIO N MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS However, neither this authorityof the Architect nor a decision made good infaith either to ELECTRONICALLY DR AFTED AIA exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA Architect to the Contractor,Subcontractors,material and equipment suppliers,their agents or DOCUMENT D407. employees,or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. . . This document has been approved and 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the endorsed by The Associated General Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the Contractors of America. limited purpose of checking for conformance with informationgiven and the design concept P P g P expressed in the Contract Documents.The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors,while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, 11 or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems,all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents.The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12..The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures.The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4. 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion,will receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner's review and records,written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project . representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, . . ; responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth .1'1'1' in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. 01997 AIA® 4.2.11Architectwill interpret The to m rpret and decide matters concerning performance under and AIA DOCUMENT MEET A201-1997 ! requirements of,'the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE -- CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION © Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 19 Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writingwithin anytime �I 9 limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2,then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them. 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and initial decisions,the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor,will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if • consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. 4m THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTOR4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion byone of theparties seeking, as a RESPECT TOITSY IS ENCOURAGEDO RH g RESPECT ITS COMPLETION OR matter of right,adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money,extension MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.The term"Claim"also includes ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AIA relating to the Contract. Claims must be initiated by written notice. The responsibility to DOCUMENT D401. substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. This document has been approved and 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims.Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after endorsed by The Associated General occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first Contractors of America. recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim,whichever is later.Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other party. 4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Subparagraph 9.7.a and Article 14,the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions.If conditions are encountered at the site which are (i) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for,performance of any part of the Work,will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified,the Architect shall so notify the Owner and m Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either party in opposition to such ,:idetermination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision. 45';11', If the conditions encountered are materially different, the Contract Sum and Contract Time • a shall be equitably adjusted,but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in f� � the Contract Sum or Contract Time,the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial 4. " determination,subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph 4-4. 01997 A1A® 4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION O Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects 71 quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced withpermission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until P the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 20 proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Paragraph io.6. 4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to(i)a written interpretation from the Architect,(2)an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault,(3)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect,(4)failure of payment by the Owner,(5)termination of the Contract by the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in accordance with this Paragraph 4.3• 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time 4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time,written - „ notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work.In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. MIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL C4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time,such Claim AONSRNUYNCE .CONSULTATION WITH AN shall be documented bydata that weather conditions were abnormal for the ATTORNEY S ITS ENCOURAGED WITH substantiating RESPECT TO COMPLETION OR period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS scheduled construction. ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA 4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers DOCUMENT D401. injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party,or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible,written notice of such injury or damage, This document has been approved and whether or not insured,shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding endorsed by The Associated General 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to Contractors of America. investigate the matter. 4.3.9 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon,and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor,the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arisingout of or relatingto this Contract. This g q g mutual waiver includes: .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or j employee productivity or of the services of such persons;and • .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable,without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article 14.Nothing contained in this Subparagraph 4.3.io shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated direct damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ., •ti. . 44. 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES • 4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims,including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those arising under Paragraphs io.3 through io.5, shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision.An initial decision by the Architect shall be required as a 01997 AIA® condition precedent to mediation,arbitration or litigation of all Claims between the Contractor AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION © Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The • - American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 21 and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due,unless 3o days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision having been rendered by the Architect. The Architect will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. 4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more of the following actions: (i)request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Architect is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Architect concludes that,in the Architect's sole discretion,it would be inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim. 4.4.3 In evaluating Claims,the Architect may,but shall not be obligated to,consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who ._ may assist the Architect in rendering a decision. The Architect may request the Owner to THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN - ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPOR 4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish MODIFITCATION. TIO ITSAUTHENTICA AUTHENTICATION additional supporting data, such partyshall respond, within ten days after receipt of such ELECTRONICALLY RONI ALL AD RAFTED AA OF THIS pp g p y p ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA request, and shall either provide a response on the requested supporting data, advise the DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING A!A Architect when the response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the Architect that no DOCUMENT D401. supporting data will be furnished.Upon receipt of the response or supporting data,if any,the Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General i 4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the Contractors of America. reasons therefor and which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both.The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration. 4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that(i)the decision is final but subject • to mediation and arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 3o days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision, then failure to demand arbitration within said 3o days' period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor.If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. 4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter, the Architect or the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety,if any,of the nature and amount of the Claim.If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default,the Architect or the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. 4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the Claim by the Architect,by mediation or by arbitration. 4.5 MEDIATION 4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic ;.' effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs 4.3.1o,9.10.4 and 9.io.5 shall, mom after initial decision by the Architect or 3o days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or 01997 AIA® equitable proceedings by either party. AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 0 Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the MA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 < - copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201 —11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. - 22 4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association.The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for arbitration but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 6o days from • the date of filing,unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. 4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.. - 4.6 ARBITRATION THIS 4.6.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic CONSEQUENCE NT DOCUM COS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONES.CONSULTATION WITH AN effect and except those waived asprovided for in Subparagraphs4.3.1o, o. p 91 4 and9.10 5,shall, ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH after decision by the Architect or 3o days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR subject to arbitration. Prior to arbitration, the parties shall endeavor to resolve disputes by MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS mediation in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 4.5. ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA 4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which, unless the DOCUMENT D401. parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect.The demand for This document has been approved and arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American endorsed by The Associated General Arbitration Association,and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. Contractors of America. 4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in 1 Subparagraphs 4.4.6 and 4.6.1 as applicable,and in other cases within a reasonable time after the _!i Claim has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13.7. 4.6.4 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include,by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner,the Architect, the Architect's employees or consultants, except by written consent containing specific H reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect, Owner, Contractor and any other person or entity sought to be joined.No arbitration shall include,by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, parties other than the Owner, Contractor, a separate contractor as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration.No person or entity other than the Owner,Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial:Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or entity not named or described therein. The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the != Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. ti*,IJ;� 4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand for "... arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. 01997 AIM) AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION © Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until ,'the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 23 4.6.6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITIONS 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term "Subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate , contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub- THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL .T_ subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF RESPECT TOITSCOMPLETIONOR THE WORK MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA Contractor, as soon aspracticable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writingto theDOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USINGAIA DOCUMENT D401. Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal This document has been approved and portion of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating endorsed by The Associated General whether or not the Owner or the Architect,after due investigation,has reasonable objection to Contractors of America. any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor,the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. However,no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor,person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute. • 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement,written where legally required for validity, the Contractor mom shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to : ti*,I4;F fi.' assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the ,, responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work, which the Contractor, by these f, ^' Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall "irs= preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will 01997 AIA® not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 otherwise in the subcontract agreement,the benefit of all rights,remedies and redress against GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION O Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright•laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on V31/2003. 24 .the Contractor that the Contractor,by the Contract Documents,has against the Owner.Where appropriate, the Contractor.shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors.The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub- subcontractors. 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to 'the Owner provided that: .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Paragraph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL writing;and CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety,if any,obligated under bond RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR relating to the Contract. MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 3o days, the DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from DOCUMENT D401. - the suspension. This document has been approved and I ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS endorsed by The Associated General 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD Contractors of America. SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance ( i and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Paragraph 4.3. • 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in . each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in - reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so.The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,separate contractors and the Other until subsequently revised. OMNI • 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs .•.F,1 � construction or operations lated to the Project with the Owner's own forces,the Owner shall `s• be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the .,.111 Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including,without excluding others, those .61;14111111r stated in Article 3,this Article 6 and Articles 1o,n and 12. mom. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 01997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION O Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951,'1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997.by The - American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced - with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201— 11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 25 � I 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities,and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor,the Contractor shall,prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an • acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. 6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN • defective construction of the Contractor.The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for a costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays,improperly timed activities,damage to the ATTORNEY S COUPAGEDWIRH I Work or defective construction of a separate contractor. RESPECT TO TS COMPLETION OR p MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate DOCUMENT D40I. contractors as provided in Subparagraph io.2.5. This document has been approved and 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for endorsed by The Associated General cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Subparagraph 3.14. Contractors of America. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor,separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 GENERAL 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract,by Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work,subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and - Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor;an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract .! Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. ° ,F '• .' 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS , 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,Contractor and Architect,stating their agreement upon all of the following: ©1997 AIA® .1 change in the Work; AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 .2 the amount of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum;and GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION © Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 26 .3 the extent of the adjustment,if any,in.the Contract Time. 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3. 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES - 7.3.1 . A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive,without invalidating the Contract,order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN . 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR .1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS substantiating data to permit evaluation; ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; DOCUMENT D40). .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee;or This document has been approved and .4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6. endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for - adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change,including,in case of an increase in the Contract Sum,a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Clause 7.3.3.3,the Contractor - shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: .1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers' compensation insurance; .2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, I whether incorporated or consumed; ti - F I. .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented �, J .,NA from the Contractor or others; +5'40 lir .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work;and .5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to "97 Al" the change. AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 0 Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition: Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects 'quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced — with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a201— 11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 27 7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are A involved in a change,the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase,if any,with respect to that change. 7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties' agreement with part or all of such costs.For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute,the Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs.That determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Article 4. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORconcerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach RESPECT TO ITS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO COMPLETION OR agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK DOCUMENT D401. 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with This document has been approved and the intent of the Contract Documents.Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall endorsed by The Associated General be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders Contractors of America. promptly. . ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided,Contract Time is the period of time,including authorized adjustments,allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9.8. 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly,except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurelycommence operations on the site or elsewhereprior to the effective P date of insurance required by Article u to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner.The date is s of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the date of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a notice to mom proceed given by the Owner,the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of 01997 AIA® mortgages,mechanic's liens and other security interests. AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION © Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a201 --11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 28 I h 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve 1 Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work,or by labor disputes, fire,unusual delay in deliveries,unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration, or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of • Paragraph 4.3. THI8.3.3 This Paragraph 8.3 does notpreclude recoveryof damages for delaybyeitherpartyCO DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL g CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS 9.1 CONTRACT SUM ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and,including authorized adjustments, DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D901. is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Contractors of America. 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require.This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in -- accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or - - Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material • suppliers,and reflecting retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. 9.3.1.1 As provided in Subparagraph 7.3.8, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders. - 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. VF,, 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on a. account of materials and equipment delivered �' ."� and suitablystored at the site for subsequent •r•• • ., ..,. _ incorporation in the Work If approved in advance by the Owner,payment may similarly be '�� made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned 01997 AIA® upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest,and GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION O Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The , American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 29 shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment.The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4.1 The Architect will,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment,with a copy to the Contractor,for THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL such amount as the Architect determines is properly due,or notify the Contractor and Owner CONSEQUENES.CONSULTATIONWITHAN in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH provided In Subparagraph 9.5.i. RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA ' comprising the Application for Payment,that the Work has progressed to the point indicated DOCUMENT D401. and that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing representations are subject This document has been approved and to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial endorsed by The Associated General Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations Contractors of America. from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect.The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However,the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has(i) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.i. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount,the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner.The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or,because of subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued,to such Ir extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in .:•ti ��;�f',, Subparagraph 3.3.2,because of: lq .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for 01997 AIA® labor,materials or equipment; AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 0 Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 _ copyright laws and will subject the violator to legalprosecution.This document was electronicallyproduced g 1 with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. . 30 .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed,certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. • 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents,and shall so THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL notify the Architect. CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR from the Owner,out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELEAIA portion of the Work,the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled,reflecting percentages DOCUMENT NT MAYLY BE MADEFTED BY DOCUMENT BE MADE BY USING AIA actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion DOCUMENT D401. of the Work.The Contractor.shall,by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor,require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General 9.6.3 The Architect will,on request,furnish to a Subcontractor,if practicable,information Contractors of America. regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the __• payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2,9.6.3 and 9.6.4. 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment,a progress payment,or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner.Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. .. F '' 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the -- Contractor,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the 01997 AIA® Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration,then the AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 Contractor may,upon seven additional days'written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 0 Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth'Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. itates and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until •he date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201--11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 31 the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down,delay and start-up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the • Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractors list, the Architect will make an inspection to ATTORNEYIS CONSEQUENCES.N CONSULTATION WITH AN P P p IS ENCOURAGED WITH �, + determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use,the DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or DOCUMENT D401. correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General • 9.8.4 When the Work or designated-portion thereof is substantially complete,the Architect Contractors of America. will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance,heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate.Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof.Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE . 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Clause n.4.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work.Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the •! Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them H for payments,retainage,if any,security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and :. 'ti. insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor4:1 considers a portion substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the mmi. Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work 01997 Auk® shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 agreement is reached,by decision of the Architect. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION O Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. 3 States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until • - withpermission of P 'the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201 —11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 32 1 , 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and i Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon,partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the L_i Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ` 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and THIS ( DOCUMENT CS IMPORTANT LEGAL belief, and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been r completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the CONSEQUENCES.Y CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and RESPECT TO.ITS COMPLETION OR _ payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA final payment have been fulfilled. DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (i) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and This document has been approved and 1 E; equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the endorsed by The Associated Genera! Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered(less amounts withheld by Owner)have Contractors of America. been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 3o days' prior written notice has been given to the I_ 1 Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) — consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of i liens, claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner.If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release - or waiver required by the Owner,the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made,the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien,including all costs and reasonable attorneys'fees. I 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the h Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make ii payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted.If the ' remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished,the written consent of surety to Nomm payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such ;. .ti .I.••?r' payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it t • shall not constitute a waiver of claims. f, • 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except MIME those arising from: .1 liens, Claims,securityinterests ore C 01997 AIA® encumbrances arising out of the Contract and AIA 99-DOCUMENT A2011 7 unsettled; GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE - CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION O Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201— 11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 33 i .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all d safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL reasonable protection to prevent damage,injury or loss to: CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS '— storage on or off the site,under care,custody or control of the Contractor or the ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors;and DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AVA .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto,such as trees,shrubs, lawns,walks, DOCUMENT D401. pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances,rules, Contractors of America. regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage,injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract,reasonable safeguards for safety and protection,including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards,promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to `I in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and to.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor,a Subcontractor, a o� Sub-subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 and to.2.1.3,except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them,or by anyone for whose acts either of , them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. A• r• q 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of•the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents.This person shall be the Contractor's -1�i*rir superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and loom Architect. • 01997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 0 Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a201— 11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 34 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance,including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall;upon recognizing the condition,immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. - 10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and,in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to verify that it has been rendered harmless. Unless • otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the - Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance.The Contractor ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR - reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner.If either the Contractor MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall DOCUMENT D401. resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the This document has been approved and Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up,which adjustments endorsed by The Associated General shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. Contractors of America. 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor,Subcontractors,Architect,Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area --, if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Subparagraph 1o.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless,provided that such claim,damage,loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property(other than the Work itself) and provided that such damage, loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence of a party seeking indemnity. - : 10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Paragraph io.3 for materials and substances brought to the site by the Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the j, Contract Documents. 10.5 If,without negligence on the part of the Contractor,the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. 10.6 EMERGENCIES 10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at . . jj F. the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional . 'ti. .;t', compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph 4.3 and Article 7. 4'•. •1/1116.4. Ilt• -- ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 01997 AIA® • AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE. CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 0 Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951,.1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The - American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. itates and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until he date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 35 • 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may .;A be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: .1 claims under •workers' compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed; .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury,occupational sickness or disease,or death of the Contractor's employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; ' .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL destruction of tangible property,including loss of use resulting therefrom; CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH damage arising out of ownership,maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR .7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS and ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA .8 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's DOCUMENT D401. obligations under Paragraph 3.18. This document has been approved and -- 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph n.i.1 shall be written for not less than limits endorsed by The Associated General of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is Contractors of America. • greater.Coverages,whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis,shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph u.t shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 3o days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably available,an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the. final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised -3 limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate,or both,shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. 11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE r 11.3.1 Optionally,the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project - Management Protective Liability insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary .. . �j F. coverage for the Owner's, Contractor's and Architects vicarious liability for construction .• '4. . f', b- operations under the Contract. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of s+• purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage,and the Contractor shall not be mom responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner.The minimum limits of liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits 01997 AIA® required for Contractor's Liability Insurance under Clauses n.1.1.2 through u.i.i.5. AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION t.. O Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. • States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until • the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201 —11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 36 11.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance,the Owner,Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance.The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner,Architect or other persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under Paragraph ua. 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided,the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder's risk"all-risk"or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of - materials supplied or installed by others,comprising total value for the entire Project at the site THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR has been made as provided in Paragraph 9ao or until no person or entity other than the Owner MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS has an insurable interest in the property required by this Paragraph n.4 to be covered, ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Project. DOCUMENT D401. 11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall This document has been approved and include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and endorsed by The Associated General physical loss or damage including,without duplication of coverage,theft,vandalism,malicious Contractors of America. mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. - 11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so - inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and the W Sub-subcontractors in ork, and appropriate Chan a Order the cost thereof shall be byg charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing,then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. 11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. 11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site,and also ; portions of the Work in transit. 11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to .. . Ij�•.; I such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor . 'ti. . f shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, . without mutual written consent,take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that %••- i would cause cancellation,lapse or reduction of insurance. 11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance.The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler ow AIA® - and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE - 1 CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION O Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The - American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. - States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced l` with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, - which expires on 1/31/2003. 37 ' Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. 11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards,however caused.The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property,including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. • 11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy,the Owner shall,if possible,include such insurance,and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. 11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL those insuring the Project,or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITHAN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph n.4.7 for damages caused byfire or other causes of loss covered bythis separate MODIFICATION.N AUTHENTICATIONR OF THIS g P ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA endorsement or otherwise. DOCUMENT D40I. 1 11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur,the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy This document has been approved and of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Paragraph u.4. Each policy endorsed by The Associated General shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements Contractors of America. related to this Project.Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced,until at least 3o days'prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. 11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (i) _i each other and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees,for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph n.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor,as appropriate,shall require of the Architect,Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and the subcontractors,sub-subcontractors, - agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of :-n subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification,contractual or otherwise,did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. 11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as It II fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds,as their interests may :•.1*, ;F-'+' appear,subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph u.4.1.0. t b The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the 4, Contractor,•and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 01997 AIA® 11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties. The GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION O Copyright 19111, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 __ copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 38 cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary.The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach,or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4.6. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7. 11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power;if such objection is made,the dispute shall be resolved as provided in Paragraphs 4.5 and 4.6. The Owner as fiduciary shall, in the case of arbitration, make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators.If distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required,the arbitrators will direct such distribution. 11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTOfaithful performance of the..Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as RESPECT TO EY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS date of execution of the Contract. ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA 11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of DOCUMENT D401. bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK Contractors of America. 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,costs of uncovering and replacement shall,by appropriate Change Order,be at the Owner's expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents,correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work,including additional testing and inspections and compensation 1,,„, for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's expense. 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION t, , 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.5, if,within one year "''+___ after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Subparagraph 9.9.a,or by terms of an 01997 AIA® applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents,any of the Work is found to AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The ' American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 39 . correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner _ has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an s opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect,the Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 2.4. 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between _ Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Paragraph 12.2. -,.�'' THIS DOCUMENT MS IMPORTANT LEGAL 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the ATTORNEY/S ENCOURAGED WITH Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED NA 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA whether completed or partially completed,of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the DOCUMENT D401. Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of Contractors of America. limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents.Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced,nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. _ 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK • 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction,in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable.Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS . y 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners,successors, assigns II and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Subparagraph 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of ' • • •.:Ir the other.If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent,that party 4511 ti" shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to an 01997 Ain® institutional lender providingconstruction financingfor the In such event,the lender AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 Project. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION O Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material- herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 40 • shall assume the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. - 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES - - 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract,nor shall such action or failure to CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder,except as may be specifically ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH agreed in writing. RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS. 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor This document has been approved and shall make arrangements for such tests,inspections and approvals with an independent testing endorsed by The Associated General laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,or with the appropriate public authority,and shall Contractors of America. bear all related costs of tests,inspections and approvals.The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. 13.5.2 If the Architect; Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Subparagraph 13.5.1.,the Architect will,upon written authorization from the Owner,instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures.Such costs,except as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.3,shall be at the Owner's - expense. 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing,inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the Contractor's expense. 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing,inspection or approval shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the — Architect. 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests,inspections or approvals required by the Contract 4' , 111, 71 - Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and,where practicable, at the normal place of - ;i testing. 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made 01997 AIA® promptly to avoid'unreasonable delay in the Work. AIA DOCUMENT A2 -1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION O Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201—11/19/2002. AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 41 13.6 INTEREST 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. - 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD q y 13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: .1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any, alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion; .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring subsequent;to the relevant date of Substantial THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment;and MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of DOCUMENT D4t)I* action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the This document has been approved and date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty endorsed by The Associated General provided under Paragraph 3.5,the date of any correction of the Work or failure to Contractors of America. correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12.2, or the date of actual - commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner,whichever occurs last. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the:Work is stopped for a period of 3o consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub- subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons: .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public!authority having jurisdiction which requires all Work to be stopped; .2 an act of government,such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all Work to be stopped; .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.i,or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or .4 the Owner has failed to furnish to thel Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's request,reasonable evidence as required by Subparagraph 2.2.1. MEM 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the t' Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other f ver persons or entities performing portions of the Work under, direct or indirect contract with the �•-•—1hr Contractor,repeated suspensions,delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as '�� described in Paragraph 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than too percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion,or no days in any 365-day period,whichever is less. 01997 AlA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION O Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition: Reproduction jof the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201 —11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 42 • 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Subparagraph i4.LI or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor $ may,upon seven days'written notice to the Owner and Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery,including reasonable overhead,profit and damages. I 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 6o consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the — Owner as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.3. - 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE • 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH workers or proper materials; RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS _ the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA .3 persistently disregards laws,ordinances,or rules,regulations or orders of a public DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA authority having jurisdiction;or DOCUMENT D401. .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract This document has been approved and Documents. endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist,the Owner,upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action,may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, • seven days' written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 take possession of the site and of all materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.4;and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.2.1., the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of fmishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived,such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,as the case may be,shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. : ' ., 'ti. , on 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause,order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or INENNE interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. 01997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 0 Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The ,American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a201—11/19i2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 43 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay or interruption as described in Subparagraph 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent: .1 that performance is,was or would have been so suspended,delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible;or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.4.1 The Owner may,at any time,terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. • 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall: THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN _ .2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH preservation of the Work;and RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION A A OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA termination stated in the notice,terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. DOCUMENT D401. 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be This document has been approved and entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such endorsed by The Associated General termination,along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. Contractors of America. -_l 01997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION s_ 0 Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. • States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below.User Document:97a201—11/19/2002.AIA License Number 1027208, which expires on 1/31/2003. 44 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00800 SPECIAL CONDITIONS The following supplements modify the"General Conditions of the Contract for Construction",AIA Document A201, 1997 edition, as a part of these Contract Documents. ARTICLE 1 -COMPLIANCE WITH WAGE RATES AND FILING OF"INTENT TO PAY PREVAILING WAGES" HEREINAFTER CALLED"INTENT"AND "AFFIDAVIT OF WAGES PAID" 2.1 "Prevailing Wages on Public Works"-The Contractor and Subcontractors shall comply with 39.12 RCW and amendments"Prevailing Wages on Public Works."The prevailing rate wages to be paid to all workers, laborers,or mechanics employed in the performance of any part of this Contract shall be in accordance therewith. 2.2 Current prevailing wage data will be furnished by the Industrial Statistician upon request. Requests shall be made to the State of Washington Department of Labor and Industries. Wage data is also available at http://www.lni.wa.aov/prevailingwage/prev wage rates.htm The Contractor is responsible for paying the appropriate wage rates. 2.3 The Contractor, and all Subcontractors, on or before the date of commencement of work, shall file a statement under oath with the City and with the Director of Labor and Industries certifying the rate of hourly wages paid to each classification of laborers,workers,or mechanics employed to perform work under this Contract shall not be less than the prevailing rate of wages determined by the Washington State Labor and Industries. Such statement and any supplemental statements which may be necessary shall be filed in accordance with the practices and procedures required by the Department of Labor and Industries. 2.4 Copies of all"Intents"shall be on file with the Contractor,the Industrial Statistician, and the City. 2.5 "Affidavits of Wages Paid"-upon completion of project, the Contractor shall fully execute and file"Affidavit of Wages Paid"with the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries and any other agencies required by law. Sample copy enclosed herein. Copies shall be provided to the City prior to Final Completion, Final Payment and release of . Retainage. Each affidavit of wages paid must be certified by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries before it is submitted. 2.6 All costs and fees for and associated with the"Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages" and "Affidavits of Wages Paid"are to be paid by the Contractor. ARTICLE 2-STATE LICENSING LAW The Contractor agrees to comply with all requirements of Chapter 18.27 RCW. The Contractor agrees and covenants to furnish unto the Owner proper evidence that the Contractor has fully 02373.00 00800-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00800 SPECIAL CONDITIONS complied with the State Licensing Law of the State of Washington, Chapter 18.27 RCW, and a Contractor's Certificate of Registration shall be in full force and effect throughout the work project herein above enumerated, prior to starting work. A� ARTICLE 3- NON-DISCRIMINATION The Contractor shall offer equal opportunity to all qualified employees and applicants for employment without regard to the race,creed, color, sex, national origin, age, or disability. ARTICLE 4-CITY OF RENTON BUSINESS LICENSE Prior to signing a contract the contractor agrees to purchase a City of Renton Business License and maintain the license in full force and effect throughout the work of the project. License may be purchased from the City Finance Department located on the First Floor of the City Hall Building, 1055 South Grady Way, Renton, WA. ARTICLE 5-SITE AND STREET CLEANING Contractors working dump trucks and/or other equipment on paved streets and roadways will be required to clean said streets at the conclusion of each day's operation or as directed by the City. If the area is not properly cleaned or the condition of the excavation warrants or if required by other City or State ordinances or requirements,the Owner shall direct the Contractor to provide facilities to remove clay or other deposits from the tires or between dual wheels before trucks and/or other equipment will be allowed to travel beyond the construction site. Any violation of the above requirements shall be sufficient ground for the Owner to order the area in question cleaned by others,the cost of the operation to be deducted from the Contract amount. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to control dust at the construction site by watering as required or as-directed by the Owner. All costs in connection with the above work shall be considered as incidental to the construction, and payment shall be considered to be included in the prices bid for the various items comprising this improvement. ARTICLE 6-PERFORMANCE BOND (CONTRACTOR'S CONTRACT BOND): The Contractor shall execute and deliver to the Owner a bond on the form included in this Contract Documents,with an approved surety company, as surety in the sum of the full amount of the contract price including the Washington State Sales Tax, in compliance with the Revised Codes of Washington, and any amendments thereto.The bond shall also guarantee the Contractor's material and workmanship on the project for a period of one(1)year from the date of the issuance of his Certificate of Substantial Completion by the Architect. ARTICLE 7-TRAFFIC SAFETY AND STREET USE: 02373.00 00800-2 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00800 SPECIAL CONDITIONS • The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of barricades and the safety guards and any other structures of improvement necessary for the complete protection of the public or workers including traffic study requirements as directed by the City in consultation with the Public Works and Police Departments. The Contractor shall further abide by all rules and regulations of OSHA as amended or supplemented by WISHA. Contractor shall be responsible for any permits required • due to construction activity or staging in the public right-of-way including, but not limited to, traffic control and flaggers as required by City Public Works Department. All costs in connection with the above work shall be considered as incidental to the construction, and payment shall be considered to be included in the prices bid for the various items comprising this improvement. ARTICLE 8-PERMITS: The Owner will pay directly for the Building Permit. It shall be the Contractors responsibility to apply for and pay for the plumbing, mechanical,electrical and elevator permits and to secure all . . other Municipal, County,or State permits and licenses necessary or incident to the actual performance of the work under this Contract that have not been addressed in the contract documents, and shall, during the work progress, comply with all laws,ordinances, and governmental regulations pertaining to carrying out of the work. END OF SECTION • 02373.00 00800-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 00810 INSURANCE CONDITIONS MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE AND REQUIREMENTS • The following supplements modify the"General Conditions of the Contract for Construction",AIA - Document A201, 1997 edition, as a part of these Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain and maintain the minimum insurance coverage set forth below. By requiring such minimum insurance, CITY OF RENTON shall not be deemed or construed to have assessed the risks that may be applicable to the CONTRACTOR under the Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall assess its own risks and if it deems appropriate and/or prudent, maintain higher limits and/or broader coverage. (1) Commercial General Liability-Acord Form or equivalent,written on an occurrence basis, including: • Premises and Operations ( Including CG 2503 general aggregate to apply per project if applicable) • Explosion, Collapse and Underground Hazards • Products/Completed Operations • Contractual Liability . • Broad Form Property Damage • Independent Contractors • Personal/Advertising Injury •Stop Gap Liability (2) Automobile Liability including all • Owned Vehicles • Non-Owned Vehicles ! ,P • Hired Vehicles (3) Workers'Compensation • Statutory Benefits -Show Washington Labor&Industries Number (4) Umbrella Liability • Excess of Commercial General Liability and Automobile Liability. Coverage should be as broad as primary. (5) Builder's Risk(for new construction..only;.-City.will-procure Builder's Risk for remodels)• " • Builder's Risk insurance covering interests of the City,the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub- , subcontractors in the Work shall be provided by the Contractor. Builder's Risk insurance shall be on an "all-risk'policy form, and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage,including flood and earthquake,theft,vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse,temporary buildings and debris removal.The Builder's Risk insurance covering the work will have a deductible of$5,000 for each occurrence,which will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Higher deductibles for flood and earthquake perils may be accepted by the City upon 02373.00 00810-1 01/28/03 RENTON'PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 00810 INSURANCE CONDITIONS written request by the Contractor and written acceptance by the City.Any increased deductibles accepted by the City will remain the responsibility of the Contractor. The Builder's Risk insurance shall be maintained until Final Acceptance of the Work by the City. CONTRACTORS INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS The CONTRACTOR shall carry the following limits of liability as required below: Commercial General Liability General Aggregate* $2,000,000 Products/Completed Operations Aggregate $2,000,000 Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000 . Personal/Advertising Injury $1,000,000 Fire Damage (Any One Fire) $ 50,000 Medical Payments(Any One Person) $ 5,000 Stop Gap Liability $1,000,000 *General Aggregate to apply per project Automobile Liability • Bodily Injury/Property Damage $1,000,000 (Each Accident) Workers'Compensation Statutory Benefits-Show Washington Labor&Industries Number Umbrella Liability Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000 General Aggregate Limit $1,000,000 Products/Completed Operations Aggregate $1,000,000 Builder's Risk • Shall be written in the amount of the completed value of the project with no coinsurance provisions. 02373.00 00810-2 01/28/03 - I, i RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 00810 INSURANCE CONDITIONS Per Lam $ 1,000,000 Aggregate $ 1,000,000 • • ii . I + 02373.00 00810-3 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION m RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 00810 INSURANCE CONDITIONS ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR shall Name CITY OF RENTON, and its officers,officials, agents, employees and volunteers as Additional Insureds(ISO Form CG 2010 or equivalent). CONTRACTOR shall provide CITY OF RENTON Certificates of Insurance and copies of policies, if at our sole discretion it is deemed appropriate Further, all policies of insurance described above shall: 1) Be on a primary basis nor contributory with any other insurance coverage and/or self-insurance carried by CITY OF RENTON. 2) Include a Waiver of Subrogation Clause. 3) Severability of Interest Clause(Cross Liability) 4) Policy may not be non-renewed,canceled or materially changed or altered unless forty-five (45) days prior written notice is provided to CITY OF RENTON. Notification shall be provided to CITY OF RENTON by certified mail. An example of an acceptable cancellation clause is as follows: "Should any of the above described policies be canceled before the expiration date thereof, the issuing company will eavor-te mail 45 days written notice to the certificate holder named to the left.But-failure-to-email " The CONTRACTOR shall promptly advise the CITY OF RENTON in the event any general aggregate or other aggregate limits are reduced below the required per occurrence limit. At his or her own expense the CONTRACTOR will reinstate the aggregate limits to comply with the minimum requirements and shall furnish to the CITY OF RENTON a new certificate of insurance showing such coverage is in force. Required insurance coverage shall be maintained throughout the term of this contract, except Automobile Liability and Workers'Compensation,for a period of two (2)years after the date of substantial completion of the project. On all Certificates of Insurance, the Certificate Holder shall be listed as"City of Renton, Washington, Attention: Dennis Culp, Facilities Director" • M1 + . zl 02373.00 00810-4 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00910 BOND TO THE CITY OF RENTON FORM KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: • That we,the undersigned as principal,and corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of as a surety corporation,and qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become surety upon bonds of contractors with municipal corporations,as surety are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the City of Renton in the penal sum$ for the payment of which sum on demand we bind ourselves and our successors,heirs,administrators or person representatives, as the case may be. This obligation is entered into in pursuance of the statutes of the State of Washington,the Ordinance of the City of Renton. Dated at ,Washington,this day of ,20 Nevertheless,the conditions of the above obligation are such that: WHEREAS,under and pursuant to Public Works Construction Contract CAG- providing for construction of Project Name the principal is required to furnish a bond for the faithful performance of the contract;and F WHEREAS,the principal has accepted,or is about to accept,the contract,the undertake to perform the work therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth; 02373.00 00910-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON DOCUMENT 00910 BOND TO THE CITY OF RENTON FORM • NOW,THEREFORE,if the principal shall faithfully perform all of the provisions of said contract in the manner and within the time therein set forth,or within such extensions of time as may be granted under said contract,and shall pay all laborers,mechanics,subcontractors and materialmen, and all persons who shall supply said principal or subcontractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of said work,and shall hold said City of Renton harmless from any damage or expense by reason of failure of performance as specified in the contract or from defects appearing or developing in the material or workmanship provided or performed under the contract within a period of one year after its acceptance thereof by the City of Renton,then and in that event this obligation shall be void;but otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect. Principal Surety Signature Surety's Address Name and Title Agents Signature Name and Title 02373.00 00910-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 01100 SUMMARY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK A. Project consists of the renovation of an existing automotive repair shop, located at 233 Burnett Avenue South in downtown Renton,Washington, into future retail, restaurant,and assembly uses. Future uses will be tenant improvements and are not part of this work. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION • A. The Owner: City of Renton. Renton City Hall, Fifth Floor. 1055 South Grady Way, Renton, Washington,98055. B. The Architect: Mithun Architects + Designers+Planners. Pier 56, 1201 Alaskan Way,Suite 200, Seattle,Washington, 98101. C. Consultants to the Architect: 1. Civil and Structural Engineer: Coughlin Porter Lundeen, Inc. 217 Pine Street,Suite 300, Seattle, Washington, 98101. 2. Mechanical Engineer: Keen Engineering. 1932 First Avenue, Suite 307,Seattle,Washington 98101. 3. Electrical Engineer: Cross Engineers, Inc. 2407 North 31n Street, Suite 100,Tacoma, Washington 98402. 1.3 SPECIAL WORK REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor Use Of Premises: 1. General: Confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances,permits and the Contract Documents. Allow no materials or equipment to unreasonably encumber the site. 2. Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of site within the construction limits. However since the premises adjoin, both public right-of-ways and public transit,the Contractor's operations shall be governed by maintaining continuous use of all normal access on streets and driveways. 3. Where Contractors use of site includes existing streets, sidewalks or right-of-way,the Contractor shall obtain approval and pay for use of such areas in accordance with requirements of the City of Renton. B. Lane Restrictions: Public right-of-way on Logan Avenue and Burnett Avenue shall be maintained to at least one lane, unless otherwise approved by The City of Renton. Written requests for interim closing of right-of-ways shall be submitted to The City of Renton in advance of scheduled work. Provided traffic control plan, stating purpose, including date and time duration for each request. Refer to Section 01130 for additional requirements. Work outside the designated work zone which restricts the 1 Renton Transit Center or Metro Bus routes shall be prohibited during hours 8:30 am to 2:30 pm, L i Monday through Friday. C. Hours of Operation:Contractor's operation on the project site are limited to the hours from 7:00 am to 8:00 pm, Monday through Friday, and from 9:00 am to 8:00 pm on Saturdays. 1. Do not conduct work during the Farmer's Market on Tuesdays. D. Hours Restricted for Hauling: Contractor's operations for hauling are limited to the hours from 8:30 am to 3:30 pm, Monday through Friday. E. Site: The Contractor is the custodian of the site and is responsible to provide access,storage, and work space for Contractor's work force. Due to site limitations the Contractor shall be responsible to provide off site storage for materials, parking and transportation as may be required to maintain the scheduling of the Work. F. Existing Improvements, Hardscape and Utilities: 02373.00 01100-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01100 SUMMARY 1. General: Protect existing structures,sidewalks,curbs,streets, landscaping, utilities and work of any kind,which is to remain,from damage defacement,or interruption of service,except as may be specially directed or authorized by the Architect. All damage shall be repaired to approximate original condition within the Contract Sum. 2. Transit Shelters: Except where indicated to be relocated, or modified under this Contract, Contractor shall be responsible for removing,storing and protecting offsite, all components for re- installation in original locations which interfere with Contractors operations. 3. Existing Trees: Trees to remain shall be protected and maintained throughout the Construction period. Trees designated to be removed and replanted shall be stored offsite and maintained by a qualified landscaper or NM certified arborist whose work shall result in the successful re- establishment of all trees. 4. Utilities: Protect and maintain existing utilities from damage or interruption,except as required to make service connections. Verify locations of all utilities and coordinate interruption and relocation with respective utility company. 5. Hardscape: Where curbs and sidewalks are to remain,protect from settlement and Contractors operations. Site improvements which cannot be salvaged or which become damaged shall be replaced to City of Renton Standard Specifications and as required by the Contract Documents. 6. Site Improvements: Items, including, but limited to guard rails,benches and area lighting designated to be're-used',or similar terms, shall comply with the requirements of Section 02221, Demolition. 7. Documentation: Document condition of existing site improvements to remain by photograhic or other approved assessment as approved by the Architect. Maintain records of assessment at the jobsite for Architect's and Owner's review. G. Assume responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products stored on and off site under this Contract. H. Conduct operations to ensure least inconvenience to public and to transit areas. I. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or staging areas needed for operations. J. Do not load structure with weight that would jeopardize its safety. K. Construction Cranes: By FAA regulation, Contractor's use of construction cranes at the Work site �z shall be restricted to a height of 120 feet above grade. The City of Renton will submit notification to FAA for use of equipment upon formal review of Contractor's proposed mobilization and use of site. 1.4 SEPARATE WORK which maybe executed prior to, simultaneous A. Construction Under Other Contracts: Work on Project hich with,or after completion of Work of this Contract,and which is excluded from this Contract include: 1. Graphic. 2. Security Equipment. B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract_ 1.5 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS AND EQUIPMENT A. Products and equipment noted"FOIC"will be furnished by the Owner for Installation by the Contractor. 1. Work includes providing support systems to receive products and equipment and plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections. Items include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Trash receptacles. _- b. Fire extinguishers and cabinets. c. Surface mounted soap dispensers. 2. Owner will: a. Arrange for and deliver shop drawings, product data, and samples,to Contractor. b. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. c. Submit claims for transportation damage. d. Arrange for replacement of damaged,defective,or missing items. e. Arrange for manufacturers'warranties, inspections, and service. 02373.00 01100-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01100 SUMMARY f. Furnish delivery dates for products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall 3. Contractor will: a. Review shop drawings, product data, and samples and return them to Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product. b. Receive and unload products at site. c. Protect items from damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements. d. Repair or replace items damaged by Work of this Contract. e. Incorporate delivery dates in Construction Schedule. 4. Upon delivery, Owner and Contractor will jointly inspect items for damage. B. Items noted "NIC"(Not In Contract),will be furnished and installed by Owner. Coordinate installation of these items with Owner's forces. 1.6 COORDINATION A. General: The Contractor is responsible for all construction means and methods and for the general coordination of the work of all trades. B. Site: The Contractor is, in general,the custodian of the site of the project and it is his responsibility to provide access, storage,and workspace for all those engaged in the Work. The site shall be maintained in an orderly manner with debris and trash removed daily. C. Utilities: It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide temporary access and to allow all trades including utility companies to deliver their equipment. Coordinate requirements for same. D. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on the Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes,ducts, and conduits,as closely as practicable; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations,for maintenance,and for repairs. E. In finished areas, except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. 1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16- division CSI "Master Format"numbering system. 1.8 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For products specified by association or trade standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. The date of the standard is that in effect as of the date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, except when a date is specified. C. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. Maintain copy at jobsite during progress of the specific element of work. • END OF SECTION 02373.00 01100-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION _ RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Identification and description of Alternate work. B. Related Sections: 1. Owner-Contractor Agreement Alternates accepted by Owner for incorporation into the Work. 2. Sections of Specifications identified in each Alternate. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Base Bid: Includes all labor, materials,services and incidentals necessary for the completion of General Construction Work, including Mechanical and Electrical Work,for the project as indicated and specified. B. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders for work that may be added to or deducted from the base Y bid amount. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.3 PROCEDURES • A. Alternates will be exercised at the option of Owner. B. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of each alternate into Project. C. Include as part of each alternate,miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. D. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. E. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required to complete the Work, including changes under each Alternate,when acceptance is designated in Owner-Contractor Agreement. 1.5 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1:Access flooring. 1. Base Bid: Provide access flooring(Section 10270)and recessed concrete slab as indicated. 2. Alternate: Delete access flooring system including panels, pedestals, and accessories. Raise recessed concrete slab on grade to main floor level. Raise associated concrete footings to match typical footing depth per structural. Delete extended concrete stem walls. Delete furring and insulation of existing concrete structure throughout building. Realign section of south wall per 30/A6.1. B. Alternate No.2: Curtainwall at gable ends. 1. Base Bid: Provide curtainwall(Section 08900)as indicated at east and west elevation gables. 2. Alternate: Delete curtainwall glazing,and framing system including all anchors, associated flashings and trims. Provide typical exterior one-hour rated wall of Section 07412-metal wall panels(vertical configuration), over cold-formed metal framing (Section 05400)-building paper over 5/8"type'X' gypsum sheathing, over metal studs @ 16"o.c., infill studs with R-19 blanket insulation (Section 07210)and provide 5/8"type'X' gypsum wallboard (Section 09620), painted 02373.00 01230-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES . 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. - PART 2-PRODUCTS A. Not Used. PART 3-EXECUTION A. Not Used. END OF SECTION • • • • 02373.00 01250-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Procedures for preparation and submittal of Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections: 1. 01330-Submittals: Submittal procedures. 2. 01770-Closeout Procedures: Contract Closeout Procedures. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit Schedule of Values prior to first Application for payment. B. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703. Contractor's standard form or • media-driven printout will be considered on request C. Format and Content Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for 0 each Specification Section. 1. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Change Orders(numbers)that affect value. c. Dollar value. 2. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 3. List administrative and General Conditions items separately. Upon request of the Architect, furnish support data substantiating the correctness of any designated amounts. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar, total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. D. Revise schedule to reflect approved change orders, for each application for payment. 1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA G702-Application and Certificate for , Payment and Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment B. Payment Application Times: Unless indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor, the date for each progress payment is the 15th day of each month. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding period and ends 15 days before the date for each progress payment C. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Incomplete Applications for Payment will be returned without action. 1. Match entries to data shown on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use current, updated schedules. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. D. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect. E. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. F. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 02373.00 01290-1 01/28/03 RENTON-PAVILION ' RENTON,.WASHINGTON SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 2. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 3. AIA Document G706,"Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 4. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 5. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 6. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. PART 2-PRODUCTS A. Not Used. - PART 3-EXECUTION A. Not Used. END OF SECTION • • • • • . .ti . I 02373.00 01290-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to,the following: 1. General coordination provisions. 2. Project meetings. 3. Request for Interpretation(RFI). 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Staff Names: Within 14 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of principal staff assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify • individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list mailing addresses, e-mail addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. 1.3 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1 1 1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Inform participants and others involved,and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. a. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner,Architect;and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meetings and conferences. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing. d. Designation of responsible personnel. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment g. Distribution of the Contract Documents. h. Submittal procedures. i. Preparation of Record Documents. j. Use of the premises. k. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. I. Parking availability. m. Office,work, and storage areas. n� Equipment deliveries and priorities. o. First aid. p. Security. q. Progress cleaning. r. Working hours. 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of meetings within two days to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report 02373.00 01310-1 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON •-,` SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION B. Preinstallation Conferences: Where required in a specification Section, schedule and administer a pre-installation conference prior to commencing work of the Section. 1. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate actions necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. 3. Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1.5 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI) A. Allot time in construction scheduling for liaison with Owner and Architect. Establish procedures for handling queries and clarifications. Use Contractor's"Request for Interpretation"form, as approved by Architect, to initiate clarifications. Allow sufficient time in construction schedule for Architect's response to the request. 1. In the event that some portion of the drawings, specifications, or other contract documents require clarification or interpretation, a Requests for Interpretation may be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect Clearly and concisely set forth the issue for which clarification or _' interpretation is sought and why a response is needed. 2. The Architect will review all Requests for Interpretation to determine whether they are Requests for Interpretation within the meaning of this term. If the Architect determines that the document is a Request for Interpretation, a response will be issued in the form of an interpretation or Architect's Supplemental Instruction. If the Architect determines that the document is not a Request for Interpretation, it will be returned, unreviewed as to content. 3. Responses to Requests for Interpretation shall be issued within 5 working days of receipt from Contractor unless the Architect determines that a longer time is necessary to provide an adequate response. If a longer time is determined necessary the Architect will,within five 5 working days of receipt of the request, notify Contractor of the anticipated response time. PART 2-PRODUCTS A. Not Used. PART 3-EXECUTION A. Not Used. END OF SECTION 02373.00 01310-2 01/28/03 4 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01320 CONTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1: Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Construction photographs. • B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures"for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordination"for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section"Submittal Procedures"for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 1 Section"Quality Requirements"for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 5. Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures"for submitting photographic negatives as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical activities are activities.on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. • 2. Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can be started. B. Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. C. Event The starting or ending point of an activity. D. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three e copies. Arrange the followinginformation in a tabular format: P 9 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category(action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architects final release or approval. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two copies, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. C. Construction Photographs: Submit prints of each photographic view within seven days of taking photographs. 1. Format Electronic, JPEG file format. Minimum resolution 640 X 480 pixels. Electronic transmittal via e-mail or upload to a project FTP site is acceptable as a.zip file, maximum size 20 megabytes. Floppy disks are also acceptable medium for transmittal, mailed or delivered within 7 days of taking photographs. 2. Identification: Provide the following information with each submittal. On each floppy disk, provide an applied label. On electronic.zip files, provide the information in the"Comment" box, with Show comments when opening zip files"engaged. a. Name of Project 02373.00 01320-1 01/28/03 . RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01320 • CONTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION '; b. Name of Architect. c. Name of Contractor. d. Date photograph was taken. e. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation rA or story of construction. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. C. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities including temporary lighting. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts,the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include submittals required during the first 30 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead-time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's"Construction Planning&Scheduling." B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Final Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures"in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 14 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 02373.00 01320-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01320 CONTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of coordination with existing construction. 2. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. I. Startup and placement into final use and operation. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not. limited to, the Notice to Proceed,Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. Refer to Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures"for cost reporting and payment procedures. G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on 1 the overall project schedule. H. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within five days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.4 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 5. Accidents. 6. Meetings and.significant decisions. 7. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 8. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 9. Meter readings and similar recordings. 10. Emergency procedures. 11. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 12. Change Orders received and implemented. 13. Construction Change Directives received. 02373.00 01320-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01320 CONTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 14. Services connected and disconnected. 15. Equipment or system tests and startups. 16. Partial Completions and occupancies. 17. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions,together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. PART 3-EXECUTION ::�' 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been or made. Issue updated schedule concurrentlywith the report of each such meeting. recognizedp P 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made,distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take four color photographs of existing building exterior and four of the interior. Take additional color photographs of Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. Show existing conditions adjacent to property. B. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take four color photographs monthly, coinciding with cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Photographer shall select vantage points to best show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. 1. Field Office Prints: Retain one set of prints of periodic photographs in field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify photographs the same as for those submitted to Architect. C. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take eight color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. Architect will direct photographer for desired vantage points. END OF SECTION 01320 02373.00 01320-4 01/28/0.3 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY • A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples,and other miscellaneous submittals. B. Related Sections: 1. 01330-Construction Progress Documentation: Construction schedule, submittal log. 2. 01630-Product Requirements: Substitution submittals, products list. 3. 01770-Closeout Procedures: Closeout submittals. 1.2 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Make submittals to the Architect as required to cause no delay in the work. B. Allow a minimum of 10 working,days from,receipt, for the Architect to review each submittal. C. Schedule submittals to allow sufficient time for possible revision and resubmittal of the rejected submittals, without affecting the construction schedule. D. Make the following submittals to the Owner and Architect prior to starting construction. 1. Certificates of insurance. 2. List of subcontractors and suppliers. E. Submit Schedule of Values prior to first application for payment 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. B. Reviews miffs prior to submittal to the i4rchitect Verify specified requirements for products, field measurements, and field construction requirements. C. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. D. Do not fabricate or erect work in advance of review of the Submittals. Inclusion of substitution requests into submittals will be considered cause for rejection of the submittal. rW. Partial Submittals: Submittals that are partial or contain only a portion of the data required to describe the item or installation will be rejected unless such partial submittal is coordinated with the Architect prior to submission, and final approval of all such items will be withheld pending receipt of all required - >information. • 1.4 SUBMITTAL FORM REQUIREMENTS A. Provide the following, as applicable, on each submittal: _ 1. Present and previous submittal dates. 2. The Project title and number. 3. Contractor's submittal number. 4. Subcontract identification. 5. The names of: a. Contractor. b. Supplier. c. Manufacturer. 6. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. 7. For each product, reference corresponding specification section and paragraph number. 8. A 6 x 4 inch minimum blank space for Contractor and Architect stamps. 02373.00 01330-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON n SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS a A. Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. • c. Fabrication and installation drawings. en d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Certificates indicating delegated design requirements met. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. I. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 3. Submit Shop Drawings required by individual Sections of the Specifications, and as otherwise required for proper performance of the work. 4. Illustrate fully the requirements of the Specifications and the Contract Drawings, and accurately show quantities, kinds of materials, methods of assembly, and all data required for fabrication, erection, and installation. A' • 5. Show the relationship of adjoining work, relevant field conditions and dimensions; coordinate with affected subcontractors and suppliers if in conflict. 6. Number of Copies: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and two blue-or black-line prints of each submittal. 7. The Architect will return one copy to Contractor with corrections, notations and Architect's stamp • indicating action to be taken. . 8. In the case of rejected Shop Drawings, the Architect will keep one copy and return two prints to the Contractor for use in the preparation of a revised reproducible for resubmittal. 9. Do not fabricate or erect work in advance of review of the Shop Drawings. B. The Architect may furnish documents and electronic data which may be used as bases for preparation of shop drawings. Contractor's and subcontractors' use of such documents requires agreement with Architect's Disclaimer. Fully describe requirements for each request. • 1. Reproducible backgrounds. a. Copies of contract drawings, or copies of CADD generated drawings with designated data layers, only. b. The Contractor shall reimburse the Architect for reproducible backgrounds, $50.00 per request, plus direct printing costs. 2. Database of CADD generated drawings. a. Release of CADD information will be restricted to the following categories: 1) Architectural floor plans. 2) Site plan. ;. 3) Reflected ceiling plans. 4) Exterior elevations. 5) Stair sections. b. The CADD database will be generated on PC hardware with CADD software. c. Database information furnished will be based on the status of the Contract Documents at the . time of issuance. The information provided may not necessarily represent exact as-built conditions. It shall be the Contractors sole responsibility to verify and check all field conditions against the information furnished for conformance to the Contract Documents and make all adjustments to the database file as necessary. The issuing of this information does not release the Contractor from their obligation for producing shop drawings and be responsible for dimensions, material quantities, and quality of workmanship in accordance with the Contract Documents. d. The Contractor shall reimburse the Architect for CADD databases, $150.00 per request of all or any categories listed above. 02373.00 01330-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.6 PRODUCT DATA A. Product data,where required by the technical Specifications, shall be in the form of catalog cuts, performance characteristics, and/or other descriptive data sufficient for verification of compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. C. Catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts and descriptions, illustrations and other standard descriptive data shall be clearly marked to identify pertinent materials, products, and models and shall include dimensions and clearances required. Where applicable, data shall show performance characteristics and capacities, shall indicate service connection requirements, and shall include wiring diagrams and control information. 1. Delete inapplicable information from submittals. 1.7 SAMPLES • A. Submit samples as specified in the technical Sections. 1. Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. 2. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified and to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architects sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name or name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. B. Submit 3 samples for each sample required in the technical Sections. The Architect will retain one sample. C. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set D. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of the product,with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate submittal of different categories for interfacing work. 1.8 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Prepare and submit two of each of the following Informational Submittals when required by other Specification Sections. Copies will not be returned. 1. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and,where required, is authorized for this specific Project. 2. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. 3. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements. 4. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements. .• 5. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements. 6. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. • 02373.00 01330-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 7. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location,for compliance with requirements. 8. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency,or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 9. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: a. Preparation of substrates. b. Required substrate tolerances. c. Sequence of installation or erection. d. Required installation tolerances. e. Required adjustments. f. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. 10. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: a. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. b. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product i c. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. d. Summary of installation procedures being followed,whether they comply with requirements , • and, if not, what corrective action was taken. e. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. f. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. g. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 11. Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS: Do not submit. MSDS Are not required and will not be reviewed by Architect. 1.9 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW • —4A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal "m number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.10 ARCHITECTS ACTION II A. Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Product Data, Shop Drawings and Samples: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. "Approved": The submittal has been approved and no further submittal is required. 2. "Approved as Corrected": The submittal is approved, with minor corrections marked or noted. No further submittal is required, except that if the noted corrections are made on the original by the Contractor before distribution,then two copies shall be forwarded to the Architect for record. 3. "Revise and Resubmit": The submittal has been reviewed, but requires substantial revision to comply with requirements. Revise as noted or required to bring into compliance and resubmit for re-review. 4. "Rejected": This submittal does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. 02373.00 01330-4 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION • • I dI li I • • 02373.00 01330-5 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 01400 • QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Related Sections: 1. 01100-Summary: Applicability of specified reference standards. 2. 01330-Submittals: Submittal of manufacturer's instructions. 1.2 GENERAL QUALITY CONTROL } A. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship,to produce work of specified quality. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate completed construction compliance with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes.and materials. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where a ! indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation. Mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of Work. 5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site. D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 1.4 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. 1.5 SUBMLTTALS A. Delegated-Design Submittal: in addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. ' B. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases,jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee • 02373.00 01400-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS payments,judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with.standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production • capacity to produce required units. B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project :R C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project,whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and '; inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and • inspections to be performed.1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. • B. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Cooperate with Testing Laboratory personnel, and furnish access,tools, samples, certifications, test reports, design mixes,equipment, storage, and assistance as requested by the Testing Laboratory. 2. Notify Architect and Testing Laboratory 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing.When tests or inspections cannot be performed,through the fault of the Contractor, reimburse the Owner for the additional costs incurred. 3. Remove and replace all work found not complying with the Contract Documents. Remedies shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents and code requirements. - • 4. If initial tests and inspections indicate deficient work,the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the costs of all subsequent tests and inspections related to the deficiency. ;v 5. All damage that may occur to the work as a result of normal testing operations shall be repaired to match surrounding surfaces. 6. Schedule testing and inspection so that the work of testing and inspection personnel will be as continuous and brief as possible. 7. Reimburse the Owner for travel and lodging expenses incurred for testing and inspection services performed outside a radius of 100 miles of the site. C. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner. • 1. Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 02373.00 01400-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION • RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 2. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 4. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 5. Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work. - D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated,engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting,for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. } F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. _ G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples,and similar activities. H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 21 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner,Architect,testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.8 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified, require product manufacturer to furnish qualified personnel to observe field conditions and quality of workmanship, and to provide recommendations, certifications, and other specified services. B. Representative shall submit written report to Architect listing observations and recommendations. 1.9 OWNER TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Owner-Arranged Inspections and Tests:The following list is not comprehensive, and provided for information only. Additional Owner-arranged testing and inspection requirements are delineated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 1. Sitework: a. Compaction and bearing: Test and verify bearing capacity of all load-bearing earth;test compaction fills for compliance with required densities. 2. Concrete: a. Reinforcing Steel: Inspect placement for conformity with approved shop drawings,ACI 301 - Chapter 5, and CRSI MSP#1. b. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Make slump tests for each batch delivered or at least 1 test per hour during continuous pours in accordance with requirements of ASTM C143; check and 02373.00 01400-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS verify batch consistency. Inspect forms and verify sizes and conditions. Inspect reinforcing LL and verify its proper placement. Furnish continuous inspection during placement, repair and patching operations,and curing of concrete. Make, cure, and test at least 3 test cylinders of each strength of concrete for each 150 cubic yards placed or for each day's pour, whichever is less. Report exact mix tested, minimum size aggregate, location of pour in the Work, cylinder identification,date of receipt of cylinder in laboratory, slump data, cement brand and type, air content(if entrained air is specified), admixtures used, dates and records of test cylinders, names of inspectors and laboratory personnel, and evaluation or analysis of cause, in case of test failure,and recommendations for remedial action. 3. Metal: a. Structural Steel Shop Inspection: Verify conformance of structural steel materials with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1) Visually inspect structural steel elements and components during fabrication. 2) Inspect and test shop welds in accordance with requirements for welding specified hereinafter. 3) Check shapes, sizes,classes and types of steel, high-strength threaded fasteners, tubing, rivets, and welding materials. 4) Verify adjustments to fit inaccuracies. • 5) Inspect bolted connections in accordance with requirements for bolting as specified hereinafter. 6) Other duties and responsibilities as may be noted on drawings. b. Structural Steel Field Inspection&Tests: • 1) Check location and fit of all anchorages and inserts. Verify adjustments to fit inaccuracies. 2) Visually inspect erection of all structural steel components of the Work. 3) Inspect and test field welding in accordance with requirements for welding specified hereinafter. 4) Inspect and test bolted connections in accordance with requirements for bolting specified hereinafter. 5) Inspect and verify plumbness and tolerances of structural frame for compliance with AISC Code and with requirements of the Contract Documents; other duties and responsibilities as may be noted on drawings. c. Welding Requirements: Furnish continuous visual inspection of all shop and field fillet • welding, including installation of all stud anchors. • 1) Inspect fillet welds in accordance with requirements of AWS D1.1; allow for inspection of a minimum of 15%of fillet welds by magnetic particle or dye penetrant methods. 2) Inspect 100 percent of full penetration welds and test by ultrasonic method in accordance with requirements of AWS D1.1, Section 6, Part III. a) All ultrasonic testing shall be performed by ASNT Level II technicians. b) Any frequency(1.0,2.35, or 5.0 MHz)and any angle(45, 60, 70, or 90) may be used to indicate the size, orientation and type of discontinuity more accurately, where deemed desirable. d. Bolting Requirements: Furnish visual inspection of structural joints where ASTM A307, A325, and A490 bolts are used;verify that applicable requirements of AISC specifications are met. 1) Inspect the procedure and the installation of high-strength bolts and observe field installations to assure that approved procedures are followed. 2) Test a minimum of 10%of bolts to verify that minimum required bolt tension is furnished. . 3) Should any bolt in a given connection test below minimum tension required, test all bolts in that connection. e. Steel Decking: Provide inspection of connections and anchorages to supporting members. Check and verify attachment and location of closures and accessories. f. Miscellaneous Metal: Where miscellaneous angles, channels, studs, and similar shapes are detailed for support of major components of the Work,the welds, bolts, and material are subject to the same testing equipment as other structural supporting members. 4. Thermal&Moisture Protection: a. Roofing: Check deck surfaces prior to application of roofing materials and verify that substrate is in satisfactory condition to receive roofing. Furnish continuous inspection during 02373.00 01400-4 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS application of roofing, including application of vapor barriers, insulation and roofing. Inspect all sheet metal fleshings, counterflashings and reglets for satisfactory and waterproof installation. 1.10 CONTRACTOR TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Contractor's Convenience Testing: Inspection and testing performed exclusively for the Contractor's convenience shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. PART 2-PRODUCTS • A. Not Used. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Section 01735-Cutting and Patching. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION • • 02373.00 01400-5 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION -• RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01421 STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS • • • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. General: Certain words and phrases used throughout the Contract Documents are abbreviated or are used with definitions unique to the Contract Documents. Such abbreviations,words and phrases shall have the following definitions where used in these Contract Documents." B. "By Owner": The term"By Owner" indicates Work on this Project that will be performed by the Owner or his agents, at the Owner's cost. C. "Coordinate": The term"coordinate" means to satisfactorily combine the work of all trades for a complete and operating installation. D. "Or approved": The term"Or Approved"means as accepted by the Architect as being of equivalent quality, utility, and appearance. E. "Owner-Furnished, Contractor-Installed": The term"Owner-Furnished, Contractor-Installed" means that the Owner will furnish at his cost and Contractor will install under his Contract for this Work. F. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including"shown,""noted," . "scheduled," and "specified"have the same meaning as"indicated." G. "Selected": The term"selected"means"selected by the Architect"and is not necessarily limited to a manufacturer's standard line of colors,finishes, or details. H. "Site": The term"Site"means the geographical location of the Project. I. "Specified": The term"Specified"means as written in the Specifications. • J. "Suitability": The term"Suitability", where the terms"or approved"or"or approved equal are used, means that the Architect is the sole judge of the quality and suitability of the proposed substitution. K. "Quantity": Wherever in the Contract Documents an article, device or piece of equipment is referred to in the singular number, such reference shall include as many such items as are shown on the Drawings or are required for a complete installation. • L. "Indicated": The term "indicated"refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings; or to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as"shown,""noted,""scheduled,"and"specified"are used to help the user locate the reference. Location is not limited. M. "Directed": Terms such as"directed,""requested,""authorized,""selected,""approved,""required," and"permitted" mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, instructed by the architect and similar phrases. N. "Approved": The term"approved,"when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. O. "Fumith": The term"furnish"means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. P. "Install": The term"install"describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading, temporary storage, unpacking,assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying,working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. Q. "Provide": The term "provide"means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 02373.00 01421-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01421 STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS R. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. 1. The term "experienced,"when used with the term"installer,"means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with the special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Trades: Using a term such as"carpentry"does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name. . 3. Assigning Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those operations. The specialists must be engaged for those activities, and their assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no option. However, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling contract requirements remains with the Contractor. a. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing building codes and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. S. "Recycled Content': The term"recycled content' refers to the percentage of a material, by weight, made with post-consumer or post-industrial recycled constituents. 1. "Post-Consumer": The term"post-consumer"means material which has been discarded by an individual, commercial enterprise, or other public or private entity after having fulfilled its intended application or use. 2. "Post-Industrial": The term"post-industrial" means material which has been generated as a by- product of a given process which has properties significantly different than those of the original material and therefore, in its current form, cannot be recycled back through the same general process. T. "VOC": The term 'VOC"means volatile organic compounds calculated using U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Reference Test Method 24. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly.into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents. C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and the lhl standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different but apparently equal to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. D. Copies of Standards: Each entityengaged in construction on the must be familiar with industry Project standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source and make them available on request 02373.00 01421-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON • SECTION 01421 STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS E. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's"Encyclopedia of Associations"or in Columbia Books'"National Trade& Professional Associations of the U.S." 1.3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ABBREVIATIONS A. General: Refer to Drawings for a list of abbreviations and their definitions as used in the drawing notes and in the specifications.The abbreviations,where used, shall have full force as if the word or words had been used. Where an abbreviation has more than one definition, the correct definition is determined by the context in which it is used. Standard English abbreviations, such as lb. for pound, oz.for ounce, ave.for avenue, st. for street, etc., have not been listed and shall have their standard definitions. Abbreviations pertaining to and unique to mechanical and electrical work are defined in those respective divisions of the specifications. PART 2-PRODUCTS A. Not Used PART 3-EXECUTION A. Not Used END OF SECTION • • • 02373.00 01421-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION . RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. • Section Includes: Requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Sections: 1. 01100-Summary. 2. 01700-Execution Requirements. 3. 01770-Closeout Procedures: Final cleaning. 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • A. Temporary facilities and controls shall conform to the requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities. 1.3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. 1. Permanent lighting may be used during construction upon written consent of Owner, however such use shall not be construed to prematurely begin the warranty period. Maintain lighting and make routine repairs including cleaning of lamps and fixtures and replacement of lamps that bum out prior to Owner's acceptance of the affected area. B. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. C. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. D. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. E. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before use. 1. Provide distribution piping. Space outlets so water can be reached with a 100-foot(30-m)hose. Provide one hose at each outlet. 2. Equip pumps with surge and storage tanks and automatic controls to supply water uniformly at reasonable pressures. F. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. . 1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material. G. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common- use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate telephone line for each field office. r 02373.00 01500-1 01/28/03 � f RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES A. Water Control: Maintain excavations free of water. Provide and operate pumping equipment. Do not allow rainwater, surface and subsurface waters and other fluids to accumulate in excavations, low spots or under or about structures. Provide temporary pumps, piping, ditches, dams, tanks or other methods acceptable to jurisdictional authorities. 1. Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide temporary drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed. B. Field Office: Weather-tight,with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling, and ventilating equipment, and equipped with furniture. Provide, in addition, space for Project meetings,with table and chairs to accommodate all attendees. C. Project Identification: 1. Provide two 8 x 6 foot Project identification sign of wood frame and exterior grade plywood construction, painted,with exhibit lettering by professional sign painter to Owner's design and colors. List title of Project, names of Owner,Architect,professional consultants, Contractor and major subcontractors. Erect on site at location established by Owner. 2. Allow no other signs to be displayed unless approved by Owner. D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. 1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited. 1.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES A. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, install 6 foot high chain-link or wood enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Enclose entire Project site. Install in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.1. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and other construction operations. B. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. 2. Vertical Openings: Close openings with plywood or similar materials. 3. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load- bearing construction. 4. Provide doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 5. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq. ft. in area, use fire-retardant- treated material for framing and main sheathing. 6. Install enclosures sufficient to prevent blow off during inclement weather. Seal tightly to prevent water penetration and excessive air infiltration. C. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Provide Class ABC dry-chemical fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from space being served, with sign mounted above. a. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose; provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire- exposure areas. • 02373.00 01500-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. 5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. 6. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades: Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. E. Provide barriers around trees and plants designated to remain. Protect against vehicular traffic, stored materials, dumping, chemically injurious materials, and puddling or continuous running water. F. Provide barricades around openings in floors and roof decks. G. Sidewalk Closures: Sidewalk closures and bypass walkways shall be in accordance with Part VI of the 1988 edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices(MUTCD), Revision 3, dated September 3, 1993. H. Protection Of Installed Work: 1. Provide temporary protection for installed products. Control traffic in immediate area to minimize damage. 2. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. Protect finished floors and stairs from traffic, movement of heavy objects, and storage. 3. Prohibit traffic and storage on waterproofed and roofed surfaces, on landscaped areas. I. Security: Provide security program and facilities to protect Work, materials stored off-site, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry,vandalism, and theft. 1.6 SPECIAL CONTROLS A. Dust Control: Duringtheperiod of construction, provide satisfactorymeans of controllingdust and dirt; provide dust tight chutes and or sprinkle as required to protect neighboring property, passersby, and visitors from injury or discomfort from dust. 1.7 TERMINATION AND REMOVAL A. Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if -- necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures." . • END OF SECTION • 02373.00 01500-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 01630 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers'standard warranties on products; and product substitutions. B. Related Sections: 1. 01631 -Substitution Request Form. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Basis-of-Design: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design,"including make or model number or other designation,this establishes the significant qualities related to type,function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. • 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product and Material List Submit a list, in tabular form, showing specified products and materials in Divisions 2-14. Include generic names of products and materials required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. • 1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used ih the Contract Documents. c. Manufacturer,fabricator or supplier name. d. Cost of product or material less overhead, profit, shipping and labor. 3. Initial Submittal: Within 21 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 4. Completed List: Within 35 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 5. Architect will respond in writing to Contractor after receipt of completed product and material list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation } of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with the Contract Documents. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. • 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of Construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration,theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 02373.00 01630-1 • 01/28/03- RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 01630 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather tight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 8. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation,and weather-protection requirements for storage. 9. Protect stored products from damage. B. Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and —` equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Protect from soiling or staining through ground contact. Cover products subject to deterioration with • impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation. C. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter. PART 2-PRODUCTS • 2:1 PRODUCTS A. Comply with size, make, type, and quality specified. Specifications and referenced standards are minimum requirements. 2.2 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,that are undamaged, and that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories,trim, finish,fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term"as selected,"Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term"match sample,"sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Or Approved: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term"or approved,"comply with provisions in"Comparable Products"Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 0 1. Where a single product and manufacturer is named, provide the product named. -2. Where single manufacturers or sources are named, provide a product by the manufacturer or from the source named. y> 3. Where a list of names of both products and manufacturers is included, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 4. Where a list of manufacturers' names is included, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Where"Basis-of-Design" is indicated, provide either the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. 6. Where requirement of matching an established Sample is indicated, select a product(and manufacturer)that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. 7. Where Specifications include the phrase"as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures"or similar, select a product(and manufacturer)that complies with other specified requirements. 02373.00 01630-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01630 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase"standard range of colors, patterns, textures"or similar phrase,Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase"full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase,Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product • line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitution requests will be considered for the following reasons only: T1. A product becomes unavailable due to no fault of the Contractor. 2. Subsequent information or changes indicate that the specified product will not perform as intended. .L3. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost,time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner,and similar considerations. B. Requests for substitution shall be made on Document 01631 -Substitution Request Form. Limit each request to one proposed product or system. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. C. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that the proposer: 1. Has investigated proposed product and has determined that it`meets or exceeds, in all respects, the specified product. 2. Shall provide the same warranty for substitution as for specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make or coordinate implementation of changes that may be required for work to be complete in all respects. 4. Waives claims for additional costs that may subsequently become apparent 5. Agrees to pay all costs of redesign related to the substitution. D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product -data submittals. E. Review: The Architect will be the judge of the acceptability of the proposed substitution or comparable product; in the judgment of Architect the product shall meet the following criteria: 1. It is equal or superior in quality and serviceability to the specified product 2. Its use will not entail unacceptable changes in details and construction of related work. 3. Its design and artistic effect complies with design concept F. The Architect will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness, and request additional '--` information, documentation, or samples, as necessary for evaluation of the request. Within two weeks of receipt of the completed request,the Architect will take one of the following actions. 1. If the substitution is allowed by the Architect prior to the cutoff date, an Addendum to the Bid Documents will be issued by the Architect 2. If the substitution is allowed by the Architect after the cutoff date,the Architect will notify the Contractor and issue the appropriate Construction Change Directive, Supplemental Instruction,or Proposal Request 3. If the request for substitution is denied,the proposer will be notified of the rejection. If a decision on the substitution request cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the specified product. 2.4 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. For consideration of approval of an unnamed product, provide the following: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 02373.00 01630-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON � ' SECTION 01630 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the " II Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance,weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.. END OF SECTION • 02373.00 01630-4 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01631 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM TO: MITHUN—ATTENTION: LYNN ROBBINS PROJECT: RENTON PAVILION—RENTON,WASHINGTON SPECIFIED ITEM: Specification Section Paragraph I Description • The undersigned requests consideration of the following: PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: • • Attach complete dimensional information and technical data,including laboratory tests, if applicable. • Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will require for proper installation. • Submit all necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality and performance to that which is specified. Clearly mark manufacturer's literature to indicate equality in performance. Indicate differences in quality of materials and construction. FILL IN ALL BLANKS BELOW(Attach additional sheets if necessary). 1.Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings? Yes D. No❑ If yes, indicate changes: 2.What effect does the substitution have on other trades? 3.What effect does the substitution have on applicable code requirements? 4.Differences between proposed substitution and specified item. Include"Owner's Benefit"(cost,quality,or other) description,if applicable: 5.How do manufacturer's warranties compare between proposed and specified items(s)? Same❑ Different❑ (If Different,Explain on attachment.) Submitted By: Signature Title Signature must be by person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above terms. Failure to provide legally binding signature will result in retraction of approval. Firm: Address: • Lump sum installed cost difference between proposed substitution and least expensive specified item? $ [(decrease);increase The undersigned hereby certifies that the function,appearance,and quality of the requested substitute item equals or exceeds those of the specified item,and,except for those costs indicated above,agrees to pay for changes to the building,if any,including design services,caused by.its incorporation. • Approved For Architect Review: Contractor's Signature ❑ Substitution 0 Substitution Accepted ❑ Substitution Accepted As Noted Not Accepted Date: By: MITHUN Signature Title END OF SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 02373.00 01631-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SEI17 EXECUTIONCT REQUON0IR00EMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY •r A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck } measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for interpretation to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered,together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 02373.00 01700-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.4 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly.. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. 1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.5 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. 02373.00 01700-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field- assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.7 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that ' cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION • • 02373.00 01700-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION • - PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building.or structure. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. • B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. • D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP • A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A Submit certification that temporary shoring, support, and restraining systems have been designed by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the State of the Project. B. Predemolition Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces,that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit before Work begins. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the applicable health and safety regulations of the jurisdictional authorities. B. Obtain and pay for all permits required for the demolition work. C. The design of shorings,temporary supports, and restraining systems shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Such elements shall be designed and stamped by a Structural Engineer licensed to • practice in the State of the Project. D. Pre-bid Inspection: Visit the Site to determine existing conditions, and as much as possible to determine the extent of demolition required. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS • A Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. B. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. • 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a ' separate contract. C. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 02373.00 01732-1 - 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS NOT USED PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks,walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets,walks,walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. 2. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. B. Provide protection to all surrounding public spaces. Perform work and provide temporary construction as approved by the local jurisdictional code authorities. C. Protect existing construction that will not be subject to demolition. y 1 3.4 DEMOLITION • A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner, and in accordance with the demolition procedures and sequences approved by the Owner. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb;square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 02373.00 01732-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 4. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls,floors,or framing. 6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 7. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. B. Notify the Owner of hazardous materials discovered during demolition operations. C. Provide temporary shoring as required to support existing construction against movement or overload during demolition operations, until permanent supports are in place. • D. If relics, antiques, corner stones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, or other similar items are discovered, they shall remain the property of the Owner. Notify the Architect prior to removal, and obtain approval on method of removal. E. Carefully remove, store, and protect all materials and components to be reused. F. Where removal of materials indicated to remain is necessary to facilitate new construction, carefully remove, store,and protect such materials for future reinstallation. G. Carefully remove, protect, and turn over as directed, materials and components claimed by the Owner for salvage. Prior to demolition, contact the Owner to determine,which items will be claimed. H. Where cut edges of the existing construction will be visible in the completed work, cut in uniform straight lines. Concrete and masonry shall be saw cut or core drilled. I. Repair all demolition performed in excess of that required, at no additional cost to the Owner. J. Remove all disconnected utility lines. Cap remaining ends. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected utilities. Indicate location of disconnected utilities on the Project Record drawings as specified in Section 01770. K. Pay for and coordinate the work performed by public utilities. Notify the affected utility company well in advance of the scheduled work. L. Dust producing demolition operations shall be sprinkled in areas not subject to water damage. Provide other approved means of controlling dusting in areas subject to water damage. M. Electrical Demolition Requirements: 1. Remove electrical system components as indicated on the electrical drawings. N. Plumbing Demolition Requirements: 1. Abandoned under slab piping shall be cut off flush with the floor line and sealed. Patch flush with the floor. 2. Abandoned piping that is exposed and readily accessible shall be removed. 3. Leave abandoned piping that is concealed in existing construction to remain. O. Leave site in a condition acceptable to the Owner at all times. Remove demolished materials from site daily as work progresses. Do not overload existing structure with demolished materials. 3.5 CLEANUP A. After each demolition phase, leave the area broom clean and ready for the work of other Sections. END OF SECTION 02373.00 01732-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01735 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections: 1. 07840-Firestopping: Patching fire-rated construction. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity,that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended,or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and fleshings. 3. Exterior envelope construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 02373.00 01735-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION • RENTON,WASHINGTON - SECTION 01735 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.2 PERFORMANCE A. Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum :«" • disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. • B. Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as.possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into 3' another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color,texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over "m the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. -, Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair,or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather —• tight condition. . END OF SECTION • �d- • 02373.00 01735-2 01/28/03 • I RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 6. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections: 1. 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls: Cleaning during construction. 1.2 SUBMITTALS . - 'I A. Submit all certificates of approval issued by the governing authorities, including,without limitation,the following: 1. Certificate of occupancy. B. Prior to final payment, submit the following affidavits using the forms listed below: 1. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims AIA Document G706. 2. Consent of Surety to Final Payment AIA Document G707. 3. Contractor's lien release, and lien releases from each subcontractor; Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens AIA Document G706A C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted contract sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties,workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements,final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 6. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 7. Complete startup testing of systems. 8. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 10. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 11. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 02373.00 01770-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION • RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section"Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. • 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, . and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS(PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls,floors,equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. • c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue-or black-line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity that obtained record data,whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity,to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. b. • Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. • c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings,whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings. 2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 02373.00 01770-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES • 3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation"PROJECT RECORD DRAWING"in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 2. Note related Change Orders where applicable. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and • maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data: a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. c. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams. 2. Maintenance Data: a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. c. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. e. Maintenance record forms. f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. g. Copies of maintenance service agreements. h. Copies of warranties and bonds. B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents,with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title"OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL,"Project name, and subject matter of contents. • 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring,vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product*$ e name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and.spine with the typed or printed title'WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 02373.00 01770-3 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING • A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days'advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction,.and course content. B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each 1 system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following: 1. System design and operational philosophy. 2. Review of documentation. 3. Operations. 4. Adjustments. 5. Troubleshooting. 6. Maintenance. 7. Repair. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental'and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Final Completion: a. Clean Project site,yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas,of rubbish,waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign •- deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery,and surplus material from Project site. e. . Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. • f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches,equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if 1 visible soil or stains remain. 02373.00 01770-4 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES • j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. I. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over"UL"and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION • • 02373.00 01770-5 01/28/03 1 ' RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Install and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation control. 2. Locate existing utilities. 3. Accomplish indicated and required stripping,excavation,filling,compaction,and rough grading as required for construction of structures,general site grading,utility construction,sidewalk, parking lot and roadway construction and the construction of miscellaneous improvements. 4. Remove and dispose of materials from the site,which are either not approved for use or are in excess of that required. 5. Import any additional required materials. 6. Coordinate earthwork operations with the other work of the project. B. Work shall be in accordance with the WDOT-APWA Standard Specifications, Divisions 2 through 9, and the City of Renton Standard Plans,except as modified herein. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not limited to Division 1 and the following: Section 02510 Water Distribution System Section 02530 Sanitary Sewer Section 02630 Storm Drainage Section 02751 Concrete Curbs and Sidewalks 1.3 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards for listed association,council, institute, society, and the like organization for its • full name and address. COR City of Renton Standard Plans for Road, Bridge,and Municipal Construction. WSDOT-APWA 2002 Standard Specifications for Road,Bridge,and Municipal Construction. AASHTO T176 Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by use of the Sand Equivalent Test. ASTM C136-93 Test Methods for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates. ASTM D698-91 Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5-lb(2.49-Kg)Rammer and 12-inch (305-mm)Drop. • ASTM D1556-90 Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. ASTM D1557-91 • Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb(4.54-Kg)Rammer and 18-inch (457-mm) Drop. ASTM D2922-91 Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). CO20027-33 02300-1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION • 1, RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK ASTM D3017-88(1993) Test Methods for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow depth). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Testing laboratory will submit the following reports directly to the Architect and shall copy the Contractor: 1. Analysis of soil materials,whether procured on or off site,and including fill, backfill,and borrow „ k materials. 2. Verification of each footing subgrade. 3. Compressive strength or bearing test reports. QUALITYASS URANCE AS RANCE A. Construction Monitoring and Testing: 1. The Owner will secure and pay for the services of a Geotechnical engineer to classify existing soil materials,to recommend and to classify proposed borrow materials when necessary,to verify compliance of materials with specified requirements, and to perform required field and laboratory testing. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all required testing and shall•furnish copies of test reports to the Architect. 3. The Geotechnical Engineer will take samples and perform moisture content,gradation, compaction, and density tests during placement of backfill materials to check compliance with these specifications. 4. The Contractor shall remove surface material at locations designated by the Architect and provide such assistance as necessary for sampling and testing. 5. Tests will be made by the Geotechnical Engineer for the following items: a. Moisture content b. Gradation c. Density in-place-ASTM D2922,D1556, or equivalent. d. Moisture-density relationships-ASTM D698 &ASTM 1557 Any re-testing that is required because the initial test showed that the work did not comply with these Contract Documents shall be provided and paid for at the Contractor's sole expense. 6. The Contractor shall make arrangements for the Geotechnical Engineer to be on site to observe the following activities: a. Temporary excavation cut slopes b. •Placement and compaction of structural fill c. Installation of foundation drainage systems d. Placement of footing, slab&pavement subgrades 1.6 SITE CONDITIONS A. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide,erect and maintain barricades, coverings, or other types of protection necessary to prevent damage to existing vegetation and improvements not indicated for removal. Restore any site improvements, including but not limited to landscaping, pavement,walks,structures,fences and planters, damaged by this work to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. Restore to original grades and conditions,areas adjacent to site disturbed or damaged as a result of site preparation and demolition work. B. Site Utilities: 1. Advise utility companies of excavation activities before starting excavations. Locate and identify underground utilities passing through work area before starting work 2. Coordinate all utility shutoffs with City of Renton Utilities, Renton Department of Transportation, and Renton Fire Department. Coordinate work with Division 1 requirements. CO20027-33 02300-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK 3. Coordinate utility locating,shutoffs and meter readings with utility companies. Verify that all appropriate services have been disconnected. (Contractor shall pay for all fees and costs associated with utility locating,disconnects, capping, line and meter removals). 4. Do not shut off or cap utilities without advance notice and written approval from the Owner. 5. If underground utilities are encountered in locations other than indicated, immediately advise utility owners before proceeding. Amend project record documents to show actual locations. 6. Protect existing utilities indicated to remain. 7. All earthwork including trenching and backfill of mechanical&electrical utilities is the responsibility of the General Contractor. The trenching and backfill associated with the irrigation system shall be the responsibility of the landscaping sub-contractor. C. Objectionable Noises: Limit use of air hammers and other noisy equipment. Conform with local { governing requirements regarding noise control. See Division 1 Section for additional information on allowable noise limits. D. Maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic routes: See.Division 1 Section for additional requirements. 1. Ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, alleys, sidewalks,and adjacent facilities. 2. Do not close or obstruct streets,fire lanes, sidewalks,alleys or passageways without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 3. If required by governing authorities, provide alternate routes around closed.or obstructed traffic ways. • 1.7 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUTS • A. The Contractor will be responsible for furnishing, setting and marking all line location stakes. A qualified layout engineer,surveyor, or technical specialist must be assigned to the Contractor's crew for this work and shall be on site at all times when work requiring control is being performed, together with all necessary equipment,supplies and instruments related thereto. This equipment and personnel must be available,at no additional cost to the Owner,for the purpose of verifying layout and certifying the accuracy of work on the site. B. The Contractor is responsible for preserving all benchmarks and stakes and is required to replace any stakes or benchmarks that are displaced or missing. C. The Contractor is responsible for review of all utility purveyor and City records relative to the existing underground utilities.The Contractor is responsible for avoiding damage to these facilities and shall restore all utilities at Contractor's own expense. The Contractor is to notify the Owner's Representative immediately if underground utilities not shown on record documents are encountered. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVAL OF FILL MATERIALS A. Approval of Fill Material: All material which is proposed to be used as fill shall be graded and tested for moisture content and compactability.Gradation and test results shall be submitted for review and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer prior to placement of fill. The existing site material is very sensitive to moisture&will be difficult to re-use in wet weather as indicated in the Geotechnical Engineering Report.(Refer to Geotechnical Engineering Report - . 2.2 STRUCTURAL FILL • A. Structural Fill: 1. All fill placed under footings, slab-on-grade floor, roadways,sidewalks,walkways, and all other paved areas and for backfill of utility trenches shall be"structural fill"as defined herein, unless specified otherwise for particular applications. CO20027-33 02300-3 1/24/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK 2. Structural fill shall be imported clean granular fill or on-site material which has been accepted by the Geotechnical Engineer for use as structural fill. 3. Imported structural fill shall consist of well-graded sand and gravel materials free of organic material,debris and other deleterious material,and shall conform to the following gradation requirements: U.S.Standard Sieve Size Percent Passing byDry Weight Wei ht 2 inch square 95-100 No.4 30-60 No. 10 20-50 "� No. 60 3- 12 _ No.200 0-5 • ap.O 4. On site soils used as structural fill shall be granular and free of organic material,debris and other deleterious material. It is the contractor's responsibility to show that on site soils are suitable fill material and can meet the gradation requirements outlined above. B. Common Fill: Fill placed at locations, other than those requiring structural fill,where the purpose is to raise site grades,shall be"common fill"as defined: 1. Granular material, either naturally occurring or processed. It shall be essentially free from various types of wood waste or other extraneous or objectionable materials. It shall have such characteristics of size and shape that it will compact readily. The maximum particle size shall not exceed 6 inches. 2. Common Fill shall meet the following gradation requirements: U.S.Standard Sieve Size Percent Passing by Dry Weight 1/4 inch square 25 No.200 10 3. Imported or excavated on-site material consisting of granular soils essentially cleaned of b: organic and other deleterious material and of such particle size and gradation that specified compaction can be readily attained. The moisture content of common fill material at placement and compaction shall be within a range of one percent above to two percent below optimum moisture content. 4. Common fill,whether excavated on-site or imported, shall be tested and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer prior to use. 2.3 GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR PIPE BEDDING A. Gravel backfill for pipe bedding shall be washed sand/gravel mixture free from organic matter and shall meet the following gradation requirements: U.S.Standard Sieve Size Percent Passing by Dry Weight 3/4 inch square 100 3/8 inch square 70-100 No.4 55-100 No. 10 35-95 No.40 • 10-55 No. 100 0-10 No.200 0-3 Il 2.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC CO20027-33 02300-4 1/24/03 { RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK A. Fabric for wrapping exterior drains shall be Mirafi 140N,Supac 4NP or accepted. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EROSION CONTROL A. The implementation of the Erosion Control plans and the construction,maintenance, replacement and upgrading of these facilities is the responsibility of the Contractor until all construction is approved. All work shall be in accordance with the City of Renton Construction Best Management Practices Manual. The Erosion and Sediment Control(ESC)facilities shown on the plan must be constructed in conjunction with all clearing and grading activities,and in such a manner as to insure that sediment laden water does not enter the drainage system or violate applicable water standards. B. The ESC facilities shown are the minimum requirements for anticipated site conditions. During the construction period,the erosion control facilities shall be upgraded as needed. Contractor shall pay for all costs associated with the construction, maintenance; upgrading and removal of the erosion ' control system•throughout project duration. C. Provide filter fabric between frame and grate of existing catch basins in and adjacent to work area. Provide filter fabric between frame and grate of new catch basins and area drains following installation, until site paving is completed. 3.2 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES A. Provide markers indicating limits of work and clear identification of items and areas requiring protection. B. Provide barricades,warning signs, and warning lights around open excavations as necessary to prevent injury to persons. C. Utilities: 1. Existing utilities and underground structures shown on the plan are based upon the best available public records and/or private records as supplied by the project owner and/or data obtained verbally from owners or officials associated with the particular utility. Neither the owner nor the engineer guarantee accuracy or completeness of this information and assume no responsibility for improper locations on the construction plans. Other underground facilities not shown on the drawings may be encountered during the course of the work. All invert elevations shown on the drawings shall be verified by the contractor prior to construction. 2. If changed conditions are encountered,the Contractor shall notify the Owner's representative promptly of(1)pre-existing subsurface conditions differing from those indicated in the plans,or (2)pre-existing unknown subsurface conditions, of an unusual nature,differing materially from those originally encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the contract.The Contractor shall make no claims to the owner for compensation for extra work resulting from changed conditions if the Contractor fails to promptly notify the Owner's representative and continues the work without approval in writing from the Owner. 3. The Contractor shall call the utilities underground location center for field location of all utilities and shall not begin excavation until all known underground facilities in the vicinity of the proposed work have been located and marked. If the utility is not a subscriber of the underground location center then the Contractor shall give individual notice to that utility. Contractor shall pay all costs associated with locating existing utilities. 4. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, make excavations and borings ahead of the work,as necessary,to determine the exact location of utilities and underground structures. 5. It is understood that there will be interfering utilities,service laterals and other underground pipes, drains or structures encountered that are not shown or areas shown incorrectly on the CO20027-33 02300-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON • SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK plans or have not been previously discovered in the field. Contractor agrees this is a normal and usual occurrence in the construction of underground improvements. 6. Contractor agrees to provide for these conflicts and interference's and agrees to provide for a reasonable amount of time for design changes and/or utility relocation due to said interference's. 7. .The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions and exercise sound engineering and construction practices in conducting the work. The Contractor shall protect existing public and private utilities from damage during construction. If existing public and private utilities are damaged, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner. The contractor shall restore the utility-to its existing condition. The Contractor is.responsible for the means and the methods of construction for designs shown on the plans. 8. Where the plans call for utilities to be relocated by others,the Contractor shall notify the utility company and coordinate his work so as to avoid conflicts. Depressions resulting from relocated utilities under future buildings,walls pavement,or other structures should be ro backfilled with structural fill. 9. All excavation,trenching,subgrade preparation,fill placement, and all soil work in general shall be conducted in compliance with the recommendations of the project soil engineer and the current Geotechnical engineering report. D. Pavement: The Contractor shall protect from damage all pavement or paved areas including curbs intended to remain. Contractor shall be responsible for replacement if damage occurs to pavement or curbs to remain. . E. Repair and/or replacement of damaged facilities will be accomplished at the Contractor's expense. • F. Dust Control: Contractor shall sprinkle water as necessary to control dust during dry weather conditions. Do not use water to extent causing flooding, contaminated runoff or icing. 3.3 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove any trash or debris from site, including below-ground portions. B. Remove all vegetable matter from within the limits indicated on the drawings. 1. Fill holes thus created with approved,compacted soil. 3.4 SITE GRADING A. General: Required contours and elevations are indicated and noted on Drawings;should indicated q 9 figures conflict with actual conditions, notify Owner and obtain direction before proceeding with grading of area in conflict. B. Grading: 1. To the extent applicable shape surface of site to grades and contours as noted. 2. Remove debris, rocks over 6-inch in size,vegetation,and other organic matter from material to be re-used. 3. Control grading around building areas at all times to prevent flow of water into excavated areas and ponding adjacent to buildings. 4. At paving and other site improvements,shape sub-grades to line, grades, and cross sections -indicated. After design grade is reached, Proof roll subgrade to identify soft areas in the presence of the Geotechnical Engineer. Any soft soils encountered shall excavated and replaced with structural fill to reach the required compaction. Excavate rock encountered to a depth of 6"below finish subgrade elevations. Bring low areas up to required elevations with approved fill materials. 3.5 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. General: CO20027-33 02300-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK 1. Do not allow excavation subgrades and soil at foundations to be subjected to freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. Should prepared, compacted subgrades be damaged by freezing, remove soil materials to the depth required by the Architect and replace and recompact in conformance with specified requirements at no additional cost to the owner. 2. The contractor shall be responsible for verifying the bottom of excavation elevation with the construction documents. The bottom of excavation shown should be considered approximate only. Actual excavation elevations may vary based on field conditions. 3. Provide excavation of whatever nature required for construction of the work;verify character, . quality,and disposition of material to be excavated prior to commencing. Blasting is not permitted. Keep excavations free of water while construction is in progress. 4. All earthwork for utilities shall conform to the Washington Administrative Code(WAC)296-155 requirements for Excavation,Trenching and Shoring. 5. Protect all excavated stockpiles of site soils considered suitable for re-use as structural or common fill as determined by the Geotechnical Engineer. Site soils are highly moisture sensitive and if exposed to wet weather will become unsuitable for re-use if not protected. Stockpiles which have been approved for structural or common fill that become wet due to inadequate protection shall not be re-used unless the material can be dried out to meet optimum moisture content as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. B. Catch basins, manholes and similar structures: Excavate to furnish a minimum of 12 inches between sides of excavation and outer surfaces of structure.Take care to excavate to exact depths required;fill overexcavation with compacted gravel for trench backfill. C. Trench Excavation for Water Lines: 1. Trenching shall include all excavation of every description and of whatever materials encountered to the depth indicated on the Drawings or in the Project Manual and shall be in accordance with the following Sections of WDOT-APWA: 7-10.3(1), 7-10.3(4), 7-10.3(5),7 • - 10.3(6),7-10.3(7)A,7-10.3(7)D and 7-10.3(8). 2. Minimum depth of cover for water mains shall be 36-inches or as shown in plans, unless modified by the Engineer to allow for clearance of existing utilities. 3. Minimum depth of cover for service lines shall be 36-inches, unless modified by the Engineer to allow for clearance of existing utilities. 4. Trenching for new hot water heating service and return lines shall be in accordance trenching details shown on the plans. 5. Trenching and backfilling for the exterior heating water mains,mechanical and electrical utilities shall be the responsibility of the general contractor. Installation of the utilities shall be the responsibility of the electrical and or mechanical sub-contractor. 6. Locate existing utilities ahead of the pipe laying operation to allow the required clearances to be achieved by deflecting the water line at the joints. D. Trench Excavation for Storm Drains and Sanitary Sewers: • 1. Trenching shall include all excavation of every description and of whatever materials encountered to the depth indicated on the Drawings or in the Project Manual and shall be in accordance with the following Sections of WDOT-APWA: 7-17.3(1)AI, excepting paragraphs 3 and 4; Section 7-17(1)A2;and Section 7-17(1)A4. E. Bedding and Backfill for Water Lines: 1.• Bedding for water mains,fire service lines and hydrant laterals shall be in accordance with Section 7-10.3(9)Al. 2. Backfilling of water trenches shall be in accordance with the plans and Section 7-10.3(10)of WDOT-APWA,except paragraphs 4 and 5. 3. Backfilling of trenches in the vicinity of thrust blocking shall not take place until the concrete in the thrust block has become thoroughly hardened. Walking on the pipe shall not be allowed . until at least one foot of earth has been placed upon it. CO20027-33 02300-7 1/24/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK 4. Compaction of backfill shall be in accordance with the plans and Section 7-10.3(11)of WDOT- APWA,with the following exceptions: 5. In-place density will be determined by ASTM D2922-Test for Density of Soil In-place by the nuclear method. 6. Paragraph 4 shall not apply. F. Bedding and Backfill for Storm Drains and Sanitary Sewers: 1. Bedding of storm drains and sanitary sewers shall be in accordance with Section 7-17.3(1)B of WDOT-APWA and the details in the plans. 2. Backfilling of storm drains and sanitary sewers shall be in accordance with the plans and Section 7-17.3(3)of WDOT-APWA, except paragraph 3 of 7-17.3(3)A shall not apply. 3. Backfilling of trenches in the vicinity of structures shall not take place until the cement in the masonry has become thoroughly hardened. Walking on the pipe shall not be allowed until at least one foot of earth has been placed upon it. 4. Compaction of backfill shall be in accordance with the plans and Section 7-17.3(3)B of WDOT- APWA with the following exceptions: a. In-place density will be determined by ASTM D2922-Test for Density of Soil in-place by the nuclear method. 3.6 FINISH GRADING A. General: Remove all concrete, rocks, rubble and debris larger than 2 inches from surface. Finish grades flush with adjacent surfaces unless indicated otherwise. Finish grades adjacent to sidewalks shall be 1 inch below elevation of sidewalk unless noted otherwise. Execute any fine grading as may be necessary or incidental to all subsequent work. B. Grading Tolerance: Finish grades shall match contours and elevations shown within 1/10 foot. C. Acceptance of Finish Grading: Finish grades will be inspected and subject to acceptance by the Owner. Correct work not approved at no additional cost or time. D. Protection of Finished Surfaces:Allow no heavy objects to be moved over finish grade surfaces. At no cost to Owner, repair any ruts or holes in finished surfaces,and any obstruction to positive drainage. Repair areas showing settlement. E. Minimum Grade: Finish surfaces shall be sloped to drain with a minimum cross slope of 1.0%. If field conditions do not allow for the minimum slope,the contractor shall notify the Owner. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF EARTH MATERIALS • A. Remove all excavated material that is not acceptable for use as fill on site. Legally dispose of excess material off site, at Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall provide to the owner a copy of the dump tickets. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall perform testing to verify conformance with Specifications and Drawings. B. Compaction: 1. Compact all fill and backfill to prevent subsequent settlement. - 2. Water'settling or jetting will not be permitted as a means of compaction. 3. Furnish heavy rollers or compactors except as follows: a. Use pneumatic hand tampers for trenches and areas not accessible to heavy equipment. 4. Required compaction: Compact fills and backfills to the following minimum relative compaction as specified by the Geotechnical Engineer. CO20027-33 02300-8 1/24/03 • RENTON PAVILION • RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02300 • EARTHWORK END OF SECTION • • • l i I F CO20027-33 02300-9 1/24/03 1 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. • Work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Furnishing and installing waterlines,gate valves,fittings,thrust blocking,joint restraints, and new services. 2. Coordinating and installing the domestic water service and fire service. • 3. Coordinating with the City of Renton for placing water meter • 4. Temporary connections. 5. Coordinate and provide connections to building piping. • 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not limited to the following: 1. Drawings, general provisions of the Contractor and Division 1 specifications apply to this section. 2. Section 02300-Earthwork 1.3 REFERENCES _ A. Reference Standards for listed association,council, institute,society,and the like organization for its full name and address. COR City of Renton,Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction. WSDOT-APWA 2002 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge,and Municipal Construction. UPC The Uniform Plumbing Code. • IAMPO The International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials Standards. AWWA American Water Works Association Standards. 1.4 PERMITS - A. The Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits and fee's related to their work. 1.5 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUTS A. The Contractor will be responsible for furnishing,setting and marking all line location stakes. A qualified layout engineer, surveyor,or technical specialist must be assigned to the Contractor's crew for this work and shall be on site at all times when work requiring control is being performed, together with all necessary equipment, supplies and instruments related thereto. This equipment and personnel must be available,at no CO20027-33 02510-1• 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION additional cost to the Owner,for the purpose of verifying layout and certifying the accuracy of work on the site. B. The Contractor is responsible for review of all City and Owner's records relative to the existing underground utilities.The Contractor is responsible for avoiding damage to these facilities and shall restore.all active utilities at contractor's own expense. C. The Contractor is to notify the Owner immediately if underground utilities not shown on the Site Survey are encountered. a^r 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data for materials and equipment. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. 4 inch or larger pipe: Cement lined ductile iron pipe Class 52 per WDOT-APWA Section 9-30.1(1). B. Fittings for ductile iron pipe shall be: 1. Ductile iron conforming to AWWA C110 and C111 or AWWA C153 and shall be cement-mortar lined conforming to AWWA C104. 2. Except where restrained joint systems are required, mechanical or push on joints may be used. 3. Where restrained joint pipe is required,threaded flanges by restrained joint adapters shall not be longer than three pipe diameters. Threaded flanges and pipe shall conform to AWWA C115. The exterior flange lip overlapping the pipe barrel shall be sealed with a bituministic mastic. 4. Sleeves less than 12 inches diameter shall be 12 inches minimum length and shall be mechanical joint. 5. Sleeves greater than 12 inches diameter shall be of the long body type and shall be 15 inches minimum length and shall be mechanical joint. 6. Hub-by-flange fitting length shall conform to AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Threaded flanges and pipe thickness shall conform to AWWA C115. Hub-by- flange fittings shall be mortar lined per AWWA C105. The exterior flange lip overlapping the pipe barrel shall be sealed with bituminous mastic. Threaded flanges will be allowed only on hub-by-flange fittings. Pipe with threaded flanges will not be allowed. 7. All other fittings shall be per applicable portions of WDOT-APWA Sections 9- 30.2, 9-30.6(3)and 9-30.6(5): C. Pipe 3 inches and smaller in diameter: Copper tubing Type K,ASTM B88,annealed, unless indicated otherwise on plans. The tubing shall be coupled using flare-type compression fittings, conforming to the requirements of AWWA C800, minimum 150 psi working pressure. - D. All pipe shall be marked with the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF)seal and in accordance with ASTM and AWWA marking requirements which include but is not limited CO20027-33 02510-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION to the manufacturer's name and class of pipe. Pipe shall bear no evidence of interior or exterior extrusion marks. Pipe walls shall be uniform,smooth and glossy. E. Conductive warning tape shall be placed over all sewer, drainage,water and irrigation pipe. Tape shall be manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored,continuous printed plastic tape, aluminum backed, intended for direct-burial service. Tape shall be not less than 6"wide x 4 mils thick. Tape Schedule: Piping Color Wording • Domestic Water Blue Caution Domestic Water Irrigation Water Blue Caution Irrigation Water 2.2 BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIAL A. Bedding and backfill material shall be in accordance with Section 02200. 2.3 VALVES A. Gate valves shall conform.to WSDOT-APWA Sections 9-30.3. (All valves shall be of the same diameter as the pipe as shown on the plans unless otherwise specified). B. Flanges shall be faced and drilled,ASA Class 235,for use with full face gaskets. C. Valve boxes shall be in accordance with Section 9-30.3(4)of WSDOT-APWA. Unless otherwise noted on the plans,valve boxes shall be installed on all buried valves. Provide cast iron extensions as necessary to fit site requirements. 2.4 THRUST BLOCKING A. Portland Cement Concrete for thrust blocking shall be Class 5(1-1/2)per COR Standard Plans and Specifications. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that trench is ready to receive work, and excavations, dimensions,and elevations are as indicated on Drawings. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 'INSTALLATIONS A. Verify existing locations from the records of City of Renton. B. General: 1. All trenching shall conform to the Washington Administrative Code (WAC)296- 155 requirements for Excavation,Trenching and Shoring. CO20027-33 02510-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION • RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION 2. Trench excavation,foundation bedding,and backfill for watermains shall be in accordance with Section 02200. 3. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all underground water mains including new irrigation lines, domestic service lines,fire protection mains,and hot water heating mains. C. Install pipe,fittings and appurtenances in accordance with the following Sections of tim WDOT-APWA:7-11.1 through 7-11.3(6), and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Pipe deflection at joints shall be one half the manufacturers allowable amount. D. Install valves in accordance with WSDOT-APWA Section 7-12. E. Install thrust blocking in accordance with WSDOT-APWA Section 7-11.3(13). 3.3 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SERVICES A. Connections to the existing private water system shall not be made without first making the necessary arrangements with the Owner and Renton Water Department in advance. B. Test,flush and disinfect new lines prior to placing in service: Contractor shall furnish all test results to the Owner for Acceptance. 3.4 TESTING AND DISINFECTION A. Contractor shall pressure test pipe in accordance with Section 7-11.3(11)of WSDOT- APWA and AWWA C600. B. Flushing and disinfection of water mains shall be in accordance with WSDOT-APWA Section 7-11.3(12). Contractor shall provide and pay all costs for disinfection testing. C. Contractor shall coordinate with the Renton Fire Department for required thrust restraint inspections and witnessing of flushing,flow and pressure tests. Minimum five days notice required prior to each test. D. After disinfection, all contaminated water is to be disposed of into the sanitary sewer or neutralized prior to discharge into the storm drainage system. Flushing of the water mains shall be accomplished in such a manner as not to cause flooding or down stream property. END OF SECTION • CO20027-33 02510-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Furnishing and installing sanitary sewer pipe,fittings, cleanouts and side sewers of the type and sizes designated in the plans and specifications. 2. Coordinate with City of Renton and provide connections to existing public and private system. 3. Temporary connections. 4. Coordinate and provide connections to building plumbing. B. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual,including but not limited to the following: Drawings, general provisions of the Contractor and Division 1 specifications apply to this section. Section 02300-Earthwork Section 02630-Storm Drainage 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards for listed association, council, institute,society,and the like organization for its full name and address. COR City of Renton Standard Plans for Road, Bridge,and Municipal Construction. WSDOT-APWA 2002 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge,and Municipal Construction. • 1.3 PERMITS • A. The contractor shall secure and pay for all permits and fee's associated with their work. 1.4 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUTS A. The Contractor will be responsible for furnishing, setting and marking all line location. A qualified layout engineer, surveyor, or technical specialist must be assigned to the Contractor's crew for this work and shall be on site at all times when work requiring control is being performed,together with all necessary equipment, supplies and instruments related thereto. This equipment and personnel must be available, at no additional cost to the Owner,for the purpose of verifying layout and certifying the accuracy of work on the site. B. The Contractor is responsible for review of all COR records relative to the existing underground utilities.The Contractor is responsible for avoiding damage to these facilities and shall restore all active utilities at the Contractor's own expense. • C. The Contractor is to notify the Owner immediately of underground utilities encountered,which are not shown on the drawings or Owner's survey or record drawings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS CO20027-33 02530-1 1/24/03 • RENTON PAVILION • • RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWER A. Submit in accordance with Sections 01300,01335 and the manufacturer's data for material and equipment including but not limited to pipe,ceanouts,conductive warning tape, and foam blocking. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE(PVC)PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D3034, SDR 35,or better with rubber gasket joints. B. Pipe within the buildingenvelope shall be PVC Schedule 40 shall conform to ASTM- - P D 1785. Schedule 40 fitting shall conform to ASTM-D-12466-73. 2.2 CONDUCTIVE WARNING TAPE A. Conductive warning tape required over all sewer,drainage,water and irrigation pipe. Tape shall be manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored,continuous printed plastic tape,aluminum backed, intended for direct-burial service. Tape shall be not less than 6"wide x 4 mils thick. Tape Schedule: • Piping Color Wording Sanitary Sewer Green Caution Sanitary Sewer 2.3 FITTINGS, COUPLINGS AND JOINTS • - A. Fittings shall be the same material as the pipe. • B. Tees on existing pipe and new connections to manholes shall be connected by core drilling and flexible connections. • C. Pipe to pipe connections shall be made with a flexible gasketed coupling, adapter or coupling- adapter to make a watertight joint. Couplings shall be those manufactured by Romac, Caulder, or Femco. 2.4 CLEAN-OUTS • A. Cleanouts shall conform to COR Std plans and Contract Documents. Size to match connection pipe. Clean outs will be furnished with locking lids. 2.5 BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIAL A. Backfill material shall be in accordance with Section 02300 and the details in the Plans. B. Bedding material shall be in accordance with Section 02300 and the details in the Plans. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION WITH OTHER WORK A. Verify location from the records of COR. CO20027-33 02530-2 1/24/03 1 I RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02530 SANITARY SEWER B. Before installation Contractor shall make proper provisions for site sanitary sewer lines and to avoid interference with installation of other work and/or other contractors. Any changes caused by Contractor's neglect to coordinate work shall be made by Contractor at Contractor's expense. C. Sanitary drawings and specifications shall be compared with drawings and specifications of other trades and any discrepancies between them reported to the Owner prior to installation of work. 3.2 TRENCHING AND PIPE LAYING A. Excavation and preparation of the trench.shall be in accordance with Section 02300. All trenching shall conform to the Washington Administrative Code(WAC)296-155 and WISHA requirements for Excavation,Trenching and Shoring. B. Excavation shall be made to alignment,elevation,grade and slope as indicated on the drawings. C. Laying shall be in conformance with Section 02300 and WSDOT-APWA Section 7-17.3(2). D. Laying within the building envelope shall be installed in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code and shall be install by a licensed plumber. 3.3 BEDDING AND BACKFILLING A. Bedding and backfill shall be per Section 02300 and the details in the Plans. • 3.4 PIPE CROSSINGS A. Where pipe crossings are less than 6-inches foam blocking shall be placed to for separation and protection per manufactures recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND TESTING A. Cleaning and testing shall be in conformance with Contract Documents and Section 7-17.3(4)of WSDOT-APWA. END OF SECTION CO20027-33 02530-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Furnishing and installing storm sewer piping and fittings of the type and sizes designated in the plans and specifications. 2. Connections to existing combined sewer. 3. Building footing drains. 4. Temporary connections. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual,including but not limited to the following: Drawings, general provisions of the Contractor and Division 1 specifications apply to this section. Section 02300-Earthwork Section 02530-Sanitary Sewer System 1.03 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards for listed association, council,institute,society,and the like organization for its full name and address. COR City of Renton Standard Plans for Road, Bridge,and Municipal Construction WSDOT-APWA 2002 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction. - AWWA C110/A21.10 1987 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 inch,Through 48 inch, for Water and Other Liquids. 1.04 PERMITS A. The contractor shall secure and pay for all permits and fee's associated with their work. 1.05 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUTS A. The Contractor will be responsible for furnishing, setting and marking all line location stakes. A qualified layout engineer,surveyor, or technical specialist must be assigned to the Contractor's crew for this work and shall be on site at all times when work requiring control is being performed,together with all necessary equipment, supplies and instruments related thereto. This equipment and personnel must be available,at no additional cost to the Owner,for the purpose of verifying layout and certifying the accuracy of work on the site. B. The Contractor is responsible for review of all COR records relative to the existing underground utilities. The Contractor is responsible for avoiding damage to these facilities and shall restore all active utilities at the Contractor's own expense. CO20027-33 02630-1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE C. The Contractor is to notify the Owner immediately of underground utilities encountered,which are not shown on the drawings or owner's survey or record drawings. 1.06 SUMBITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Sections 01300,01335 and the manufacturer's data for material and equipment including but not limited to pipe,catch basin, manholes,frames and grates. PART2-PRODUCTS Contractor shall note that all pipe within the building shall conform to the current Uniform Plumbing Code. 2.01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE(PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D3034,SDR 35, or better with rubber gasket joints. B. Pipe with less than 18-inches of cover shall be PVC Schedule 40,ASTM D 3034 SDR 35 or ASTM F 789. C. Perforated pipe shall be minimum of ASTM D-2729 PVC Schedule 40 or better slotted as needed. Glue joints, smooth bore. D. Connections to catch basins or manholes shall be by a GPK manhole adapter. E. Fittings for PVC pipe shall be injected molded tees or factory solvent cemented saddle tees and shall have sufficient strength to withstand handling and load stresses normally encountered. 2.02 CONDUCTIVE WARNING TAPE A. Conductive warning tape required over all sewer,drainage,water and irrigation pipe. Tape shall be manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous printed plastic tape,aluminum backed, intended for direct-burial service. Tape shall be not less than 6"wide x 4 mils thick. Tape Schedule: Piping Color Wording Storm Sewer Green Caution Storm Sewer 2.03 FITTINGS, COUPLINGS AND JOINTS A. Fittings shall be the same material as the pipe. B. Tees on existing pipe and new connections to manholes shall be connected by core drilling and flexible connections. C. Pipe to pipe connections shall be made with a flexible gasketed coupling, adapter or coupling-adapter to make a watertight joint. Couplings shall be those manufactured by Romac, Caulder,or Femco. D. Provide water stops at construction joints for the stormwater detention vault. Water stops shall be in accordance with City of Renton Requirements. 2.04 BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIAL A. Backfill material shall be in accordance with Section 02300 and the details in the Plans. CO20027-33 02630-2 1/24/03 "" RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02630 - STORM DRAINAGE • B. Bedding material shall be in accordance with Section 02300 and the details in the Plans. 2.05 CONCRETE CATCH BASINS A. Catch basins shall be per Contract Documents, COR Standard Plans and per WSDOT-APWA Section 7- 05. B. All catch basins shall have outlet traps conforming to COR Standard Plans. • • 2.06 FOUNDATION DRAINS A. Pipe within the building envelope shall be PVC Schedule 40 shall conform to ASTM-D-1785. Schedule 40 fitting shall conform to ASTM-D-12466-73 B. Perforated pipe outside the building shall be minimum of ASTM D-2729 PVC or better slotted as needed. Glue joints,smooth bore. C. Connections to catch basins or manholes shall be by a GPK manhole adapter. D. Fittings for PVC pipe shall be injected molded tees or factory solvent cemented saddle tees and shall have sufficient strength to withstand handling and load stresses normally encountered. 2.07 PRE-CAST TRENCH DRAIN A. Channels shall have interlocking joints and horizontal ribs to ensure a positive anchor in the encasement concrete. B. Properly fittings outlets,end caps and necessary catch basins shall be included. C. The grate shall be Polydrain No. 505 or approved equal and be capable of being locked to the channel ij with removable lock downs. 2.08 Plaza Drain A. Zurn Z-508, 9"Diameter top drain, Dura-Coated cast iron body with bottom outlet,seepage pan and combination membrane flashing clamp and frame for heavy duty cast iron deep flange slotted grate. PART 3-EXECUTION • 3.01 COORDINATION WITH OTHER WORK • A. Verify location from the records of COR. B. Before installation Contractor shall make proper provisions for site storm lines to avoid interference with installation of other work and/or other contractors. Any changes caused by Contractor's neglect to coordinate work shall be made by Contractor at Contractor's expense. C. Site storm drain drawings and specifications shall be compared with drawings and specifications of other trades and any discrepancies between the documents reported to the Owner prior to installation of work. 3.02 TRENCHING AND PIPE LAYING A. Excavation and preparation of the trench shall be in accordance with Section 02300. All trenching shall conform to the Washington Administrative Code(WAC)296-155 and WISHA requirements for CO20027-33 02630-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE Excavation,Trenching and Shoring. B. Excavation shall be made to alignment,elevation, grade and slope as indicated on the drawings. C. Laying shall be in conformance with Section 02300 and WSDOT-APWA Section 7-17.3(2). 3.03 CATCH BASIN AND STRUCTURE INSTALLATION OR MODIFICATION A. Structures shall be installed or modified in accordance with Section 7-05 of WSDOT-APWA and the drawings. i B. Adjustments to existing structures to remain shall be in accordance with Section 7-05.3(1)P&7-05.3(2)of WSDOT-APWA. C. All storm drain manholes shall have full and complete channels. 3.04 BEDDING AND BACKFILLING 1 A. Bedding and backfill shall be per Section 02300 and the details in the Plans. 3.05 PRE-CAST TRENCH DRAIN A. The trench drains shall be installed per the manufacturer's instructions and details. POLYCLIP installation devices shall be used to hold the channels to line and grade,prevent floatation and ensure proper concrete encasement. 3.05 PIPE CROSSINGS A. Where pipe crossings are less than 6-inches foam blocking shall be placed to for separation and protection per manufactures recommendations. 3.06 CLEANING AND TESTING A. Cleaning and testing shall be in conformance with Section 7-17.3(4)of WSDOT-APWA. END OF SECTION • 11 . • ly CO20027-33 02630-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02751 • CONCRETE CURBS AND SIDEWALKS PART 1 —GENERAL • 1.1. SECTION INCLUDES • A. Section Includes: Portland cement concrete pavements, curbs and sidewalks including base courses as described herein and in drawings. 1.2. RELATED SECTIONS A. Coordinate work with related work specified in other parts of the Specifications, including but not limited to the following: Earthwork Section 02300 1.3. REFERENCES A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. They are part of this section insofar as specified and modified herein. The Contractor shall have one copy of the each of the following documents at the job site.The bidder in submitting a bid acknowledges that he is familiar with the documents named in References and that they are incorporated into this document by reference. The Standard Plans and Policies apply only to performance and materials and how they are to be incorporated into the work. The legal/contractual relationship sections and the measurements and payment sections do not apply to this document. COR City of Renton Standard Plans for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction WSDOT-APWA 2002 Standard Specification for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction. APAW Designs and Specifications for Asphalt Concrete Pavements and Bases, 1990 Edition. B. The following publications of the issues listed below, but referred to hereinafter by basic designation only,form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto. American Society for Testing &Materials(ASTM): ASTM D1557 Methods of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils, Using 10 lb (4.5 kg) Rammer and 18 in. (457 mm) Drop. 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. General:Submit in accordance with Division 1. B. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certification that concrete mix, aggregate base and herbicide comply with specification requirements; include laboratory, compaction,and slump test reports verifying compliance, if requested. CO20027-33 02751-1 1/24/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02751 CONCRETE CURBS AND SIDEWALKS • 1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide materials produced by cement concrete producer regularly engaged in the production of concrete paving mix. Installer must be experienced in the installation of cement concrete paving with adequate equipment and personnel for the completion of the work. B. Materials: Provide fresh new materials meeting or exceeding requirements specified herein. C. Allowable Tolerances: Provide patching in such a manner so that new work is level and i contiguous with existing pavement;make transitions and grade changes smooth. yJ D. Allowable Tolerances: Provide rough grade finished to the required contours and elevations within 0.10 foot,plus or minus;fine grading to within 0.04 feet, plus or minus. Verify condition of i • subgrade prior to asphalt paving; commencement of asphalt paving constitutes acceptance of subgrade as satisfactory for installation of paving as specified. • E. Testing: Contractor will furnish material testing and inspection for quality control during paving operations. Paving thickness is subject to core.tests upon completion. Should average thickness be less than specified,apply more paving to furnish specified thickness as a • minimum. Patch all core drill holes. 1.6. PROJECT SITE A. Existing Conditions: Where paving interferes with the completion of the work,cut out and dispose of debris. Upon completion of the Work, patch all such damaged pavement to match adjacent existing paving. • B. Environmental Conditions: Do no work when base or earth sub-grade is wet or contains an • excess amount of moisture. C. Protection&Controls: 1. • Grade Control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades, including crown and cross slopes,for each course of paving until completion and acceptance of the Work. • 2. Traffic Control: Maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic lanes during paving operations as required for other construction activities and for access to the existing building and facilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the new paving against vehicular traffic prior to and for a minimum of 48 hours following any required seal coat operation. • PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS A. Soil Sterilant: Herbicide shall be an EPA approved dry,free-flowing,dust-free chemical compound which is non-flammable, non-poisonous and non corrosive.The chemical shall be a chlorate-borate compound,such as polybor-chlorate and 68 percent sodium metaborate or 73 percent disodium octaborate,suitable for application in powder form or in a solution. B. Headers, Benders&Stakes: Construction Grade Douglas fir; preservative treated. • C. Aggregate Base Course: One or more layers of top course and base course over prepared subgrade in accordance with WSDOT Paragraph 9.03.9(3). CO20027-33 02751-2 1/24/03 -i RENTON PAVILION • RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02751 CONCRETE CURBS AND SIDEWALKS D. Crack Filler: Flexafil rubberized asphalt,or equal. E. Other Materials: Provide all accessory and incidental materials, equipment,tools, and methods required for completion of paving where indicated on drawings, including the following. 1. Concrete curbs: Provide concrete curbs in sizes and configurations indicated on the plan. Construct cement concrete vertical curb with air entrained concrete Class 3000 conforming to the requirements of WSDOT-APWA Section 8-04.3. Portland cement and aggregates shall conform to Section 8-04.2 of WSDOT-APWA. Calcium Chloride is not allowed as an admixture. 2. Cement Concrete Paving: in accordance with Standard Specification Section 5-05.2. 3. Cement Concrete Sidewalks:Construct cement concrete sidewalks and integral curb and sidewalks and ADA ramps with air entrained concrete Class 3000 conforming to the requirements of WSDOT-APWA Sec.6-02. Portland cement,aggregates,joint filler and curing materials shall conform to Section 8-14.2 of WSDOT-APWA. Calcium Chloride is not allowed as an admixture. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION A. General: Remove all existing fill,debris,vegetation,and other perishable materials from areas to be paved. Proof roll subgrade and address soft yielding areas per Soil Engineer's recommendation. Bring areas requiring fills to rough grade elevations. Install wood headers ( and benders to true lines as indicated and securely staked to prevent movement or displacement during paving operations. Remove upon completion. Apply sterilant to subgrades in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes your acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 1. Verify proper compaction of subgrade,Section 02300,for on-grade work. C. Aggregate Base Course: Place in accordance with the requirements of WSDOT Standard Specification Section 4-04 and to the thickness shown on the plan or to match existing depth, whichever is greater. Materials shall be graded and compacted in 4-inch maximum layers to at least 98 percent of maximum density in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method D. Base Course may be substituted with compacted sub-grade upon visual inspection and approval by the Soils Engineer. 3.2. PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: 1. Carefully verify and coordinate with all City of Renton and WSDOT/APWA requirements. 2. Verify existing dimensions and shapes.Conform to existing where applicable. 3.3. PAVING INSTALLATION A. Cement concrete sidewalks and walkways shall be installed in accordance with the plan drawings and WSDOT-APWA Section 8-14. Expansion joints shall be provided at maximum 15- ' foot spacing and shall be coordinated with the Architectural scoring pattern. Sidewalks and courtyard paving shall be divided per the landscape and Architectural scoring pattern, by scoring 1/4 inch deep. Sidewalks and walkways shall be broom finished in accordance with Section 3300. Walkways shall be installed flush with adjacent walks. CO20027-33 02751-3 1/24/03 • RENTON PAVILION yl RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02751 CONCRETE CURBS AND SIDEWALKS 3.4. CONCRETE CURB INSTALLATION A. Install cement concrete vertical curbs,and curb and gutter in accordance with Contract Documents and WSDOT/APWA Section 8-04.3(1). Provide expansion joints at maximum15 foot spacing. Perform the work in a manner which results in a curb constructed to specified line and grade,uniform in appearance and structurally sound. Remove curbs found with unsightly bulges,ridges or other defects and'replaced if Owner's representative considers them irreparable. When checked with a 10-foot straightedge, grade shall not deviate more than 1/8 inch,and alignment shall not vary more than 1/4 inch. Curb repairs shall match existing grades. ._ END OF SECTION • • CO20027-33 02751-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Piping,valves, sprinklers, specialties, controls, and wiring for automatic control • irrigation system. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Lateral Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers. Piping is under pressure during flow. B. Irrigation Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design 100 percent water-coverage(head to head coverage) irrigation system for shrub bed indicated. B. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as architectural columns. Maintain 100 percent water coverage of planting areas indicated. C. All pipe flow velocities shall not exceed(5')five feet per second. . D. Minimum pressure shall be maintained to operate pop-up spray sprinklers for system design. E. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping, valves, and specialties, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Irrigation Main Piping: 150 psig. 2. Lateral Piping: 100 psig. 1.4 SUBMITTALS • A. Product Data: Include pressure ratings,rated capacities, and settings of selected models for the following: 1. General-duty valves. 2. Specialty valves. 3. Valve boxes. 4. Sprinklers. 5. Pipes,tubes, and fittings. 6. Automatic controllers. Include wiring diagrams. 7. Control cables. Include splice kits. B. Shop Drawings: Show irrigation system piping, including plan layout, and locations, types, sizes, capacities, and flow characteristics of irrigation system piping components. Include water meters, backflow preventers,valves, piping, sprinklers and devices, accessories, controls, and wiring. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping, system components, adjacent utilities, and proximate structures.Show areas of sprinkler spray and overspray. Show wire size and number of conductors for each control cable. Show graphic and written legend for all components. Show maximum pressure loss for farthest head from POC. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For irrigation systems, to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures," include data for the following: 1. Automatic-control valves. 2. Sprinklers. 3. Controllers. 02373.00 02810-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS E. Point of Connection Water Pressure Test:Test water pressure at the irrigation system point of connection prior to beginning work. F. Field quality-control test reports. G. Operation and maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: All work shall be warranted in writing for one(1)year from date of substantial 4� completion against all defects in materials, equipment, and workmanship. Warranty shall also cover repair or damage to any part of the premises resulting from leaks orbther defects in material, equipment, and workmanship to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect Repairs, if required, shall be done promptly upon notification by the Owner and, at no cost to the Owner. _ ' PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not.limited to, manufacturers specified. - • 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPES,TUBES,AND FITTINGS A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 40 and Class 200. P 1. PVC Socket Fittings, Schedule 40 and Class 200: ASTM D 2466. a. Fittings, cement and thinner shall be of the brand(s) recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe. • 2.3 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES A. Mainline Gate Valve: Hammond brass, screw-end, 150#WOG with cross handle. Mainline gate valve shall be of the same size as PVC mainline. B. Valve Boxes: Carson Industries, green body with locking lid use standard or Jumbo rectangular box for all electrical control'valves. Size accordingly. Double check valve assembly box shall be Super Jumbo XL Model. Use extensions as required to protect 4"below valves and 12"below the DCVA. 1. Operating Wrenches: Furnish total of(2)two steel, tee-handle operating wrenches with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating - nut • C. Backflow Preventer. Zum Wilkens double check backflow preventer. The backflow preventer shall • consist of cast brass.The internal assemblies shall consist of engineered polymer check valves and guides with stainless steel springs. The backflow preventer shall be pressure rated to 175 psi working and 350 psi hydrostatic to a temperature of 180 F. • 02373.00 02810-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 2.4 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Plastic Automatic Control Valves: Molded-plastic body, normally closed,diaphragm, globe type with manual flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid.The valve shall have a manufacturer's limited warranty of not less than five(5)years. Use for Master Valve also. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. B. Automatic Drain Valves: Spring-loaded-ball type of corrosion-resistant construction and designed to open for drainage if line pressure drops below 2-1/2 to 3 psig. C. Mainline Manual Drain Valve: Brass 3/4"angle valve. Install manual drains at low points along mainline(minimum of 1 drain valve per POC). _ D. Quick-Couplers: Factory-fabricated, bronze or brass,two-piece assembly. Include coupler water-seal valve; removable upper body with spring-loaded or weighted, rubber-covered cap; hose swivel with ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet;and operating key. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. E. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 inch minimum to 2 inches maximum. 2.5 SPRINKLERS • A. Description: Plastic housing and corrosion-resistant interior parts designed for uniform coverage over !_ entire spray area indicated, at available water pressure. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. B. 6" Pop-up, Spray Sprinklers: Fixed pattern,with screw-type flow adjustment and stainless-steel retraction spring. All sprinklers will be bottom inlet only. Install self sealing feature in any sprinkler where there is a potential for low head drainage. 2.6 SPRINKLER SPECIALTIES A. Automatic Controller. Automatic controller shall be of Rainbird ESP-4 solid-state controller locking vandal proof box. Controller shall be installed and wired in accordance with all applicable codes. B. Wiring: UL 493,Type UF-B multiconductor,with solid-copper conductors and insulated cable; suitable for direct burial. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. AFC Cable Systems Inc. b. Alcatel Canada Wire, Inc. c. American Electric Cable Co. d. American Insulated Wire Corp. e. Cerro Wire&Cable Co., Inc. f. Colonial Wire and Cable Co., Inc. g. Essex Group, Inc.; Building Wire Products Division. h. Precision Cable Manufacturing Co., Inc. i. Southwire Company. 2. Feeder-Circuit Cables: No. 12 AWG minimum, between building and controllers. 3. Low-Voltage, Branch-Circuit Cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between controllers and automatic control valves;color-coded different from feeder-circuit-cable jacket color-with jackets of different { colors for multiple-cable installation in same trench. 4. Splicing Materials: Manufacturer's packaged kit consisting of insulating,spring-type connector or crimped joint and epoxy resin moisture seal; suitable for direct burial. 02373.00 02810-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS . PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Refer to Division 2 Section"Earthwork"for excavating, trenching,and backfilling. B. Install piping and wiring in sleeves under sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, and railroads. C. Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes necessary. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded • from 3/4 to 3 inches, to•12 inches below grade. Cover gravel or crushed stone with sheet of asphalt- saturated felt and backfill remainder with excavated material. D. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following: 1. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 18"below finished grade. 2. Lateral Piping: 12 inches below finished grade. 3. Sleeves: 18 inches below finished grade. 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS • A. Piping in control-valve boxes and aboveground may be joined with flanges instead of joints. B. Underground Irrigation Main Piping: Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. C. Lateral Piping: Class 200, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. D. Sleeves: Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. E. Transition Fittings: Use transition fittings for plastic-to-metal pipe connections according to the following: 1., Couplings: a. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. . b. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA transition coupling. 2. Fittings: a. Aboveground Piping: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings. b. Underground Piping: Union with plastic end of same material as plastic piping. y� 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install piping at minimum uniform slope of 0.5 percent down toward drain valves. B. Install piping free of sags and bends. C. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. • D. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. E. Install unions adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components. F. Lay piping on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions. G. Underground Gate Valves: Install in valve box with top flush with grade. .- 1. Install valves and PVC pipe with restrained, gasketed joints. H. Underground, Manual Control Valves: Install in manual control-valve box. sar I. Control Valves: Install in control-valve box. J. Drain Valves: Install in control-valve box. K. Flush circuit piping with full head of water and install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is completed. 02373.00 02810-4 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS L. Locate part-circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 4 inches from walls and 2 inches from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated. M. Install control cable in same trench as irrigation piping. Provide conductors of size not smaller than recommended by controller manufacturer. 1. Control wires are to be taped together at 10 foot intervals, then placed along the mainline or lateral lines and at least 2 inches from side piping. Do not tape the wire harness to any piping. • 2. Provide an 18"harness loop at all sleeve ends and direction changes. 3. Install cable in separate sleeve under paved areas if irrigation piping is installed in sleeve. 4. Install cable in separate sleeve anywhere it changed direction from piping. 3.4 CONNECTIONS • A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section"Grounding and Bonding". B. .Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section"Conductors and Cables". 3.5 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Warning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground, detectable warning tape over underground piping, during backfilling of trenches. B. Refer to Division 2 Section"Earthwork"for warning tapes. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Hydrostatic Mainline Test Mainline shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 psig. To be valid, all tests must be performed under the direction and supervision of the Landscape Architect. a. Attach test pump or air compressor to head of mainline after double check valve. b. 2.Attach gate valve to opposite end of mainline. c. 3.Open gate valve at end of mainline and open main shut off valve until all air is removed from the mainline. d. 4.Close gate valve at end of mainline and install pressure gauge and reopen valve. e. 5.Close main shut off valve and apply 150 pound test to mainline, hold for one hour. Maximum allowable drop is 5 psi in a one hour test. 2. Lateral lines shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test at existing static water pressure. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate controllers and automatic control valves to confirm proper system operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Remove and replace units and retest as specified above. 3.7 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. Verify that controllers are installed and connected according to the manufacturer's specifications. C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements in Division 16 Sections. D. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Adjust settings of controllers. B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate of rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit. 02373.00 02810-5 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS C. Adjust sprinklers so they will be flush with, or not more than 1/4 inch above, finish grade. z, 3.9 CLEANING A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices. • 3.10 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain controller and automatic control valves. Refer to Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures." 3.11 WINTERIZATION A. Deactivate and drain system prior to the onset of the freezing season and reactivate at the onset of the spring season. Certify by letter the dates of winterization/activation. Repair damage from failure to comply. 1. When using compressed air to winterize the system, do so in short cycles at no more than 40 psi air pressure. Do not allow pipe close to the compressor to get hot to the touch. POC and Mainline manual drains may also be used to drain this system. END OF SECTION • • • .02373.00 02810-6 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION • RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02870 SITE FURNISHINGS PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Custom fabricated benches. 1.2 SUBMITTALS • A. Product Data: Submit complete product data for each item. B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items. C. Samples: 1. Submit samples of composite wood and steel finishes. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Steel and Iron: 1. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.2 COMPOSITE WOOD A. Composite Wood: Combination of recycled wood fiber and polyethylene plastic. 1. Product: Provide"ChoiceDek Premium"manufactured by A.E.R.T. and distributed by Weyerhaeuser. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Stainless steel,with Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners. B. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain,without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined per ASTM E 488. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Form metal true to line and level with true curves and accurate angles and surfaces. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arris. B. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. C. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Clean exposed welded joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 2.5 FINISHES A. Steel and Iron Finishes: _ 1. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. a. Hot-dip galvanize steel and iron hardware to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2. Shop prime and paint in accordance with Section 09900. 02373.00 02870-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON . SECTION 02870 SITE FURNISHINGS PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 0 A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing to in-place construction. B. Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or,where indicated,with uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers. C. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such • finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as n required. D. Bolt benches securely in positions indicated. END OF SECTION l , • • • 02373.00 02870-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02930 PLANTING PART 1 -GENERAL , 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: • 1. Preparation and finish grading of planting areas. 2. Furnish and install shrubs. • 3. Topsoil and Amendments. 4. Cleanup and Maintenance. B. Related Sections: 1. 02300-Earthwork. For excavation,filling,and rough grading and for subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials. 2. 02810-Irrigation Systems. • 1.2 DEFINITIONS • A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. B. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous,well-rooted plants grown in a container with well- established established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for kind,type, and size of exterior plant required. C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil. D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill, before placing planting soil. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Samples: 5 lb of mineral mulch in labeled plastic bag. 2. Samples: 5 lb of manufactured topsoil in labeled plastic bag. B. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, signed by product manufacturer, and complying with the following: 1. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products. 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists,where applicable. C. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer. D. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer who maintains an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when planting is in progress. B. Manufactured Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content;cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil. 1. Report suitability of topsoil for plant growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory topsoil. 02373.00 " 02930-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON -, SECTION 02930 PLANTING C. Provide quality, size,genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock." -- D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,-AND HANDLING A. Do not prune shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sunscald, drying, sweating, whipping,and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during delivery. Do not drop exterior plants during delivery. B. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage,and keep roots moist. 1.6 WARRANTY m • A. Special Warranty: Warrant the following plants, for the warranty period indicated, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. 1. Warranty periods below are examples only for some categories of plants; revise to suit Project. 2. Warranty Period for Shrubs: One year from date of Substantial Completion: 3. Remove dead plants periodically during warranty period. Replace immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. Identify and, if appropriate, do all work necessary to prevent replacement plants from a similar demise. 4. Replace plants in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period. 5. A limit of one replacement of each plant will be required, except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements. 6. Visit the site quarterly during the warranty period to review the condition of the plant material. Report each visit to Landscape Architect. If unsatisfactory growing conditions and/or maintenance practices are evident, notify the owner of problems and proposed solutions in writing immediately. In the absence of such communications, the contractor is fully responsible for all plant loss replacements. 7. Replace plants with same variety, and root condition as materials originally specified. Size to include any new growth since installation, such that replacement plants match existing adjacent plants of the same variety. • 1.7 MAINTENANCE A. Shrubs: Maintain during warranty period by pruning, cultivating, watering,weeding, fertilizing,and resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. PART2-PRODUCTS • 2.1 PLANTS A. Shrub Material: Furnish nursery-grown shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sunscald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. 1. Provide container-grown shrubs. 2.2 TOPSOIL A. Manufactured Topsoil: Three Way Mix as produced and premixed by Pacific Topsoils(phone 425 337 2700).Three Way Mix to be amended for fertility and pH as recommended by soil test done on site , soils. 02373.00 02930-2 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02930 PLANTING • 2.3 FERTILIZER A. Commercial Fertilizer. Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Shrubs: Agro Nurseryman's Supplement#3: 7-8-9. 2.4 MULCHES 1. Mineral Mulch: Black Pebblestone as produced by Manufacturers Mineral Company(phone 206 228 2120. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PLANTING A. Subgrade: 1. Shrub Planting Areas: Minus 14"to allow for 2"mulch topdressing and 12" of topsoil. 2. Eradicate any surface vegetation rooted in the subgrade prior to subgrade preparation. Rotovate all compacted subgrades as noted to a depth of 6"to promote proper drainage for plant growth. Remove subsurface soil lumps, rocks, and debris larger that 2"from all areas and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. Float or drag subgrades to produce smooth, uniform surfaces. • 3. Contractor shall verify that subgrades are completed before commencement of planting. All areas shall be graded such that subgrade shall be flush with subgrade of all adjacent areas except as noted. All areas shall allow for topsoil and mulch as specified herein. 4. Install irrigation mainline at completion of subgrade preparation in shrub areas. B. Bed Establishment: 1. Spread planting soil mix to a depth 12 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. 2. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. C. Shrubs: 1. Set shrubs plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball 1 inch above adjacent finish • grades. 2. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant. If container stock is rootbound,slash roots vertically with a sharp knife along outside of ball in three places minimum before planting. 3. Soak rootballs which have dried significantly before planting; prune broken roots 1/2"or more in diameter cleanly. 4. Place topsoil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled,water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of topsoil mix. 5. Provide positive drainage away from finish grade at plant crowns, after planting and settling, at no greater than 1/4" per foot, unless otherwise specified. 6. Notify Landscape Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in shrub pits. 7. Apply fertilizer topdressing (7-8-9)at manufacturer's recommended rate. 8. Plant at any time plant materials is available and weather conditions are consistent with good • horticultural practice. 9. Mineral Mulching: Apply 2-inch average thickness of mineral mulch. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems. 02373.00 02930-3. 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 02930 PLANTING D. Shrub Pruning: Prune,thin, and shape shrubs according to standard horticultural practice. Prune shrubs to retain natural character. Shrub sizes indicated are sizes after pruning. E. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations,operations by other contractors and trades, ,.3 and others. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged exterior planting. F. Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 3.3 PLANT ESTABLISHMENT A. Not less than twelve weeks nor more than twenty-four weeks after initial planting, apply second application of 7-8-9 fertilizer to all plantings, including trees, shrubs and groundcover. B. Review time of actual application with Landscape Architect in the event seasonal changes may require a certain delay. -I END OF SECTION 1;e• • • 02373.00 02930-4 01/28/03 -I RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cast-in-place concrete. 2. Concrete accessories. 3. Formwork, shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 4. Concrete reinforcement. 5. Concrete Sealer. B. - Related Sections: 1. 07920-Joint Sealants: Expansion joint fillers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions,weather,test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Steel Reinforcement Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement" Include material, grade, bar schedules,stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. • Indicate embedded items, supporting, and spacing devices. 2. Slab Layouts: Dimension locations of control, expansion, and construction joints. Relate to building grid lines. 3. Formwork: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. Design and engineering of formwork are Contractor's responsibility. D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Mix Designs: Prior to concrete work, submit mix designs for approval. 2. Test Results: Submit test results per ASTM C311 performed less than 6 months prior to use for approval by Architect. 3. Certifications: Submit mill certificates for cement and aggregates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. • PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous,true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials for concrete which will be concealed from view in the completed Work. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels,suitable for concrete forms,complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows for concrete scheduled to be exposed to view in the completed Work: a. Structural 1, B-B Plyform, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed. • 02373.00 03300-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON • SECTION 03300 CONCRETE B. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. C. Form-Release Agent Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties -- designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60,deformed. B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. C. Bar-Supports: Bolsters, chairs,spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice"from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement ASTM C150, normal-Type 1 Portland, grey color. • B. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F; loss on ignition (LOI) not to exceed 1 percent. Use fly ash from one single source for the whole Project. C. Normal Weight Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33; Class severe weathering region, but not less than 3S. D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air-Entrainment: ASTM C 260; One of the following, or approved: 1. "Micro-Air';or"MBVR", Master Builders Inc. 2. "Air Mix"; Euclid Chemical Co. C. Water Reducer Normal: ASTM C 494,Type A; One of the following, or approved: 1. "Pozzolith/Polyheed"; Master Builders Inc. 2. "Eucon WR 75"; Euclid Chemical Co. D. High Range Water Reducer(Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494,Type F or G, second or third generation type. Shall be batch plant added,extend plasticity time, reduce water 20 to 30 percent. Provide one of the following, or approved: 1. "Rheobuild"; Master Builders Inc. 2. "Eucon 37"; Euclid Chemical Co. E. Accelerator: ASTM C 494, Type C or E, non-corrosive, non-chloride. Provide one of the following, or .� approved: 1. "Pozzutech 20"; Master Builders. 2. "Accelgard 90"; Euclid Chemical Co. F. Set Retarder: ASTM C494, Type B. 02373.00 03300-2 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 I CONCRETE 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Under Slab Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745 Class B; one of the following: 1. "Stego Wrap"by Stego Industries, LLC(877/464-7834). 2. "Vapor Block 10"by Raven Industries(800/635-3456). 3. "Moistop Ultra"by Fortifiber(800/773-4777). B. Bonding Agent Two component 100%solids epoxy adhesive; 1400 psi shear bond strength to concrete; Sonnebom"Sonobond,"Master Builders Inc. "Brutem 17,"Euclid Chemical Co. "Euco 452MV, or approved. C. Non-Shrink Grouts: ASTM C1107, Grade B; non-shrink non-catalyzed natural aggregate grout; • minimum compressive strength of 7000 PSI at 28 days;25 to 30 second flow when tested in accordance with ASTM C939 at 45 to 90 degrees F; cement gray in color; Master Builders Inc. "Masterfow 928," Euclid Chemical Co."HiFlow Grout,"or approved. D. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces when applied to forms or form liners. E. Preformed Joint Fillers: ASTM D1751;The Burke Company"Fiber Expansion Joint", or approved. At joint locations to receive sealant use Burke"Joint Cap", or approved, to form recess and bond break • for sealant installation. F. Curing Materials: ' 1. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182,Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,weighing approximately 9 oz./sq.yd. dry. 2. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet F 3. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309,Type 1, Class B. G. Penetrating Floor Sealer: Chemically reactive,waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. Provide one of the following: • 1. Ashford Formula; Curecrete Chemical Co., Inc. 2. Seal Hard; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. • H. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. One of the following, or approved: • 1. "Sonoflex Canefiber"; Sonnebom. 2. "Fiber Expansion Joint';The Burke Company' 2.6 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. i 1. Cement Binder. ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer. Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded,washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109. 5. Pr.oducts: One of the following: a. K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete;Ardex, Inc. b. Levelex Underlayment; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. c. Ultra/Plan MB; Mapei Corporation. d. Self Leveling Underlayment"SLU"; Raeco, Inc. B. Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch. 1. Cement Binder. ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 02373.00 03300-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CONCRETE 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109. • 5. Products: One of the following: a. SD-T Self-Leveling Self-Drying Concrete Topping;Ardex Inc. b. Levelex HS Overlayment; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. z 2.7 CONCRETE MIX A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix YA or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. B. Cementitious Materials: Provide percentage replacement of standard protland cement-only mix, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: C. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. D. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 2 to 4 percent, unless otherwise indicated. E. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floors. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent. F. Admixtures: 1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture(superplasticizer)in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. All concrete placed in ambient temperatures from 40 degrees F to 20 degrees F, and all slab concrete placed in ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F, shall contain an accelerator at the manufacturer's required dosage. 4. All concrete placed in ambient temperatures of 90 degrees F or above, shall contain a set �I retarder at the manufacturer's required dosage. G. Provide 28 day compressive strengths as indicated on Drawings. Where not indicated, provide minimum 3000 psi compressive strength. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information. 2.9 REINFORCEMENT FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice." PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated,within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual. • 02373.00 03300-4 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION • RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CONCRETE D. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips,wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. E. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. F. Verify lines, levels, and measurement before proceeding with formwork. Align form joints. G. Use form coating on forms in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Verify that form coatings will not affect the bond of subsequent concrete surface treatments. H. Coordinate with work of other Sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts. 3.2 VAPOR RETARDER A. Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions under all interior slabs-on-grade. B. Lap and seal all seams a minimum of 6 inches, seal around all penetrations, lap and seal against foundation walls and footings with manufacturer's recommended sealing tape. • 3.3 REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice"for placing reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale; earth, ice, and other foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. i Lap edges and ends.of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. • F. Provide laps and concrete cover as indicated in the Drawings. G. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated. 1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete. bonding to one side of joint. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved by Architect. C. In accordance with ACI 30, deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 02373.00 03300-5 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CONCRETE 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. • E. Bonding Agent Mix thoroughly and apply strictly in accord with the manufacturer's instructions; do not use when ambient temperature is below 45 degrees F. Place concrete in contact immediately while bonding agent is still tacky. 3.5 SLAB JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Expansion Joints: 1. Place expansion joints where exterior slabs abut concrete walls, the building perimeter, and other fixed objects abutting or within the slab area. At exterior sidewalks, place expansion joints at maximum 20 foot intervals unless otherwise indicated. 2. Place perpendicular to longitudinal axis of wall and curbs. 3. Form expansion joints with joint filler. Recess joint filler 1/2 inch below finished concrete surface to receive sealant specified in Section 07920. 4. Tool expansion joints to 1/4 inch radius. C. Control Joints: 1. Make joints straight; perpendicular or parallel to building lines and slab edges, as appropriate. 2. Control joints shall be saw cut, formed by prefabricated insert joints, or tooled a Contractor's option. 3. Radius tooled control joints to match expansion joints. 4. Control joints shall penetrate the slab a minimum of 1/4 the thickness of the slab and shall be 3/16 inch in width minimum; 1/4 inch width in sidewalks. 5. Space control joints at the locations indicated, except when not indicated locate in at 32 times the slab thickness. At exterior sidewalks, place control joints at maximum 20 foot intervals. :I 6. Align joints with column lines when ever possible. Joints shall form rectangular panels with the by long side less than 1-1/2 times the length of the short side. Provide circular or diamond shaped joint lines around columns. Locate control joints at reentrant corners. Coordinate with placement of joints in tile surfaces. D. Construction Joints: Place at either expansion or control joint locations for slab on grade construction. 3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective - areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch in height. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed _ surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work. 1. Apply bonding agent where required. 02373.00 03300-6 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CONCRETE B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings: Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing as•follows: 1. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover,water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width,with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor coverings. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.9 FLOOR SEALERS A. Penetrating Floor Sealers: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor seal treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. 2. Apply sealer as soon as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; re-wet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner. 02373.00 03300-7 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON 3 SECTION 03300 CONCRETE 3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar. Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air - bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets,fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. >� 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that,when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match " adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, . mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas,except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. ,.Y 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top.of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 02373.00 - 03300-8 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CONCRETE 3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1 R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish,apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system C. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps,and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. D. Tolerances: Provide floor tolerances as follows,when measured in accordance with ASTM El 155. 1. Slabs on Grade to receive thinset flooring and resilient floor covering and exposed to view in the finished work: FF 35, FL 25, over test area; FF 24, FL 17, minimum local value. 2. Slabs on Grade to receive raised flooring : FF 25, FL 20, over test area; FF 17, FL 15, minimum local value. 3. Slabs on Grade under concrete topping,thickset: FF 20, FL 15, over test area; FF 15, FL 10, minimum local value. E. Finish Schedule: 1. Full Trowel finish interior floor slab surfaces, unless specified otherwise. 2. Light steel trowel finish interior floor slab surfaces scheduled to receive tile, terrazzo, or other similar bonded materials. 3. Broom finish exterior slabs, sidewalks, and curbs. 4. Accessible Ramps: Sloped,portion of ramp shall be cast in a separate operation from the adjoining surfaces. Imprint with #9(1-1/2")flattened expanded metal mesh, unless otherwise required for compliance with applicable state and county standards for public sidewalk construction. • 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to'ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu.yd.or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mix,testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143;one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 4. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 5. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days. 02373.00 03300-9 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CONCRETE a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. . C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average'of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive- strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. • E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted.by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION AdJ 02373.00' 03300-10 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 03545 CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling underlayment for interior finish flooring as necessary to meet specified tolerances. 1. Ramps and tapers as necessary to correct levels between dissimilar finishes on concrete slabs. B. Related Sections: 1. 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Slab tolerances. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in their original unopened packages and protect from freezing, direct sun exposure, and exposure to moisture. • 1.4 PROJECT CONDTIONS A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance. B. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application • recommended by manufacturer. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Self-Leveling Underlayment Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in uniform thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109. 2. Aggregate: Well-graded,washed gravel or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required. 3. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F. 4. Provide one of the following: a. K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete;Ardex, Inc. b. Levelex Underlayment; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. c. Ultra/Plan MB; Mapei Corporation. d. Self Leveling Underlayment"SLU"; Raeco, Inc. B. Self-Leveling Traffic-Bearing Topping: __ 1. Compressive Strength: Not less than 6000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109. 2. Provide the following: a.. SD-T Self-Leveling Self-Drying Concrete Topping;Ardex Inc. C. Trowelable Underlayment: 1. Ardex Inc. "SD-P" Fast-Setting Underlayment. 2. Laticrete International, Inc. "Laticrete 220 Medium Bed Mortar mixed with "Laticrete 3701 Latex Mortar Admix." 3. Tamms Industries Co. "Thinpatch." D. Accessories: Furnish primers, patching compounds, and sand fillers as recommended by the underlayment manufacturer for the conditions of the project. 02373.00 03545-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 03545 CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. With the exception of areas where leveling can be accomplished by use of latex underlayment, as specified in other sections, install cementitious underlayment to concrete slabs as indicated on the Drawings, and as necessary to level slabs or bring substrates to proper elevation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for underlayment application. 1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting)through underlayment according to manufacturer's recommendations. R 2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking. B. Prepare floor substrates for underlayment at all locations where floor does not meet specified tolerance requirements. C. Verify that all areas to be leveled are at or below final design elevation. D. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form- release agents, dust, dirt, grease,oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. E. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation,test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions to achieve required thickness. 1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and intercoat adhesion. 2. At substrate expansion, isolation,and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment. B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. 1. Apply a final layer without aggregate if required to produce smooth surface. 2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. E. Do not install finish flooring over underlayment until after time period recommended by underlayment manufacturer.F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a"hollow"sound when tapped. G. Set screeds, markers, and reference blocks. Set screeds at all construction and control joints to establish weakened plane joints in underlayment. H. Finish to a smooth level surface within tolerances specified for concrete floors. 4� • 02373.00 03545-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 03545 CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT 3.4 CLEANING A. As work proceeds, clean up excess materials, rubbish, and splash. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Self-Leveling Underlayment: Provide at all concrete slabs as necessary to correct slab flatness and levelness tolerances. B. Self-Leveling Traffic-Bearing Topping: Provide at locations indicated to remain exposed and subject to traffic. C. Trowelable Underlayment: Provide at locations such as transitions between dissimilar floor coverings, ramps, and other areas where slopes are indicated. END OF SECTION 1. • • 02373.00 03545-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION • RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes structural steel and grout. B. Related Sections: 1. 09900-Painting: Requirements for paint systems. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. C. Welding certificates. } D. Mill test reports. E. Source quality-control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified, fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category Sbd. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code- -Steel." C. Comply with applicable provisions of AISC's"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: Per structural drawings. B. Channels, Angles,Shapes: Per structural drawings. C. Plate and Bar: Per structural drawings. D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: Per structural drawings. E. Steel Pipe: Per structural drawings. 02373.00 05120-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. i 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS,AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer. SSPC-Paint 25,Type II, iron oxide,zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd. B. Primer. Fabricator's standard lead-and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer. 2.4 GROUT - A. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings—Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design".B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts"for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. • 02373.00 05120-2 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. • 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. 5. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and • standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3,"Power Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Comply with testing and inspection requirements of Part 3,Article"Field Quality Control." B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding. rf PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Examination: Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings—Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." C. Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base plates. Clean bottom surface of base plates. 1. Set base plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts.as required. 2. ' Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base plate before packing with grout. 3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. 02373.00 05120-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 05120 ' STRUCTURAL STEEL D. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3.2 FIELD CONNECTIONS • A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts"for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings—Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. • 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." • C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION • 02373.00 05120-4 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON • SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Composite floor deck. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. C. Product certificates. D. Welding certificates. E. Research/evaluation reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code- -Steel,"and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel." B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those steel deck units tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory"or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. 2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. C. AISI Specifications: Calculate structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. BHP Steel Building Products USA Inc. 2. Nucor Corp.;Vulcraft Div. 3. Verco Manufacturing Co. 02373.00 05310-1 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON • SECTION 05310 • STEEL DECK 2.2 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK A. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs « ; and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No.29, the minimum section properties indicated, and the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel(SS), G60 zinc coating. 2. Profile Depth: Per structural drawings 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: Per structural drawings 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Accessories: Steel deck manufacturer's standard accessory materials, including mechanical fasteners, closure strips, pour stops, and closures for deck. B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1010 through 1020 headed stud type, cold-finished carbon steel,AWS D1.1, Type B,with arc shields. C. Repair Paint Lead-and chromate-free rust-inhibitive primer. PART 3-EXECUTION . f. 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No.29, manufacturer's written instructions,and requirements in this Section. B. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract - side-lap interlocks. C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. D. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to decking. E. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of decking,and support of other work. • F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. • 1. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. G. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. H. Floor Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and 02373.00 05310-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK sides of decking. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of floor deck panels, unless otherwise indicated. I. Repairs and Protection: 1. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality- control testing. 1 B: Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. END OF SECTION • y - • • 02373.00 05310-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior non-load-bearing curtain-wall framing. 2. Gypsum sheathing and building paper. B. Related Sections: • • 1. , 09260-Gypsum Board Assemblies: Interior non-load-bearing metal-stud framing and ceiling- • suspension assemblies. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall height. b. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Curtain-Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of wall height as follows: 1) 1/360: All walls except otherwise noted. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F. 4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows: a. Upward and downward movement of 3/4 inch. B. Design exterior non-load-bearing curtain-wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials. C. Provide framing of depth indicated on the Drawings. Where stud gage is indicated on the Drawings, provide studs of indicated or heavier gage;where stud spacing is indicated on the Drawings, provide additional studs or closer spacing as necessary to meet design requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings,sizes,thicknesses,and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details,and attachment to adjoining Work. 1. Shop drawings shall be sealed by the designing engineer. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certification: Submit written certification that the framing system has been designed to meet the . specified performance requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. AISI Specifications: Comply with current edition of AISI's"Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members"for calculating structural characteristics of cold-formed metal framing. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code— Steel,"and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel." C. Use only welders certified by the Washington Association of Building Officials. 02373.00 • 05400-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON : . • SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING D. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with the AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Members". E. Structural Design: Structural Design of the framing system shall be by a structural engineer licensed a to practice in the State of Washington. F. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Framing system shall meet the requirements of Uniform Building Code. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING CURTAIN-WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths and sizes indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0538 inch (16 gage). 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches minimum. 3. Finish: G90 zinc coated finish in accordance with ASTM C653. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched,with unstiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0538 inch (16 gage). 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches minimum. 3. Finish: G90 zinc coated finish in accordance with ASTM C653. C. Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads. 2.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. 1. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 2. Product: Provide"Dens-Glass Gold"by Georgia-Pacific Corp. . 2.3 ANCHORS, CLIPS,AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123. B. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials,with capability to sustain,without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Powder-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials,with capability to sustain,without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. E. Sheathing Fasteners: Steel drill screws, ASTM C 954, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion- protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Building Paper. Proprietary building wrap with flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84. Provide the following: 02373.00 05400-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 1. 'Tyvek Commercialwrap"; DuPont Company. • B. Sheathing Tape: Henry Bakor"Blueskin SA"; minimum nine inch wide strips,40 mils thick. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASTM C 1007, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line,and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with - ,. fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. • E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. F. Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings,that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb,and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. I. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. J. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as indicated on drawings. K. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. L. Install horizontal bridging in curtain-wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 54 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. a. Install solid blocking at every other stud. 2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel,welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 02373.00 05400-3 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING • M. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers,web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors,fasteners, and stud girts,to provide a complete and stable curtain-wall- . framing system. N. Construct corners with a minimum of 3 studs per corner. • 'I O. Provide framing as required to form solid backing for all edges of gypsum sheathing, and trim accessories. P. Touch-up field welds and scratched or damaged galvanizing with zinc-based solder in accordance with requirements of ASTM A780. • s,b Q. Attach cross studs or furring channels to studs for attachment of wall mounted items. R. Install framing between studs for attachment of electrical boxes and other mechanical and electrical items. 3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION • A. General: Install gypsum sheathing to comply with GA-253 and manufacturer's written instructions. B.. Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of the work; fit tightly against abutting construction, except provide a 3/8-inch setback where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. C. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint sealant installation so these materials are installed in the sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed exterior wall assembly. D. Apply fasteners so screw heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing. E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with sheathing;cut and space edges to match spacing of structural support elements. F. Tape all andpenetrations with sheathingtape per manufacturer's recommendations. P joints 1. Prime all substrates with recommended primer prior to application. 2. Roll tape into substrate with recommended roller in accordance with manufacturers instructions. • Hand pressure application not permitted. G. Building Paper Application: Cover sheathing with building paper as follows: 1. Cut back 1/2 inch on each side of break in supporting members at expansion-or control joint locations. 2. Apply to comply with manufacturers written installation instructions. 3. Apply to cover vertical flashing with 4-inch overlap. • • END OF SECTION • • 02373.00 • 05400-4 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.1 SUMMARY '; A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 3. Corner guards. • B. Related Sections: 1. 09900-Painting: Field painting of shop primed metal fabrications. 2. 10705-Fixed Sunscreens: Sunscreen support assembly. 1.2 SUBMITTALS • A. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation; indicate materials, thicknesses, dimensions, methods of reinforcement and embedment,attachments,shop finishes, provisions for work of other trades, and other pertinent information as requested by Architect. Indicate locations of holes or lifting lugs required for hot dipped galvanizing. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Experienced and regularly engaged in producing metal fabrications of the type specified; must employ only skilled personnel using proper equipment to produce work. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Carbon Steel: 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36. 2. Sheet ASTM A366. 3. Pipe: ASTM A53, seamless,Type S, plain end; schedule 40 unless indicated otherwise. 4. Tubing: ASTM A500 or A501, seamless. 5. Sheet Furniture Steel: American open-hearth sheet steel,furniture quality, free from scale, rust pitting or other defects affecting appearance. 6. Checker Plate: Standard raised pattern checker plate, 3/16 inch thick, unless otherwise noted or specified. B. Fasteners: Types as indicated, specified, or required for the assembly and installation of fabricated items. 1. Bolts: ASTM A307, unless indicated otherwise; include nuts and plain harden washers. 2. Drilled-In Concrete Anchors: Ramset'Trubolt Stud Anchor," Hilti Fastening Systems"Kwikbolt," or approved, unless indicated otherwise. C. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated,fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining,without failure,the load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488,conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Threaded or wedge type;galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts,washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153. D. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. E. Exterior Primers: 1. Galvanized Steel: Epoxy Primer One of the following; color similar to finish coat. a. "Series N27 Typoxy,"by Tnemec. b. "Carboline 888,"by Carboline Company 02373.00 05500-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 2. Ferrous Metal: Organic Zinc Rich Primer. One of the following, unless approved otherwise. a. "Series 90-97 Tneme-Zinc"by Tnemec. b. "Carboline 859"by Carboline Co. F. Non-Shrink Grout: Master Builder's"Master Flow 713,"Sonneborn "Sonogrout,"or approved. G. Miscellaneous Materials: Furnish incidental accessory materials, tools, and equipment as necessary for fabrication and installation of miscellaneous metal items as indicated on the Drawings. 2.2 PREFABRICATED COMPONENTS A. Handrail Brackets: Julius Blum &Company"No. 306", or approved. Standard handrail brackets fabricated to receive railing. Provide complete with screws and fastenings required for installation. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate as follows, unless specified or indicated otherwise. 1. Verify all dimensions and fabricate to detail with accurate sizes and shapes, straight lines, smooth curves, and sharp angles. 2. Welds shall have sufficient strength to withstand the loads applied. 3. For items exposed to view or subject to contact, grind welds smooth and level with adjacent surfaces; remove all burrs from cut edges. 4. Bend curved sections to a smooth radius free from buckles and twists. 5. Fabrications in exterior locations shall be fabricated to shed water. , B. Fabrication of Elements to Receive Galvanized Coatings: 1. Fabricate in accordance with the applicable requirements of ASTM A143,A384, and A385. 2. Remove welding slag and burrs prior to galvanizing. 3. Avoid fabrication techniques which could cause distortion or embrittlement of the steel. 2.4 SHOP FINISHES A. Hot Dip Galvanizing: • 1. Steel fabrications shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Bolts, nuts,washers, and other hardware shall be galvanized in accordance with A153. 2. Surface Finish: The galvanized coatings shall be continuous, firmly adhered, smooth, and free from defects. 3. Locations: Provide hot dip galvanizing for all metal fabrications in exterior or moist conditions, unless otherwise indicated.B. Exterior Primed Finishes: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the finish coat manufacturer's recommendations, and as specified below. 2. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPS SP-1; commercial blast ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP6. 3. Spray apply primers in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Apply primers to receive field application of finish coats as specified in Section 09900. 4. Except for surfaces indicated to be field welded, coat all surfaces of fabrication,whether or not exposed to view in installed position. 5. Maintain at least one coat of primer at all times during installation. Immediately patch damaged coatings. 6. Finish coat shall be free of dirt, flow lines, sags, blisters, pinholes, and other surface imperfections. 7. Locations: Provide at all exterior metal fabrication exposed to view, items located in semi- protected areas such as parking garages, and other fabrications as scheduled. Do not prime surfaces to be field welded. 02373.00 05500-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 2.5 PROTECTION A. For metal in contact with concrete, masonry, and other dissimilar materials, provide contact surfaces with coating of an approved zinc-chromate primer in manner to obtain not less than mil dry film thickness. ! p PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION • A. Install metal fabrications in accurate locations shown. Unless indicated otherwise, fabrications shall be installed plumb and level. . B. Provide all anchorage devices as indicated and required for a secure installation. C. Touch-up all surfaces damaged during installation. Patch all welds and damage marks with matching primer. END OF SECTION • • 02373.00 05500-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel pipe and tube handrails. B. Related Sections: 1. 05081 -High Performance Architectural Coatings: Special clear powder coat finish. 2. 05511 -Metal Stairs: For steel pipe handrails and railings included with metal stairs. 3. 05720-Ornamental Railings: For ornamental metal handrails and railings fabricated from custom components. 4. 09900-Painting. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 Ibf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. B. Thermal Movements: Provide handrails and railings that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change(range)in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F,ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. • C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of handrails and railings. Include plans, elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other Work. 1. For installed handrails and railings indicated to comply with design loads, include certification signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation that design meets performance requirements. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify handrail and railing dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 02373.00 05521-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for handrails and railings. Furnish setting drawings,templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Schedule installation so handrails and railings are mounted only on completed walls. Do not support temporarily by any means that does not satisfy structural performance requirements. ,.� PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. B. Steel and Iron: Provide steel and iron in the form indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53;finish,type, and weight class as follows: a. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. b. Type F,or Type S, Grade A, standard weight(Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. C. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WELDING MATERIALS, FASTENERS,AND ANCHORS A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and • compatibility in fabricated items. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Handrails and Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, • grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring handrails and railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. 1. For steel handrails, railings, and fittings, use plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. 2.3 PAINT A. Bituminous Paint Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.4 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed,factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 02373.00 05521-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 2.5 FABRICATION _ A. General: Fabricate handrails and railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing,details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required .to support structural loads. B. Assemble handrails and railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation..Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling,twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components. D. Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings for connecting members by welding. Cope components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide close fit,or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld connections continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections,finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. E. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings,and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by handrails and railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. G. For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, and steel plate forming bottom closure. H. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges. I. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns. 2.6 STEEL FINISHES A. Galvanized Handrails and Railings: Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron handrails and railings to comply with ASTM A 123. Hot-dip galvanize hardware for exterior steel and iron handrails and railings to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 2. Fqr galvanized handrails and railings,provide galvanized fittings, brackets,fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. 3. Locations:All exterior railings. B. Refer to Section 09900 for painted finish requirements. 02373.00 05521-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON �g SECTION 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS • PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting; drilling,and fitting required to install handrails and railings. Set handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free from rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrail and railing components that have been coated or • finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. C. Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space '. posts at interval indicated, but not less than that required by structural loads. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrails and railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in"Fabrication"Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 1. Galvanized Weld Repair: Repair field welded galvanized surfaces with zinc-based solder in accordance with ASTM A 780. B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post. 3.3 ANCHORING POSTS A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions: 1. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement. B. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 1/8-inch build-up, sloped away from post. 3.4 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. . C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 02373.00 05521-4 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS • 4. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies,fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of handrails and railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at the time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION • • 02373.00 05521-5 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON Su 0 • ROUGHCT CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood sheathing. 2. Blocking, nailers, and curbing. 3. Plywood terminal back boards. • 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit complete technical and product data on the following: 1. Preservative and fire retardant wood treatments. 2. 'Framing and sheathing accessories. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Work shall conform to the requirements of the currently enforced Uniform Building Code, as adopted by the jurisdiction. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEATHING A. Wood Structural Panels: 1. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated. B. Plywood Wall Sheathing: As indicated on drawings. C. Plywood Roof Sheathing: As indicated on drawings. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Lumber shall be manufactured in accordance with PS 20, and shall be stamped and graded in accordance with WWPA,WCLB, or NLGA grading rules. B. Moisture Content: Kiln dried to 19%maximum moisture content, except for material whose least dimension is 4 inches thick or greater. C. Species: Hem-Fir, Spruce-Pine-Fir(SPF), or Douglas Fir Larch, unless indicated or specified otherwise. 2.3 PANEL MATERIALS • A. Terminal Backboards:APA AC grade exterior,fire retardant treated. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Hot-dipped galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity, and treated wood locations. 2. Use ring shank nails at roof sheathing. 3. Screws: Self tapping; countersunk or low profile head. B. Metal Connectors: Simpson Company, Silver Metal Products, Inc, or approved;types as indicated on the Drawings. C. Construction Adhesive: Product meeting the requirements of APA specification AFG-01. D. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers. 02373.00 06100-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2.5 WOOD TREATMENT A. Wood Preservative(Pressure Treatment): 1. Preservative treat all exterior lumber, including roofing nailers, curbs and other wood in contact with concrete, masonry, and moist conditions. 2. For above ground use, use AWPA Treatment C-2 using CCA waterbome preservative with 0.25 pounds per cubic foot of wood retention. 3. For ground contract use, use AWPA Treatment C-22 using CCA waterbome preservative with 0.40 pounds per cubic foot of wood retention. 4. Treated lumber shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 19%; treated plywood shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 15%. 5. Treated lumber shall bear the quality stamp of an inspection agency approved by the jurisdictional code authorities. B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Fire retardant treat interior plywood, and other wood as indicated or specified. Provide exterior fireproofing at rooftop blocking, nailers, curbs, sheathing, and other locations subject to wetting during construction operations. 2. Pressure treat lumber in accordance with AWPA C-20 and plywood in accordance with AWPA C- 27. 3. Treated lumber shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 19%; treated plywood shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 15%. 4. All fire retardant treated wood shall bear a UL"FR-S" label, or a label from an approved inspection agency certifying that the material has a flame spread rating no higher than 25 with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Exterior fire retardant treated wood shall be treated by means of a system which has been demonstrated to exhibit no increase in fire hazard classification in accordance with ASTM E84 test after having been subjected to accelerated weather conditioning in accordance with ASTM D2898. 5. Approved Products: a Interior Fireproofing: Clear finish product, Hickson Corporation"Dricon," Hoover Treated Wood Products"Pyro-guard,"or Osmose Wood Preserving Co. of America, Inc. "Flame Proof LHC." b. Exterior Fireproofing: Hoover Treated Wood Products"Exterior Fire-X." PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines,with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 2. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule,"and Table 23-II-B-2, 'Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing Nailing Schedule,"in the Uniform Building Code. C. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's"Manual for Wood Frame Construction,"unless otherwise indicated. D. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential&Commercial,"for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. 02373.00 06100-2 01/28/03 fl RENTON PAVILION -' RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY i F F. Fastening Methods: 1. Sheathing: Nail to wood framing. • 3.2 BLOCKING, NAILERS,AND CURBS A. Provide blocking, nailers, and curbs for sheathing, roof construction, metal flashing, and other construction as indicated, and as necessary for firm support. B. Blocking: Install wood blocking to receive mechanical fasteners for support of plumbing and electrical fixtures and equipment, cabinets, door stop plates,wood base,wainscots, coat hooks,toilet and bath accessories, kitchen equipment, and all other wall and ceiling mounted components. C. Screw fasten wood components to metal framing and support elements. 3.3 PLYWOOD TERMINAL BACKBOARDS A. Provide a fire retardant treated plywood terminal backboard for telephone systems where indicated on the drawings. _ B. Mechanically apply directly over gypsum backing board. END OF SECTION • • • • • • 02373.00 06100-3 . . 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 06150 WOOD DECKING { I � PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-sawn decking. B. Related Sections: 1. 09900-Painting: Exposed wood deck finish. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Decking Standard: Comply with AITC 112,"Standard for Tongue-and-Groove Heavy Timber Roof Decking." 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Schedule delivery of wood decking to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL A. General: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard,"and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. • B. Grade Stamps: Factory mark with grade stamp of inspection agency on surfaces that will not be t exposed to view. C. Moisture Content Provide wood decking with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. 2.2 SOLID-SAWN WOOD DECKING A. Wood Species: Douglas fir-larch or Douglas fir-larch (North), Hem-fir or hem-fir(North). B. Decking Nominal Size: 3x6. C. Decking Grade: Commercial Decking or Commercial Dex. D. Surface and Edge Pattern: Smooth surface,Vee grooved. 2.3 FASTENERS AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Fastener Material: Hot-dip galvanized or Stainless steel. B. Sealant Latex sealant compatible with substrates. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate decking in lengths for lay-up. 02373.00 06150-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION 0 RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 06150 WOOD DECKING PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION • Wood Decking: Install to comply with referenced deckingstandard. A. �Solid-Sawng p y B. Apply joint sealant to seal roof decking at exterior walls at the following locations: 1. Between decking and supports located at exterior walls. 2. Between decking and exterior walls that butt against underside of decking. 3. Between tongues and grooves of decking over exterior walls and supports at exterior walls. C. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing.erection. Replace damaged decking if repairs are not approved by Architect. D. Provide temporary waterproof covering to protect exposed decking before applying roofing. END OF SECTION • II • 02373.00 06150-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood standing and running trim. B. Related Sections: 1. 09900-Painting: Field applied finish coatings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS • A. Samples: 1. Wood with Transparent Finish: Submit a minimum of 3- 12 inch long samples. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ti A. Conform to AWI Custom grade standards unless specified or indicated otherwise. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver wood materials to the building until"wet'work such as gypsum wallboard work has been completed. B. Store materials indoors in ventilated area with a minimum temperature of 60 degrees F., and a maximum humidity of 55%. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard,"for lumber and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. B. Exterior Standing and Running Trim: '! 1. Species and Grade: Smooth-textured,clear cedar. C. Interior Standing and Running Trim: 1. Medium Density Fiberboard(MDF): ANSI A208.2 Class MD a. Provide formaldehyde-free"Medite II"as manufactured by Sierra Pine. 2.2 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate all trim to the shapes indicated. B. Tolerances for overall assembly dimensions shall be within 1/32 of an inch. C. Shop fit and assemble to the greatest extent possible. D. Back or kerf cut all trim greater than 2 inch in width,except terminate before exposed ends. E. Finishing: Refer to Section 09900. 02373.00 06400-1 . 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where required for alignment. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts. B. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber-available. Stagger joints in adjacent and related trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners. • C. Jointing: Make all joints to conceal shrinkage; miter all exterior corners;cope all interior corners, miter or scarf all end-to-end install all trimpieces as longaspossible,jointingonlywhere solid support PP joints; is obtained. Make no joints closer than 4 feet to corners. D. Fastening: 1. Install all items straight,true, level, plumb, and firmly anchored in place;where blocking or backing is required, coordinate as necessary with other trades to ensure placement of all required backing and blocking in a timely manner. 2. Fasten trim with finish nails or screws of proper dimension to hold the member firmly in place without splitting the wood. 3. On exposed finish work, set all nails and screws and putty. END OF SECTION • 02373.00 06400-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07162 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL __f 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Chemically reactive capillary waterproofing, for negative side application to existing and cast-in-place concrete foundation walls. B. Related Selection: 1. 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Surface finishes. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION • A. Surface applied waterproofing material which waterproofs by crystalline growth through the capillary voids of the concrete. 1.3 SUBMITTALS it A..__.Product Literature: Complete product literature and application instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The installation shall be under the direct supervision of the manufacturer's representative. 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A. As recommended by the waterproofing manufacturer. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Kryton International. 2. Xypex Chemical Corporation. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Proprietary field mixed cementitious waterproofing slurry system;one of the following: 1. "Krystol T2" by, Vancouver, B.C. (800/267-8280). 2. "Xypex Concentrate"by Xypex Chemical Corporation, Richmond, B.C. (604/273-5265). B. Patching Compound: Cementitious waterproofing and repair mortar for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections;with properties. C. Water: Potable. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates,with Applicator present,where waterproofing is to be applied. Examine concrete for visible structural defects, cracks larger than .01 inch, honeycomb, and other unacceptable surface conditions. 1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Notify Architect in writing of active leaks or structural defects that would affect system . performance. B. Report discrepancies to the Architect. 02373.00 07162-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION • RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07162 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING C. Commencement of work shall constitute Contractor acceptance of substrate conditions. -� 3.2 PREPARATION A. Repair damaged or unsatisfactory concrete or masonry according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Rout cracks and other defects to sound concrete. Patch tie holes, faulty construction joints, honeycombed areas, and routed cracks with patching mortar. C. Surface Preparation: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to remove • efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, mortar spatter,grease, oils, curing compounds, coatings, and form- release agents to ensure that waterproofing bonds to concrete surfaces. 1. Clean concrete surfaces according to ASTM D 4258. a. Prepare existing concrete surfaces by mechanical abrading or abrasive-blast cleaning according to ASTM D 4259. - 2. Concrete Joints: Clean reveals according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. D. Rinse all surfaces to be waterproofed with water the day prior to application of waterproofing. 3.3 APPLICATION A: General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions for application. 1. Dampen surface with water and maintain damp condition until applying waterproofing. 2. Apply waterproofing to negative-side surfaces. 3. Number of Coats: One. B. Final Coat Finish: Smooth. • C. Moist-cure.waterproofing for three days immediately after application has set, followed by two days of air drying as recommended in writing by manufacturer. D. Waterproofing Treatment Extensions: Extend waterproofing treatment as follows: 1. Onto columns integral with treated walls. 2. Onto interior nontreated walls intersecting exterior treated walls, for a distance of 24 inches. END OF SECTION • • 02373.00 07162-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concealed building insulation. B. Related Sections: 1. 07610-Sheet Metal Roofing: For roofing insulation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each type of insulation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with.appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Location: Concealed building insulation. B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578,Type VI, 1.80 lb/cu.ft., with maximum flame- spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively. 1. Location: Underslab and slab perimeter insulation. C. Foil-Faced Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Dow"Thermax." 1. Location: Walls,where indicated. D. Spray Foam Urethane: Two-component polyurethane sprayed and foamed in place. 1. Product As manufactured by FOMO Products, Inc. (800/321-5585), or approved. 2. Location: Steel pipes,where indicated. 02373.00 07210-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION _ A. Verify adjacent materials are secure, properly spaced, dry, and ready to receive installation. B. Verify mechanical and electrical services within spaces to insulated have been installed and tested. 3.2 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A.. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. F. Install batt insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Install perimeter insulation on vertical surfaces by setting units in adhesive. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line. 2. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection board set in adhesive. C. Protect top surface of perimeter underlab insulation from damage during concrete work by applying protection board. D. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. E. Install insulation without gaps or voids. F. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 02373.00 07210-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07412 METAL WALL PANELS • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: • 1. Metal wall panels. B. Related Sections: 1. 05400-Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Metal studs, bracing, anchorage, and framing accessories. 2. 07620-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal flashing and trim not part of this Work. 3. 07920-Joint Sealants: Field-applied sealants. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide manufactured wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding design wind loads indicated under in-service conditions with deflection no greater than the following, in accordance with ASTM E 330. 1. Maximum Deflection: 1/180 of the span. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's product specifications, standard details,certified product test results, and general recommendations,as applicable to materials and finishes for each component and for total panel assemblies. • B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of panels, details of corner conditions,joints, panel profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factory-and field- assembled work. C. Samples for Verification: Provide sample panels 12 inches long by actual panel width, in the profile, style, color, and texture indicated. Include clips, caps, battens,fasteners, closures,and other exposed panel accessories. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed metal wall panel projects similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting wall panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. B. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store panels to ensure dryness. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS • A. Field Measurements: Verify location of structural members and openings in substrates by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Products The design for metal wall panels is as follows: 1. MP-1: IMSA"Prestige 12"concealed fasteners. 02373.00 07412-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION • RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07412 METAL WALL PANELS 2. MP-2: IMSA"Nu-Wave Corrugated"exposed fasteners. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering comparable products may be incorporated into the Work upon approval. 2.2 METALS AND FINISHES A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755 and the following requirements: 1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ-55 coating, Grade 40; structural quality. 2. Thickness: As required to meet performance criteria, but not less than 22 gage. 3. Surface: Smooth,flat, mill finish. 4. Exposed Finish: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat,fluoropolymer system composed of not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight with a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.9 mil and 30 percent reflective gloss when tested according to ASTM D 523. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 5. Prime Coat for Concealed Surfaces: Apply pretreatment and white or light-colored, baked-on polyester primer coat;with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, EPDM or neoprene sealing washer, end-welded studs, designed to withstand design loads. 1. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. B. Accessories: Unless otherwise specified,provide components required for a complete wall panel assembly including trim,copings,fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, seam covers, flashings, louvers, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match materials and finishes of panels. 1. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, self-extinguishing, expanded, cellular, rubber or cross-linked, polyolefin-foam flexible closure strips. Cut or premold to match configuration of panels. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. 2. Joint Sealant: One-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone-rubber sealant as recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat, unless otherwise indicated. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Apply bituminous coating or other permanent separation materials on concealed panel surfaces where panels would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials that are noncompatible or could result in.corrosion or deterioration of either materials or finishes. C. Fabricate panel joints with captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. 02373.00 07412-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07412 METAL WALL PANELS PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements indicated for conditions affecting performance of metal panel walls. 1. Panel Supports and Anchorage: Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, and other secondary structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed to meet requirements of panel manufacturer. 2. Do not proceed with wall panel installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate metal wall panels with rain drainage work;flashing; trim; and construction of roofing, parapets., walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. B. Promptly remove protective film, if any,from exposed surfaces of metal panels. Strip with care to avoid damage to finish. 'i C. Secondary Structural Supports: Install girts, angles, and other secondary structural panel support members and anchorage according to the Light Gage Structural Institute's"Guide Specifications," Section 07410, "Manufactured Roof and Wall Panels." 3.3 PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with panel manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor panels and other components of the Work securely in place,with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Field cutting exterior panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Locate and space exposed fasteners in true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled, uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of neoprene washer. B. Accessories: Install components required for a complete wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units,clips, seam covers, flashings, louvers, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. C. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets,joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated,types recommended by panel manufacturer. 1. Install weatherseal to prevent air and moisture penetration. Flash and seal panels at ends and intersections with other materials with rubber, neoprene, or other closures to exclude weather. 2. Seal panel end laps with a bead of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Separate dissimilar metals by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals. E. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on level, plumb,and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Damaged Units: Replace panels and other components of the Work that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as soon as each panel is installed. On completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 02373.00 07412-3 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON • • SECTION 07552 SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING . • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: SBS-modified bituminous membrane roofing system. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a roofing system and that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide"for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings. 1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. '/ D. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class B; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form,without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. 1. 20 years after date of substantial completion. • PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER • A. Basis-of-Design Product The design for modified bituminous membrane assemblies is based on Siplast Roofing products. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named products or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Soprema Roofing and Waterproofing, Inc. 2. Malarkey. 02373.00 07552-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07552 SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS —, A. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, SBS-modified asphalt-impregnated and-coated sheet,with glass-fiber-reinforcing mat, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides. 1. Siplast Parabase. B. Interply: ASTM D 6164, Grade S, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. 1. Siplast Paradiene 20. C. Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6164, Grade G, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Siplast Paradiene 30 FR. D. Backer Sheet ASTM D 4601, asphalt-impregnated and-coated, glass-fiber sheet, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides. E. Flashing Sheet SBS-modified polyester reinforced asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified. F. Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM D 312,Type II. • G. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. . 2.3 ACCESSORIES • A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. B. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M,glass-mat,water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4 inch thick. C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major • surfaces. D. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated at crickets, saddles, and tapered areas. E. Cants: Wood fiberboard,ASTM C 208, nominal 4 inches by4 inches by 1-1/2 inches,with 5-inch face. F. Roof Drain Flashing: 2-1/2-to 4-pound sheet of common desilverized pig lead. G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide miscellaneous accessories recommended by roofing system manufacturer. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where roofing is to be installed. Correct substrate surfaces which are unacceptable to `I the installer and to the manufacturer's installation instructions before starting roofing application. 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree insulation cant strips at junctures of roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees. B. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. 02373.00 07552-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07552 SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING 3.3 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's"Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing." B. Base Sheet: Starting at low point of roof, embed in solid moppings of roofing bitumen. Provide 4-inch end lap of each ply. C. Interply: Starting at low point of roof, embed in solid mappings of roofing bitumen. Lap each ply 19 inches over preceding ply, leaving 17 inches exposed. Provide 4-inch end lap of each ply. • D. Cap Sheet: Embed one ply of mineral-surfaced cap sheets into solid mopping of roofing bitumen. E. Coordinate installing roofing system so components of the roofing membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast 1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt with joints and edges sealed. 2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system. 3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. • F. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. 3.4 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer. 2. Backer Sheet Application: Mechanically fasten backer sheet to walls or parapets. Adhere backer sheet over roofing membrane at cants in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt or cold-applied adhesive. 3. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt or in cold-applied adhesive at rate required by roofing system manufacturer. B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 4 inches onto field of roofing membrane. C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing. D. Roof Drains: Set metal flashing in bed of asphalt roofing cement on completed roofing membrane. Cover metal flashing with roofing membrane cap-sheet stripping and extend a minimum of 6 inches beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing membrane. Clamp roofing membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring. 1. Install stripping•according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect 1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. B. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 02373.00 07552-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07552 SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING 3.6 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report,with copies to Architect and Owner. • B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. END OF SECTION • • • • Yr ' I i�y 02373.00 07552-4 01/28/03 H • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: On-site, roll-formed sheet standing-seam metal roofing system and associated flashing and trim. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. 07620-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. For fasciae, flashings and other sheet metal work not part of sheet metal roofing. 2. 07920-Joint Sealants: For field-applied sheet metal roofing sealants. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide complete sheet metal roofing system, including, but not limited to, on-site, roll- formed metal roof panels, insulation, cleats, clips, anchors and fasteners, sheet metal flashing and drainage components related to sheet metal roofing,fascia panels, trim, underlayment, and accessories as indicated and as required for a weathertight installation. - =7, B. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing sheet metal roofing assemblies that comply with UL 580 for Class 90 wind-uplift resistance. 1. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of sheet metal roofing work. C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal roofing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change(range)in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation,overstressing of components,failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal roofing thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal roofing that does not allow water infiltration to building interior, with metal flashing lapped to allow moisture to run over and off the material. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal roofing, including plans, elevations, and keyed references to termination points. Distinguish between shop-and field- assembled work. Include the following: 1. Details for forming sheet metal roofing, including seams and dimensions. 2. Details for joining and securing sheet metal roofing, including layout of fasteners, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 4. Details of roof penetrations. 5. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings. 6. Details of special conditions. 7. Details of connections to adjoining work. 8. Details of the following accessory items: a. Flashing and trim. b. Roof curbs. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Sheet Metal Roofing: 12 inches long by actual width, including finished seam. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments. 02373.00 07610-1 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING 2. Trim and Closures: 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Accessories: 12-inch-long Samples for each type of accessory. 1/ D. Roll-Forming Equipment Certificate: Issued by UL for manufacturer's portable roll-forming equipment designed for producing sheet metal roofing. Show expiration date no earlier than two months after scheduled end of sheet metal roofing. E. Qualification Data: For Installer. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive testsperformed byaqualified testing P agency,for sheet metal roofing portable roll-forming equipment. Include reports for structural performance. G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of sheet metal roofing. B. Roll-Formed Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: An authorized representative of roll- formed sheet metal roofing manufacturer for fabrication and installation of units required for this • Project. C. Sheet Metal Roofing Standard: Comply with SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 2. Review flashings, special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal roofing. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal roofing including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable:esheet metal roofing Installer, manufacturer's representative for sheet metal roofing portable roll-forming equipment, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal roofing installation. 4. Examine sheathing conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. 5. Review flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal roofing. 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and testing and inspecting if applicable. 7. Review temporary protection requirements for sheet metal roofing during and after installation. 8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after sheet metal roofing installation. 9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver metal coils, components, and other sheet metal roofing materials so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package sheet metal roofing materials for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect sheet metal roofing materials in a manner to prevent bending,warping, twisting, and surface damage. 02373.00 07610-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07610 • SHEET METAL ROOFING • C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets,covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal coils and sheet metal roofing materials to ensure dryness. Do not store metal coils or sheet metal roofing materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1.6 COORDINATION • A. Coordinate sheet metal roofing with rain drainage work,flashing, trim, and construction of sheathing and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal roofing that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. —'1 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.. c. Cracking, checking, peeling,or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. ( 'B. Special Installer's Warranty: Roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Roofing Installer, in which.Roofing Installer agrees to repair or replace components of custom-fabricated sheet metal roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. . 1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Structural failures. b. Loose parts. c. Wrinkling or buckling. d. Failure to remain weathertight, including uncontrolled water leakage. e. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering, including nonuniformity of color or finish. f. Galvanic action between sheet metal roofing and dissimilar materials. f2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS • fi A. Basis of Design: The design is based on"Bemo-Roof'by BemoUSA Inc. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering comparable products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Morin Corp. 2. Fabral. 2.2 ROOFING SHEET METALS A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; structural quality. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 3. Thickness: 0.0276 inch. 4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements of AAMA 2605. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 02373.00 07610-3 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON • SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING 2.3 INSULATION A. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578 Type II, 1.35-lb/cu.ft. minimum density. 1. Edges: Factory chamfered to provide true butt joints over curvature of wood deck. 2. Acceptable Manufacturer. Insulfoam(206/242-9424), or approved. 2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Field Underlayment; Felt: TM D 22 , ype II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts. B. Perimeter Underlayment; Self- d , ranular-Faced Sheet: ASTM D 1970, 55 mils thick minimum, consisting of glass-fiber-mat reinforcing and SBS-modified asphalt, granule faced, with s release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Acceptable Product "#170 Arctic Seal"by Malarkey Roofing. Li 1 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder,welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing system and as . 4' ' recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing. B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts,and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer head. 2. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets. C. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with .release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. D. Elastomeric Joint Sealant ASTM C 920, of base polymer,type, grade, class, and use classifications required to produce joints in sheet metal roofing that will remain weathertight and as recommended by roll-formed sheet metal roofing manufacturer for installation indicated. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Metal Roofing Accessories: Provide components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim,copings,fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips,flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of sheet metal roofing, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves,fabricated of same metal as sheet metal roofing. 2. Clips: Minimum 0.0625-inch-thick panel clips designed to withstand negative-load requirements, and thermal movement, two fasteners minimum. 3. Bearing Plates: Minimum 6"x6", designed to hold rigid insulation in place and distribute metal roof load, gage as required to meet performance criteria. Provide clip attachment. 4. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 5. . Closures: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell • laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match sheet metal roofing profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. B. Gable Halters: Manufacturers standards extruded aluminum profile designed to support metal panel and flashing at gable ends. 2.7 EQUIPMENT . A. Portable Roll-Forming Equipment Manufacturer's standard UL-certified equipment capable of forming sheet metal roofing in profiles indicated. 02373.00 07610-4 01/28/03 ..r RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07610 • SHEET METAL ROOFING 2.8 FABRICATION A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown and recommendations in SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"that apply to the design, dimensions(pan width and • seam height), geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of installation indicated. Fabricate sheet metal roofing and accessories at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Standing-Seam Roofing: Form standing-seam pans with finished seam height of nominal 2-1/2 inches. B. General: Fabricate roll-formed sheet metal roofing panels to comply with details shown and roll- formed sheet metal roofing manufacturer's written instructions. C. Fabricate sheet metal roofing to allow for expansion in running work sufficient to prevent leakage, damage, and deterioration of the Work. Form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 01. Lay out sheet metal roofing without cross seams. 2. Fold and cleat eaves in the shop. 3. Form and fabricate sheets,seams,strips, cleats,valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral flashings, and other components of metal roofing to profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangements shown and as required for leakproof construction. D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are indicated or required to produce weathertight seams,form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards. E. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals or by fabricator. F. Sheet Metal Accessories: Custom fabricate flashings and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems. • 2. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. 3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 4. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"for application but '; not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. it k 02373.00 07610-5 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON 5.) SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, sheet metal roofing supports, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking ,I! and that installation is within flatness tolerances. • 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored, and that provision has been made for flashings, and penetrations through sheet metal roofing. B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating sheet metal roofing to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of sheet metal roofing before sheet metal roofing installation. . C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install flashings,fasciae, copings, and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Section 07920-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment on roof sheathing under roofing insulation. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage,where possible,to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal roofing. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water,with lapped joints of not less than 12 inches.. 1. Apply from eave to ridge. 2. Apply on roof not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap edges of self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches, in shingle fashion to shed water. B. Perimeter Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment at roof perimeter,wrinkle free, on roof sheathing under roofing insulation at eaves and rakes. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply at locations indicated below][at locations indicated on Drawings], in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1. Roof perimeter for a distance up from eaves of 36 inches beyond interior wall line. 2. Rake edges for a distance of 18 inches. . 3. Around penetrating elements for a distance from element of 18 inches. 3.4 INSTALLATION, GENERAL • A. General: Install sheet metal roofing perpendicular to purlins or supports. Anchor sheet metal roofing and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Install fasteners, solder,welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing system and as recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing. 1. Field cutting of sheet metal roofing by torch is not permitted. 2. Rigidly fasten eave end of sheet metal roofing and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill roofing. 3. Provide metal closures at rake edges. 4. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 5. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 6. Locate roofing splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger roofing splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 7. Lap metal flashing over sheet metal roofing to allow moisture to run over and off the material. • 02373.00' 07610-6 • 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING B. Fasteners: Use fasteners as recommended by manufacturer. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized- asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator of sheet metal roofing or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. D. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. E. Fascia: Align bottom of sheet metal roofing and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings. 3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation: Install insulation on roof sheathing over underlayment. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage,where possible,to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal roofing. Install panels in two layers,2 inches minimum each layer, stagger joints. 3.6 ON-SITE, ROLL-FORMED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION A. General: Install on-site, roll-formed sheet metal roofing to comply with sheet metal roofing manufacturer's written instructions for UL wind-uplift class indicated. Provide sheet metal roofing of full,langthiromeave to eai, Apply continuous bead of sealant to top ange of lower panel as panels are formed. B. Standing-Seam Sheet Metal Roofing: Fasten sheet metal roofing to wood deck through insulation and bearing plates with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 1. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and"fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging field-applied sealant 2. Seamed Joint Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so cleat, sheet metal roofing, and field-applied sealant are completely engaged. 3.7 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim,copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or • intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof,form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less.than 1 inch deep,filled with mastic sealant(concealed within joints). 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. 02373.00 07610-7 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING B. Replace panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 3.9 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. WHEREAS <Insert name>of<Insert address>, herein called the"Roofing Installer,"has performed roofing and associated work("work") on the following project: 1. Owner: City of Renton. 2. Address: Renton City Hall, Fifth Floor, 1055 South Grady Way, Renton,WA 98055. 3. Building Name/Type: Renton Pavilion. 4. Address: 233 Burnett Aveneue, Renton,WA 98055. 5. Area of Work: <Insert information.> 6. Acceptance Date: <Insert date.> 7. Warranty Period: <Insert time.> 8. Expiration Date: <Insert date.> V ' B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor)to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be.made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. lightning; b. peak gust wind speed exceeding 100 mph. c. fire; d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, h;-' deterioration, and decomposition; e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals,whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes,Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other - - work, and positioning of anything on roof,this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations,Warranty shall not become null and s void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work,shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade,work deck, spray-cooled surface;flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified,this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 02373.00 07610-8 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks,defects,or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically,this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this<Insert day>day of<Insert month>, <Insert year>. • 1. Authorized Signature: <Insert signature.> - 2. Name: <Insert name.> 3. Title: <Insert title.> END OF SECTION • 02373.00 07610-9 ' 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM • PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sheet metal flashing and trim. B. Related Sections: 1. 09900-Painting: Field finishing of sheet metal exposed to view in the finished work. 2. 15160-: Galvanized pipe downspouts. • 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fastening systems shall allow for the thermal movement of the materials without buckling, loosening, and leakage. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Catalog cuts and installation instructions for manufactured products. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material, profile,jointing pattern,jointing details, materials, gages,fastening methods, and installation details. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Applicator. Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with 5 years minimum experience. • e B. Unless indicated or specified otherwise, perform work in accordance with the recommendations of SMACNA. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING —a A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion,and to provide ventilation. B. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining, or damage. • PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel:ASTM A653;factory primed G90 galvanized finish; 24 gage unless noted otherwise; shop primed for application of shop finish; custom colors to match adjacent finishes, as determined by Architect. 1. Factory Prime Coating: White or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat;with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 167, Type.302 or 304. 1. Finish: 2D(dull annealed). 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Provide soft neoprene washers at exposed fasteners. 2. Finish exposed fasteners to match material being fastened. . 3. Material: Use galvanized steel or stainless steel. 4. Use screws when fastening into wood or sheet metal. 02373.00 07620-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON r' SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 5. Use expansion anchors or drive pins when fastening into concrete or masonry. B. Reglets: Types as indicated; galvanized steel or rigid extruded PVC; manufactured by Fry Reglet Co or approved; ends covered with plastic tape. C. Solder. ASTM B32. D. Flexible Boot Pipe Flashing: Portals Plus(708/766-5240; 800/774-5240)"Alumi-Flash"with EPDM boots, or approved; sized to match pipe diameter; split type with sealing hardware where necessary for installation at penetrating items which cannot be disconnected for top access. Furnish stainless steel • draw bands, adapters, connection hardware, and sealants as necessary for a complete and weather tight installation. E. Flexible Flashing: 1. Concealed Wall Flashing: "Blueskin SA"by Henry Bakor or approved. 2. Under Metal Coping: "Vycor Ultra"by W.R. Grace or approved. F. Plastic Cement FS SS-C-153, Type I-asphaltic base cement. 2.3 FABRICATION - A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. B. General: 1. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. 2. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. 3. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet; interlockable with sheet. 4. Form pieces in longest practical lengths, except as limited by expansion joint requirements. 5. Non-Moving Joints: Shop fabricate to the greatest practical extent. a. Solder all non-moving shop fabricated joints in steel and stainless steel flashing;[weld all non-moving joints in aluminum flashing and trim;[ b. Prefinished Galvanized Steel: Lap joints 1 inch, minimum; accurately cut and fit as necessary to maintain profile; embed contact surfaces in sealant; rivet with stainless steel or - color matched coated steel pop rivets at 3 to 4 inches o.c. 6. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. 7. Shop fabricate corners with minimum 18 inch long legs. 8. Fabricate vertical faces with,bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. 9. Form seams lapped in the direction of water flow. C. Fabricate all flashing to detail and as specified below. Use minimum 24 gage prefinished galvanized steel sheet unless indicated or specified otherwise. 1. Parapet Caps (Copings): 22 gage;joints in accordance with SMACNA Table 3-1; Fabricate with slotted holes at 8 inches on center for fastening at the back; paint. 2. Preformed Cap Flashing: 20 gage stainless steel sheet; soldered joints. 3. Counterflashing and Receivers: Removable type; SMACNA Fig 4-3 snaplock configuration; shop fabricated corners. 4. Conductor Heads: SMACNA Figure 1-25F. 5. Gutters: Configuration as shown on drawings. Provide straps at 30 inches on center, expansion joints at maximum 50 feet. a. • Girth 16 to 20 Inches: 24 gage galvanized steel; paint. b. Girth 21 to 25 Inches: 22 gage galvanized steel; paint. c. Straps: 1/8 x 1 G90 hot dip galvanized steel. 6. Downspouts: See Section 15160; paint. a. Accessories: Wire ball downspout strainer. 7. Pipe Penetrations: Flexible pipe boot flashing; Portals Plus(800/774-5240)"Alumi-Flash"with EPDM boots, or approved; sized to match pipe diameter;split type with sealing hardware where necessary for installation at penetrating items which cannot be disconnected for top access. 02373.00 07620-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM. Furnish stainless steel draw bands, adapters, connection hardware, and sealants as necessary for a complete and weather tight installation. D. Splashblocks: Precast concrete; approximately 12"wide x 18"long,with channel depression to distribute water from downspouts onto roof surface. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION • _ A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder,welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. C. Coordinate and sequence flashing installation with the work of other Sections. D. Use flexible flashing in locations indicated,and under all copings and curb flashings. E. Install starter and edge strips, and continuous cleats before starting installation. F. Surface Mounted Reglets: Install true to lines and levels; seal top of reglets with silicone sealant. G. Fastening: 1. Secure flashings using continuous cleats whenever possible. Use exposed fasteners only at the backside of copings, and at other locations not exposed to public view, unless otherwise approved by the Architect. 2. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. 3. Insert counterflashings into receivers to form tight fit;where snap fit is not provided, secure in place with stainless steel sheet metal screws, 16"o.c., maximum. 4. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit; secure in place. H. Make watertight connections between scuppers and adjacent roofs,walls, and flashings. Seal all laps. I. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of surface mounted reglets. •J. Joints: 1. Install flashings with provision for plus or minus 1/16 inch thermal movement at each end; provide expansion joints at 12'-0"o.c., maximum. 2. Seal concealed lap joints in with two parallel beads of butyl sealant; use butyl sealant where bedding.sealant is indicated or required. K. Install splash blocks under downspout outlets. 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. Upon request of the Architect, demonstrate that installation is completely watertight by hosing with water as directed. END OF SECTION 1 02373.00 07620-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY • A. Section Includes: Through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated assemblies. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Each firestopping system shall be selected to maintain fire rating of the assembly in which it used. B. Firestopping systems shall be resilient as necessary to accommodate differential movement between assemblies. C. Where firestopping is used to seal;penetrations through floors with waterproof membranes, system shall be selected for compatibility with membrane material. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide through-penetration firestop systems for rated walls, floors and roofs that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and '', other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated. B. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. T-Rated Systems: Where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with I adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas and where required, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814,. D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of through-penetration firestop system product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. • 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations,from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items. C. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed through-penetration firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Code Verification: Prior to installation of fire stopping systems obtain approval from the jurisdictional code authorities for the fire stopping systems and applications proposed. 1. 02373.00 07840-1 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON A' SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING C. Firestopping: Tested'in accordance with ASTM E119, UBC Standard 7-1 or UL 1479 to meet the hourly fire ratings of the construction being sealed. Provide F rated assemblies, except where T rated assemblies are required by the code authority. • gym' D. Firestopping systems shall be UL assemblies. • 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Maintain maximum ventilation to remove volatile emissions produced during the installation process. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through- penetration firestop systems. C. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or approved: 1. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. 2. Johns Manville. 3. Specified Technologies Inc. 4. 3M Fire Protection Products. 5. Tremco. 2.2 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another,with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with performance requirements. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer. • B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 02373:00 07840-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF FIRESTOPPING A. Provide firestopping at mechanical, electrical, and plumbing penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, and ceilings, and other locations as indicated on the Drawings. B. Install firestopping in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as necessary to meet the specified fire rating requirements. C. Where firestopping is used to seal around penetrations through waterproof membranes, install to maintain integrity of waterproof barrier. D. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. - ' 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words:.'Warning—Through-Penetration Firestop System—Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Date of installation. 4. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. - 5. Installer's name. 3.4 CLEANING • A. Trim excess material flush with adjacent surface. B. Remove spills, leave area in undamaged, clean condition. END OF SECTION • • • 02373.00 07840-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY • • A. Section Includes: 1. Sealant and backing materials. 1.2 SUBMITTALS • A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Manufacturers surface preparation and installation instructions. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturers color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Submit cured samples of each sealant type and color proposed for the work. E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion: 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint- sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers,for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use manufacturers standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Submit number of pieces of each type of material required by sealant manufacturer, including joint substrates, shims,joint-sealant backings,secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturers written instructions for corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with,joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 02373.00 07920-1 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 1.5 WARRANTY A. Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. *Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial*Completion. B. Furnish sealant manufacturer's standard 5 year warranty for all non-silicone sealants. C. Furnish sealant manufacturer's standard 20 year warranty for silicone sealants. D. Warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturers written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant. B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified for porous substrates, provide products that are nonstaining and have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Silicone; Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing: 1. Typical Locations: Exterior, non-traffic joints, unless specified otherwise. Secondary seal in two- stage joints. 2. Provide one of the following: a. 795; Dow Corning. b. Silpruf; GE Silicones. c. 895; Pecora Corporation. D. Silicone; Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing: 1. Typical Locations: Fluoropolymer finished aluminum-to-aluminum joints. a. 791; Dow Corning. E. Silicone; Mildew-Resistant: Formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes. - 1. Typical Locations: Joints around countertops in kitchen or coffee areas;joints around sinks, etc. 2. Provide one of the following: a. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning. b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones. c. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation. • F. Urethane; Multicomponent Pourable: Type M, Grade P, class 25; colors as selected. 1. Typical Locations: Provide at all exterior and interior horizontal joints subject to traffic and abrasion, unless specified otherwise slope less than 6%. 2. Uses Related to Exposure: T(traffic). .. 3. Provide one of the following: a. THC-900;Tremco. b. SL 2; Sonneborn. • 02373.00 07920-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS c. NR-200 Urexpan; Pecora Corporation. d. 2C SL; SikaFlex G. Latex: ASTM C834 with maximum VOC content of 250 grams per liter. 1. Typical Locations: Interior joints,and interior joints at continuous air barrier unless specified otherwise. 2. Provide one of the following: a. Acrylic Latex Caulk;Tremco. b. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. c. Sonolac; Sonneborn. H. Epoxy: Two-part, self-leveling, 100%solids joint filler with maximum VOC content of 250 grams per liter. 1. Typical Locations: Exposed sawcuts and construction joints in concrete slabs. 2. Color: Gray. 3. Provide the following: a. Epolith-P; Sonneborn. b. Sikadur 51; Sika Corp. 2.2 BACKER ROD A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 1. ASTM C 1330, closed-cell material with a surface skin, thickness approximately 130 percent of joint width. Size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. • 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. 'Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints(except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing,water repellents,water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, --, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning 02373.00 07920-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. 3. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. a. Metal. b. Glass. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Apply masking tightly around-joints to protect adjacent surfaces from excess sealant. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. - B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and - back of joints. 1.1 E. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins,tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Tool joints concave, unless indicated or specified otherwise. Finish free of air pockets,foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Joint Depth: 1. Sealant beads shall have a sectional width to depth ratio of 2 to 1, unless specified otherwise or I� recommended otherwise by the sealant manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANUP A. Clean adjacent surfaces free of excess sealant as the work progresses. Use cleaningagents 1 P 9 9 recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 02373.00- 07920-4 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS • B. Upon completion, remove and dispose of masking. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect sealant in joints subject to dirt, moisture, and traffic during the sealant curing process. Protection shall be able to resist traffic while remaining securely in position. END OF SECTION • • • • 02373.00 07920-5 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel doors and frames. B. Related Sections: 1. 08710-Door Hardware. 2. 09900-Painting: Field painting of doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire- resistance ratings,and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Frames: Indicate configuration,anchor types and spacings, location of cutouts for hardware, reinforcement, and finish. 2. Doors: Indicate elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cutouts for hardware. C. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of ANSI A250.8. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Installed frame and door assembly shall conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated. 1 2. Where doors are noted with an hourly fire resistance rating, provide door and frame assemblies . • labeled by Underwriter's Laboratory, or any other testing laboratory approved by the local code authorities, to meet the hourly fire rating noted. Assemblies shall meet UBC 7-2-97 requirements for positive pressure. . 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect doors and frames with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. B. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Members of the Steel Door Institute and of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer's, subject to compliance with the specified requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Cold rolled ASTM A366, or hot rolled pickled and oiled sheet conforming to ASTM A569. 2.3 DOORS A. ANSI A250.8; Seamless. B. Minimum 18 gage face sheets for interior doors; minimum 16 gage face sheets for exterior doors. C. Core: 02373.00 08110-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1. Interior Doors: Vertical steel stiffeners with sound deadening fill between stiffeners, or resin impregnated kraft paper honey comb core. 2. . Exterior Doors: Polystyrene or polyurethane foam core. :.ti D. Provide continuously welded seamless edges. No plastic fillers will be accepted. E. Close top edges of exterior doors flush with steel filler cap; seal joints watertight. F. Cut mortises for butts using appropriate templates; universal non-handed preparation of doors is not acceptable. 2.4 FRAMES A. Design: Double equal rabbet, unless indicated otherwise;fully welded. B. Gages: 1. Exterior Frames: Minimum 14 gage. 2. Interior Frames: Minimum 16 gage for frames of door openings up to and including 4 feet in width; 14 gage for frames greater than 4 feet in width. C. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. 2.5 FINISH A. Exterior Units: Hot dip galvanized zinc coating conforming to ASTM A653, Commercial Steel(CS), Type B, with an A60 zinc-iron-alloy(galvannealed)coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. Provide modified epoxy ester baked-on primer to receive urethane coating specified in Section 09900. B. Interior Units: Manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive primer. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment,to assure proper assembly at Project site. B. Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated,fabricate doors, panels, and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 0.053-inch-thick, metallic-coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. C. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. D. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80. E. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." F. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers,and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. G. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. H. Thermal-Rated(Insulating)Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. 02373.00 08110-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value of 0.41 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or better. I. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. J. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF FRAMES • • A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's ii data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge ji location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 3. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames,within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHl A115.1G. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer. 1. END OF SECTION 02373.00 08110-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08310 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors and frames. B. Related Sections: 1. 09900-Painting: Field applied finish. • 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data. Include sizes, types,finishes,scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where an access door is required in fire rated construction,the access door assembly shall be labeled by Underwriter's Laboratory, ITS, or any other testing laboratory approved by the local code authorities, to meet the hourly fire resistance rating of the construction in which the access door is installed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL AND CEILING ACCESS DOORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Milcor LP. (Lima OH; 800-441-6899). 2. Karp Associates, Inc. (Maspeth NY;718-784-2105). 1. 3. MM Systems Corporation(Tucker GA; 770-938-7570). 4. Nystrom Products Co. (Minneapolis MN; 612-781-7850). 5. JL Industries(Bloomington, MN;612-835-685.0) B. Door Types: 1. Fire Rated Metal Access Door. a. Flush type design. b. 16 gage frame; minimum 20 gage welded pan door panel insulated with non-combustible filler c. Self closing and self latching,with interior latch release ri d. Fully concealed pin type hinges or continuous piano hinge, 175 degree opening. e. Ring turn latch. 2. Non Rated Metal Wall and Ceiling Access Door. a. Flush type design b. 16 gage steel frame; 14 gage door panel. c. For installation in drywall: Integral attachment flange and drywall bead for flush installation. d. Fully concealed pin type hinges or continuous piano hinge, 175 degree opening. • e. Hardware: Cylinder lock. C. Sizes: 12"x 12"size for hand access, 22"x 30"minimum size for man entry, unless indicated otherwise. D. Finish: Galvanized steel with wiped coat finish; prime units with manufacturer's standard primer to receive paint coatings as specified in Section 09900. Provide stainless steel access doors at restrooms, and other moist locations. 1. 02373.00 08310-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08310 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install access doors of sizes and in locations as indicated. Provide access doors for access to balancing and fire dampers,trap primers,valves,fans, terminal units, and other equipment requiring periodic inspection through finished walls and ceilings,whether indicated or not. Coordinate access requirements with other trades. B. Install frames plumb and level in wall and ceiling openings,with plane of door surface in accurate alignment with plane of wall or ceiling surface. C. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION • 02373.00 08310-2 01 f28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08361 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Electrically operated sectional overhead doors. B. Related Sections: 1. 05500-Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel supports. 2. Division 16: Electrical conduit and connection of motor operator and controls. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Overhead sectional door assemblies shall include,without limitation, sectional door, track, hinges and fixtures, all overhead mounting supports,counterbalance system, motor operator system, push button control station and all other accessories required for a complete installation. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide sectional overhead doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door components: 1. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure(velocity pressure)as indicated on drawings, but not less than 20 lbf/sq. ft. acting inward and outward. 2. Air Infiltration: Maximum Rate: 0.08 cfm at 15 mph. B. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Provide sectional overhead door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 10,000 cycles. 1.4 SUBMITTALS • - A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's complete product literature indicating specified items and method of installation. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate details and dimensions of fabrication and installation, including locks, track mounting, supports, and location of operating mechanism. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: The design is based on"521 Series"aluminum sectional door manufactured by the Overhead Door Company. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering comparable products that may be incorporated into the Work,include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Clopay Building Products Company;a Griffon Company. 2. Haas Door. 2.2 ALUMINUM DOOR SECTIONS A. Construct door sections with extruded-aluminum shapes, complying with ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. Join stiles and rails by welding or with concealed stainless-steel through bolts, full height of door section. 02373.00 08361-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON • z SECTION 08361 .• SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS Form meeting rails to provide a weathertight-seal joint. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. -, .B. Aluminum Framing: Class I, Clear Anodic Finish. : 2.3 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized steel track system, sized for door size and weight, . designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown, including brackets, bracing,and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Weld or bolt to track supports. 1. Provide tracks configured as indicated in drawings. • 2. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized steel supporting members to provide strength and rigidity during opening and closing of doors. :-_, B. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping•gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of overhead door. 1. Provide motor-operated doors with combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge. 2. Provide continuous flexible seals at door jambs for a weathertight installation. C. Full-Vision Panels: Manufacturer's standard,tubular, aluminum-framed section fully glazed w th 1-inch thick insulating units specified in Section 08800, set in neoprene glazing channel and with re ovable extruded-aluminum stops. 2.4 HARDWARE A. General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware to suit door type. B. Hinges: Heavy-duty galvanized steel hinges at each end stile and at each intermediate stile. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails. Provide double-end hinges where required and for doors exceeding 16 feet in width. C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball bearings in case-hardened steel races. locking device assembly with lock, dead bolt, operating handle, and adjustable locking bar to engage D. e through slots in tracks. 1. Locking Bars: Full-disc cremone type, both jamb sides operable from inside only. - 2. Lock cylinder is specified in Division 8 Section"Door Hardware." 1 E. 'Provide safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked. 2.5 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM A. Torsion Spring: Fabricated from oil-tempered-steel wire, mounted on a cross-header tube or steel shaft. Connect to door with galvanized aircraft-type lift cables with cable safety factor of at least 5 to 1. . Provide springs calibrated for a minimum of 10,000 cycles. B. Cable.Drums: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums grooved to receive cable. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of shaft. C. Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded, steel or bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either cable breaks. D. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level shaft and prevent sag. E. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation. i 02373.00 08361-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON • SECTION 08361 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycle requirements specified, and accessories required for proper operation. B. Disconnect Device: Hand-operated disconnect device for automatically engaging chain-and-sprocket operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect device and operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. C. Provide control equipment, maximum 24-V, ac or dc. D. Door-Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor,trolley or drawbar type, and floor-level quick •release for manual operation. E. Electric Motors: High-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty,with overload protection, sized to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position. 1. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors with building electrical system. F. Remote-Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button controls labeled"Open,""Close,"and"Stop." G. Obstruction Detection Device: Automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. H. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. PART 3-EXECUTION • 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are correctly dimensioned with headers level,jambs plumb, and floor level. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install door,track, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified. B. Install doors free from warp, twists, or distortion. 3.3 REPAIR AND ADJUSTMENT A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily,free of warp, twist, or distortion and with weathertight fit around entire perimeter. B. Repair damage to overhead sectional doors to match manufacturer's original finish. Replace components which cannot be properly repaired. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional overhead doors. END OF SECTION 02373.00 08361-3 01/28/03 '1 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08415 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 11 1. Exterior aluminum entrances. - B. Related Sections: 1. 08710-Door Hardware: Cylinder locks. 2. 08800-Glazing. 3. 08900-Glazed Aluminum Framing Systems: For additional performance requirements. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Comply with additional applicable performance requirements as specified in Section 08900. I • B. Air Infiltration: Limited to 0.06 cfm/sq.ft.of system surface area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq.ft. 1. Single doors: Not more than 0.5 cfm per linear foot of crack. 2. Pairs of doors: Not more than 1.0 cfm per linear foot of crack. C. Thermal Performance: • 1. Maximum thermal conductance U=1.0 for framing members only. a. Door frames: Not more than 0.93. D. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each system indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevations,sections, details of installation and attachments to other Work. 1. Prepare data based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. 2. For entrance systems, include hardware schedule and locations. C. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color required. D. Product test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company authorized by system manufacturer,one installer for total system. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Furnish five year written warranty executed to the Owner,from the manufacturer,against defects in materials and workmanship. Defects include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including,but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 3. Failure of operating components to function normally. 4. Water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas. 02373.00 08415-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08415 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design: The design is based on Kawneer."350 Series" Medium Stile entrance doors. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Vistawall. 2. EFCO Corporation. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 sheet;ASTM B 221 extrusions. B. Glazing: Specified in Section 08800-Glazing. C. Glazing Gaskets: Pressure-glazing system of black,resilient Santoprene or EPDM glazing gaskets with sealed corners,setting blocks, and shims or spacers. Do not use vinyl glazing gaskets. D. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos, cold-applied asphalt mastic paint formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Doors: 1-3/4-inch-thick glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded tubular rail and stile members, mechanically fastened corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie-rods, and with snap-on extruded-aluminum glazing stops and preformed gaskets. 1. Provide Kawneer 350 Series Medium Stile doors. 2. Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other locations,provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. B. Weatherstripping: 1. At fixed stops: Replaceable, compression type molded gaskets of neoprene or EPDM rubber complying with ASTM C 864 or of polyvinyl chloride complying with ASTM D 2287. $' 2. At other edges: Replaceable woven polypropylene,wool, or nylon pile,with aluminum or nylon fabric backing,complying with AAMA 701. 3. At door bottom: Adjustable molded EPDM or vinyl sweep,continuously contacting threshold; concealed mounting. 4. Provide weatherstripping on all exterior doors. C. Finger Guards: Hollow neoprene or polyvinyl chloride gasket mounted on hinge jamb of frame at centerline of door. Provide for all double-acting doors. D. Hardware for Aluminum Doors: Provide all hardware as required for proper operation, in accordance with the schedule located at the end of this section. E. Fasteners, Flashings, and Accessories: Compatible with adjacent materials, corrosion-resistant, - nonstaining,and nonbleeding. Use concealed fasteners except for application of door hardware. F. Miscellaneous Concealed Metal Members: High-strength aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel; hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123 may be used for members which are not exposedto weather or abrasion. G. Dissimilar Metal Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, or other nonconductive,nonabsorptive material. H. Joint Sealers: Provide products specified in Division 7. 2.4 DOOR HARDWARE A. Manually Operated Doors 02373.00 08415-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08415 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES 1. Checking Hinge: Rixson-27NHO X CC XLFP; single-acting, handed type,with adjustable positive stop, backcheck. Furnish without modification to adjustment arm;door manufacturer's standard hinge not acceptable. Accessories as follows: a. 180 top pivot. B. Weatherproofing: Furnish weatherstripping,gaskets and all other accessories as required for positive weatherproof seal. 1. Door Bottoms: Pemko 1800 Series surface mounted sweep; size to accommodate gap between door and threshold,length to match door width. _ C. Automatic Swing Door Operator: 1. Manufacturer: Horton Automatics (800/531-3111). 2. Operating Mechanism: "Series 4800 LE Electric Operator";overhead concealed transom mount; 90 degree opening. 3. Pushbutton Switch: Horton"C1260-4 Push Plate Switch"and plate sub-assembly;recessed configuration in 4x4 junction box with 6"diameter brushed stainless steel push plate with engraved and contrasting color paint filled handicap insignia and message"PRESS TO OPEN"; weatherproof for exterior installations. Furnish two per opening. D. Door Pulls: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard offering. E. Threshold for Swinging Doors: Rixson 3xPH700; extruded aluminum, modified as necessary to suit conditions; mill finish aluminum; undrilled,furnish stainless steel Phillips flathead screws and shields or expansion anchors as appropriate for attachment of threshold. Machine openings as required to receive hardware. F. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. 1. Pair of Doors: Provide manufacturers standard top and bottom locking concealed devices with cylinder and keylock in accordance with Section 08710. Provide center mullion. 2. Single Doors: Provide manufacturers standard rim locking concealed devices with cylinder and keylock in accordance with Section 08710. i 2.5 FINISH A. Finish: Class I,clear anodic coating complying with AAMA 611. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting stops). Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system. B. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. 1. Provide factory fabricated rain deflectors and sill end dams for framing exposed to weather. C. Door Framing: Reinforce to support imposed loads and for hardware indicated. Cut,drill,and tap for factory-installed hardware before finishing components. _ D. Doors: Factory-fabricate doors and factory-install all hardware except surface-mounted items. 1. Perform fabrication required for hardware before finishing. E. Factory assemble framing and components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. F. Welding: Perform welding before finishing; use methods which do not discolor metal;grind exposed welds flush; match original finish. G. Reinforcing: Provide as required to comply with performance requirements for rigidity and to support hardware; isolate dissimilar metals as specified in"Installation." H. Avoid damage to finishes. 02373.00 08415-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08415 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Isolate metal surfaces in contact with incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended -, by manufacturer. B. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. C. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Section 08800-Glazing. D. Install sealants at system perimeter to comply with requirements of Section 07920-Joint Sealants. E. Install framing components true in alignment with established lines and grades to the following tolerances: 1. Variation from Plane: Limit to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: For surfaces abutting in line,limit offset to 1/16 inch. For surfaces meeting at corners, limit offset to 1/32 inch. 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. F. Install doors without warp or rack. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and smooth operation. G. Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weathertight closure. END OF SECTION • 02373.00 08415-4 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Door hardware, including appropriate fasteners and miscellaneous materials as required, completing the work of this section and providing a proper installation. B. Except as noted herein,door hardware items listed elsewhere in this specification shall not be a requirement of this division. C. Door hardware supplier will conduct all keying conferences for products specified in this section. In addition, they will assist the Architect with all future change order revisions and coordination during the duration of the Project. When requested they will also meet with the Owner's project manager and Architect during the schedule review process to help identify, review and complete the hardware schedule approval process. D Related Sections: 1. 06100 -Rough Carpentry. 2. 08110 -Steel Doors and Frames. 3. 08415 -Aluminum Entrances. E. Where listed below, Cylinders will be furnished under this section for material provided under other Sections, i.e.08361 etc. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Door Hardware Schedule: 1. Submit six(6)copies of a detailed hardware schedule. List hardware for each door opening separately, using a vertical format per the sample hardware set below. Provide five(5)copies of catalog cuts for each item proposed. Provide physical samples when requested by the ,( Architect. 2. Sample hardware set: Door 101 HW1 One single door 101 corridor 100 from classroom 101 LHR 90 deg 3'0 x 7'0 x 13/4"W x HM 3 ea Butts BB179 US26D 4%x 4% 1 ea Lockset ML2051 DSA 630 SA114 M17 CT6 1 ea Closer DC2200 689 M54 M72 M74 1 ea Kickplate K0050 10 x 34 630 1 ea Wall stop 1270CVCP 626 3 ea Silencers 4279 3. Promptly incorporate any corrections and changes in the reviewed submittal and return copies,quantity as required, of the revised schedule to the Contractor for his use and distribution. 4. Acceptance of the hardware schedule does not relieve the supplier of responsibility for errors or omissions. B. Templates: Upon receipt of reviewed schedule,supply templates or physical hardware to fabricator of factory prepared doors,frames,and other work affected. Upon request, check the associated shop drawings to confirm that adequate provisions are made for proper installations. C. Special Tools:The Contractor is to provide to the Owner two sets of any special tools shipped with the finish hardware products required for maintenance and installation. Deliver to Owner at completion of work. 02373.00 08710-1 01/28103 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE D. Operations and Maintenance Data: Submit required sets of maintenance manuals per Division 1, which shall include as-built Hardware Schedule, catalog cuts,template lists with templates and warranty information. One additional copy shall either be delivered with the permanent keys or given separately to the maintenance department at the completion of the construction period. This -� copy shall contain parts data for exit devices, locksets&closers, and catalog cuts including manufacturer's name. E. Keying Schedule:After receipt of the approved door hardware schedule, the door hardware supplier shall be responsible to arrange a meeting with the Owner's project manager and the Architect to determine the keying requirements for the project.This request shall be made through the Contractor.At this meeting the keying system shall be discussed and all lockset functions reviewed to insure they are functionally correct. Four complete copies of the keying schedule shall be submitted to the Contractor for distribution to the appropriate parties. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications: 1. A recognized distributor who has been furnishing hardware in the same area as the project for LL:_ a period of not less than 5 years and has successfully completed projects similar in type and scope. The distributors'organization shall employ qualified Architectural Hardware Consultants and licensed locksmiths who are available at all reasonable times during the course of construction to meet with the Owner,Architect or Contractor for hardware or keying consultation. 2. The Hardware supplier shall be a factory-authorized distributor of the material provided and shall maintain a stock and parts inventory of all standard items supplied on the project for future service to the owner. B. Fire rated Openings:Provide listed door hardware at fire rated openings that complies with NFPA 80 and the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Current versions of the following reference standards: 1. ANSI/NFPA-NO. 80 FIRE DOORS AND WINDOWS. 2. ANSI/NFPA-NO. 101 LIFE SAFETY CODE. 3. UL-BUILDING MATERIALS LIST. 4. Department of Justice Public Law 101-336—Americans with Disabilities Act. 5. ANSI/BHMA REFERENCE STANDARDS 156.xx a. ANS 156.1 Butts and Hinges b. ANS 156.3 Exit Devices c. ANS 156.4 Door Controls—Closers d. ANS 156.5 Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products e. ANS 156.6 Architectural Door Trim f. ANS 156.7 Template Hinge Dimensions g. ANS 156.8 Door Controls—Overhead Holders h. ANS 156.13 Mortise Locks and Latches i. ANS 156.16 Auxiliary Hardware j. ANS 156.18 Materials and Finishes 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING - A. Tag each item or package to clearly identify the item and its intended location. Package in containers clearly marked with hardware set number. B. Inventory hardware jointly with Contractor and hardware supplier's representative until both parties are satisfied that the count is correct.A dry, locked storage space shall be provided for the checking, sorting and storage of the hardware. 1.6 WARRANTY 02373.00 08710-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE A. The door hardware shall carry a limited warranty against defects in workmanship and operation for a period of one year from date of substantial completion. Door closers shall have a 5 year limited warranty. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products listed in the Hardware Schedule in sufficient quantities to complete the job requirements. 1. Butts& Hinges: Specified -Stanley Alternates-Bommer, Hager 2. Manual Flush Bolts: Specified -Ives Alternates-Trimco, Glynn Johnson 3. Mortise Locks: Specified -Best Alternates-Schlage, Sargent 4. Exit Devices: Specified -Von Duprin Alternates-Corbin, Precision 5. Surface Closers: Specified -Corbin Alternates-LCN—4041 series, Norton 7500BF series 6. Flat goods&trim: Specified -Trimco Alternates-None 7. Thresholds&Gasket: Specified -Pemko Alternates-Reese, National Guard B. Any Item occurring in the Hardware Schedule but not listed in this section shall be furnished as shown in the schedule unless otherwise approved by the Architect. 2.2 HARDWARE FINISH A. Except as noted otherwise in the schedule,finishes of hardware materials are as follows: BUTTS—exterior 630, interior 626. LOCKSETS 630. EXIT DEVICES 630. CLOSERS 689. PUSH &PULLS 630. KICKPLATES 630. THRESHOLDS Alum. MISC ITEMS 626 or as specified. B. The designations used for the hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes". 2.3. BUTTS A. Type: As scheduled B. Size:•3'0"wide and under-4-1/2"x 4-1/2". 3'1"wide and over -5"x 4-1/2". Provide wide throw hinges where required due to trim applications or other conditions. C. Quantity: 3 each up to and including 90"in height.Add 1 additional hinge for every additional 30" or fraction thereof. For unusual size or weight doors,furnish type, size,and quantity recommended by manufacturer. D. All exterior outswinging doors to have non-removable pins (NRP set screw in barrel). 2.4 LOCKSETS 02373.00 08710-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE A. Design: lever-17H B. Backset: 2 3/" 3 C. Locksets and latchsets shall be furnished with strikes having a sufficient strike lip to protect trim (Note: 3 latch bolts require 3/4'minimum clearance for trim, otherwise extended lip strikes must be furnished). All lock sets to have curved lip strikes. D. Type: Mortise locksets: All Mortise locksets and latchsets shall be the product of one manufacturer. Locksets and latchsets shall be Grade 1,heavy-duty,and U.L. listed for use on fire -: doors. Deadbolt function shall be 1"projection. Functions as indicated in the hardware groups. Anti-friction latchbolts where indicated. 2.5 KEYING A. All keyed cylinders shall be subject to an existing Best masterkey system. B. All permanent cylinder cores and keys shall be by the owner. 2.6 EXIT DEVICES A. Provide heavy-duty trim with through-bolted mounting. Where levers are specified provide in a design to match the locksets. 2.7 DOOR CLOSERS, SURFACE - A. Furnish drop plates or other mounting plates where required. Provide closer of proper size and mounting style for each opening. B. Furnish sex nuts and bolts for all doors. C. Provide as specified in hardware groups. 2.8 OVERHEAD STOPS - 1 A. Provide proper size overhead stop for door width. 2.09 GASKET AND THRESHOLD A. Provide material of proper size and configuration for the specified opening. 2.10 KEY CABINET A. Provide a key control system including: Envelopes, labels,tags with self-locking key clips,receipt forms,3-way visible card index,temporary markers, permanent markers and standard metal cabinet. Provide type as specified for this phase. B. Provide hinged panel type RWC 25S cabinet,for wall mounting. ;y; PART 3-EXECUTION 3. 1 HARDWARE INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be by skilled craftsmen experienced in the installation of commercial builders hardware, and shall be in accordance with the approved shop drawings of Sections 08110-Steel Doors and Frames,08210- Flush Wood Doors, 08415 Aluminum Entrances, and other applicable 02373.00 08710-4 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE door sections. Manufacturer's standard locations shall apply except as otherwise directed by the Architect or as required to meet applicable code requirements. Where cutting and fitting are required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be finished, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation with the finishing work specified in Division 9 sections. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. B. Set units level, plumb,and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. C. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. D. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants". E. Weather-stripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated. 3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND DEMONSTRATING: A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. Where hardware is installed more than one month prior to the acceptance or occupancy of a space or area,the installer is to return to the installation during the week prior to the acceptance or occupancy and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and • finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for the final operation of the heating and cooling systems. Clean any adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware operation. B. Approximately six months after acceptance of hardware in each area,the installer shall return to the Project and make any necessary adjustments to the hardware to restore proper operational function of door and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in any recommended additions or maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design or installation. Prepare a written report of current or predictable problem (of a substantial nature)in the hardware performance. If there is a hardware problem the installer cannot resolve, the finish hardware supplier and a representative of the manufacturer of the product concerned shall be contacted. At a mutually convenient time,the installer,the hardware supplier and the manufacturer's representative shall meet at the jobsite to review and try to resolve the problem. This meeting shall be at no charge to the Owner or Contractor unless the problem is determined to be the result of faulty installation. 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule in the drawings and related information concerning the following hardware groups. Quantities indicated in any instance are for supplier convenience only and are not guaranteed. • B. Hardware Groups: HW1 2 ea Continuous hinge CFM95HD 1 ea Exit device 3327TL 1 ea Cylinder 1E72 1 ea Exit device ED4400 2 ea Pull 1191-4 N mtg 02373.00 08710-5 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 2 ea Closer DC2210 1 ea Concealed overhead stop 6-X34 1 ea Floor stop 1201 1 ea Threshold 158A MS & ES -,' 2 ea Door bottom 18061CP 1 set Gasket 305CR 2 ea Meeting stile gasket 18041CP HWla 1 ea Continuous hinge CFM95HD 1 ea Exit device 33NL-OP 1 ea Cylinder 1E72 1 ea Pull 1191-4 N mtg 1 ea Closer DC2210 1 ea Concealed overhead stop 6-X34 1 ea Threshold 158A MS & ES 1 ea Door bottom 18061CP 1 set Gasket 305CR HW1b 1 ea Continuous hinge CFM95HD x cut for 4611 1 ea Power transfer 4611 **//** 1 ea Exit device 33NL-OP 1 ea Electric latch retraction mod RE1550C-1 **//** 1 ea Cylinder 1E72 1 ea Pull 1191-4 N mtg 1 ea Auto operator KM2100 Push Alum **//** 2 ea Push button 212266 **//** 1 ea Power supply 1426-04-AO **//** 1 ea Key switch 1320-2 Maintain **//** 1 ea Cylinder 1E74 (key switch) 1 ea Floor stop 1201 1 ea Threshold 158A MS & ES 1 ea Door bottom 18061CP 1 set Gasket 305CR System description: When keyswitch is turned on the green LED will light, the exit —, device latches will retract and the push buttons will be activated. When the keyswitch is turned off the red LED will light, the exit device latches will extend and the push buttons will be deactivated. HW2 All hardware by door manufacturer except: 1 ea Keyswitch 1310-2 Momentary DPDT 1 ea Cylinders 1E74 02373.00 08710-6 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE HW2a All hardware by door manufacturer except: HW3 Hinges BB191 1 ea Lockset 35H7EW 626 less outside trim 1 ea Cylinder pull 1821 1 ea Closer/stop DC3210 A4 1 ea Threshold 158A MS & ES 1 ea Door bottom 18061CP 1 set Gasket S88D HW4 Hinges BB179 1 ea Lockset 35H7EW 626 1 set Automatic flush bolts 842 1 ea Dustproof strike 82 1 ea Coordinator 672 1 ea Closer DC2200 - • 1 ea Floor stop 1211 1 ea Concealed overhead stop 1-X36 1 set Gasket S44D 1 set Meeting stile gasket S77C Astragal by door supplier. HW5 Hinges BB199 1 ea Lockset 35H7EW 626 less outside trim 1 ea Cylinder pull 1821 2 ea Flush bolts 458B 1 ea Dustproof strike 487B x 489B 2 ea Closer DC2210 2 ea Concealed overhead stop & holder 1-X26 1 ea Threshold 158A MS & ES 2 ea Door bottom 18061CP 1 set Gasket 305CR Astragal by door supplier. • HW6 Hinges BB179 1 ea Lockset 626 35H7EW TL 1 ea Closer/stop DC2210 A4 1 set Gasket S44D HW7 02373.00 08710-7 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE Hinges BB179 1 ea Pull plate 1018-3 1 ea Push plate 1001-3 1 ea Closer DC2200 1 ea Wall stop 1270CVCP Silencers HW8 Hinges BB179 1 ea Lockset 35H7E 6262 1 ea Closer DC2200 1 ea Wall stop 1270CVCP 1 set Gasket S44D HW9 Hinges BB191 1 ea Lockset 35H7E 626 1 ea Closer/holder DC2210 Al 1 ea Threshold 165AT MS & ES 1 ea Door bottom 18061CP - 1 set Gasket 305CR = � HW10 Hinges BB179 1 ea Latchset 35HN 626 1 ea Wall stop 1270CVCP Silencers END OF SECTION 02373.00 08710-8 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08800 GLAZING • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass and glazing. • B. Related Sections: 1. 07920-Sealants: Structural silicone glazing sealant. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and _ impact loads(where applicable)without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture,fabrication, and installation;failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials;or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths(annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated. b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. c. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: 1 lite per 1000 for lites set more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind and snow action. 1) Load Duration: 30 days. d. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all four edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch,whichever is less. 1) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. 2) For insulating glass. 3) For laminated-glass lites. e. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6 mm. C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change(range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both • solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on,products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick and a nominal 1/2- inch-wide interspace. 4. Center-of-Glass U-Values: NFRC 100 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 5. Center-of-Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient NFRC 200 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program. 6. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. 02373.00 08800-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON -� SECTION 08800 GLAZING • B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch-square Samples for glass. 1. Coated vision glass. �7 2. Ceramic-coated spandrel glass. 3. Insulating glass for each designation indicated. .� C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. • D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in"Quality Assurance"Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. F. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials. G. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating the following products comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products: 1. Coated float glass. 2. Insulating glass. 3. Glazing sealants. • • 4. Glazing gaskets. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with pertinent recommendations in the GANA"Manual of Glazing." B. Safety Glass Standard: Comply with UBC code requirements. C. Qualifications of Glass Manufacturer: Provide glass produced by a nationally recognized manufacturer of high efficiency glass. D. Qualifications of Glaziers: Provide personnel thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required, and at least one person completely familiar with the referenced standards and the requirements of this Work,who shall personally direct installation of glazing materials. E. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of one of the following inspecting and testing -- agencies: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council. 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. 3. National Accreditation and Management Institute. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation,temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Provide cushions at edges of glass to prevent impact damage during shipment and storage. C. Comply with insulating unit fabricators requirements for limits on exposure to reduced barometric pressure during shipment. 02373.00 08800-2 5 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08800 GLAZING 1.6 WARRANTY A. Replacement Guarantee: • 1. Provide new conforming glass units to replace all glass units which break for a period of one year. 2. Units broken by impact,fire, earthquake, or similar events which exceed the design loads and conditions are not subject to this requirement. 3. No allowances for statistical probability of breakage under anticipated loading conditions will be .made in consideration of failure of glass materials under load. 4. Include all labor and materials for replacement of failed unit(s). Replacement shall include coordination with the Owner, immediate provision for maintaining openings secure and weathertight, timely ordering and fabrication of replacement items as required, installation, and cleaning. B. Laminated Glass Warranty: Furnish five year warranty from the glass manufacturer agreeing to replace glass units which have defective coating including edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated- glass standard.. C. Coated-Glass Products Warranty: Furnish ten year warranty from the glass manufacturer agreeing to replace glass units which have defective coating including peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.D. Insulating Glass Unit Warranty: 1. Furnish ten year manufacturer's warranty, including coverage of units for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, condensation between lites, and replacement of same. PART 2-PRODUCTS • 2.1 GLASS • A. Provide the following glass in combinations as scheduled at the end of this Section: 1. Clear Glass: ASTM C1036,Type I, class 1(clear),clear, quality q3 glazing select. 2. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048;Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select). 3. Sputter-Coated Float Glass: Float glass with metallic-oxide or metallic-nitride coating deposited by vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat treatment. 2.2 LAMINATED GLASS • A. Laminated Glass: Comply with ASTM C 1172 for kinds of laminated glass indicated and other requirements specified, including those in the Laminated-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3. B. Interlayer. Interlayer material as indicated below, .060 thickness, clear or in colors, and of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation. 1. Interlayer Material: Polyvinyl butyral sheets. C. Laminating Process:. Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets. 2.3 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified. 1. Provide Kind HS(heat-strengthened)float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified. Provide Kind FT(fully tempered)where safety glass is indicated or required. 02373.00 08800-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 08800 GLAZING 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene; 70-90 Shore A durometer hardness;4 inches long x 1/4 high x width as required for application indicated. B. Weather Glazing Sealant: Compatible with insulating glass seal. C. Butt Glazing Sealant: Dow-Coming"999 A,"clear. D. Glazing Tape(Interior): Norton'V-980,"PTI"303,"or approved. Size: 1/8 inch by 1/2 inch. E. Glazing Gaskets for Existing Storefronts: "Santoprene,"silicone, or EPDM glazing beads, for a complete weatherproof seal; premolded or welded corners; Furnish shapes compatible with existing window wall systems. 2.5 FABRICATION • A. Insulating Glass Units: 1. Dual lite units fabricated from glass as scheduled; 1/2 inch.nominal airspace; dual seal system. .1 2. Twin primary seals of polyisobutylene and secondary seal of silicone or polysulfide sealant. Outer seal shall be compatible with glazing system. 3. Spacer Bar: Mill finish aluminum;fill with desiccant; corners shall be partially miter cut and bent • (not cut through), or formed with corner keys ultrasonically soldered in place. 4. Each piece shall bear certification number, date, and manufacturer's identification mark. . 5. Assembly of insulating units shall be by a fabricator approved by the glass materials manufacturer. B. Tempered and Heat Strengthened Glass: 1. Tempered Glass: Glass which has been heat treated to strengthen glass in bending to not less than 4 times the annealed strength; certified safety glass in accordance with ANSI Z97.1. 2. Heat Strengthened Glass: ASTM C1048; glass which has been heat treated to strengthen glass in bending to not less than times annealed strength. 3. Fabricate tempered and heat strengthened glass units so that principle distortion will be in the horizontal direction in the finished installation. • 4. Unless otherwise approved by the building official, provide manufacturer's label on each light, indicating type and thickness of glass. 5. Comply with UBC for identification and labeling of safety-glazing materials in hazardous locations subject to human impact loads. C. Laminated Glass: Two layers of glass as scheduled with a minimum .060 inch thick transparent vinyl interlayer by Monsanto or DuPont. D. Translucent Frit Coating: "EtchMatte"by Milgard Tempering Inc. (Tacoma WA;800/824-8674), "Translucent Frit"by Northwestern Industries, Inc. (Seattle, WA 800/426-2771), or approved; solid field pattern. • PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready for work of this Section. • 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal frame corner joints, and other leakage points with sealant. At insulating glass units the sealant shall be compatible with the seal of the unit. Do not plug weep holes. • • 02373.00 08800-4 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08800 GLAZING C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant, unless otherwise recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances,and adequate sealant thicknesses,with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that,when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants. E. Install settingblocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing p y g g publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Butt Glazing: Install butt glazing sealant as indicated;tool to a smooth concave configuration; remove excess sealant. Provide joint width of 3/8 inch plus or minus 1/8 inch. K. Structural glazing shall be in accordance with the structural glazing sealant manufacturer's written recommendations. L. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly,with stretch allowance during installation. M. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at comers.. N. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by insertingdense compressiongaskets formed and installed to lock inplace against faces of removable 9 stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. O. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 02373.00 08800-5 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08800 GLAZING 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, - , and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into.contact E' with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month,for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline s deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked,abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. 3.5 GLASS TYPE SCHEDULE A. The following are the glass types as indicated on the Drawings: 1. GL-1: Insulating glass unit with 1/2 inch air space between two panes of glass and Low-E coating -on number 2 surface as follows: a. Exterior Pane: Minimum 1/4 inch clear glass; PPG"Solarban 60." b. Interior Pane: Minimum 1/4 inch clear glass. 2. GL-2: Insulating glass unit with 1/2 inch air space between two panes of glass and Low-E coating on number 2 surface as follows: a. Exterior Pane: Minimum 1/4 inch clear glass; PPG"Solarban 60." b. Interior Pane: Minimum 1/4 inch clear glass, translucent ceramic fit, fully tempered. • END OF SECTION • • �.b 02373.00 08800-6 01/28/03 - RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON • SECTION 08900 GLAZED ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEMS • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Curtainwall system (CW). 2. Storefront system (SF). 3. Operable windows within framing systems. 4. Sealants within systems. 5. . Related flashing and trim. 6. Related anchor brackets and supports. 7. Structural design of systems including framing system,glazing, and attachment to structure. B. Related Sections: 1. 01230-Alternates: Requirements related to the work of this section. 2. 07920-Joint Sealants: Installation of joint sealants installed with glazed aluminum framing systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section. 3. 08415-Aluminum Entrances: Glazed aluminum entrance doors. 4. 08800-Glazing: Glass and glazing requirements. 1.2 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION A. Glazing: Physically and thermally isolated from framing members. B. Reglazable from the interior, except spandrel glazing or panels are reglazable from the exterior. C. Appearance: System shall conform to the general appearance as indicated on the drawings, including without limitation, position, spacing, and location of framing members, plane of glazing, exterior frame general profile and shape, and dimension points. • 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS • A. General: Provide glazed aluminum framing systems that have the following capabilities based on preconstruction testing: B. Thermal Performance: 1. Systems shall provide for noiseless expansion and contraction caused by a cycling temperature range of-20 degrees F. to 180 degrees F.without causing detrimental effects to components, sealing systems, or surrounding construction. 2. Thermal Transmittance: Provide systems with certification labels stating that they have been tested in accordance with NFRC-100 SB(site-built)to meet the specified requirements using • glass which matches the glass to be used in the Project. At the Contractor's option, computer simulated performance calculations may be used when accepted by the jurisdictional code authorities. Provide glazed aluminum framing systems with a U-values of 0.55. C. Structural Design: 1. Wind Loads: a. Design to resist flexural, shear, and torsional stresses caused by positive and negative wind loads indicated on the Structural Drawings, but in no case less than 20 PSF. b. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to 1/175 of clear • span or 3/4 inches,whichever is smaller c. Wind loads need not be considered as additive to seismic loads. d. Sidesway(Story Drift): Accommodate building story drift when wind loads effect maximum . overturning moment. Calculate story drift according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Anchorages and inserts shall be designed to resist all design and live loads, in combination as�y specified, and including a contribution of 1.5 x the design.wind:load. 3. Seismic Design: The installed system shall be capable of accommodating seismic loads in compliance with the requirements of UBC Seismic zone 3. 02373.00 08900-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON . SECTION 08900 GLAZED ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEMS 4. In the plane of the wall, deflection of framing members, when carrying their full design dead loads, shall not reduce the glass bite below 75 percent of the design dimension, reduce the glass edge clearance below 25 percent of the design dimension, or exceed 1/8 inch,whichever is greater. 4y 5. Uniform Structural Load Test At 150 percent of design pressure, permanent deflections of framing members shall not exceed 1/1000 of the span length, and components shall not experience failure or significant distortion. 6. At connection points of framing members to anchors, anchor deflections in any direction shall not exceed 1/8 inch, and permanent set shall not exceed 1/16 inch under 100% design pressure. 7. Anchor clips with slotted holes shall be calculated in the most extended position. 8. Each system shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM E330 to resist the maximum design wind loads.Tested assemblies shall have spans equal to or greater than the assemblies proposed for this contract. D. Air leakage: ASTM E283; maximum per square foot of surface area at differential static pressure of 6.24 psf as follows: 1. Framing System: 0.06 cfm. 2: Windows: 0.09 cfm. E. •Water Control:1. Systems shall drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or - migrating moisture to exterior. 2. Systems shall remain watertight when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at a minimum differential static pressure of 8 psf. F. Dynamic Movement: Systems shall accommodate the following without damage to system components or performance. - D 1. Movement within the system. 2. Movement between the system and perimeter framing components. 3. Application and release of design live loads 4. Deflection of structural support framing. G. System shall not exhibit vibration harmonics,wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening,weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of the system. 1. Framing members shall have thermally broken or thermally improved design. 2. Systems shall not use snap engaged components as structural members. • H. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide glazed aluminum framing systems, including anchorage,which accommodates dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Elevations, system dimensions, and expansion and contraction joint location. 2. Special and typical details. 3. Framing profiles. 4. Materials, alloys, and finishes. 5. Adjacent construction. . 6. Anchorage system details. 7. Fastening methods. 8. Shop drawings shall be stamped by the'designing structural engineer. B. Samples: 1. One sample of each typical glazed aluminum framing system corner section with minimum 12- inch long legs. Finish to match Architect's sample. Include typical glass unit and glazing system. 2. One 12 x 12 inch sample of each type of glass proposed. C. Preconstruction Sealant Test Reports: Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been 02373.00 08900-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 08900 GLAZED ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEMS tested for compatibility and adhesion with sealants; include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results for sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. D. Test Reports: Copies of test reports which verify that the glazed aluminum framing systems meet the thermal, structural, air and water infiltration performance requirements specified. E. Submit manufacturer's certificate that window units meet or exceed specified performance requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installers: Under the direct supervision of the manufacturer of the glazed aluminum framing systems. B. Testing Agency Qualifications for NFRC Labeling: An independent agency certified by the NFRC to provide NFRC labels for testing indicated. C. Design: Structural design of the glazed aluminum framing systems shall be by a Structural Engineer Licensed to practice in the State of Washington. D. Structural welding shall be performed by AWS Certified welders. E. Unless specified otherwise, all materials shall conform to the Metal Curtain wall Guide Specifications as published by the Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association. F. Pre-installation Conference: 1. Attendance: a. Architect. b. Owner's representative. c. Glazed aluminum framing systems subcontractors. d. Glazing subcontractor. e. Sealant subcontractor. f. Other parties affected by the Work of this Section. 2. Agenda: Include review of scheduling, phasing, coordination with other trades, approvals, glazing, scaffolding, protection, manufacturer's field observation requirements,field quality control, cleaning, and remedies. G. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of glazed aluminum framing system, including operable windows and doors, metal panels, exterior flashing and sheet metal, trim, air barriers, related anchors and supports, and exterior sealant systems related to the aluminum framing system, insulation,from one source and by a single manufacturer. H. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment,and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sight lines and • relationships to one another and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing,field testing, or in-service performance. I. Preconstruction Sealant Testing: Perform sealant manufacturer's standard tests for compatibility and adhesion of sealants with each material that will come in contact with sealants and each condition required by curtain-wall systems. 1. Test a minimum of five samples of each metal, glazing, and other material. 2. Prepare samples using techniques and primers required for installed systems. 3. Perform tests under environmental conditions that duplicate those under which systems will be installed. 4. For materials that fail tests,determine corrective measures required to prepare each material to ensure compatibility with and adhesion of sealants, including, but not limited to, specially formulated primers. After performing these corrective measures on the minimum number of samples required for each material, retest materials. 02373.00 08900-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08900 GLAZED ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEMS 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and show recorded measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of assemblies and components adjacent to and penetrating glazed aluminum framing systems to ensure that completed installation meets performance criteria established herein. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Submit a written 5 year warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum framing systems that fail in materials or workmanship. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. • 3. Failure of system to meet performance requirements. 4. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials. 5. Failure of operating components to function normally. 6. Water leakage. 7. Glazing breakage. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Products: The design for glazed aluminum framing systems is based on products manufactured by Kawneer as follows: 1. Curtainwall(CW): 1600 Wall. 2. Storefront(SF):Trifab 451T. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named products or a comparable products by one of the following: 1. Vistawall. 2. EFCO Corporation. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, complying with the requirements of standards indicated below. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. B. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, plates, and bars;ASTM A 611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip; or ASTM A 570 for hot-rolled sheet and strip. C. Glazing as specified in Section 08800-Glazing. D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard pre-molded corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers; in hardness recommended by manufacturer. - - 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 02373.00 08900-4 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08900 GLAZED ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEMS B. Fasteners and Accessories: Aluminum, stainless steel, or ASTM B633 zinc plated steel and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Finish exposed portions to match glazed aluminum framing systems. 1. At movement joints, use slip-joint linings, spacers, and sleeves of material and type recommended by manufacturer. C. Anchors: 3-way adjustable anchors that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements. • D. Thermal Breaks: Continuous polyamide nylon or continuous polyurethane. 1. Polyamide nylon shall be reinforced with glass fibers and shall be mechanically locked to extrusions with closely spaced crimps. 2. Polyurethane shall be poured into a cavity of a single extrusion. The extrusion shall be debridged after the polyurethane hardens. The cavity shall have closely spaced indentations to mechanically lock the polyurethane against slippage in the cavity. E. Windows: Basis of Design: Kawneer"6200T." 1.. Windows: Conforming to requirements ofAAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2-97 classification HC-40 for types indicated, unless otherwise indicated. Water penetration performance to equal or exceed value specified herein for aluminum framing system. a. Comply with Glazing System requirements. b. Vent frames shall be extruded aluminum.Tube perimeter shall be continuous aluminum with • thermal break construction. c. Weatherstrips shall have a continuous spline engaged in a continuous groove in the frame. Provide two continuous lines of weatherstrip at vent perimeters. Weatherstrips shall be extruded neoprene. d. Hinges shall be four-bar stainless steel type 302 or 304 with adjustable friction shoe. Provide 2 hinges per vent which comply with AAMA 904.1 F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements • except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components that,when assembled,will have accurately fitted joints with ends coped or i j mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. B. Frame Units: Factory assemble frame units according to Shop Drawings to greatest extent possible. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. Assemble components to drain-water-passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to the exterior. 1. Install glazing according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of Division 8 Section 08800-Glazing unless otherwise indicated. C. Fabricate system components to the shapes indicated,with allowance for shim spacing around perimeter of assembly. D. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. Seal joints with sealant. • E. Prefabricate custom brake-formed sections from minimum.050 inch thick aluminum to the configurations indicated. Fabricate to have concealed fasteners in the final installation. Prefinished to match framing sections. F. Aluminum Fabrication Tolerances: Conform to AA requirements. G. Isolate aluminum from dissimilar materials 02373.00 08900-5 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08900 GLAZED ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEMS 2.5 FINISHES ' A. Finish for Exposed Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I, clear anodic coating complying with AAMA 611. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate dimensions,tolerances, and method of attachment with the other work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing glazed aluminum framing systems Do not install damaged components. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. Provide means to drain water to the exterior to produce a permanently weatherproof system. B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint C. Securely attach frames to structure. Maintain drainage channels free from construction debris. D. Install factory-assembled frame units plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. ;J. E. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to the exterior. • F. Align frames plumb and level,free of warp or twist, in accordance with the installation tolerances. Maintain dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. G. Install operable windows plumb and level, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather- stripping contact and hardware movement to provide specified performance and proper operation. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Install glazed aluminum framing systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch;where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned surfaces by less than 2 inches, limit offset to 1/2 inch. 4. Location: Limit variation from plane or location shown on Shop Drawings to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform the following tests: 1. Air Infiltration: Test areas of installed system identified by Architect for compliance with system performance requirements according to ASTM E 783. 2. Water Spray Test After completing the installation of 75-feet-by-1-story minimum area of each glazed aluminum framing system, test systems for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2 in a minimum of 3 areas each system as directed by Architect and Construction Manager. B. Repair or remove Work that does not meet requirements or that is damaged by testing; replace to conform to specified requirements. 02373.00 08900-6 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 08900 GLAZED ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEMS 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. • END OF SECTION • • • • • • 02373.00 08900-7 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09260 • GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Non-load-bearing steel framing. • 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each of the materials used. 1.3 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Select framing systems, gages, supports, bracing, and connections as necessary to meet the structural requirements specified. 1. Partition framing shall conform to the widths indicated, unless approved otherwise. Provide thicker gages and decreased stud spacing as necessary to meet the design requirements. 2. Select framing members based on the manufacturer's published span tables. B. Design Loads: 1. Interior Ceiling Assemblies: 5 pounds per square foot uniform live load, plus dead loads: 2. Exterior Soffit Assemblies: 30 psf positive and negative uniform live load, plus dead loads. 3. Interior Partitions without Wall Mounted Casework: 5 pounds per square foot uniform live lateral load. 4. Interior Partitions with Wall Mounted Casework: 5 pounds per square foot uniform live lateral load,casework dead load, and casework live load of 25 PSF of shelf area. 5. Seismic Loads: Conform to the requirements of currently enforced edition of the Uniform Building UBC seismic zone a 3. C. Deflection Requirements: 1. Maximum deflection of 1/240 for flexible finish materials such as gypsum board and veneer plaster. 2. Maximum deflection of 1/360 for rigid finish materials including gypsum plaster, cement plaster, ceramic tile, maximum 3/8"thick stone tile, or mirrors. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Perform work in accordance with GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual." B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Provide assemblies meeting the hourly fire ratings indicated and specified.Assemblies shall be approved by the local jurisdictional authorities. 2. Fire rating requirements take precedence over the construction requirements indicated. In the event of conflict, notify the Architect, and do not begin construction in the area of conflict until the conflict has been resolved. C. Assembly Instructions: Contractor shall keep at the site and make available to installers a copy of the following: 1. Installation requirements for each fire rated assembly. 2. GA 216. 02373.00 09260-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 09260 • GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations,whichever are more stringent. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 - STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch-diameter wire. C. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and capable of sustaining,without failure,a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency. 2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated,fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials,with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating,soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter. E. Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510, mild carbon steel. 1. Diameter: As indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Corrosion-resistant paint. F. Angle Hangers at Soffit Framing: ASTM A 653/A 653M,G60 hot-dip galvanized commercial-steel sheet. G. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch, a minimum 1/2-inch- wide flange,with ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. Depth: As indicated. H. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645,direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall. b. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System. 2.2 STEEL PARTITION FRAMING . A. Components, General: As follows: 1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with ASTM A 653, minimum G40, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 3. Gages: a. Furnish gages as required to meet deflection requirements, unless indicated or specified • otherwise; minimum 25 gage b. Top runner for partitions extending only to the acoustical ceiling grid shall be 20 gage. c. Provide minimum 20 gage for full height partition framing extending from structure to structure. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. C. Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 toprunner with 2-inch deepflanges. 9 02373.00 09260-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES D. Proprietary Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of gypsum board applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Delta Star, Inc., Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System(SFT). b. Metal-Lite, Inc.;Slotted Track. • E. Proprietary Firestop Track: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak. F. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated. G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. I�G H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch deep,steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. I. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size,corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.3 GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. B. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. C. Furnish boards of maximum permissible length for type of installation indicated, tapered edge for boards to be exposed, taped and finished;square edge for boards in concealed applications; 5/8 inch thick unless noted or specified otherwise;furnish type Xfor fire rated partitions. 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS • A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M. 1. Product: "Dens-Shield Tile Backer"manufactured by G-P Gypsum Corp. B. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive for laminated construction: ASTM C557, unless recommended otherwise by the gypsum board manufacturer. B. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Concealed flange crimp-on or tape-on type; metal or PVC at Contractor's option. 2. Control Joint Trim: USG 093 or approved. 3. Reveal Moldings: Fry Reglet Co. , Pittcon Industries, Inc., Gordon Inc, or approved; aluminum extrusions with taping flanges; shapes as indicated. C. Joint Treatment Materials: Comply with ASTM C475 and the following: 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. All Subsequent Coats: Use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Screws:ASTM C1002. 02373.00 09260-3 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665,Type I (blankets without membrane facing)produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral=fiber requirements of assembly. F. Acoustical Sealant Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. One of the following, or approved: 1. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant Non-Flammable- Latex. 2. Pecora Corp.; BA-98. 3. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. • PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION • A. Install steel framing in accordance with ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to � support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars,toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available,with United States Gypsum's"Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure. 2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. a. Use deep-leg or proprietary deflection track. b. Use proprietary firestop track at rated partitions. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently. - - E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated, but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that -- interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Secure hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. 7. Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. 02373.00 09260-4 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES F. Install tracks (runners)at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install foam-gasket isolation strip between studs and wall. 2. Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. 3. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 4. For partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid- structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated. G. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs)at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. H. Firestop Track: 1. Where proprietary fire rated compensating channels are used at heads of fire rated metal stud and gypsum board partitions, install gypsum board in accordance with the track manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 GYPSUM WALLBOARD INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board and finish in accordance with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels. C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent*panels not less than one framing member. D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open • (unsupported)edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts: H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. K. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c. 02373.00 09260-5 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES L. Tile Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. M. Use screws to fasten.gypsum board to metal furring or framing. Adhesive application of gypsum a' board may be used if it is in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and meets fire rating requirements. , N. Double Layer Applications: 1. Use backing board or standard board for first layer. 2. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. O. Trim: 1. Use longest practical lengths,with no piece less than 2 feet long for continuous runs greater than 8 feet Securely fasten and align trim ends at joints. 2. Place concealed flange corner beads at all external corners.At angles other than 90 degrees, • bend the flange to conform to the angle. 3. Place concealed flange type L trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 4. Use J trim at exposed gypsum board edges where sealant joint is indicated. P. Sealant Joints: 1. Coordinate installation of firestopping and sealants at concealed joints between partitions and structure at all fire rated and acoustically insulated partitions. 2. Where sealant joints are indicated at ends or edges of wallboard, install for uniform 1/8 inch joint, unless otherwise indicated. Installation of sealant in exposed locations is specified in Section 07920. Q. Install required number of layers of wallboard behind panel boards, fire extinguisher cabinets, and other recessed elements as necessary to maintain fire rating of walls. 3.3 CONTROL JOINTS A. Discontinue gypsum board and use control joint trim at control joints. B. Coordinate with the framing installer to ensure that framing is installed immediately on either side of each control joint C. Space control joints as indicated. When not indicated, locate as follows: 1. At maximum 30 foot intervals along continuous wall planes. 2. At maximum 50 foot intervals at continuous ceilings with perimeter relief. 3. At maximum 30 foot intervals at continuous ceilings without perimeter relief. 4. At locations where expansion or control joints occur in the building structure. 5. Locate control joints to form rectangular or square sections, in"L,""U,"'T,"or other irregularly shaped areas. 6. Position control joints to intersect light fixtures, air diffusers, door openings, and other areas of stress concentration. D. Verify location with the Architect prior to installation. Give the Architect a minimum of 48 hours notice. 3.4 FINISHING A. Finish to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners,and trim flanges where panels are substrate for tile and where indicated. 3. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first,fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. B. Taping: 1. Apply a uniform layer of taping compound to all joints and angles to be reinforced. _ 2. Apply reinforcing tape immediately centered over the joint and seated into the compound. 3.. Skim coat shall follow immediately but shall not function as a fill or second coat 02373.00 09260-6 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES • 4. Tape shall be properly folded and embedded in all angles to provide a true angle. C. Filling: 1. After taping compound has hardened, apply taping compound,filling the board flush with the surface. 2. The fill coat shall cover the tape and feather out slightly beyond the tape. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Install gypsum board with 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum variation from plane in any direction. • • END OF SECTION • • • • • { I r . 02373.00 09260-7 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION - RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09310 TILE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY j ! A. Section Includes: ' 1. Wail tile. B. Related Sections: 1. 09260-Gypsum Board Assemblies: Tile backing board. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit for each type of tile, grout, adhesive, additive, accessory, and membrane specified. B. Samples: • 1. Tile: Submit samples of each type and color of tile. Include representative range of colors and finishes to be expected. 2. Grout: Submit cured samples of each grout color. C. Schedule: Submit a schedule of each tile type, grout, and joint width combination proposed. 1.3 *QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Conform to ANSI Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile. PART 2-PRODUCTS . 2.1 TILE A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile,"for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B. Tile: As scheduled on drawings. . C. Special Shapes: Unless otherwise indicated or specified,furnish special shapes as standard with the tile manufacturer for uniform transitions and concealed edges in the finished installation. Special shapes include bullnoses, double bullnoses, corner bullnoses, and cove assemblies. 2.2 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar(Thin Set): ANSI A118.4,consisting of the following: 1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive. 2. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. 3. Acceptable Product "211 Crete Filler Powder'with 4237 Latex Thin-set Mortar Additive,"by Laticrete International, Inc. B. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout ANSI A118.6, color as indicated. 1. Polymer Type: Either ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients, or acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to . prepackaged dry-grout mix. 2.. Acceptable Product "500 Series Sanded Grout'with "1776 Grout Admix Plus" by Laticrete International, Inc. 3. Colors: As scheduled. 02373.00 • 09310-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09310 TILE 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Sealer. Colorless, slip-and stain-resistant sealer, not affecting color or physical properties of tile surfaces. Provide the following: 1. "MagicSeal"by Bostik/CeramaSeal(800/356-4903). B. Tile Cleaner. A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. 2.4 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT • A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. .�. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean;free from oil,waxy films, and curing compounds. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Architect. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Ceramic Tile Floor TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards. • B. Wall Application-Thinset over tile backing board. 1. TCA System: W245. 2. Installation Standard: ANSI A108.4. 3. Bond Coat Thinset mortar. C. Joint Pattern: 1. Lay out tile pattern prior to commencing tile installation. 2. Accurately locate grout joints on lines indicated;where not indicated, adjust grout joints within specified tolerances to minimize use of cut tiles at field edges. 3. Where cut tiles are necessary, position tile such that cut tile at each edge of each rectilinear field is not less than half of a full size unit, unless indicated otherwise. D. Tiles shall be blended as required to avoid pattern repeats and"patches"of adjoining tiles of distinctive color or character within each field area. E. Clean joints of mortar to minimum depth of 1/4 inch to allow subsequent grout installation. F. Tolerances: 1. Joint Width Variation: Plus or minus 25%of the proposed joint width. 02373.00 • 09310-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09310 . TILE 1. 2. Taper. Plus or minus 25%from one end to the other. 3. No portion of tile surface shall vary more than 1/16 inch above or below an adjacent tile surface. 4. Install tile fields level to within tolerance specified for finished substrate. 3.3 GROUTING A. Comply with provisions of ANSI A108.10. _ I B. Mix grouts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Grout all joints, except expansion joints, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Float joints to a slightly concave profile. D. Remove excess grout from tile surfaces in accordance with the grout and tile manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use excess amounts of water. • E. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage caused by cleaning agents. Do not use cleaners which would ,, damage tile or grout surfaces. . F. Cured grout joints shall be made free of efflorescence, prior to sealing. • -• 3.4 CURING• A. Cure installation in accordance with the grout manufacturer's recommendations. Protect tile and grout during curing operations. B. Protect tile surfaces during curing. Keep traffic off tile surfaces for a minimum of 4 days, unless • recommended otherwise by the grout or mortar manufacturer. fi 3.5 CLEANING i A. Wash and thoroughly rinse all tile. Leave all tile surfaces clean. II 3.6 TILE SEALING • _ A. Apply stain repellent sealer to all tiled areas in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to achieve maximum penetration into tile body and grouts. B. Apply sealer at earliest possible date allowed by grout and sealer manufacturer. C. Wipe tile surfaces after application as necessary to remove all visible sealer residue. • END OF SECTION . I 02373.00 09310-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall base. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. B. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861. One of the following, or approved: 1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products. • 2. Johnsonite. 3. Roppe Corporation. B. Color: Refer to finish schedule. C. Style: Cove(with top-set toe). D. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. E. Height 4 inches, unless indicated otherwise. F. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length. G. Outside Corners: Premolded. H. Inside Corners: Job formed or premolded. I. Surface: Smooth. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated: PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap,wax, oil,or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 02373.00 09310-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON' SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE _ram C. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. , 3.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters,casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece,with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates,fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces. G. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Clean surfaces to remove marks and soil. B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION • 02373.00 09310-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09775 REINFORCED PLASTIC PANEL WALL COVERING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforced plastic panel wall covering. • 2. Adhesives, sealants, and related accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. 09260-Gypsum Board Assemblies: Substrate. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Product literature on adhesives and sealants to be used in conjunction with panel system installation. 2. Manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for system components. B. Samples: 1. Three samples of wall paneling material proposed for the work; 3 x 4 inch minimum size. 2. One each of each cap, corner, and division molding proposed for the work; minimum 4 inches in length. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 60 degrees F and relative humidity as prescribed by the adhesive manufacturer, during installation, and until installed adhesive is fully cured. B. Allow no containers of adhesive to be opened until all potential sources of flame or spark have been shut down or extinguished and until warnings against their ignition during adhesive application have been posted. . C. Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of solvent based adhesive. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Panel Material: 1. Manufacturer/Type: One of the following: a. Marlite Brand Class I/A Fire Rated FRP by Marlite(Dover, OH 330/343-6621); color as scheduled in the Finish Legend. b. Fire-X Glasbord with Surfaseal, by Kemlite Company(Joliet, IL 800/435-0080); color as scheduled in the Finish Legend. 2. Panel Type: Fiberglass reinforced polyester panels, with embossed textured face. 3. Thickness: 3/32 inch. 4. Size: 48 inches x length required for conditions indicated. 5. Fire Rating: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Moldings: Manufacturer's standard PVC cap, corner, and division moldings; color to match panels. C. Adhesive: 1. For Panel Installation: Marlite Brand C-375 or C-551 Construction Adhesive by Marlite, or 444 Non-Flammable F.R.P. Panel Adhesive by W. W. Henry Company, 2. For Molding Installation: Marlite Brand C-375 C-551 Adhesive by Marlite, or 444 Non-Flammable F.R.P. Panel Adhesive by W.W. Henry Company. 3. Furnish adhesive spreaders with 3/16 inch V-notches, 5/16 inch apart for application of adhesive to panels. 02373.00 09775-1 01/28/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09775 REINFORCED PLASTIC PANEL WALL COVERING D. Sealant: Flexible waterproof sealant for bedding panel edges, Marlite Brand Silicone Sealant MS-251 by Marlite, or Silicone Sealant S255C by Kemlite Company. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Substrate: Verify that drywall substrate is clean, dry, solid, straight, and free from projections. B. Where conditions require installation of paneling prior to installation of flooring, coordinate with other trades to establish.accurate location of top of base. C. Do not start work until other work requiring penetration of wall covering has been completed, or accurately located. D. Commencement of plastic paneling wall covering work constitutes installer's acceptance of the substrate. • 3.2 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut panels accurately to size with proper allowance for expansion and moldings. B. Sand or file all edges smooth without chipping. C. Cut openings for penetrations in accurate location with approximate 1/8 inch clearance around penetrations. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install base molding to wall at proper elevation, in solid bed of adhesive. Allow adhesive to set • thoroughly prior to installation of paneling. B. Seal base molding to top of wall base. C. Establish centerline of each distinct flat area to be covered. Trim division moldings to mate with base moldings; install in solid bed of adhesive, either on centerline, or offset 24inches from center, as necessary to maximize panel widths at corners. Molding shall be installed straight and plumb. D. Cut top cap and division or corner moldings to shape,with edges trimmed to fit to adjacent moldings. E. Apply sealant into installed moldings in sequence with panel installation. F. Apply adhesive to backs of panels in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. G. Maintain lines and levels of panel edges and moldings. - H.* Allow 1/8 inch gap between top cap, corner, or division molding posts, and panel edge; all edges shall be firmly bedded to the moldings in sealant. I. Promptly remove sealant squeeze out with a damp cloth, as work progresses; remove adhesive with appropriate solvent. J. Install sealant behind flanges and at penetrations through paneling, and between top cap of panel and substrate. 3.4 CLEANING A. Inspect surfaces of paneling and remove excess adhesive from face of laminate using solvent recommended by manufacturer. B. Promptly remove unused cut pieces from the site. 02373.00 09775-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09775 REINFORCED PLASTIC PANEL WALL COVERING C. Prior to substantial completion of each area where reinforced plastic panel wall covering is installed, clean all surfaces of plastic panels, using procedures recommended by the manufacturer. ii END OF SECTION ii 02373.00 09775-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Painting of new interior and exterior building surfaces. B. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces,finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code- . required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. 1. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate color. 2. Where color or finish is not designated,the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1.2 DEFINITIONS iva A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85- degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating,finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. B. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application. 3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: --)a. Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch-square samples of each color and material on hardboard. b. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch-square samples of flat metal and two 8-inch-long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. • 02373.00 09900-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 9I A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers,and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. . 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when.the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. . 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal.or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products of the following manufacturer are the basis of the contract documents, unless noted otherwise: 1. Sherwin Williams Company. B. Products of other manufacturers that meet the Product Composition Acceptance Criteria below will be considered in accordance with the substitution procedures specified in Section 01630. Requests for substitution must be accompanied by the following information for each product proposed for use: 02373.00 09900-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING 1. Manufacturer's recommendations for use; include limitations. 2. Manufacturer's recommended primers. C. Product Composition Acceptance Criteria: 1. Solids by Weight: Plus or minus 2 percent of named product. 2. Resin Content: Percentage of total vehicle, not more than 1 percent less than named product. 3. Resin Type: To match or be better than that of named product. Resin will be evaluated on the following basis, listed from most preferable to least desirable: a. Latex/Acrylic: Acrylic, vinyl acrylic, styrenated acrylic, polyvinyl acetate, unspecified latex. b. Alkyd: Long oil, medium oil, short oil, non-specific(presumed short oil). 4. Titanium Dioxide Content: Percentage of total pigment, not more than 2 percent less than named product. 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturers product identification will not be acceptable. C. Colors: Refer to finish schedule. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION . A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions,-with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. } 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 02373.00 09900-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING 2. Concrete: Prepare concrete surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by coating manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish coating to blister and bum, correct this condition before application. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's(SSPC) recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants in accordance with SSPC-SP 1. Scuff all hot-dip galvanized surfaces with 3M Metal Finish pad. a. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to.match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. . Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required,to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. I- 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 02373.00 09900-4 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING • B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices,welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet,velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no bum through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. F. Pigmented(Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. G. Transparent(Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. • 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. . 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the • Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner. a. Quantitative material analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. c. Apparent reflectivity. • • 02373.00 09900-5 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. I. Color retention. m. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint,the 2 coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING • A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades,whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect B. Provide''Wet Paint'signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.7 SCHEDULE OF COATINGS FOR INTERIOR NONTRAFFIC SURFACES A. Gypsum Wallboard: 1. Latex, eggshell:Typical wall finish. a. Preparation coat: "Prep-Rite High Build"; 3.0 DFM. b. Primer: Harmony Interior Latex Primer B11 W 900; 1.3 DFM. c. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. d. Top coat ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel; 1.6 DFM. 2. Latex,flat Ceilings. a. Preparation coat "Prep-Rite High Build"; 3.0 DFM. b. Primer. Harmony Interior Latex Primer B11 W 900; 1.3 DFM. c. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. d. Top coat ProMar 200 Latex Flat; 1.6 DFM. __ B. Concrete: 1. Acrylic Latex: ; a. Block Filler. Loxon block filler. b. Intermediate coat Same as top coat . c. •Top coat ProMar 200 Latex Semigloss; 1.3 DFM. C. Ferrous Metal: Hollow metal doors and frames, handrails, stairs, exposed miscellaneous metals: 1. Direct to Metal Acrylic, semigloss. a. Primer. DTM Acrylic, Semi-Gloss Series B66-200; 3.0 DFM. b. Intermediate coat None required. c. Top coat Same as Primer. • 3.8 SCHEDULE OF COATINGS FOR EXTERIOR NONTRAFFIC SURFACES 02373.00 09900-6 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING A. Concrete: Exposed exterior surfaces. 1. Modified Waterbome Acrylate, sand texture. a. Primer: "54-562,"by Tnemec, 6 mils. b. Intermediate coat: Not required. c. Top coat: High build acrylic with texture to match adjacent EIFS;Tnemec"Enviro-Crete ,- 157"; 9 DFM. B. Ferrous Metal: Structural steel, exposed miscellaneous metal. 1. Urethane, semi-gloss. a. Primer(omit where shop primed): Zinc-rich urethane;Tnemec 90-97'Tneme-zinc';2.5 to= 3.5 DFM. b. Intermediate coat Polyamide epoxy; Tnemec Series 161/66;4 to 6 DFM. c. Top coat High-build acrylic urethane; Tnemec Series 73, "Endura-Shield";2 to 4 DFM. C. Galvanized Metal: Exposed structural steel members, hollow metal doors and frames, canopy framing, exposed miscellaneous metal. . 1. Urethane, semi-gloss. a. Primer: Epoxy"Series 66,"by Tnemec; 2.5 DFM. Not required if shop primed. b. Intermediate coat Not required. c. Top coat: High-build acrylic urethane; Tnemec Series 73, "Endura-Shield"; 2 DFM. D. Wood-Stain Finish: Wood decking and other exterior stained wood items. 1. Semi-Transparent Stain: 2. System: Two coats of exterior wood stain in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. i Each coat shall be spray applied and back brushed P Y PP 3. Product: TWP 100 by Wood Care Systems(800/827-3480). 4. Apply first coat to all wood surfaces prior to installation. Apply second coat after installation by brush or sprayed and back brushed in. END OF SECTION Tf i • 02373.00 09900-7 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Baked enamel units as follows: _f 1. Toilet partitions. 2. Urinal screens. B. Related Sections: 1. 10810-Toilet Accessories. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Toilet Partition Configuration: Floor mounted, overhead-braced design. B. Urinal Screen Configuration: Wall hung, bracket supported. 1.3 SUBMITTALS • A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data, including information on anchors, hardware,fastenings, accessories and installation instructions. B. Samples: 1. Submit manufacturer's complete line of colors for selection by the Architect. 2. Submit one sample of each type of hardware proposed for the Work. • C. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate partition layouts, swing of doors, elevations, anchorage and mounting details, panel construction, components hardware, finishes and all relevant dimensions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to the requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities, including accessibility regulations. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers are approved, subject to the specified requirements: 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. Global Steel Products Corporation. 3. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Metal Panels: 1. Facing Sheets: ASTM A 591/A 591 M, 80Z(24G) (electrolytically zinc-coated)or ASTM A 653/A 653M(hot-dip galvanized or galvannealed), commercial steel sheet for exposed applications, that is mill phosphatized, and selected for smoothness; minimum gages as follows: a. Pilasters: 20 gage. b. Panels: 20 gage. c. Urinal Screens: 20 gage. d. Doors 22 gage. 2. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard impregnated kraft paper honeycomb core. 3. Panel Thicknesses: 1 inch minimum for doors, panels, and screens; 1-1/4 inch minimum for pilasters. 4. Grab-Bar Reinforcement Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units. 02373.00 10160-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON =, SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 5. Fabricate units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement to receive partition-mounted hardware and accessories. Minimum reinforcement gages as follows: a. Concealed Anchorage Reinforcement Minimum 12 gage galvanized steel sheet. b. Concealed Tapping Reinforcement: Minimum 14 gage galvanized steel sheet. 6. Pressure-laminate seamless face sheets to core material, and seal edges with continuous interlocking strip or with lapped and formed edges. 7. Weld edges and corners,with exposed welds ground smooth. 8. Finish: a. Clean galvanized steel surfaces after fabrication and before application of enamel coating system, to remove processing compounds, oils, and other contaminants. b. Prime metal with baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. c. Apply two(2)coats of thermosetting enamel finish, applied by electrostatic process, and baked in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. Color as selected by Architect. B. Overhead Bracing: Continuous extruded aluminum tubing in antigrip profile,with clear anodized finish. C. Pilaster Shoes: ASTM A 167,Type 302/304 stainless steel, not less than 3 inches high, 20 gage, finished to match hardware. D. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching panels to walls and pilasters; Polished stainless steel, unless specified otherwise. Aluminum or low temperature alloy castings not acceptable. E. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy duty operating hardware of polished stainless steel. 1. Hinges: Cutout inset type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. Provide gravity type, spring-action cam type, or concealed torsion-rod type, to suit manufacturer's standards. 2. Latch units for non-handicapped compartments: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted units designed.for emergency access with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. 3. Latch units for handicapped compartments: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted sliding latch units, designed for emergency access and for use by handicapped persons. 4. Coat hook: Manufacturer's standard unit, combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper. 5. Door pull: Manufacturer's standard unit. F. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel finished to match hardware, with tamper-resistant heads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized, cadmium-plated, or other rust-resistant protective-coated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION • A. General: Provide standard doors, panels,screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. 1. Provide internal reinforcement in metal units for compartment-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. B. Toilet Compartments and Screens: Pressure laminate seamless face sheets to core material and provide continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped and formed edges. Seal corners by welding or clips. Grind exposed welds smooth. C. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion- - resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. D. Wall-Hung Screens: Provide units in sizes indicated of same construction and finish as compartment panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide metal-faced screens with integral full-height flanges for attachment to wall. 02373.00 10160-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION • RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS E. Take field measurements prior to fabrication where possible. Coordinate installation of adjacent materials as necessary to accommodate installation within specified requirements. F. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open at any • angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latch and Keeper: Recessed latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 4. Door Bumper. Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumpers at out-swinging doors or entrance screen doors. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at out-swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. G. Urinal Screen Size: 18 x 42, unless indicated otherwise. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Overhead Support Framing: 1. Provide concealed steel framing for support and attachment of ceiling hung partitions. 2. Coordinate with the adjacent construction as necessary to accommodate installation of adjacent materials. 3. Attach pilasters to overhead framing members only. Do not attach to metal deck or other building system components. 4. Support framing shall be rigid and secure and shall be capable of resisting a minimum of 50 plf or _r 1000 lbs dead load,whichever is greater. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch between panels and walls. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Secure panels to walls and panels with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than 2 fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. C. Provide maximum 1/2 inch clearances between pilasters and panels and between panels and walls. D. Equip each door with hinges, one door latch and one coat hook and bumper. Provide door pull on outswinging doors. E. Equip each compartment with convenience shelf. F. Install door strike keeper and door bumper on each pilaster in alignment with door latch. G. All exposed attachments shall be made using tamperproof bolts and nuts. I . • 02373.00 10160-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Hardware Adjustment Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position. B. Remove protective maskings. C. Clean exposed surfaces of panel systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period. D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and screens are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION • 02373.00 10160-4 01/28/03 UNDERGRADUATE TUDENT HOUSING AT BLAKELEY VILLAGE UNIVERS! -SECTION 10210 WALL LOUVERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior architectural metal louvers. B. Related Sections: • 1. 09900-Painting: Shop painting system. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS • • A. Structural Performance: Provide exterior metal louvers capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent deformation of louver components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of AMCA certified louvers with minimum three years experience. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 4 A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. • 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.6 PROTECTION A. Protect louvers and finishes from damage during delivery and installation. B. Protect adjacent surfaces,finishes and materials from damage during installation of louvers. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Airolite Co. • 2. Construction Specialties, Inc. 3. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 4. Ruskin Manufacturing;Tomkins Industries, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. B. Description: 1. Fixed louver design; drainable. Provide blade braces as necessary for a straight non-sagging louver blades. 2. Minimum 0.081"thick extruded aluminum blades and frames. Provide additional thickness as necessary to meet structural requirements. 3. Louver Depth: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. • 00527.00` 10210-1 01/28/03 UNDERGRADUATE STUDENT HOUSING AT BLAKELEY VILLAGE UNIVERSITY OF WASHINGTON • SECTION 10210 WALL LOUVERS 4. Free Area: Minimum 50%for 4 x 4 ft. unit. 5. AMCA certified rating. 6. Maximum 0.01 oz/sq ft.water penetration at 1000 fpm air velocity, when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. 7. Finish: Factory primed and shop finished as specified in Section 09900. Color to match adjacent surfaces. C. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials. 1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 2. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. D. Anchors and Inserts: Of type,size, and material required for loading and installation indicated. Use • nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as needed for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 but containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Blank-Off Panels B. Insulated, Blank-off Panels: Laminated metal-faced panels consisting of insulating core surfaced on back and front with metal sheets. 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Metal Facing Sheets: Aluminum sheet, not less than 0.032-inch nominal thickness. 3. Insulating Core: Unfaced mineral-fiber or foamed-plastic rigid insulation board. 4. Edge Treatment Trim perimeter edges of blank-off panels with louver manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum-channel frames, with corners mitered and with same finish as panels. 5. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with 1/8-by-l-inch PVC compression gaskets. 6. Panel Finish: Same type of finish applied to louvers, but black color. 7. Attach blank-off panels to back of louver frames with stainless-steel, sheet metal screws. C. Louver Screens Provide screen at each exterior louver. 1. Insect Screen: Galvanized steel, 18-by-14 mesh, 0.011-inch wire. • 2. •Screen Location: Interior face. 3. Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated with same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached; mill finish. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated,with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining materials'tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required.for complete assembly. E. Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers where indicated or required • for drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to interior. F. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 00527.00 10210-2 01/28/03 UNDERGRADUATE STUDENT HOUSING AT BLAKELEY VILLAGE UNIVERSITY OF WASHINGTON SECTION 10210 WALL LOUVERS G. Fabricate louvers to the special shapes as indicated on the drawings. • PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings affecting this work are properly prepared and that opening dimensions are as required. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install louvers in openings properly aligned and level. Install in accurate alignment with other exterior cladding elements. B. Secure louver rigid with concealed fasteners. Flash exterior louvers to drain. C. Secure insect screens behind the open portions of each louver. D. Clean surfaces and joints. E. Coordinate with Section 07920 for installation of sealants. END OF SECTION • 00527.00 10210-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 10270 J r ACCESS FLOORING n PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:Access floor and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. 01230-Alternates: Requirements related to the work of this section. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS • A. Structural Performance: Provide access flooring systems capable of withstanding the following loads and stresses, as determined by testing manufacturer's current standard products according to applicable procedures in CISCA A/F, "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors": 1. Concentrated-Load Performance: Capable of withstanding 1000 lb applied on one square inch of panel area at any location within panel,with a bottom-surface deflection under load and a permanent set not to exceed, respectively, 0.08 inch and 0.010 inch. 2. Ultimate-Load Performance: Capable of withstanding a minimum ultimate concentrated load equal to 2 times concentrated design load applied to panels,without failing. 3. Rolling-Load Performance: Capable of withstanding a 200 pound rolling load applied to panels, with a combination of local and overall deformation not to exceed 0.040 inch after exposure to rolling load over CISCA A/F Path A or B,whichever path produces the greatest top-surface deformation. 4. Stringer Concentrated-Load Performance: Capable of withstanding, without panels in place, a concentrated load of 200 lbf at center of span with a permanent set not to exceed 0.010 inch. 5. Pedestal Axial-Load Performance: Capable of withstanding,without panels or other supports in place, a 3000 lbf axial load per pedestal. 6. Pedestal Overturning-Moment Performance: Capable of withstanding,without panels or other supports in place,an overturning moment per pedestal of 1000 lbf x inches. B. Floor Panel Impact-Load Performance: Capable of withstanding an impact load of 100 Ibf when dropped from 36 inches onto a 1-sq. inarea located anywhere on panel,without failing. C. Earthquake Load Performance: Capable of withstanding a lateral seismic force in seismic zone applicable to this Project, according to requirements of building code in effect for this Project's building type. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated including manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate flooring layout, interruptions to grid, special sized panels required, panels drilled or cut-out for services, appurtenances or interruptions, edge details, ramps, railings,and elevation differences, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Verify dimensions of areas for installation by field measurements and indicate measurements.on Shop Drawings. C. Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color and texture required. D. Product test reports. II 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 75 requirements for raised flooring. 1.5 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide three floor panels, three pedestals, and three stringer assemblies. B. Store as directed in clearly marked cartons. 02373.00 10270-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 10270 ACCESS FLOORING PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. InterfaceAR. 2. Maxcess Technologies, Inc. 3. Tate Access Floors, Inc. 2.2 FLOOR PANELS AND UNDERSTRUCTURE Ai A. General: Proprietary portable systems of modular floor panels on elevated supports(understructures) forming accessible underfloor cavities(air spaces)to accommodate electrical and mechanical services complying with the following: 1. Nominal Panel Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2. Panel Fabrication Tolerances: a. Size and Squareness: Plus or minus 0.015 inch of required size,with a squareness tolerance of plus or minus 0.015 inch. b. Flatness: Plus or minus 0.020 inch, measured on a diagonal on top of panel. B. Cementitious-Filled, Formed-Steel Panels: Fabricated with die-cut flat top sheet and die formed and stiffened bottom pan formed from cold-rolled steel sheet joined together by resistance welding to form an enclosed assembly,with metal surfaces protected against corrosion by manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish. C. Pedestals: Base, column with provisions for height adjustment,and head (cap); made of steel or aluminum or a combination of both. 1. Base: Square or circular base with not less than 16 sq. in. of bearing area. 2. Leveling Mechanism: Vibration-proof mechanism for making and holding fine adjustments in height over a range of not less than 2 inches and for locking at a selected height. 3. Height As required to achieve underfloor clearance indicated. 4. Head: Designed to support understructure system indicated. 5. Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: For anchoring pedestal bases to subfloor, provide torque- controlled expansion anchors made from carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5(5 microns)for Class SC 1 service condition (mild),with the capability to sustain,without failure, a load equal to 5 times the loads imposed by pedestal overturning moment on fasteners, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488. • D. Stringer Systems: Bolted modular steel stringer systems made to interlock with pedestal heads and form a grid pattern placing stringers under each edge of each floor panel and a pedestal under each corner of each floor panel;with manufacturer's standard galvanized or corrosion-resistant paint finish. 2.3 ACCESSORIES • A. Cutouts: Provide cutouts in floor panels for cable penetrations and service outlets, reinforced as needed to make panels with cutouts comply with standard performance requirements. 1. Number, Size, Shape, and Location: As indicated. 2. Edge: Fit cutouts with manufacturer's standard grommets in sizes indicated or, if size of cutouts exceeds maximum grommet size available, trim edge of cutouts with manufacturer's standard plastic molding having tapered top flange. a 3. Grommet Covers: Twist close and removable. 4. Cutout Seals: Manufacturer's standard. B. Service Outlets: Standard UL-listed and-labeled assemblies, for recessed mounting flush with top of floor panels, for power, communication, and signal services, and complying with the following: 1. Structural Performance: Cover capable of supporting a 1000-lbf concentrated load. 2. Cover and Box Type: Hinged polycarbonate cover with opening for passage of cables when closed and frame and steel box or formed-steel plate for mounting electrical receptacles. 3. Location: In center of panel quadrant. 4. Receptacles and Wiring: Specified in Division 16 Sections. 02373.00 10270-2 01/28/03 _ RENTON PAVILION • RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 10270 ACCESS FLOORING C. Vertical Closures(Fasciae): Manufacturer's standard metal-closure plates with factory-applied finish. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Locate each pedestal, complete any necessary subfloor preparation,and vacuum clean subfloor to remove dust, dirt, and construction debris before beginning installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION • A. Install access flooring system under supervision of access flooring manufacturer's authorized representative to produce a rigid, firm installation free of vibration, rocking, rattles, and squeaks. B. Attach pedestals to subfloor by postinstalled expansion anchors. C. Lay out floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at floor perimeter to a minimum. Scribe perimeter panels to provide close fit with adjoining construction with no voids greater than 1/8 inch where panels abut vertical surfaces. D. Cut and trim access flooring and perform other dirt-or-debris-producing operations as remotely as possible from installation area and to prevent contamination of subfloor under access flooring already installed. E. Level installed access flooring to within 0.10 inch of true level over entire access flooring area and within 0.062 inch in any 10-foot distance. F. Protection: After completing installation, vacuum clean access flooring and cover with continuous sheets of reinforced paper or plastic. Maintain protective covering until time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION I • • 02373.00 10270-3 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 10525 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: installation of Onwer-provided Fire extinguishers and Cabinets. li B. Related Sections: 1. 09900-Painting: Field paint finish. 1.2 SUBMITTALS . A. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. _. PART 2-PRODUCTS A. Not Used. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings and secured to framing in locations as indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, install 30 inches from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet. - B. Where recessed cabinets are indicated in fire rated walls, maintain fire resistance rating continuously behind the cabinet. C. Install fire extinguisher in each fire extinguisher cabinet by brackets mounted at back of cabinet. D. Where fire extinguishers are indicated for wall mounting, secure bracket to wall through finish to framing or blocking. E. Fire extinguishers shall be installed, charged, tagged, and dated, not more than 30 days prior to building turnover. F. Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely. END OF SECTION 02373.00 10525-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 10705 FIXED SUNSCREENS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Metal sunscreen and sunscreen support system. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide sunscreens,which have been manufactured, fabricated and installed to withstand loads indicated and maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage, or failure. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data sheet for specified products. 1. Performance Certificates. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including anchorage, accessories,finish colors, patterns and textures. 1. Include information necessary for fabrication and installation of louvers. Indicate materials, sizes, thickness, fastenings and profiles. C. Submit two samples of color selected, applied to specified material. D. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria, and physical requirements. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE&HANDLING • A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. s 1. Deliver, store and handle products to avoid any distortion or damage due to moisture, physical abuse or other cause Louvers shall be free from nicks, scratches and blemishes. Replace defective or damaged materials with new. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements:Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Dasolas"UNISUN®F"Solar Shading System; distributed by Newman Architectural Products(604/929-3551). 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions:ASTM B221,Alloy 6063. 1. Thickness: Minimum 0.125 inch. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Blades and Fascia: As indicated on drawings.B. Fully welded construction. 02373.00 10705-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 10705 FIXED SUNSCREENS 2.4 FINISHES A. Shop Finishing: Factory finish louvers and accessories with an 2-coat fluoropolymer coating of Kynar • 500/Hylar 500 conforming to AAMA 605 in a standard color. 1. Thickness: 1.2 mils DFT. B. Finish Protection: Provide finish protection as recommended by louver manufacturer. PART 3-EXECUTION • 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions:Verify substrate conditions,which have been previously installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Anchor sunshade to building sub-structure as indicated on drawings. B. Cut and trim units during erection only with the approval of the manufacturer and in accordance with their recommendations. Restore finish completely. END OF SECTION 1. 02373.00 10705-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 10810 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Toilet and bath accessories. top 3. Fold down baby counter. • f - ro • . B. Related Sections: 1. 09260-Gypsum Assemblies: Metal backing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturers product data, including a description of each item to be supplied. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types,quantities,sizes,and installation locations by room of each accessory required. Use room and product designations indicated. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver accessories to site until rooms in which they are to be installed are ready to receive them. B. Pack accessories individually in a manner to protect accessory and its finish. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Verify locations and dimensions shown with field conditions prior to installation. B. Avoid damaging the work or finish of other trades; repair damage, or replace damaged items, as directed, at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESSORIES A. Basis-of-Design Products: Toilet and bath accessories are based on products manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, approved manufacturers offering comparable products may be incorporated into the Work. B. Furnish the following,unless approved otherwise. 1. Semi-Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: B-3942. 2. Surface Mounted Dual Toilet Paper Dispenser: B-2840. 3. Surface Mounted Seat Cover Dispenser: B-4221. 4. -494ifrori43-4.65. DM' \5. 6. Grab Bars: B-5806x42 inches (side); B-5806x36"(rear). 7. Feminine Napkin Dispenser:B-43500;25 cent coin operation. 8. Mbp and Broom Holder: -223-36 inches. • Lav y 3 St�,�-r►lhAA �tic D. Fold Down Baby Counter: 1. Manufacturer: Koala Corporation (St. Paul, MN; 800/666-0363). 2. Construction: White HDPE shell with steel hinges,counterbalance, safety straps and bed liner dispenser. 3. Basis of Design: "Koala Bear Kare Baby Changing Station"; or approved. 4. Bed Liners: Manufacturer's standard to fit dispenser. 02373.00 10810-1 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 10810 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 3-EXECUTION • 3.1 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to jobsite at appropriate time for building-in. Coordinate installation. B. Furnish templates and rough-in measurements as required. C. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces from damage during installation of work of this Section. D. Verify exact location of accessories. E. Coordinate installation of blocking and backing as necessary to support wall mounted items. 3.2 INSTALLATION __ A. Install accessories using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit - manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 1. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf,when tested according to . method in ASTM F 446. B. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Mount accessories in locations and elevations as indicated on the Drawings. Where elevation is not indicated, mount at the minimum elevation recommended by the manufacturer. D. Use tamper-resistant fasteners. END OF SECTION 02373.00 10810-2 01/28/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. Mechanical demolition. 9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 10. Painting and finishing. 11. Concrete bases. 12. Supports and anchorages. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces,crawispaces,and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1.' ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 6129-08 15050- 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION 5 RENTON,WASHINGTON • SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS a 1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. •s3 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons. B. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code—Steel." B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure III' Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series,"Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction,to allow for mechanical installations. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section"Access Doors and Frames." PART 2-PRODUCTS 6129-08 15050-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPE,TUBE,AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. • 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125,cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250,cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber,flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or e i ring type,unless otherwise indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1,carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B813. F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 6129-08 15050-3 1/24/03 -, RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138. 11, Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer. 2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Smith-Blair, Inc. f. Viking Johnson. 2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. 3. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219,metal sleeve-type coupling. 4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting. B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent- cement-joint end. 1. Manufacturers: a. Eslon Thermoplastics. C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert,and one solvent-cement-joint end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Thompson Plastics, Inc. D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include brass end,solvent-cement-joint end, rubber 0-ring,and union nut. 1. Manufacturers: a. NIBCO INC. b. NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div. E. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 6129-08 15050-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS b. Femco, Inc. c. Mission Rubber Company. d. Plastic Oddities, Inc. 2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder- - joint, plain,or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: . a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Hart Industries, International, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div. g. Zum Industries, Inc.;Wilkins Div. D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. 1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div. E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full- face-or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers,and steel backing washers. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products&Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. j d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures. F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;threaded ends;and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: 6129-08 15050-5 1/24/03 I RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp. G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain,threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America. 2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS 3 i A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products &Systems, Inc. • b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 3. Pressure Plates:Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.7 SLEEVES A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube dosed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40,galvanized, plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe"equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. E. Molded PVC: Permanent,with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 6129-08 15050-6 1/24/03 ! ' RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.8 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. 1 B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish. C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass. D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass. E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish. I F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome- plated finish. G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate. H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw. I j 2.9 GROUT '! A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic,dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi,28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures. B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 6129-08 15050-7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION b RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment;when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. 7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. 3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS-COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. u�' C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls,ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast- brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. 6129-08 15050-8 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type. f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate,stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw. h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with -- polished chrome-plated finish. i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw or spring clips. j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw or spring clips. I. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type. M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves. O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs. t P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.- 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"for flashing. 1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout. 4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants"for materials and installation. Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 6129-08 15050-9 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION L RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron"wall pipes"for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal • pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,ceilings,and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems"for materials. T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. 3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag; dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's"Copper Tube Handbook,"using lead- free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter,using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full'ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. 6129-08 15050- 10 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance"Article. H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix. J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION-COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. 6129-08 15050- 11 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION 4: RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.6 PAINTING A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.7 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base,and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in A Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications"for structural steel. B. Cut,fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.9 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor03 mechanical materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or ; will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 6129-08 15050-12 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON i ! SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.10 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates,and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. Ij D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout,completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 15050 _r Ii 6129-0 15050- 13 1/24/03 8 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15055 MOTORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-and field-installed motors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for mounting motors and vibration isolation and seismic-control devices. 2. Division 15 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor requirements for motor-driven equipment. --'i 1.3 DEFINITIONS 11 A. Factory-Installed Motor: A motor installed by motorized-equipment manufacturer as a component of equipment. B. Field-Installed Motor: A motor installed at Project site and not factory installed as an integral component of motorized equipment. _ 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that motors, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls. Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means"the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b. The term"withstand" means"the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For field-installed motors to include in emergency, operation, .. and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 6129-08 15055-1 1/24/03 ii RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15055 MOTORS 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B. Source Limitations: Where possible, obtain field-installed motors through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices and features that comply with the following: 1. Compatible with the following: a. Magnetic controllers. b. Multispeed controllers. c. Reduced-voltage controllers. 2. Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers where applicable, and suitable for use throughout speed range without overheating. 3. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load. 4. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. B. Coordinate motor support with requirements for driven load; access for maintenance and motor replacement; installation of accessories, belts, belt guards; and adjustment of sliding rails for belt tensioning. C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement,and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Motor requirements apply to factory-and field-installed motors except as follows: 1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for motor are specified in another Section. 2. Motorized-equipment manufacturer requires ratings, performance, or characteristics, other than those specified in this Section,to meet performance specified. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Motors 3/4 HP and Larger: Three phase, unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Motors Smaller Than 3/4 HP: Single phase, unless specifically noted otherwise. 6129-08 15055-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15055 MOTORS C. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz. D. Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which motor is connected. E. Service Factor: 1.15 for open dripproof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors. F. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. H. Enclosure: Open dripproof. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Standard,as defined in NEMA MG 1. • C. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Multispeed motors shall have separate winding for each speed. D. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated. E. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated. G. Insulation: Class F,unless otherwise indicated. H. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. I. Enclosure: Cast iron for motors 7.5 hp and larger,rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5 hp. 1. Finish: Gray enamel. 2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Designed with critical vibration frequencies outside operating range of controller output. 2. Temperature Rise: Matched to rating for Class B insulation. 3. Insulation: Class H. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. 6129-08 15055-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION LL� RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15055 MOTORS B. Rugged-Duty Motors: Totally enclosed, with 1.25 minimum service factor, greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings insulated with non-hygroscopic material. 1. Finish: Chemical-resistant paint over corrosion-resistant primer. C. Source Quality Control for Field-Installed Motors: Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG 1: 1. Measure winding resistance. 2. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency. 3. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency. 4. Perform high-potential test. 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split-phase start,capacitor run. 3. Capacitor start,capacitor run. B. Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only. C. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. D. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft;sealed,prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors. E. Source Quality Control for Field-Installed Motors: Perform the following tests on each motor according to NEMA MG 1: -- 1. Measure winding resistance. 2. Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency. • 3. Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency. 4. Perform high-potential test. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive field-installed motors for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances,and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before motor installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 6129-08 15055-4 1/24/03 I RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15055 MOTORS 3.2 FIELD-INSTALLED MOTOR INSTALLATION A. Anchor each motor assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and sized n align to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level e and a gn with load transfer link. B. Install motors on concrete bases complying with Division 3. C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." 3.3 ADJUSTING _I A. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 CLEANING A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and other spots,dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. B. Clean motors,on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 15055 1 6129-08 15055-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. i 6. Pipe stands. 7. Pipe positioning systems. 8. Equipment supports. 4 B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. Division 13 Section"Fire-Suppression Piping"for pipe hangers for fire-protection piping. 3. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for vibration isolation devices. 4. Division 15 Section"Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops"for pipe guides and anchors. 5. Division 15 Section(s)"Metal Ducts"for duct hangers and supports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems,system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and•connected systems and components. C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 6129-08 15060-1 1/24/03 II RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Fiberglass pipe hangers. 3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 4. Powder-actuated fastener systems. 5. Pipe positioning systems. B. Welding certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code—Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel." 3. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code—Reinforcing Steel." 4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications"Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. B. Manufacturers: 1. AAA Technology&Specialties Co., Inc. 2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports. 3. B-Line Systems, Inc.;a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Carpenter&Paterson, Inc. 5. Empire Industries, Inc. 6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 8. Grinnell Corp. 9. GS Metals Corp. 10: National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. : -- 12. PHS Industries, Inc. 13. Piping Technology&Products, Inc. 14. Tolco Inc. C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 6129-08 15060-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating,jacket, or liner. li E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping. 2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods,nuts, saddles,and U-bolts. 2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS I ' A. Description: MFMA-3, shop-or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components. B. Manufacturers: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc.;a division of Cooper Industries. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. 3. GS.Metals Corp. 4. Power-Strut Div.;Tyco International, Ltd. 5. Thomas&Betts Corporation. 6. Tolco Inc. 7. Unistrut Corp.;Tyco International, Ltd. C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating,jacket,or liner. 2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Description: 100-psig-minimum,compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield. B. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter&Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 3. PHS Industries, Inc. 4. Pipe Shields, Inc. 5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Value Engineered Products, Inc. C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552,Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier. D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552,Type II cellular glass. circumference of pipe. E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entirep p F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. 6129-08 15060-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION : t RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS • G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc. d. MKT Fastening, LLC. e. Powers Fasteners. off' B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type stainless steel,for use in hardened portland • cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads a{ and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturers: a. B-Line Systems, Inc.;a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners. 2.7 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications. B. Manufacturers: 1. C&S Mfg.Corp. 2. HOLDRITE Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises. 3. Samco Stamping, Inc. 2.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 6129-08 15060-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that,are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. _ 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required. 5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off- center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 6. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 9. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2. 10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Tumbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 12.• U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. 14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 6129-08 15060-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction •Ig might occur. 19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. 20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary. 21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to - NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction. G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS20. 2. Carbon-or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,install the following types: 1. Steel Tumbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises(MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Tumbuckles(MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1, 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps(MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5.• C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 6. Top-Beam Clamps(MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 7. Side-Beam Clamps(MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 8. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. .� 9. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: 6129-08 15060-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS a. Light(MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy(MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 10. Side-Beam Brackets(MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 11. Plate Lugs(MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 12. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited. I � J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields(MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint-Control Devices(MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1- 1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability { factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze(MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member. L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. N. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. 6129-08 15060-7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS O. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems. D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for plumbing fixtures. - G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,expansion loops, expansion bends,and similar units. J. Ins'tall lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. 6129-08 15060-8 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum ti pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping)are not exceeded. N. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight- p distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight- distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. 5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. C. Provide lateral bracing,to prevent swaying,for equipment supports. 3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill,and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports. 6129-08 15060-9 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. .LLB' 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.6 PAINTING A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1.- Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 15060 . 6129-08 15060- 10 1/24/03 a- RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15071 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Elastomeric isolation pads and mounts. 2. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 3. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators. 4. Housed spring mounts. 5. Elastomeric hangers. 6. Spring hangers. 7. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops. 8. Thrust limits. 9. Pipe riser resilient supports. 10. Resilient pipe guides. 11. Restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails. 12. Seismic snubbers. 13. Restraining cables. } 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. A,,: Effective peak velocity related acceleration coefficient. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Siesmic design shall be suitable for Zone 3 as identified in the UBC and occupancy classifications as identified in the Architectural drawings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following: 1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads. 3. Seismic-Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of seismic restraints and snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of anchors. C. Welding certificates. 1 24/03 6129-08 15071 1 / RENTON PAVILION y ai RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15071 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that all specified equipment will withstand seismic forces identified in "Performance Requirements"Article above. Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of ; assembled components or on calculations. a. The term"withstand"means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b. The term "withstand"means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. _ 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis performed according to OSHPD and shall bear anchorage preapproval "R" number, from OSHPD or another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic- restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic- restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Testing and calculations must include both shear and tensile loads and 1 test or analysis at 45 degrees to the weakest mode. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code- -Steel." 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement,and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section"Roof Accessories." 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 1 -2 1507 1/24/03 6129 08 I4 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15071 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Available Manufacturers: B. Manufacturers: 1. Ace Mounting Co., Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. B-Line Systems, Inc. . 4. California Dynamics Corp. 5. Isolation Technology, Inc. 6. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 7. Mason Industries, Inc. 8. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 9. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc. 10. Vibration Mountings&Controls/Korfund. C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable,open-spring isolators. i !( 1. 'Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 100 psig. 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw !Y . to fasten and level equipment. D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint. 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. E. Housed Spring Mounts : Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers. 1. • Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint. 2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure. 3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel before contacting a resilient collar. • F. Elastomeric Hangers : Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color- code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. 6129-08 15071 -3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION rr RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15071 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS G. Spring Hangers : Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. H. Thrust Limits : Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to equipment. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at start and stop. 2.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES A. Available Manufacturers: B. Manufacturers: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. B-Line Systems, Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corp. 4. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 5. Loos&Co., Inc.; Cableware Technology Division. 6. Mason Industries, Inc. 7. TOLCO Incorporated. 8. Unistrut Diversified Products Co.;Wayne Manufacturing Division. 9. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 10.• Vibration Isolation Co., Inc. 11. Vibration Mountings&Controls/Korfund. C. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1-piece, molded, bridge-bearing neoprene complying with AASHTO M 251 with a flat washer face. D. Seismic Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts,and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings. 6129-08 15071 -4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON • SECTION 15071 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge kw female-wedge type. 2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1-piece, molded, bridge-bearing neoprene complying with AASHTO M 251. E. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections made of steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts for cable engagement. F. Anchor Bolts: Seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488/E 488M. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHES Manufacturer's standardprime-coat finish readyfor fieldpainting. A. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping. 1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be electrogalvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate capacity range. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. li 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations as specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." B. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on either side of equipment. I' C. Install seismic snubbers on isolated equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure. it D. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. 6129-08 15071 -5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION 72 RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15071 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS E. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-iron clamps to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods. F. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts. 3.3 EQUIPMENT BASES A. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 3000-psi concrete; trowel to a smooth finish. 1. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to supported equipment manufacturer's written instructions for seismic codes at Project site. v 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 2. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete ,yam base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions,and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 5. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality- control testing: B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing: tom. C. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing: 1. Isolator seismic-restraint clearance. 2. Isolator deflection. 3. Snubber minimum clearances. 4. Test and adjust air-mounting system controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. C. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop. 6129-08 15071 -6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15071 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS D. Adjust active height of spring isolators. E. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations. F. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. G. Torque anchor bolts accordingto equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to resist seismic forces. 3.6 CLEANING A. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic-control devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,operate,and maintain air-mounting systems. Refer to Division 1 Section"Closeout." e.; END OF SECTION 15071 • 6129-08 15071 -7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation: 1. Equipment nameplates. 2. Equipment markers. 3. Equipment signs. 4. Access panel and door markers. 5. Pipe markers. 6. Duct markers. 7. Stencils. 8. Valve tags. 9. Valve schedules. 10. Warning tags. 1.3 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Valve numbering scheme. C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies(in addition to mounted copies) to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems,"for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES . A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on equipment. 6129-08 15075- 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 1. Data: a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number. b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data. c. Labels of tested compliances. 2. Location: Accessible and visible. 3. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment. B. Equipment Markers: Engraved,color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent adhesive. 1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. 2. Data: a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. c. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and speed. 3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for equipment. C. Equipment Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core,with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening. 1. Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures. 2. Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match -- equipment identification. 3. Thickness: 1/16 inch for units up to 20 sq. in.or 8 inches in length, and 1/8 inch for larger units. _ 4. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type,permanent adhesive. D. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch-thick, engraved laminated plastic,with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for attachment. 1. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive. 2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing direction of flow. . 1. ' Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. 3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location. 4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label. 6129-08 15075-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow. B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back. 2.3 DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A. Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of airflow and duct service(such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type, permanent adhesive. - 2.4 STENCILS A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door markers,equipment markers, equipment signs,and similar operational instructions. 1. Stencil Material: Metal or fiberboard. 2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. 3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 VALVE TAGS A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2- inch numbers, with numbering scheme proposed by Contractor and approved by Engineer. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener. 1. Material: 3/32-inch-thick laminated plastic with 2 black surfaces and white inner layer. 2. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain;or S-hook. 2.6 VALVE SCHEDULES A. Valve .Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open,closed, or modulating),and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve-Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws. 2. Frame: Extruded aluminum. 3. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, single-thickness glass. 2.7 WARNING TAGS A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partiallypreprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. Size:3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string. 6129-08 15075-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT OPERATE. 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option. 3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the ate" following general categories of equipment: 1. Fuel-burning units, including boilers,furnaces, heaters,stills,and absorption units. y' 2. Pumps,compressors,chillers,condensers,and similar motor-driven units. 3. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar equipment. 4. Fans,blowers,primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. 5. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. B. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers may be omitted if both are indicated. 1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units,indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions,warn of hazards and improper operations,and identify units. 3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general categories of equipment a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. b. Fire department hose valves and hose stations. c. Meters,gages,thermometers,and similar units. d. Fuel-burning units, including boilers,furnaces, heaters, stills,and absorption units. e. Pumps,compressors,chillers,condensers, and similar motor-driven units. f. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and • similar equipment. g. Fans, blowers,primary balancing dampers,and mixing boxes. h. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. i. Tanks and pressure vessels. j. Strainers,filters, humidifiers,water-treatment systems,and similar equipment. 6129-08 15075-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION C. Stenciled Equipment Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of laminated- plastic equipment markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification. D. Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment Locate signs where accessible and visible. 1. Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color codes: a. Green: For cooling equipment and components. !b. Yellow: For heating equipment and components. lc. Green and Yellow or Orange: For combination cooling and heating equipment and components. ,d. Brown: For energy-reclamation equipment and components. 2. .Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches,and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. } 3. ,Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions,warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units. 4. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment: a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. ,b. Fuel-burning units, including boilers,furnaces, heaters, stills,and absorption units. c. Pumps,compressors,chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. rd. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar equipment re. Fans,blowers,primary balancing dampers,and mixing boxes. f. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. ig. Tanks and pressure vessels. 'h. Strainers,filters, humidifiers,water-treatment systems,and similar equipment. E. Stenciled Equipment Sign Option: Stenciled signs may be provided instead of laminated-plastic equipment signs, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification. F. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels. 3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow indication arrows showing direction of flow. 1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pretensioned pipe markers. lUse size to ensure a tight fit. 2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Self-adhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 1-1/2 inches at both ends of pipe marker,and covering full circumference of pipe. 3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Shaped pipe markers. Use size to match pipe and secure with fasteners. 6129-08 15075-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least 3 inches at both ends of pipe marker,and covering full circumference of pipe. B. Stenciled Pipe Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of manufactured pipe markers, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe markers with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles approved by submittal on each piping system. 1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking. C. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior _ nonconcealed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. s, Where flow pattern is not obvious,mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls,floors,ceilings,and nonaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers. 3.4 DUCT IDENTIFICATION A. Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes: 1. Green: For cold-air supply ducts. 2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts. 3. Blue: For exhaust-, outside-,relief-, return-,and mixed-air ducts. 4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust. 5. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. B. Stenciled Duct Marker Option: Stenciled markers, showing service and direction of flow, may be provided instead of laminated-plastic duct markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification. C. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. 3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. 6129-08 15075-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following: 1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. c. Fire Protection: 1-1/2 inches, round. d. Gas: 1-1/2 inches, round. • Valve-Tag Color: e. Cold Water: Natural. .f. Hot Water: Natural. g. Fire Protection: Natural. h. Gas: Natural. 2. Letter Color: a. Cold Water: Black. .b. Hot Water: Black. c. Fire Protection: Black. d. Gas: Black. 3.6 VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION A. Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room. 3.7 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by other work. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules. END OF SECTION 15075 6129-08 15075-7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15081 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation; insulating cements;field-applied jackets;accessories and attachments;and sealing compounds. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. 2. Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application for pumps,tanks,hydronic specialties,and other equipment. 3. Division 15 Section"Pipe Insulation"for insulation for piping systems. 4. Division 15 Section"Metal Ducts"for duct liner. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any),for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: 1. Removable insulation sections at access panels. 2. Application of field-applied jackets. 3. Applications at linkages for control devices. ii C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 12-inch-square sections of each sample material. 1. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type of field-applied finish material indicated. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests. E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. 6129-08 15- 11/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15081 DUCT INSULATION B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and - sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed • rating of 150 or less. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation,type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application. 1.7 SCHEDULING after testingduct systems. Insulation application maybegin on A. Schedule insulation application y pp 9 segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering Available Manufacturers: p q products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH. c. Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp. d. Schuller International, Inc. 2. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Rubatex Corp. 3. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation: a. Kooltherm Insulation Products, Ltd. 6129-08 15-21/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15081 1 ,1 DUCT INSULATION 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612,Type IB,without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper,reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil,and vinyl film. B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II,without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper,reinforcing scrim,aluminum foil, and vinyl film. C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. j Comply with ASTM C 534,Type II for sheet materials. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. 11 D. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation: Block insulation of rigid,expanded,dosed-cell structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126,Type II,Grade 1. 2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. General: ASTM C 921,Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. - B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil. C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray. 2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave,presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq.yd.. 1, 1. Tape Width: 4 inches. B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666,Type 304;0.020 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick. C. Wire: ,0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch, soft-annealed,galvanized steel. D. Weld-Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper-coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 1. Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the attached surface. 6129-08 15-31/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15081 DUCT INSULATION E. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface. F. Self-Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials,jackets,and substrates. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions;with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;and free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each duct system. C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder. F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. 6129-08 15-41/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15081 DUCT INSULATION H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical. I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder. L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows: 1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders. 1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor- retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures,tears,and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal. 2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing. 1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic. 2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends. 3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic. P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions. Q. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. 3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot,for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 6129-08 15-51/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15081 DUCT INSULATION 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. 4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers. 5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with , insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. 7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger,and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 10. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder. B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot,for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Space anchor pins as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints.Apply additional pins and Gips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. 4. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 6129-08 15-61/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15081 DUCT INSULATION 5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. 6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener,hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 8. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder. 3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION A. Apply insulation to ducts and plenums as follows: 1. Follow the manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation. 2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the duct and plenum surface. 3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION A. Apply glass-cloth jacket,where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory- ' applied jackets. 1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of jacket manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation. 3.7 FINISHES A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in Division 9 Section"Painting." B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. 3.8 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems: 1. Indoor concealed supply and outside-air ductwork. 2. Indoor exposed supply,and outside-air ductwork. 3. Outdoor exposed supply ductwork. 6129-08 15-71/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15081 DUCT INSULATION 4. Indoor exposed oven and dishwasher exhaust ductwork. 5. Indoor concealed oven and dishwasher ductwork. D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment: 1. Metal ducts with duct liner. 2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 3. Factory-insulated plenums,casings,terminal boxes,and filter boxes and sections. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Vibration-control devices. 6. Testing agency labels and stamps. 7. Nameplates and data plates. 8. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems. 3.9 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Service: Round and rectangular,supply-air ducts, concealed. 1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. 2. Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required:Yes. B. Service: Round and rectangular,supply-air ducts, concealed. 1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. 2. Thickness:3 inches 3. Number of Layers:Two. 4. Field-Applied Jacket:Foil and paper. - 5. Vapor Retarder Required:Yes. C. Service: Round and rectangular return-air ducts,exposed. • 1. Material: Mineral-fiber board. 2. Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Number of Layers:Two. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: PVC. 5. Vapor Retarder Required:Yes. D. Service: Rectangular, supply-air ducts,exposed. 1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. 2. Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. • Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. END OF SECTION 15081 6129-08 15-81/24/03 - RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15082 EQUIPMENT INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes blanket, board, and block insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section"Duct Insulation"for insulation materials and application for ducts and plenums. 2. Division 15 Section"Pipe Insulation"for insulation for piping systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any),for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: 1. Field application for each equipment type. 2. Removable insulation sections at access panels. 3. Application of field-applied jackets. C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 12-inch-square sections of each sample material. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests. E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 6129-08 15082-1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15082 EQUIPMENT INSULATION 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed s' rating of 150 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation,type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for insulation application. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH. c. Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp. d. Schuller International, Inc. 2. Cellular-Glass Insulation: a. Pittsburgh-Corning Corp. 3. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Rubatex Corp. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612,Type IB,without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film. B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553,Type II,without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film. C. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells, incombustible. 6129-08 15082-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15082 EQUIPMENT INSULATION 1. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552,Type I. 2. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552,Type III. 3. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552,Type IV. D. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534,Type II for sheet materials. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS _!i A. General: ASTM C 921,Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil. C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray. 3. PVC Jacket Color: Color-code to match connected piping jackets based on materials contained within the piping system. 2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics,plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq.yd.. 1. Tape Width: 4 inches. B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket: 1 , 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666,Type 304;0.020 inch thick. I 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick. C. Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch, soft-annealed,galvanized steel. D. Weld-Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper-coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 11, 1. Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the attached surface. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer E. p manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for - insulation thickness indicated. • 1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface. ;- I 6129-08 15082-3 • 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15082 EQUIPMENT INSULATION F. Self-Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated. 2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials,jackets,and substrates. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. - B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written , instructions;with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;and free of voids throughout the length of equipment. B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each equipment system. C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state. D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder. F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical. I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 6129-08 15082-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15082 EQUIPMENT INSULATION J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor •retarder. L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows: 1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation to less.than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on equipment scheduled to receive vapor retarders. Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having'same facing as insulation. Repair punctures,tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal. O. Insulate the following indoor equipment: - 9 1. Chilled-water air separators (small tanks). 2. Chilled-water pump housings. 3. Domestic hot-water storage tanks, not factory insulated. 4. Heating hot-water air separators(small tanks). 5. Condensate receivers, not factory insulated. 6. Deaerators, not factory insulated. P. Omit insulation from the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Hand holes. 6. Cleanouts. • 3.4 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION A. Apply glass-cloth jacket where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory- applied jackets. 1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of jacket manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation. B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated. 6129-08 15082-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15082 EQUIPMENT INSULATION 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.4. Apply jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-retarder mastic. C. PVC Jackets: Apply jacket with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels • for horizontal applications. Secure and seal seams and end joints with manufacturer's welding adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along the seam and joint edge. 3.5 FINISHES A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in Division 9 Section"Painting." B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:. After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Owner will engage a qualified inspection agency to perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements: B. Inspection: Engage a qualified inspection agency to perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials,jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements: C. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials,jackets,and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements: 1. Inspect pumps and tanks randomly selected by Architect. 2. Remove insulation and covers from two chilled-water pumps or one percent of chilled- water pumps,whichever is greater. 3. Remove insulation and covers from two small tanks or one percent of small tanks, whichever is greater. D. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these Specifications. E. Reinstall insulation and covers on pumps and tanks uncovered for inspection according to these Specifications. 3.7 EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. 6129-08 15082-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15082 EQUIPMENT INSULATION B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. 3.8 INTERIOR TANK AND VESSEL INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Equipment: Chilled-water air separators and compression tanks. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric. 3. Insulation Thickness: 4 inches 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Glass cloth. 5. Vapor Retarder Required:Yes. 6. Finish: Painted. -LL; B. Equipment: Domestic hot-water storage tanks, not factory insulated. 1. Operating Temperature: 55 to 140 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. • ' 'I 3. Insulation Thickness: 4 inches 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Glass cloth. 5. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 6. Field-Applied Jacket: PVC. 7. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum. C. Equipment: Heating hot-water air separators and compression tanks. i f 1. Operating Temperature: 100 to 200 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: 4 inches. 4. Field-Applied Jacket Glass cloth. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. 6. Finish: Painted. END OF SECTION 15082 6129-08 15082-7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15083 PIPE INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field- ; applied jackets;accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. 2. Division 15 Section"Duct Insulation"for insulation for ducts and plenums. 3. Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application for pumps,tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment. 4. 'Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and protection saddles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any),for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: 1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation. 3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections. 6. Application of field-applied jackets. C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit Samples in the following sizes: 1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2. 2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches square. 3. Jacket Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests. E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements. 6129-08 15083- 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15083 PIPE INSULATION 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 150 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation,type and grade,and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15 Section"Hangers and Supports." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application. C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and,where required, after installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have satisfactory test results. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH. c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. d. Schuller International, Inc. 6129-08 15083-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15083 PIPE INSULATION 2. Cellular-Glass Insulation: a. Pittsburgh-Coming Corp. 3. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Rubatex Corp. 4. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation: a. Kooltherm Insulation Products, Ltd. 5. Calcium Silicate Insulation: a. Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corp. b. Pabco. c. Schuller International, Inc. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the 11 -following: 1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied, all- 3 purpose,vapor-retarder jacket. 2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553,Type II,without facing. 3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A 3316C in the following classes and grades: a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation. b. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces. 4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C,Type II. 5. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195. 6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196. 7. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M. B. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells, incombustible. 1. Preformed Pipe Insulation,without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552,Type II, Class 1. 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation,with Jacket Comply with ASTM C 552,Type II, Class 2. C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534,Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. P Y YP YP 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. 6129-08 15083-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15083 PIPE INSULATION D. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Preformed pipe sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533,Type I. E. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves,elbows,tees, and flanges. 2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. General: ASTM C 921,Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil. C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray. 3. PVC Jacket Color: Color-code piping jackets based on materials contained within the piping system. _ D. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-mil-thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC. 1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories for the disabled. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. E. Aluminum Jacket: Factory cut and rolled to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper. F. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock, ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper. 1. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil-thick,heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. 2. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows; same material, finish,and thickness as jacket. 2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics,plain weave,presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq.yd.. 1. Tape Width: 4 inches. B. Barids: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666,Type 304;0.020 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick. C. Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, galvanized steel. 6129-08 15083-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15083 PIPE INSULATION 2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials,jackets,and substrates. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping,,including fittings,valves, and specialties. B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each piping system. C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs. E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets,clips,or other attachment devices to piping,fittings, and specialties. G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder. H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical. K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor- retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulation over fittings,valves, and specialties. 6129-08 15083-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15083 PIPE INSULATION L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors,and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. 1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder. 3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and shield. M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder. N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate. O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows: 1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip and spaced 4 inches o.c. - 3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder. 4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges,unions,valves,and fittings. 5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with vapor-retarder mastic. P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing. 1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic. 2. Applyinsulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends. PP 9 Y 3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic. Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic. R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and floors. 6129-08 • 15083-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15083 PIPE INSULATION S. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously.through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping." T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly. 1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where floor • supports penetrate vapor retarder. • 3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION - A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows: • 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor- ; i• retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic. B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows: 1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic. C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows: 1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire,tape,or bands. 3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. • D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows: 1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without disturbing insulation. 6129-08 15083-7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15083 PIPE INSULATION 3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic. 5. Use preformed heavy PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic. 6. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer. 3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows: 1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation. 2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface. B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows: 1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface. C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows: 1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface. D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows: 1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to stainer basket. 3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's • recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface. 3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION A. Apply glass-cloth jacket,where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory- applied jackets. 6129-08 15083-8 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15083 PIPE INSULATION 1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of jacket manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation. B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated. 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Apply jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-retarder mastic. C. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. D. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. 3.7 FINISHES A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in Division 9 Section"Painting." B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. 3.8 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems,materials,and equipment: 1. Flexible connectors. 2. Vibration-control devices. 3. Fire-suppression piping. 4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury. 7. Air chambers,unions, strainers,check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators. j 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Aid the consultant in performing the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation materials,jackets,and finishes,to determine compliance with requirements: 1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Architect. 6129- 1 08 5083- 9 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15083 PIPE INSULATION 2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for various pipe sizes. 3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves,whichever is less,for various pipe sizes. B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these Specifications. C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to these Specifications. 3.10 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders, and field-applied jackets. B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material, thickness,and jacket requirements. 3.11 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Service: Domestic hot and recirculated hot water. 1. Operating Temperature: 60 to 140 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses: a. Copper Pipe,:2"and less: 1"thick. b. Copper Pipe,:2'/z"and above: 1 1/z"thick. 4. Jacket: Foil and paper or field and factory applied jacket, sealed in field. 5. Vapor Retarder Required:Yes. 6. Finish: None. B. Service: Domestic chilled water. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 60 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses: a. Copper Pipe,:All sizes 1 inch thick. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required:Yes. 6. Finish: None. C. Service: Rainwater conductors. 1. Operating Temperature: 32 to 100 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses: 4/03 6129-08 15083- 10 1/2 I f RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15083 PIPE INSULATION { „ a. Cast Iron, Copper, PVC Pipe,: All sizes: 1"thick. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required:Yes. 6. Finish:None. D. Service: Roof drain bodies. 1. Operating Temperature: 32 to 100 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric. 3. Insulation Thickness: 1 "thick. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required:Yes. 6. Finish:None. E. Service: Condensate drain piping. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric. 3. Insulation Thickness: 1 inch thick. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: None. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes. 6. Finish:None. F. Service: Exposed sanitary drains and domestic water supplies and stops for fixtures for the disabled. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 120 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric. 3. Insulation Thickness: 1 inch thick. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: PVC P-trap and supply covers. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. 6. Finish:None. G. Service: Chilled-water supply and return. 1. Operating Temperature: 35 to 75 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses: a. Steel Copper Pipe,:All sizes 1 inch thick. Chilled water above 40 degrees F. b. Steel Pipe,IA inch to 2 inches: 1 inch thick. c. Steel Pipe,2.5 inch to 6 inches: 1.5 inch thick. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: PVC. 5. Vapor Retarder Required:Yes. 6. ' Finish:None. H. Service: Condenser-water supply and return. 1. Operating Temperature: 50 to 105 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses: 6129-08 15083- 11 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION 1 RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15083 PIPE INSULATION a. Steel, Copper, PVC Pipe: All sizes 1 inch thick. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: PVC. 5. Vapor Retarder Required:Yes. 6. Finish: None. I. Service: Heating hot-water supply and return. 1. Operating Temperature: 100 to 200 deg F. 2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber. 3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses: a. Steel Copper Pipe,: All sizes 1 1/2 inches thick. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper. 5. Vapor Retarder Required:No. 6. Finish: None. END OF SECTION 15083 • 6129-08 15083-12 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves: _ 1. Bronze angle valves. 2. Cast-iron angle valves. 3. Copper-alloy ball valves. 4. Ferrous-alloy ball valves. 5. Ferrous-alloy butterfly valves. 6. Bronze check valves. 7. Gray-iron swing check valves. 8. Ferrous-alloy wafer check valves. 9. Spring-loaded,lift-disc check valves. 10. Bronze gate valves. 11. Cast-iron gate valves. 12. Bronze globe valves. 3 13. Cast-iron globe valves. 14. Cast-iron plug valves. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for site construction piping. 2. Division 13 fire-suppression piping and fire pump Sections for fire-protection valves. 3. Division 15 Section"Mechanical Identification"for valve tags and charts. 4. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control valves and actuators. 5. Division 15 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves: 1. CWP: Cold working pressure. 2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 3. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 4. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. 5. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body,seating,and trim materials;valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;furnished specialties;and accessories. 6129-08 15110-1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Ii A. ASME Compliance:ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. 1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water, sanitary waste, and storm drainage piping valves unless referenced. B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design criteria. C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. _2. Protect threads,flange faces,grooves,and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate,and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 VALVES, GENERAL A. General: Valve ratings shall exceed respective system operating pressures by 50% (minimum). All valves shall be in line size unless otherwise noted. B. Refer to Part 3"Valve Applications"Article for applications of valves. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends,, unless otherwise indicated. 6129-08 15110-2 1/24/03 { RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON t SECTION 15110 VALVES D. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated. E. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. G. Valve Actuators: 1. Chainwheel: For attachment to valves, of size and mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation"Article in Part 3. 2. Gear Drive: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger. 3. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 4. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller,except plug valves. 5. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10 plug valves,for each size square plug head. H. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves. I. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves. J. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606. 1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 3 a. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate, and globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves. - 2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. K. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. 2.3 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES A. Available Manufacturers: B. Manufacturers: 1. Type 1, Bronze Angle Valves with Metal Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. • f. Red-White Valve Corp. 2. Type 2, Bronze Angle Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Cincinnati Valve Co. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 6129-08 15110-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Stockham Div. f. Grinnell Corporation. -� g. Hammond Valve. h. NIBCO INC. i. Powell,Wm.Co. 3. Type 3, Bronze Angle Valves with Metal Disc and Renewable Seat: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Stockham Div. e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. C. Bronze Angle Valves,General: MSS SP-80,with ferrous-alloy handwheel. D. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc. E. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc. F. Type 2,Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc. G. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic, PTFE or TFE disc. H. Type 3, Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and renewable seat. I. Type 3,Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and renewable seat. 2.4 CAST-IRON ANGLE VALVES A. Available Manufacturers: B. Manufacturers: 1. Type II,Cast-Iron Angle Valves with Metal Seats: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Stockham Div. d. NIBCO INC. C. Cast-Iron Angle Valves, General: MSS SP-85,Type II. D. Class 125, Cast-Iron Angle Valves: Bronze mounted with gray-iron body and bronze seats. E. Class 250, Cast-Iron Angle Valves: Bronze mounted with gray-iron body and bronze seats. 2.5 COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES A. Available Manufacturers: 6129-08 15110-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES B. Manufacturers: 1. One-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.;Apollo Div. c. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. DynaQuip Controls. f. Grinnell Corporation. g. Jamesbury, Inc. h. Kitz Corporation of America. i. Legend Valve&Fitting, Inc. j. NIBCO INC. k. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div. 2. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.;Apollo Div. b. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves: d. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Stockham Div. e. DynaQuip Controls. f. Flow-Tek, Inc. g. Grinnell Corporation. h. Hammond Valve. - i. Honeywell Braukmann. j. Jamesbury, Inc. k. Jomar International, LTD. I. Kitz Corporation of America. m. Legend Valve& Fitting, Inc. n. Milwaukee Valve Company. o. Nexus Valve Specialties. 1; p. NIBCO INC. q. R& M Energy Systems(Borger,TX). r. Red-White Valve Corp. s. Richards Industries; Marwin Ball Valves. t. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div. 3. Three-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.;Apollo Div. b. DynaQuip Controls. c. Grinnell Corporation. d. Hammond Valve. e. Jamesbury, Inc. • f. Kitz Corporation of America. g. NIBCO INC. h. PBM, Inc. i. Red-White Valve Corp. j. Worcester Controls. 4. Safety-Exhaust, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: 6129-08 15110-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.;Apollo Div. y, b. DynaQuip Controls. c. Grinnell Corporation. a d. Hammond Valve. e. Jamesbury, Inc. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. C. Copper-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110. D. One-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome-plated bronze ball, PTFE or TFE seats,and 400-psig minimum CWP rating. E. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with full -port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats;and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem. F. Three-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with full -port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats;and 600-psig minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem. G. Safety-Exhaust, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Two-piece bronze body with exhaust vent opening, chrome-plated ball with vent, blowout-proof stem, locking handle, and working pressure rating of 400-psig CWP. 2.6 FERROUS-ALLOY BALL VALVES A. Available Manufacturers: _ B. Manufacturers: 1. American Valve, Inc. 2. Conbraco Industries, Inc.;Apollo Div. 3. Cooper Cameron Corp.;Cooper Cameron Valves Div. 4. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Stockham Div. 5. Flow-Tek, Inc. 6. Foster Valve Co. 7. Hammond Valve. 8. Jamesbury, Inc. 9. Jomar International, LTD. 10. Kitz Corporation of America. 11. KTM Products, Inc. 12. McCANNA, Incorporated. 13. Milwaukee Valve Company. 14. NIBCO INC. 15. PBM, Inc. 16. Richards Industries; Marwin Ball Valves. 17. Worcester Controls. C. Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-72,with flanged ends. D. Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valves: Class 150,full port. - E. Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valves: Class 300,full port. 6129-08 15110-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES 2.7 BRONZE CHECK VALVES A. Available Manufacturers: B. Manufacturers: 1. Type 1, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Metal Disc: I a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Stockham Div. d. Red-White Valve Corp. e. Walworth Co. 2. Type 2, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Stockham Div. e. Walworth Co. 3. Type 1, Bronze,Vertical Lift Check Valves with Metal Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. d. Red-White Valve Corp. 4. Type 2, Bronze,Vertical Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: a. Grinnell Corporation. b. Kitz Corporation of America. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. 5. Type 3, Bronze,Swing Check Valves with Metal Disc: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Cincinnati Valve Co. c. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. d. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. e. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. f. Grinnell Corporation. g. Hammond Valve. h. Kitz Corporation of America. i. Legend Valve&Fitting, Inc. j. Milwaukee Valve Company. k. NIBCO INC. I. Powell,Wm. Co. m. Red-White Valve Corp. n. Walworth Co. o. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div. 6129-08 15110-7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES 6. Type 4, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Hammond Valve. g. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. h. Milwaukee Valve Company. i. NIBCO INC. j. Red-White Valve Corp. k. Walworth Co. I. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div. C. Bronze Check Valves,General: MSS SP-80. D. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat. E. Type 1,Class 125, Bronze,Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat. F. Type 1, Class 200, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat. G. Type 1,Class 200, Bronze,Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat. H. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat. I. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat. J. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat. K. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat. L. Type 3, Class 125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat. M. Type 3, Class 200, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and seat. N. Type 4, Class 125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat. O. Type 4, Class 200, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat. 2.8 GRAY-IRON SWING CHECK VALVES A. Available Manufacturers: 6129-08 15110-8 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES B. Manufacturers: 1. Type I, Gray-Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Flomatic Valves. • f. Grinnell Corporation. g. Hammond Valve. h. Kitz Corporation of America. i. Legend Valve&Fitting, Inc. j. Milwaukee Valve Company. k. Mueller Co. I. NIBCO INC. m. Powell,Wm.Co. n. Red-White Valve Corp. o. Walworth Co. p. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div. 2. Type II, Gray-Iron Swing Check Valves with Composition to Metal Seats: a. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. c. Mueller Co. d. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div. 3. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Swing Check Valves: a. Grinnell Corporation. • b. Mueller Co. c. Victaulic Co. of America. C. Gray-Iron Swing Check Valves, General: MSS SP-71. D. Type I, Class 125, gray-iron, swing check valves with metal seats. E. Type I, Class 250, gray-iron, swing check valves with metal seats. F. Type II, Class 125, gray-iron, swing check valves with composition to metal seats. G. Type II, Class 250, gray-iron, swing check valves with composition to metal seats. H. 175-psig CWP Rating, Grooved-End, Swing Check Valves: Ductile-iron body with grooved or shouldered ends. I ': I. 300-psig CWP Rating, Grooved-End, Swing Check Valves: Ductile-iron body with grooved or shouldered ends. 2.9 FERROUS-ALLOY WAFER CHECK VALVES A. Available Manufacturers: 6129-08 15110-9 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES B. Manufacturers: 1. Single-Plate, Ferrous-Alloy,Wafer Check Valves: a. Gestra, Inc. b. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. c. Mueller Co. d. Techno Corp. e. Tyco International, Ltd.;Tyco Valves&Controls. f. Wheatley Gaso, Inc. 2. Dual-Plate, Ferrous-Alloy,Wafer Check Valves: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Stockham Div. c. Flomatic Valves. d. Gestra, Inc. e. Grinnell Corporation. _ f. Gulf Valve Co. g. Metraflex Co. h. Mueller Steam Specialty. i. NIBCO INC. j. Red-White Valve Corp. k. SSI Equipment, Inc. I. Techno Corp. m. Val-Matic Valve&Mfg.Corp. n. Valve and Primer Corp. o. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div. 3. Dual-Plate, Ferrous-Alloy,Wafer-Lug Check Valves: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves. b. Gulf Valve Co. c. Valve and Primer Corp. 4. Dual-Plate, Ferrous Alloy, Double-Flanged-Type Check Valves: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Gulf Valve Co. c. Techno Corp. C. Ferrous-Alloy Wafer Check Valves,General: API 594, spring loaded. D. Single-Plate, Class 125 or 150, Ferrous-Alloy,Wafer Check Valves: Flangeless body. E. Single-Plate, Class 250 or 300, Ferrous-Alloy,Wafer Check Valves: Flangeless body. F. Single-Plate, Class 125 or 150, Ferrous-Alloy,Wafer-Lug Check Valves: Single-flange body. G. Single-Plate, Class 250 or 300, Ferrous-Alloy,Wafer-Lug Check Valves: Single-flange body. H. Single-Plate, Class 125 or 150, Ferrous-Alloy, Double-Flanged Check Valves: Flanged-end body. 6129-08 15110-10 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES I. Single-Plate, Class 250 or 300, Ferrous-Alloy, Double-Flanged Check Valves: Flanged-end body. J. Dual-Plate,Class 125 or 150, Ferrous-Alloy, Wafer Check Valves: Flangeless body. K. Dual-Plate, Class 250 or 300, Ferrous-Alloy,Wafer Check Valves: Flangeless body. L. Dual-Plate, Class 125 or 150, Ferrous Alloy,Wafer-Lug Check Valves: Single-flange body. M. Dual-Plate, Class 250 or 300, Ferrous-Alloy,Wafer-Lug Check Valves: Single-flange body. N. Dual-Plate, Class 125 or 150, Ferrous-Alloy, Double-Flanged Check Valves: Flanged-end body. O. Dual-Plate, Class 250 or 300, Ferrous-Alloy, Double-Flanged Check Valves: Flanged-end body. 2.10 SPRING-LOADED, LIFT-DISC CHECK VALVES A. Available Manufacturers: B. Manufacturers: 1. Type I,Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves: a. Mueller Steam Specialty. 2. Type II, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves: } a. Durabla Fluid Technology, Inc. b. Flomatic Valves. c. GA Industries, Inc. d. Grinnell Corporation. e. Hammond Valve. f. Metraflex Co. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. Mueller Steam Specialty. i. Multiplex Manufacturing Co. j. NIBCOINC. k. SSI Equipment, Inc. I. Val-Matic Valve&Mfg. Corp. m. Valve and Primer Corp. C. Lift-Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74-1, with spring-loaded bronze or alloy disc and bronze or alloy seat. D. Type I, Class 125, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast-iron shell with diameter matching companion flanges. E. Type I, Class 250, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast-iron shell with diameter matching companion flanges. 6129-08 15110- 11 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES F. Type II, Class 125, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves: Compact-wafer style with cast-iron shell with diameter made to fit within bolt circle. G. Type II, Class 250, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves: Compact-wafer style with cast-iron shell with diameter made to fit within bolt circle. 2.11 BRONZE GATE VALVES A. Available Manufacturers: B. Manufacturers: 1. Type 1, Bronze, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. - b. Cincinnati Valve Co. 1 c. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. d. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. e. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Stockham Div. f. Grinnell Corporation. g. Hammond Valve. h. Kitz Corporation of America. i. Legend Valve&Fitting, Inc. j. Milwaukee Valve Company. k. NIBCO INC. I. Powell,Wm.Co. m. Red-White Valve Corp. n. Walworth Co. o. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div. 2. Type 2, Bronze, Rising-Stem,Solid-Wedge Gate Valves: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Cincinnati Valve Co. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves. d. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. e. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Stockham Div. f. Grinnell Corporation. g. Hammond Valve. h. Kitz Corporation of America. i. Milwaukee Valve Company. j. NIBCO INC. k. Powell,Wm.Co. I. Red-White Valve Corp. • m. Walworth Co. - 3.• Type 3, Bronze, Rising-Stem,Split-Wedge Gate Valves: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. c. Grinnell Corporation. d. NIBCO INC. C. Bronze Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-80,with ferrous-alloy handwheel. 6129-08 15110- 12 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES D. Type 1, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge. E. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge. F. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge. G. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge. H. Type 3, Class 125, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze split wedge. I. Type 3, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze split wedge. 2.12 CAST-IRON GATE VALVES A. Available Manufacturers: B. Manufacturers: 1. Type I, Cast-Iron, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Hammond Valve. g. Kitz Corporation of America. h. Legend Valve&Fitting, Inc. i. Milwaukee Valve Company. j. NIBCO INC. k. Powell,Wm. Co. I. Red-White Valve Corp. m. Walworth Co. n. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div. 2. Type I, Cast-Iron, Rising-Stem Gate Valves: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.;Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Hammond Valve. g. Kitz Corporation of America. ' h. Legend Valve&Fitting,Inc. i. Milwaukee Valve Company. j. NIBCO INC. k. Powell,Wm. Co. I. Red-White Valve Corp. m. Walworth Co. n. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div. 6129-08 15110- 13 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION sl RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES :l9 C. Cast-Iron Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-70,Type I. D. Class 125, NRS, Bronze-Mounted, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze trim, x ' nonrising stem, and solid-wedge disc. E. Class 125, OS&Y, Bronze-Mounted, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze trim, gl rising stem,and solid-wedge disc. F. Class 125, NRS, All-Iron, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with cast-iron trim, nonrising stem,and solid-wedge disc. G. Class 125, OS&Y, All-Iron, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with cast-iron trim, rising stem,and solid-wedge disc. 2.13 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES 1—, A. Available Manufacturers: B. Manufacturers: 1. Type 1, Bronze Globe Valves with Metal Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Hammond Valve. g. Kitz Corporation of America. h. Legend Valve&Fitting, Inc. i. Milwaukee Valve Company. j. NIBCO INC. k. Powell,Wm. Co. I. Red-White Valve Corp. m. Walworth Co. 2. Type 2, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Hammond Valve. g. Kitz Corporation of America. h. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. • i. Milwaukee Valve Company. j. NIBCO INC. k. Powell,Wm. Co. I. Red-White Valve Corp. m. Walworth Co. 3. Type 3, Bronze Globe Valves with Renewable Seat and Metal Disc: 6129-08 15110- 14 1/24/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Stockham Div. e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Hammond Valve. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Walworth Co. C. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-80,with ferrous-alloy handwheel. D. Type 1,Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc. E. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc. F. Type 1, Class 200, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc. G. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with PTFE or TFE disc. H. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with PTFE or TFE disc. Type 3, Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and renewable seat. J. Type 3, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with bronze disc and renewable seat. 2.14 CAST-IRON GLOBE VALVES • A. Available Manufacturers: B. Manufacturers: .II 1. Type I, Cast-Iron Globe Valves with Metal Seats: a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group;Stockham Div. e. Grinnell Corporation. f. Hammond Valve. g. Kitz Corporation of America. h. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Powell,Wm.Co. k. Red-White Valve Corp. I. Walworth Co. C. Cast-Iron Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-85. D. Type I, Class 125, Cast-Iron Globe Valves: Gray-iron body with bronze seats. E. Type I, Class 250, Cast-Iron Globe Valves: Gray-iron body with bronze seats. 6129-08 15110- 15 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES 142 2.15 CAST-IRON PLUG VALVES A. Available Manufacturers: 3 B. Manufacturers: 1. Lubricated-Type, Cast-Iron Plug Valves: a. Milliken Valve Co., Inc. b. Nordstrom Valves, Inc. c. Olson Technologies; Homestead Div. d. R&M Energy Systems(Tomball,TX). e. Walworth Co. 2. Nonlubricated-Type, Cast-Iron Plug Valves: a. General Signal; DeZurik Unit. b. Grinnell Corporation. c. Mueller Flow Technologies. d. Tyco International, Ltd.;Tyco Valves&Controls. . e. Wheatley Gaso, Inc. f. Xomox Corporation. C. Cast-Iron Plug Valves,General: MSS SP-78. D. Class 125 or 150, lubricated-type,cast-iron plug valves. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. ,_ F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS 6129-08 15110-16 1/24/03 , 3 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly,or gate valves. 2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly,or globe valves. 3. Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves. B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted. C. Chilled-Water Piping: Use the following types of valves: 1. Angle Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze. 2. Angle Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, cast iron. 3. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller:One-piece,400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy. 4. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150,ferrous alloy. 5. Butterfly Valves,NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged, 150-psig CWP rating, ferrous alloy,with EPDM liner. 6. High-Pressure Butterfly Valves, NPS 3 and Larger:Single-flange, Class 150. j 7. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 175-psig CWP rating. 8. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class .125, horizontal or vertical,bronze. 9. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller. Type 4,Class 125, bronze. 10. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, gray iron. 11. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron, Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 175-psig CWP rating. 12. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Single-plate, wafer, Class 125 or 150 ferrous alloy. 13. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 125 minimum. 14. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I or II, Class 125, cast iron. 15. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, bronze. 16. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, OS&Y, bronze-mounted cast iron. 17. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, bronze. 18. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 250, bronze-mounted cast iron. 19. Plug Valves, NPS 2 and Larger: Class 250 or 300, lubricated-type,cast iron. 20. Resilient-Seated, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: 175-psig CWP rating, cast iron. D. Condenser Water Piping: Use the following types of valves: 1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller:One -piece,400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy. 2. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150,ferrous alloy. 3. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged, 150-psig CWP rating,ferrous alloy, with EPDM liner. 4. • High-Pressure Butterfly Valves, NPS 3 and Larger:Single-flange, Class 300. 5. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 175-psig CWP rating. 6. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, horizontal or vertical, bronze. 7. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125 or 250, gray iron. 8. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron, Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 175-psig CWP rating. 6129-08 15110- 17 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION ,, RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES 9. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Single -plate, wafer, Class 125 or 150, ferrous alloy. 10. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I or II, Class 125, cast iron. 11. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze. 12. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, OS&Y, bronze-mounted cast iron. 13. Globe Valves,NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze. 14. Globe Valves,NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, bronze-mounted cast iron. 15. Plug Valves, NPS 2 and Larger: Class 125 or 150, lubricated-type,cast iron. 16. Resilient-Seated, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: 175-psig CWP rating, cast iron. E. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves: 1. Angle Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze. 2. Angle Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125 or 250,cast iron. LJ 3. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller:Two-piece,400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy. 4. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged, 150-psig CWP rating,ferrous alloy,with EPDM liner. 5. Grooved-End,Ductile-Iron Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 175-psig CWP rating. 6. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, horizontal or vertical, bronze. 7. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150, bronze. 8. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, gray iron. 9. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron, Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 175-psig CWP rating. 10. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Single -plate, wafer, Class 125 or 150, ferrous alloy. 11. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger. Type I or II, Class 125, cast iron. 12. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 1, Class 150, bronze. 13. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, OS&Y, bronze-mounted cast iron. 14. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze. 15. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, bronze-mounted cast iron. 16. Plug Valves, NPS 2 and Larger: Class 125 or 150, lubricated-type with FDA-approved- material sealant, cast iron. 17. Resilient-Seated, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: 175-psig CWP rating, cast iron. F. Heating Water Piping: Use the following types of valves: 1. Angle Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze. 2. Angle Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125, cast iron. 3. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller:Two-piece,400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy. 4. • Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged, 150-psig CWP rating,ferrous alloy,with EPDM liner. 5. High-Pressure Butterfly Valves, NPS 3 and Larger: Single-flange, Class 300. 6. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 175-psig CWP rating. 7. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, horizontal, bronze. 8. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125,gray iron. . 9. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron, Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 175-psig CWP rating. 6129-08 15110- 18 1/24/03 I ' RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES 10. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger. Single -plate, wafer, wafer-lug, or double- flanged, Class 250 or 300,ferrous alloy. 11. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I or II, Class 125, cast iron. 12. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2,Class 150, bronze. 13. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, OS&Y, bronze-mounted cast iron. 14. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller. Type 2, Class 150,bronze. 15. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, bronze-mounted cast iron. 16. Plug Valves, NPS 2 and Larger: Class 125 or 150, lubricated-type,cast iron. G. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following types of valves: 1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: One, Two, or Three-piece,400-psig CWP rating, copper alloy. 2. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy. 3. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 3, Class 125, bronze. 4. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I or II, Class 125,gray iron. 5. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron, Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 175-psig minimum CWP rating. 6. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 1,Class 125, bronze. 7. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, OS&Y, bronze-mounted cast iron. 8. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 1, Class 125,bronze. 9. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125,cast iron. 3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings, and specialties. B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. F. Install chainwheel operators on valves NPS 4 Insert other and larger and more than 96 inches above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor elevation. G. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. ' Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. 3. Lift Gheck Valves: With stem upright and plumb. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction. 6129-08 15110- 19 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15110 VALVES B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. .b C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure,unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. END OF SECTION 15110 • 4I� 6129-08 15110-20 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15121 PIPE EXPANSION AND FITTINGS AND LOOPS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following pipe expansion joints and expansion compensation devices for mechanical piping systems: 1. Metal-bellows expansion joints. 2. Expansion compensators. 3. Rubber expansion joints. 4. Flexible-hose expansion joints. 5. Packed slip expansion joints. 6. Flexible ball joints. 7. - Pipe bends and loops. 8. Alignment guides and anchors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BR: Butyl rubber. B. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber. C. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber. D. CSM: Chlorosulfonyl-polyethylene rubber. E. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. F. NR: Natural rubber. G. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures. B. Capability: Products shall absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of pipe expansion joint and alignment guide indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and bends. 6129-08 15121 - 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15121 PIPE EXPANSION AND FITTINGS AND LOOPS 2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and methods of assembly and attachment to building structure. 3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure. 4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end connections,and location for each expansion joint. C. Product Certificates: For each type of pipe expansion joint,signed by product manufacturer. ° D. Welding certificates. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pipe expansion joints to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. Steel Shapes and Plates: AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-Steel." 2. Welding to Piping: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1120, circular-corrugated-bellows type with external tie rods. 1. Manufacturers: a. Adsco Manufacturing, LLC. b. Flexicraft Industries. c. Flex-Pression,Ltd. d. Flex-Weld, Inc. e. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. f. Metraflex, Inc. • g. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Pathway Division. h. Unaflex Inc. i. WahlcoMetroflex. 2. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Single- or multiple -ply phosphor- bronze bellows, copper pipe end connections,and brass shrouds. 6129-08 15121 -2 1/24/03 I i RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15121 PIPE EXPANSION AND FITTINGS AND LOOPS 3. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints for Stainless-Steel Waterway: Single-ply stainless-steel bellows,stainless-steel-pipe end connections,and steel shroud. 4. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Single- or multiple -ply stainless-steel bellows,steel pipe end connections,and carbon-steel shroud. 5. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Configuration:Single-or double-bellows type, unless otherwise indicated. 7. End Connections: Flanged or weld. B. Rubber Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1123, fabric-reinforced rubber with external control rods and complying with FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors." 1. Manufacturers: a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. b. Flexicraft Industries. c. Flex-Weld, Inc. d. Garlock Sealing Technologies. e. General Rubber Corp. i f. Mason Industries, Inc.; Mercer Rubber Co. g. Metraflex, Inc. h._ MG Piping Products Co. i. Proco Products, Inc. j. Red Valve Company, Inc. k. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Pathway Division. I. Tozen America Corp. m. Unaflex Inc. n. Vibration Mountings&Controls, Inc. 2. Spherical Type:Single or multiple spheres. a. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings forNPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 150 psig at 220 deg F. b. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings for NPS 5 and NPS 6: 140 psig at 200 deg F. c. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings forNPS 8 to NPS 12: 140 psig at 180 deg F. 3. Material: BR, EPDM, NR. 4. End Connections: Full-faced, integral, steel flanges with steel retaining rings. C. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible-metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible hose; with inlet and outlet elbow fittings,corrugated-metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths. 1. Manufacturers: a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. b. Flexicraft Industries. c. Flex-Pression, Ltd. d. Metraflex, Inc. 2. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Copper-alloy fittings with solder joint end connections. • 6129-08 15121 -3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15121 PIPE EXPANSION AND FITTINGS AND LOOPS a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 340 psig at 450 deg F ratings. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 300 psig at 70 deg F and 225 psig at 450 deg F ratings. 3. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon-steel fittings with threaded end connections for NPS 2 and smaller and flanged end connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. • a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 325 psig at 600 deg F ratings. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 200 psig at 70 deg F and 145 psig at 600 deg F ratings. c. NPS 8 to NPS 12: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 125 psig at 70 deg F and 90 psig at 600 deg F ratings. 2.3 ALIGNMENT GUIDES A. Description: Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for alignment of piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe. 1. Manufacturers: a. Adsco Manufacturing, LLC. b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. c. Flex-Hose Co. Inc. d. Flexicraft Industries. e. Flex-Weld, Inc. f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. g. Metraflex, Inc. h. Piping Technology&Products, Inc. fl i. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Pathway Division. 2.4 MATERIALS FOR ANCHORS A. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel,hex head. C. Washers: ASTM F 844,steel,plain,flat washers. D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened 5 portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. 1. Stud: Threaded,zinc-coated carbon steel. 2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel. 3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel. E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened portland . cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. 6129-08 15121 -4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15121 PIPE EXPANSION AND FITTINGS AND LOOPS 1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881,Type IV, Grade 3, 2-component epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed. 2. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel. F. Concrete: Portland cement mix,3000 psi minimum. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete"for formwork, reinforcement,and concrete. G. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout;suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive,and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi,28-day compressive strength. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION A. Install manufactured, nonmetallic expansion joints according to FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors." B. Install expansion joints of sizes matching size of piping in which they are installed. C. Install alignment guides to allow expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress. 3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION A. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature. B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors. 1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 SWING CONNECTIONS A. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including tee in main. B. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including tee in riser. C. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including tee in main. 3.4 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE INSTALLATION A. Install guides on piping adjoining pipe expansion joints and bends and loops. 6129-08 15121 -5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION ..r RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15121 PIPE EXPANSION AND FITTINGS AND LOOPS F'.33 B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure. 3.5 ANCHOR INSTALLATION ..� A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1. C. Construct concrete anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated and include embedded fasteners. D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion joint manufacturer's written instructions if expansion joints or compensators are indicated. E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed on or in concrete. END OF SECTION 15121 „b 6129-08 15121 -6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15122 METERS AND GAGES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following meters and gages for mechanical systems: 1. Thermometers. 2. Gages. 3. Test plugs. 4. Flowmeters. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for domestic and fire-protection water service meters outside the building. 2. Division 2 Section"Natural Gas Distribution"for gas meters outside the building. 3. Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for domestic and fire-protection water service meters inside the building. 1. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber. r B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves. B. Shop Drawings: Schedule for thermometers, gages, flowmeters indicating manufacturer's number,scale range,and location for each. C. Product Certificates: For each type of thermometer, gage, and flowmeter, signed by product manufacturer. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flowmeters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 6129-08 15122-1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15122 METERS AND GAGES 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 METAL-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Palmer-Wahl Instruments Inc. 2. Trerice, H.O.Co. 3. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 4. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. B. Case: Die-cast aluminum or brass,7 inches long. C. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled,with magnifying lens. D. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. E. Window:Glass or plastic. F. Connector: Rigid,straight type or Rigid,angle type. G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation. H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. 2.3 PLASTIC-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ernst Gage Co. 2. Eugene Ernst Products Co. 3. Marsh Bellofram. 4. Miljoco Corp. 5. Trerice, H.O.Co. 6. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 7. Winters Instruments. B. Case: Plastic,7 inches long. C. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic-liquid filled,with magnifying lens. D. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. - E. Window: Glass or plastic. 6129-08 15122-2 1/24/03 Ib RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15122 METERS AND GAGES F. Connector:Rigid,straight type or Rigid,angle type. G. Stem: Metal,for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation. H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. 2.4 DUCT-TYPE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Miljoco Corp. 2. Palmer-Wahl Instruments Inc. 3. Trerice, H. O.Co. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc. B. Case: Metal or plastic, 7 inches long. C. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic filled,with magnifying lens. D. Tube Background: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum- with permanently etched scale markings. E. Window:Glass or plastic. F. Connector: Rigid, angle type. G. Stem: Metal,for installation in mounting bracket and of length to suit installation. H. Mounting Bracket: Flanged fitting for attachment to duct and made to hold thermometer stem. I. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. 2.5 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS _ A. Manufacturers: 1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 2. Ernst Gage Co. - 3. Eugene Ernst Products Co. 4. Marsh Bellofram. 5. Miljoco Corp. 6. NANMAC Corporation. 7. Noshok, Inc. • 8. Palmer-Wahl Instruments Inc. 9. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation. 10. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. 11. Trerice, H. O. Co. 12. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 13. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 14. WIKA Instrument Corporation. 15. Winters Instruments. 6129-08 15122-3 1/24/03 i I RENTON PAVILION 3 RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15122 METERS AND GAGES B. Description: Direct-mounting, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers complying with ASME B40.3. C. Case: Liquid-filled type, stainless steel with 3-inch diameter. D. Element: Bimetal coil. E. Dial: Satin-faced,nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. F. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal. G. Window: Glass or plastic. H. Ring: Stainless steel. 1. Connector: Rigid, back type. _.� J. Stem: Metal,for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation. K. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. 2.6 THERMOWELLS A. Manufacturers: 1. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S.Gauge Div. 2. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations;Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 3. Ernst Gage Co. 4. Marsh Bellofram. 5. Miljoco Corp. 6. NANMAC Corporation. 7. Noshok, Inc. 8. Palmer-Wahl Instruments Inc. 9. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation. 10. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. 11. Trerice, H. O. Co. 12. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 13. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 14. WIKA Instrument Corporation. 15. Winters Instruments. B. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used. C. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type, diameter, and length required to hold thermometer. ' I 2.7 PRESSURE GAGES , ti A. Manufacturers: 1. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div. 2. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 6129-08 15122-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15122 METERS AND GAGES 3. Ernst Gage Co. 4. Eugene Ernst Products Co. 5. KOBOLD Instruments, Inc. 6. Marsh Bellofram. 7. Miljoco Corp. 8. Noshok, Inc. 9. Palmer-Wahl Instruments Inc. 10. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation. 11. Trerice, H.O.Co. 12. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 13. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 14. WIKA Instrument Corporation. 15. Winters Instruments. B. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: Indicating-dial type complying with ASME B40.100. 1. Case:Liquid-filled type, metal or plastic,4-1/2-inch diameter. 2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 4. Movement: Mechanical,with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 5. Dial: Satin-faced,nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 6. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal. 7. Window: Glass or plastic. 8. Ring:Metal or plastic. 9. Accuracy: Grade C, plus or minus 3 percent of middle half or D, plus or minus 5 percent of whole scale. 10. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure. 11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure. C. Pressure-Gage Fittings: 1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless-steel needle type. 2. Syphons: NPS 1/4 coil of brass tubing with threaded ends. 3. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant, porous-metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure. 2.8 TEST PLUGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. MG Piping Products Co. 3. National Meter, Inc. 4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 5. • Sisco Manufacturing Co. 6. Trerice, H. O.Co. 7. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div. B. Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap,with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping. C. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F. 6129-08 15122-5 1/24/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15122 METERS AND GAGES D. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves. - 1. Insert material for air,water,oil,or gas service at 20 to 200 deg F shall be CR. �.. 2. Insert material for air or water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F shall be EPDM. E. Test Kit: Furnish one test kit(s)containing one pressure gage and adaptor,two thermometer(s), and carrying case. Pressure gage, adapter probes, and thermometer sensing elements shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping. 1. Pressure Gage: Small bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch-diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be 0 to 200 psig. 2. Low-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1-to 2-inch- diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 25 to 125 deg F. 3. High-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch-diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 0 to 220 deg F. 4. Carrying case shall have formed instrument padding. 2.9 VENTURI FLOWMETERS A. Manufacturers: • 1. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 2. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. vl 3. Bailey-Fischer&Porter Co. 4. Flow Design, Inc. 5. Gerand Engineering Co. 6. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 7. Leeds&Northrup. 8. McCrometer, Inc. -' 9. Preso Meters Corporation. 10. Victaulic Co. of America. B. Description: Differential-pressure design for installation in piping; with calibrated flow- measuring element, separate flowmeter, hoses or tubing, valves, fittings, and conversion chart compatible with flow-measuring element,flowmeter, and system fluid. C. Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel; with brass fittings and attached tag with flow conversion data. D. Pressure Rating:250 psig. E. Temperature Rating:250 deg F. F. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. G. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged or welded. H. Range: Flow range of flow-measuring element and flowmeter shall cover operating range of equipment or system served. I. Permanent Indicators: Suitable for wall or bracket mounting, calibrated for connected flowmeter element, and having 6-inch- diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for connecting to flowmeter element. 6129-08 15122-6 1/24/03 I � ' RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15122 METERS AND GAGES 1. Scale: Gallons per minute. 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 and 80 percent of range. J. Portable Indicators: Differential-pressure type calibrated for connected flowmeter element and having two 12-foot hoses in carrying case. 1. Scale: Gallons per minute. 2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent between 20 and 80 percent of range. 1. K. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter. 2.10 FLOW INDICATORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brooks Instrument Div.; Emerson Electric Co. 2. Dwyer Instruments, Inc. 3. Ernst Gage Co. 4. Eugene Ernst Products Co. 5. McCrometer, Inc. 6. OPW Engineered Systems; Dover Corp. 7. Penberthy, Inc. B. Description: Instrument for installation in piping systems for visual verification of flow. C. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body; with sight glass and plastic pelton-wheel indicator,and threaded or flanged ends. D. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. E. Temperature Rating:200 deg F. F. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. G. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS A. Install liquid-in-glass thermometers in the following locations: 1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller. 3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central systems. 4. Outside-air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts. B. Install liquid-filled-case-type, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers at suction and discharge of each pump. C. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers: 1. Domestic Hot Water:30 to 180 deg F,with 2-degree scale divisions. 6129-08 15122-7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION Et'.11 RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15122 METERS AND GAGES ti.J 2. Domestic Cold Water:0 to 100 deg F,with 2-degree scale divisions. 3. Heating Hot Water:30 to 240 deg F,with 2-degree scale divisions. 4. Condenser Water:0 to 160 deg F,with 2-degree scale divisions. 5. Chilled Water: 0 to 100 deg F,with 2-degree scale divisions. 6. Air Ducts: Minus 40 to plus 110 deg F,with 2-degree scale divisions. 3.2 GAGE APPLICATIONS A. Install dry-case-type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. B. Install liquid-filled-case-type pressure gages at chilled- and condenser-water inlets and outlets of chillers. C. Install liquid-filled-case-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump. 3.3 INSTALLATIONS t a A. Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions. B. Install remote-mounting dial thermometers on panel, with tubing connecting panel and thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length. C. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of diameter of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated. D. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of•duct where duct thermometers are indicated. Attach to duct with screws. E. Install direct-mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most readable position. F. Install remote-mounting pressure gages on panel. G. Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam). H. Install needle-valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam. I. Install test plugs in tees in piping. J. Install flow indicators, in accessible positions for easy viewing, in piping systems. K. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements and flowmeters as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions. flowmeter elements in accessiblepositions in piping systems. L. Install p p g y M. Install differential-pressure-type flowmeter elements with at least minimum straight lengths of pipe upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions. N. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions. 6129-08 15122-8 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON } SECTION 15122 METERS AND GAGES O. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations. P. Install flowmeters at discharge of hydronic system pumps and at inlet of hydronic air coils. Q. Assemble components and install thermal-energy meters. R. Mount meters on wall if accessible; if not,provide brackets to support meters. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and li maintenance for meters,gages, machines,and equipment. B. Connect flowmeter-system elements to meters. C. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters. D. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section"Grounding and Bonding." E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section"Conductors and Cables." 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions,after installation. B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility. END OF SECTION 15122 11 I i 6129-08 15122-9 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15140 L_ DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes domestic water piping and water meters inside the building. I B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company. C. Water meters will be furnished by utility company for installation by Contractor. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water-service piping and water meters outside the building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building. 2. Division 15 Section"Meters and Gages"for thermometers, pressure gages,and fittings. 3. Division 15 Section"Plumbing Specialties"for water distribution piping specialties. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � 3 A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with 125 psig,unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For pipe,tube,fittings,and couplings and water meters. B. Water Samples: Specified in Part 3"Cleaning"Article. _ I C. Field quality-control test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label,stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9,"for potable domestic water piping and components. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 6129-08 15140- 1 1/24/03 1 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Types K and L,water tube,annealed temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder joint ends. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and- socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces,and solder joint or threaded ends. B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Type L,water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder joint ends. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and- socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces,and solder joint or threaded ends. 4. Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze castings. a. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and bolts and nuts. 2.4 VALVES A. Bronze and cast-iron, general-duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section"Valves." B. Balancing and drain valves are specified in Division 15 Section"Plumbing Specialties." 2.5 WATER METERS A. Displacement-Type Water Meters NPS 2 and Smaller: AWWA C700, nutating-disc totalization mefer with bronze case and 150-psig minimum working-pressure rating; with registration in gallons or cubic feet as required by utility;and with threaded end connections. 1. Manufacturers: a. ABB. b. Badger Meter, Inc. 6129-08 15140-2 1/24/03 _I RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING c. Carlon Meter Company Inc. d. Invensys North American Water. e. Mueller Company. f. Schlumberger Limited;Water Div. g. Venture Measurement. h. Rockwell i. Neptune B. Turbine-Type Water Meters: AWWA C701, totalization meter with 150-psig minimum working- pressure rating; with registration in gallons or cubic feet as required by utility; and with the following end connections: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged. 3. Manufacturers: a. ABB. b. Badger Meter, Inc. c. Hays Fluid Controls. d. Invensys North American Water. e. Master Meter, Inc. f. McCrometer. g. Mueller Company. h. Schlumberger Limited;Water Div. i. SeaMetrics Inc. j. Venture Measurement. k. Rockwell. I. Neptune. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Excavating,trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section"Earthwork? 3.2 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated. C. Grooved joints may be used on aboveground grooved-end piping. D. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing. E. Domestic Water Piping on Service Side of Water Meter inside the Building: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 4 to NPS 6: Hard copper tube,Type L; copper pressure fittings;and soldered joints. 6129-08 15140-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 2. NPS 4 to NPS 6: Hard copper tube, Type L with grooved ends; copper grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-tube couplings;and grooved joints. F. Under-Building-Slab, Domestic Water Piping on House Side of Water Meter, NPS 4 and Smaller: Hard copper tube,Type L; copper pressure fittings;and soldered joints. G. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered =' joints. 2. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 3. NPS 2: Hard copper tube,Type L;copper pressure fittings;and soldered joints. 4. NPS 2: Hard copper tube, Type L with grooved ends; copper grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-tube couplings; and grooved joints. 5. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 6. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type L with grooved ends; copper grooved- end fittings; grooved-end-tube couplings;and grooved joints. 3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the • following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast-iron butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast- iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Hot-Water-Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves. B. Cast-iron,grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping. C. Ball, butterfly,and check valves may be used in matching piping materials. D. Install shutoff valve dose to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use - butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. E. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, '.® and where required to drain water piping. 1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated. 6129-08 15140-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING F. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Balancing valves are specified in Division 15 Section"Plumbing Specialties." G. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not f stop flow. Calibrated balancing valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties." 3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." B. Install under-building-slab copper tubing according to CDA's"Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to I make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15 Section"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." D. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Wall penetration systems are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." E. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Pressure gages are specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages," and drain valves and strainers are specified in Division 15 Section"Plumbing Specialties." F. Install water-pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves. Water-pressure regulators are specified in Division 15 Section"Plumbing Specialties." G. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb. H. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements. 3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813,water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end-pipe or grooved-end-tube coupling housing, gasket, lubricant,and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. D. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar. I ' 6129-08 15140-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION La RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 3.6 WATER METER INSTALLATION A. Rough-in domestic water piping and install water meters according to utility company's requirements. B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by contractor. C. Install water meters according to AWWA M6 and utility's requirements. 1. Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water-meter inlet. Install valve on water-meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Install turbine-type water meters with shutoff valve on water-meter inlet. Install valve on water-meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and outlet and on valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. 4. Install fire-service water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and outlet and on full-size valved bypass around meter. Support meter, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. 5. Install remote registration system according to standards of utility and of authorities having jurisdiction. 91 3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." B. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install the following: - 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following: aJ a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable,steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43,adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 49,spring cushion rolls, if indicated. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52,spring hangers. C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section"Hangers and Supports." D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers,to a minimum of 3/8 inch. it F. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 6129-08 15140-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2-Inch rod. G. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet. H. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. I. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. J. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.8 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. PP 9 adjacent � P C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to the following: 1. Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping. 2. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section"Plumbing Fixtures." 4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 6129-08 15140-7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation,notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. ,.v B. Test domestic water piping as follows: 1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. 2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.10 ADJUSTING A. Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow. a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to • provide flow of hot water in each branch. b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated. 5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use. 6129-08 15140-8 1/24/03 i RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings,adjustments,and operation. 3.11 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable and non-potable domestic water piping as follows: ' 4 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if • methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. END OF SECTION 15140 • 6129-08 15140-9 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON • HI SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes soil and waste,sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building and to locations indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for soil, waste, and vent piping systems specialties. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic and rubber piping materials: 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer. 3. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 4. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 5. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil,Waste,and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. P 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For pipe,tube,fittings,and couplings. B. Shop Drawings: For sovent drainage system, include plans,elevations, sections,and details. C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label,stamp,or other markings of specified testing agency. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS 6129-08 15150- 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion- resistant metal band on each end. C. Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and • ends compatible with, piping to be joined. v 2.2 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPING A. Hub-and-Spigot Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74,Service class. 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. • B. Hubless Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. 1. Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral,center pipe stop. a. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel shield;stainless-steel bands;and sleeve.1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch-wide shield with 4 bands. 2) NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch-wide shield with 6 bands. b. Heavy-Duty, FM-Approved Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel housing;stainless-steel bands;and sleeve. 1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch-wide housing with 2 bands. 2) NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch-wide housing with 2 bands. c. Heavy-Duty, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48, 2-piece, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and sleeve. d. Heavy-Duty, Type 301, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 301, stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands;and sleeve. 1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch-wide shield with 4 bands. • 2) NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch-wide shield with 6 bands. e. Compact, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310 with ASTM A 167, Type 301, or ASTM A 666, Type 301, stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve. 1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 2-1/8-inch-wide shield with 2 bands. 2) NPS 5 and NPS 6: 3-inch-wide shield with 4 bands. -r 6129-08 15150-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPING A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical joint bell and plain spigot end, unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,and steel bolts. 2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 47, malleable-iron castings or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe. a. Ductile-Iron-Piping, Keyed Couplings: AWWA C606, for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts. B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end, unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. a. Gaskets: AWWA C111,rubber. 2. Ductile-Iron, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 47, malleable-iron castings or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe. a. Ductile-Iron-Piping, Keyed Couplings: AWWA C606, for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts. 3. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound, ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include two gasketed ball joint sections and one or more gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble components for offset and expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111,ductile- iron glands, rubber gaskets,and steel bolts. 4. Ductile-Iron, Deflection Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets,and steel bolts. 5. Ductile-Iron, Expansion Joints: Three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111; ductile-iron glands, rubber • gaskets, and steel bolts. 2.4 COPPER TUBING A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306,drainage tube, drawn temper. 6129-08 15150-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder joint fittings. B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Type L,water tube,annealed temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper,solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. , 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24,Class 150,with solder joint end. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and- socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces,and solder joint or threaded ends. C. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Types L,water tube,drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittin s if indicated. PP 1 99 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24,Class 150,with solder joint end. p' 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and- socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder joint or threaded ends. 2.5 PE ENCASEMENT A. PE Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, PE film, 0.008- inch minimum thickness,tube or sheet. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Refer to Division 2 Section"Earthwork"for excavating,trenching,and backfilling. 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges may be used on aboveground pressure piping,unless otherwise indicated. C. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: Use NPS 1-1/2 hubless, cast-iron soil piping and one of the following: a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304,stainless steel. b. Couplings: Heavy-duty,cast iron. c. Couplings: Compact,stainless steel. 2. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: Steel pipe; cast-iron,threaded drainage fittings; and threaded joints. 3. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: ABS pipe,ABS socket fittings,and solvent-cemented joints. 4. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Service class,cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 6129-08 15150-4 1/24/03 1 ! RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 5. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Hubless,cast-iron soil piping and one of the following: a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304,stainless steel. b. Couplings: Heavy-duty,cast iron. c. Couplings: Compact,stainless steel. , 6. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Copper DWV tube,copper drainage fittings,and soldered joints. a. Option for Vent Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and .NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type M; copper pressure fittings;and soldered joints. 7. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Service class,cast-iron soil piping;gaskets; and gasketed joints. 8. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Hubless,cast-iron soil piping and one of the following: a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304,stainless steel. b. Couplings: Heavy-duty,cast iron. c. Couplings: Compact,stainless steel. 1 9. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Steel pipe;cast-iron,threaded drainage fittings; and threaded joints. 10. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Copper DWV tube,copper drainage fittings,and soldered joints. D. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: i 4 1. NPS 1-1/2: Hubless,cast-iron soil piping and one of the following: a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304, stainless steel. b. Couplings: Heavy-duty,cast iron. c. Couplings: Compact,stainless steel. 2. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Service class,cast-iron soil piping;gaskets;and gasketed joints. 3. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Hubless,cast-iron soil piping and one of the following: a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 301,stainless steel. b. Couplings: Heavy-duty,cast iron. c. Couplings: Compact,stainless steel. 4. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Stainless-steel piping, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 5. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Service class,cast-iron soil piping;gaskets; and gasketed joints. 6. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Extra-Heavy class,cast-iron soil piping;gaskets; and gasketed joints. 7. • NPS 5 and NPS 6: Hubless,cast-iron soil piping and one of the following: a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304,stainless steel. b. Couplings: Heavy-duty,cast iron. c. Couplings: Compact,stainless steel. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION 6129-08 15150-5 1/24/03 1_ RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING y A. Refer to Division 2 Section"Sanitary Sewerage"for Project-site sanitary sewer piping. B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation. C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers. D. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping. E. Underground, Ductile-Iron: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried piping inside the building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to sanitary sewer piping outside the building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets. 1. Encase piping with PE film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. F. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. G. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for wall penetration systems. H. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Encase underground piping with PE film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. I. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be 4 used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. J. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated,with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. K. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. 6129-08 15150-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING L. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems in locations indicated and as follows: 1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction. M. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing. N. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. ri 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction. B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"Chapter IV,"Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings. 2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp. C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. D. Grooved Joints: Assemble joint with keyed coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section"Valves"for general-duty valves. B. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to sewage backflow. 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves, unless drain has integral backwater valve. 3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 4. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties"for backwater valves. 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for seismic-restraint devices. B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. 9 PP P P 9 PP Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable,steel clevis hangers. 6129-08 15150-7 1/24/03 { RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43,adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49,spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section"Hangers and Supports." D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers,with 3/8-inch minimum rods. F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet. H. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 CONNECTIONS - A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings,and spe ialties. B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section"Plumbing Fixtures." 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties." 4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 6129-08 15150-8 1/24/03 f ` RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures,as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test,complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders,on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection,water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack II openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping - system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. END OF SECTION 15150 6129-08 15150-9 1/24/03 , RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. i 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes storm-drainage piping inside the building and to locations indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section"Plumbing Specialties"for storm drainage piping system specialties. 1.3 DEFINITIONS 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For pipe,tube,fittings, and couplings. B. Shop Drawings: For controlled-flow storm drainage system, include calculations, plans, and details. C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label,stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion- resistant metal band on each end. C. Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 6129-08 15160- 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 2.2 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPING A. Hub-and-Spigot Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74,Service class. _ 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. B. Hubless Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. 1. Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral center pipe stop. a. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel shield;stainless-steel bands;and sleeve. 1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch-wide shield with 4 bands. 2) NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch-wide shield with 6 bands. b. Heavy-Duty, FM-Approved Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel housing; stainless-steel bands;and sleeve. 1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch-wide housing with 2 bands. 2) NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch-wide housing with 2 bands. c. Heavy-Duty, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48, 2-piece, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and sleeve. d. Heavy-Duty, Type 301, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 301, • stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands;and sleeve. 1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch-wide shield with 4 bands. 2) NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch-wide shield with 6 bands. e. Compact, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310 with ASTM A 167, Type 301, or ASTM A 666, Type 301, stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve. 1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 2-1/8-inch-wide shield with 2 bands. 2) NPS 5 and NPS 6: 3-inch-wide shield with 4 bands. 2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPING A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical joint bell and plain spigot end, unless groovedflanged or flan ed ends are indicated. -- 1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,and steel bolts. 6129-08 15160-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWAC151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end, unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. 2. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound, ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include two gasketed ball joint sections and one or more gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble components for offset and expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111,ductile- iron glands, rubber gaskets,and steel bolts. 3. Ductile-Iron, Deflection Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. 4. Ductile-Iron, Expansion Joints: Three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber - gaskets, and steel bolts. 2.4 COPPER TUBING A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306,drainage tube, drawn temper. _ a 1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29,wrought copper, solder joint fittings. B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Type L,water tube,annealed temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- ,1 copper,solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150,with solder joint end. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and- socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces,and solder joint or threaded ends. C. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Types L and M,water tube,drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper,solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150,with solder joint end. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and- socket,metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder joint or threaded ends. 2.5 PE ENCASEMENT A. PE Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105 PE film, 0.008- inch minimum thickness,tube or sheet. PART 3-EXECUTION 6129-08 15160-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Refer to Division 2 Section"Earthwork"for excavating,trenching,and backfilling. 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges may be used on aboveground pressure piping,unless otherwise indicated. C. Aboveground Storm Drainage Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Service class,cast-iron soil piping;gaskets;and gasketed joints. 2. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Hubless,cast-iron soil piping and one of the following: a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304,stainless steel. b. Couplings: Heavy-duty,cast iron. c. Couplings: Compact,stainless steel. 3. NPS 2 to NPS 4: Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings,and soldered joints. 4. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Service class,cast-iron soil piping;gaskets;and gasketed joints. 5. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Hubless,cast-iron soil piping and one of the following: a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304,stainless steel. b. Couplings: Heavy-duty,cast iron. c. Couplings: Compact,stainless steel. 6. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Copper DWV tube,copper drainage fittings,and soldered joints. D. Underground Storm Drainage Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 3 and NPS 4: Service class,cast-iron soil piping;gaskets;and gasketed joints. 2. NPS 3 and NPS 4: Extra-Heavy class,cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3. NPS 3 and NPS 4: Hubless,cast-iron soil piping and one of the following: a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304,stainless steel. b. Couplings: Heavy-duty,cast iron. c. Couplings: Compact,stainless steel. 4. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Service class,cast-iron soil piping;gaskets;and gasketed joints. 5. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Extra-Heavy class,cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 6. NPS 5 and NPS 6: Hubless,cast-iron soil piping and one of the following: 6129-08 15160-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING a. Couplings: Heavy-duty,Type 304,stainless steel. b. Couplings: Heavy-duty,cast iron. c. Couplings: Compact,stainless steel. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION III A. Refer to Division 2 Section"Storm Drainage"for Project site storm sewer and drainage piping. B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation. C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers. D. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main piping. E. Underground, Ductile-Iron: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to storm sewer piping outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets. 1. Encase piping with PE film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. F. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. G. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for wall penetration systems. H. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Encase underground piping with PE film according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. I. Make changes in direction for storm piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. J. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated,with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. K. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 6129-08 15160-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING L. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing. M. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction. B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"Chapter IV,"Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings. 2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp. C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder, and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section"Valves"for general-duty valves. B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sump pump discharge. 1. Use gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 and smaller. 2. Use gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, downstream from shutoff valve, on each sump pump • discharge. D. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backlog. 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 3. Refer to Division 15 Section"Plumbing Specialties"for backwater valves. 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for seismic-restraint devices. B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42,clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable,steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. 6129-08 15160-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52,spring hangers. C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers,with 3/8-inch minimum rods. F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet. H. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 4. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. I. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. J. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties. B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. 6129-08 15160-7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. , D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction in absence of published procedures,as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test,complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage been tested and approved. piping until it has pp Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection,water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. END OF SECTION 15160 • 6129-08 15160-8 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 12 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping,special-duty valves,and hydronic specialties for hot-water heating, chilled-water cooling, and condenser water systems; makeup water for these systems; ,1 blowdown drain lines; and condensate drain piping. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems"for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through exterior walls. 3. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for general piping materials and installation requirements. 4. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports"for pipe supports, product descriptions, and installation requirements. Hanger and support spacing is specified in this Section. 5. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check valves. 6. Division 15 Section "Meters and"Gages" for thermometers, flow meters, and pressure gages. 7. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying hydronic piping. 8. Division 15 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic piping. 1 9. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls"for temperature-control valves 1 and sensors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride. B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve indicated. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for diverting fittings, calibrated balancing valves, and automatic flow-control valves. B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides,and expansion joints and loops. C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. 6129-08 15181 - 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING D. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements. E. Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. F. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at Project site. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX,"Welding and Brazing Qualifications." B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME ` i label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section VIII, Division 1. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies. B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations. C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections. D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections. E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement,and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections. F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems"for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Water Treatment Chemicals: Furnish sufficient chemicals for initial system startup and for preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 6129-08 15 181 -2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Calibrated Balancing Valves: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Flow Design, Inc. c. Gerand Engineering Company. d. Griswold Controls. e. ITT Bell &Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp. f. Taco, Inc. 2. Pressure-Reducing Valves: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. ITT Bell &Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp. e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.;Watts Regulators. 3. Safety Valves: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. ITT McDonnell&Miller Div.; ITT Fluid Technology Corp. • e. Kunkle Valve Division. f. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. 4. Automatic Flow-Control Valves: a. Flow Design, Inc. b. Griswold Controls. 5. Expansion Tanks: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. ITT Bell &Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp. d. Taco, Inc. 6. Air Separators and Air Purgers: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. ITT Bell &Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp. d. Taco, Inc. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS 6129-08 15181 -3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION 1 RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials. 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing:ASTM B 88, Type L. B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88,Type K. C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306,Type DWV. D. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. E. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. F. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony. G. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver). 2.4 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends. B. Steel Pipe, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12: ASTM A 53, Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends. C. Steel Pipe, NPS 14 through NPS 18: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless), Grade B, Schedule 30, black steel, plain ends. D. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250. E. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300. F. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150,250,and 300. G. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced. H. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M,wall thickness to match adjoining pipe. I. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group,end connections,and facings: 1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face. J. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket; 150-psig minimum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 6129-08 15181 -4 1/24/03 I { RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING K. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber-reinforced rubber body with steel flanges drilled. to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating temperatures up to 250 deg F and pressures up to 150 psig. L. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being welded. M. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design temperatures and pressures. 2.5 VALVES A. Gate,globe, check, ball,and butterfly valves are specified in Division 15 Section"Valves." B. Refer to Part 3"Valve Applications"Article for applications of each valve. C. Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller. Bronze body, ball type, 125-psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, and having threaded ends. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position. D. Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron or steel body, ball type, 125-psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, and having flanged or grooved connections. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals,and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position. E. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with low inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and noncorrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory set at operating pressure and have capability for field adjustment. F. Safety Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with brass and rubber, wetted, internal working parts; shall suit system pressure and heat capacity and shall comply with .the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section IV. G. Automatic Flow-Control Valves: Gray-iron body, factory set to maintain constant flow with plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations, and equipped with a readout kit including flow meter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case. Each valve shall have an identification tag attached by chain, and be factory marked with the zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. Valve shall be line size and one of the following designs: 1. Gray-iron or brass body, designed for 175 psig at 200 deg F with stainless-steel piston and spring. 2. Brass or ferrous-metal body,designed for 300 psig at 250 deg F with corrosion-resistant, tamperproof, self-cleaning, piston-spring assembly easily removable for inspection or ' replacement. 3. Combination assemblies, including bronze ball valve and brass alloy control valve, with stainless-steel piston and spring, fitted with pressure and temperature test valves, and designed for 300 psig at 250 deg F. 2.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 6129-08 15181 -5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING A. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 225 deg F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with NPS 1/8 discharge connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection. B. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 240 deg F operating temperature; with NPS 1/4 discharge connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection. C. Expansion Tanks: Welded carbon steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature. Separate air charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity by a flexible bladder securely sealed into tank. Include drain fitting and taps for pressure gage and air-charging fitting. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Factory fabricate and test tank with taps and supports installed and labeled according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. D. Tangential-Type Air Separators: Welded black steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125- psig minimum working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature; perforated stainless-steel air collector tube designed to direct released air into expansion tank; tangential inlet and outlet connections; threaded connections for NPS 2 and smaller, flanged connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger; threaded blowdown connection. Provide units in sizes for full-system flow capacity. E. In-Line Air Separators: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir designed to decelerate system flow to maximize air separation at a working pressure up to 175 psig and liquid temperature up to 300 deg F. F. Air Purgers: Cast-iron body with internal baffles that slow the water velocity to separate the air workingpressure of 150psig solution and divert it to the vent for quick removal. Maximum and temperature of 250 deg F. G. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal. capacity;with fill funnel and inlet,outlet, and drain valves. 1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment. H. Diverting Fittings: 125-psig working pressure; 250 deg F maximum operating temperature; cast-iron body with threaded ends, or wrought copper with soldered ends. Indicate flow direction on fitting. I. Y-Pattem Strainers: 125-psig working pressure; cast-iron body(ASTM A 126, Class B),flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket,and bottom drain connection. J. T-Pattem Strainers: 750-psig working pressure; ductile-iron or malleable-iron body, grooved- end connections, stainless-steel basket with 57 percent free area; removable access coupling and end cap for strainer maintenance. K. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket; 150-psig minimum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged-or threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 6129-08 15181 -6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING L. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber-reinforced rubber body with steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating temperatures up to 250 deg F and pressures up to 150 psig. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Hot and Chilled Water, NPS 2 and Smaller: Aboveground, use Type L drawn-temper copper • tubing with soldered joints or Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints. Belowground or within slabs, use Type K annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered joints. Use the fewest possible joints belowground and within floor slabs. B. Hot and Chilled Water: Aboveground, use Type L drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints. Belowground or within slabs, use Type K annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered joints. Use the fewest possible joints belowground and within slabs. C. Hot and Chilled Water, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded and flanged joints. D. Condenser Water, NPS 2 and Smaller: Aboveground, use Type L drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints or Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints. Belowground or within slabs, use Type K annealed-temper copper tubing with brazed joints. E. Condenser Water. Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded and flanged joints or grooved mechanical joint couplings. F. Condensate Drain Lines: Type L drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated,use the following valve types: 1. Shutoff Duty: Gate,ball, and butterfly valves. 2. Throttling Duty: Globe,ball,and butterfly valves. B. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection to each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the branch line. Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. C. Install calibrated balancing valves in the return water line of each heating or cooling element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing. D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. E. Install safety valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install safety-valve discharge piping, without valves, to floor. Comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements. F. Install pressure-reducing valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as required to regulate system pressure. 6129-08 15181 -7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping ` D installation requirements. B. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. C. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. D. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. E. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, install the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe. G. Install strainers on supply side of, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and , elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS2. H. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction. 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing of supports. B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span,9 feet; minimum rod size,3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size,3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6129-08 15181 -8 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING 7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet;minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 8. NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span,8 feet;minimum rod size,3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span,9 feet; minimum rod size,3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size,3/8 inch. E. Support vertical runs at roof,at each floor,and at 10-foot intervals between floors. 3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint construction requirements for soldered and brazed in copper tubing; threaded, welded, and flanged q jointsPP 9� 9 joints in steel piping;and solvent-welded joints for PVC and CPVC piping. 3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils,and elsewhere as required for system air venting. B. Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of system piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. C. Install dip-tube fittings in boiler outlet. Install piping to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Connect boiler-outlet piping. D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction lines. Install piping to compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install drain valve on units NPS 2 and larger. E. Install combination air separator and strainer in pump suction lines. Install piping to compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install blowdown piping with gate valve; extend to nearest drain. F. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above floor. Install feeder in bypass line, off main, - using globe valves on each side of feeder and in the main between bypass connections. Pipe drain,with ball valve,to nearest equipment drain. G. Install expansion tanks above air separator. Install gage glass and cocks on end of tank. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank. 6129-08 15181 -9 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING 1. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank, piping connections, and fittings, plus weight of a full tank of water. Do not overload building components and structural members. �v H. Install expansion tanks on floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank is properly charged with air to suit system design requirements. 3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections. B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. C. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections. 3.8 CHEMICAL TREATMENT A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine the type and quantities of chemical treatment needed to keep system free of scale,corrosion,and fouling. B. Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME 631.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. - 3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve,set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure,to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid. 3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the ' design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, r pump,valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." 6129-08 15181 - 10 1/24/03 if RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 6. Prepare written report of testing. ivl 3.10 ADJUSTING A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been completed,to permanently indicate final balanced position. B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system: 1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves. 2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation. 3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. 4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely(automatic type), or bleed air completely(manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves. 7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design requirements. 8. Lubricate motors and bearings. 3.11 CLEANING A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers. END OF SECTION 15181 • 6129-08 15181 -11 1/24/03 t � RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15185 i HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps. 2. Automatic condensate pump units. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber. B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics,furnished specialties,final impeller dimensions,and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves. _ p B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power,signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hydronic pumps through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of hydronic pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps. 6129-08 15185- 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION i RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15185 HYDRONIC PUMPS 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces s and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings,and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs. B. Store pumps in dry location. C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage. D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand,grit,and other foreign matter. E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement,and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Mechanical Seals:One mechanical seal for each pump. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the a' manufacturers specified. 2.2 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. Aurora Pump; Division of Pentair Pump Group. 3. Bell &Gossett Div.of ITT Industries. 4. Burks Pumps; Div.of Crane Pumps&Systems. 5. Grundfos Pumps Corporation. 6. Little Giant Pump Co.; Subsidiary of Tecumseh Products Co. 7.• MEPCO (Marshall Engineered Products Co.). 8. Taco, Inc. B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-coupled, in- line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically. Rate pump for 125-psig minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F. 6129-08 15185-2 1/24/03 I RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15185 HYDRONIC PUMPS C. Pump Construction: 1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, and threaded companion-flange connections. 2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast.bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, _ and secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified performance. 3. Pump Shaft:Stainless steel. 4. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal. ,mot 5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. D. Motor: VFD, with permanently lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated; and rigidly mounted to pump casing. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section"Motors." E. Capacities and Characteristics: Refer to Schedules on Drawings 2.3 AUTOMATIC CONDENSATE PUMP UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Aurora Pump; Division of Pentair Pump Group. 2. Little Giant Pump Co.;Subsidiary of Tecumseh Products Co. 3. MEPCO(Marshall Engineered Products Co.). 4. Armstrong. ,1 5. Peerless. B. Description: Packaged units with corrosion-resistant pump, plastic tank with cover, and automatic controls. Include factory- or field-installed check valve and a 72-inch- minimum, electrical power cord with plug. 2.4 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS _,i A. Suction Diffuser: Angle pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump- inlet fitting; with.bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers; bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory-fabricated support. B. Triple-Duty Valve: Angle or straightpattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump- discharge tY 9 9 P 9 Y P discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features. Brass gage ports with integral check valve,and orifice for flow measurement. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation. C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed. 6129-08 15185-3 1/24/03. RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15185 HYDRONIC PUMPS D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PUM P INSTALLATION A. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and acre--ssories. B. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping. continuous-thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of sufficient size to support C. Install 9 9 PP pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Fabricate brackets or supports as required. Hanger and support materials are specified in Division 15 Section"Hangers and Supports." D. Suspend vertically mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps independent of piping. Install pumps with motor and pump shafts vertical. Use continuous-thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers a�' of sufficient size to support pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Hanger and support materials are specified in Division 15 Section"Hangers and Supports." _ E. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open drain. 3.3 ALIGNMENT A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundation, grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and piping connections have been made. B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers'written instructions. C. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified. D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured,fully tighten foundation bolts. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps. D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles. E. Install check valve and throttling valve on discharge side of pumps. ti F. Install Y-type strainer and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps. 6129-08 15185-4 1/24/03 i . RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON ! SECTION 15185 HYDRONIC PUMPS G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between pump casing and valves. H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure-gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple input selector valve. I. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge. J. Install electrical connections for power,controls,and devices. K. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section"Grounding and Bonding." L. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section"Conductors and Cables." 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. s 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting: a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction. 5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and dosing drains, and prepare pump for operation. 6. Start motor. 7. Open discharge valve slowly. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 15185 6129-08 15185-5 1/24/03 1 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15189 HVAC WATER TREATMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. j 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes water-treatment systems for the following: 1. Heating, hot-water piping (closed-loop system). 2. Chilled-water piping (closed-loop system). 3. Heating and condensate piping. 4. Condenser water piping(open system). B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Water Softeners" for water treatment in hydronic and steam and condensate piping. 1.3 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Closed-Loop System: One bypass feeder on each system with isolating and drain valves downstream from circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Introduce chemical treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain water quality for HVAC systems that controls corrosion and build-up of scale and biological growth for maximum efficiency of installed equipment without posing a hazard to operating personnel or the environment. B. Base chemical treatment performance requirements on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Closed System: Maintain system essentially free of scale, corrosion,and fouling. 2. Condenser Water, Medium-to-Large Cooling Tower System: Maintain system essentially free of scale and total suspended solids. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities;water-pressure drops;shipping, installed,and operating weights;and furnished products listed below: 1. Pumps. 2. Chemical solution tanks. 3. Agitators. 4. Control equipment and devices. 6129-08 15189- 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15189 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 5. Test equipment. 6. Chemicals. 7. Filters. 4:V 8. Chemical feeders. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. C. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at Project site. D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance ! requirements. E. Maintenance Data: For pumps, agitators, filters, system controls, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the chemical treatment manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of chemical treatment equipment required for this Project. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.7 MAINTENANCE A. Scope of Service: Provide chemicals and service program for maintaining optimum conditions in the circulating water for inhibiting corrosion, scale, and organic growths in the cooling, chilled- water piping heating, hot-water piping heating, steam and condensate piping, steam and condensate system for humidifier and cooking appliance applications, condenser water piping and equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion, including the following: 1. Initial water analysis and recommendations. 2. Startup assistance. 3. Periodic field service and consultation. 4. Customer report charts and log sheets. 5. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with government regulations. • 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS ,.� A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Chemicals: Furnish quantity equal to 200 percent of amount initially installed. 6129-08 15189-2 1/24/03 i a RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15189 HVAC WATER TREATMENT PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. HVAC Water-Treatment Products: a. Ampion Corp. b. Anderson Chemical Co., Inc. c.. Aqua-Chem, Inc.; Cleaver-Brooks Div. d. Barclay Chemical Co.,Water Management, Inc. e. Betz Dearborn, Inc. f. Calgon Corp., ECC International. g. Diversey Water Technologies, Inc. h. DuBois Chemicals, Inc.;DuBois USA Subsidiary. i. Fluids Pumps&Controllers, Inc. j. Harmsco Industrial Filters. k. Metro Group., Inc.; Metropolitan Refining Div. I. Nalco Chemical Co. m. Selick&Bird, Inc. n. Stewart-Hall,Div.of the Rectorseal Corp. o. Trane Boland Services;Water Treatment. p. Watcon, Inc. � n 2.2 CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT A. Bypass Feeders: Cast iron or steel, for introducing chemicals into system; with funnel shutoff valve on top, air-release valve on top, drain valve on bottom, and recirculating shutoff valves on sides. 1. Capacity:2 quarts. 2. Working Pressure: 125 psig. B. Drip Feeders: Plastic reservoir with capillary tubing probe,weight,charging syringe,and dip. C. Positive-Displacement Diaphragm Pump: Simplex, self-priming, rated for intended chemical with 25 percent safety factor for design pressure and temperature. 1. Adjustable flow rate. 2. Thermoplastic construction. 3. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, 120-V, 60-Hz, single-phase motor. Comply with • requirements in Division 15 Section"Motors." 4. Built-in relief valve. D. Positive-Displacement Piston Pump: Metal and thermoplastic construction. 1. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, 120-V, 60-Hz, single-phase motor. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section"Motors." 6129-08 15189-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15189 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 2. Built-in relief valve. E. Chemical Solution Tanks: Chemical-resistant reservoirs fabricated_from high-density opaque d ' polyethylene with graduated markings. 1. Molded fiberglass cover with recess for mounting pump, agitator, and liquid-level switch. 2. Capacity:30 gal., 50 gal.. F. Agitator: Direct drive, 1750 rpm,mounted on tank with angle adjustment. • 1. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, 120-V, 60-Hz, single-phase motor. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section"Motors? 2. Stainless-steel clamp and motor mount,with stainless-steel shaft and propeller. G. Liquid-Level Switch: Polypropylene housing, integrally mounted PVC air trap, receptacles for connection to metering pump, and low-level alarm. H. Packaged Conductivity Controller: Solid-state circuitry, 5 percent accuracy, linear dial adjustment, built-in calibration switch, on-off switch and light, control-function light, output to control circuit,and recorder. I. Cold-Water Meter: Positive-displacement type with sealed, tamperproof magnetic drive; impulse contact register, single-pole,double-throw,dry-contact switch. 1. Rotating-disc type with bronze or cast-iron body rated for 125 psig. 2. Magnetic-drive or mechanical-impulse contactor matched to signal receiver. 3. At least six-digit totalizers. 4. 120-V ac. J. Solenoid Valves: Forged-brass body, globe pattern, and general-purpose solenoid enclosure with 120-V,continuous-duty coil. K. Electronic Timers: 150-second and 5-minute ranges, with infinite adjustment over full range,' and mounted in cabinet with hand-off-auto switches and status lights. L. Chemical Tubing: Schedule 40, PVC with solvent-cement joints; or polypropylene tubing with heat fusion. M. Plastic Ball Valves: Rigid PVC or CPVC body, integral union ends, and polytetrafluoroethylene seats and seals. N. Plastic-Body Strainer: Rigid PVC or CPVC with cleanable stainless-steel strainer element. O. Condenser Water-Treatment Control Panel: Incorporate solid-state integrated circuits and digital LED displays, in NEMA 250,Type 12 enclosure with gasketed and lockable door. 1. Control dissolved solids, based on conductivity, and include the following: a. Digital readout display. b. Temperature-compensated sensor probe adaptable to sample stream manifold. c. High,low,and normal conductance indicator lights. d. High or low conductance alarm light, trip points field adjustable; with silence switch. 6129-08 15189-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15189 HVAC WATER TREATMENT e. Hand-off-auto switch for solenoid bleed-off valve. f. Bleed-off light to indicate valve operation. g. Internal adjustable hysteresis or dead band. 2. Control inhibitor feeding, based on makeup volume, and include the following: a. Solid-state reset counter(accumulator),with selections from 1 to 15. b. Solid-state timer,adjustable from 15 to 300 seconds. c. Test switch. -1 d. Hand-off-auto switch for chemical pump. e. Illuminated legend to indicate feed when pump is activated. f. Solid-state lockout timer, adjustable from 15 to 180 minutes, with indicator light. Lockout timer to deactivate the pump and activate alarm circuits. g. Electromechanical-type, panel-mounted makeup totalizer to measure amount of makeup water. - 3. Control biocide with an adjustable time programmer and include the following: a. 24-hour timer with 14-day skip feature to permit activation any hour of day. b. Precision, solid-state, bleed-off lockout timer (zero to nine hours) and clock- controlled biocide pump timer (zero to two and one-half hours). Prebleed and bleed lockout. c. Solid-state alternator to enable the use of two different formulations. d. 24-hour digital display of time of day. e. 14-day LED display of day of week. f. Fast and slow internal clock set controls. g. Battery backup so clock is not disturbed by power outages. h. Quartz timekeeping accuracy. Hand-off-auto switches for biocide pumps. I j. Biocide A and Biocide B illuminated legends to indicate pump is running. 'i 2.3 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT A. Test Kit: Manufacturer recommended equipment and chemicals, in a carrying case, for testing pH, total dissolved solids, dissolved oxygen, biocount, chloride, and total alkalinity and for calcium hardness field tests. - B. Corrosion Test Coupon Assembly: Constructed of corrosion material, complete with piping, valves, and mild steel and copper coupons. Locate copper coupon downstream from mild steel coupon in the test coupon assembly. 1. Two-station rack for closed-loop systems. 2. Four station rack for open condenser water systems. 2.4 CHEMICALS A. Furnish chemicals recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are compatible with piping system components and connected equipment. B. System Cleaner: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products. C. Biocide: Chlorine release agents or microbiocides. 6129-08 15189-5 1/24/03 • RENTON PAVILION ul RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15189 HVAC WATER TREATMENT D. Closed-Loop, Water Piping Chemicals: Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH, corrosion inhibitors,and conductivity enhancers. 2.5 CONDENSER WATER FILTRATION UNIT A. Description: Filtration unit, including sand filter, filter pump, strainer, and controls; factory assembled,piped, and wired; mounted to steel skid. B. Sand Filter: Glass-fiber-reinforced polyester tank, internal distribution piping, differential gage panel, manual and automatic pressure relief valves, backwash valve, and backwash sight tube; graded silica sand installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Pump: All-bronze, centrifugal filter pump with totally enclosed, fan-cooled motor; strainer mounted on pump suction;and manually reset,motor-overload switch with pilot light. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section"Motors." D. Backwash Control: Automatic, with time clocks and differential pressure switches; mounted in NEMA 250,Type 4 control panel;factory wired for single, external electrical connection. 2.6 HOT-WATER/CHILLED-WATER FILTRATION UNIT A. Filtration Unit: Stainless-steel housing and polypropylene filter with polypropylene core. B. Replaceable Filter Media: Compatible with antifreeze and water-treatment chemicals. - C. Filter Media for Sediment Removal Service: Rated at 98 percent efficiency for 20-micrometer • particulate. D. Pressure Drop through the Filter Cartridge: Not to exceed 2 psig at design-flow rate when clean, and 2 psig when filter is dirty. -_ PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 WATER ANALYSIS A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine the type and quantities of chemical treatment needed to maintain the water quality as specified in"Performance Requirements"Article. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install treatment equipment level and plumb. B. Add cleaning chemicals as recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate �..- general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. 6129-08 15189-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15189 HVAC WATER TREATMENT C. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in Division 16 Sections for connecting electrical equipment. D. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 11 A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing. 2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing chemicals for water-treatment system. 3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the preliminary phase of HVAC systems'startup procedures. B. Test chemical feed piping as follows: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test results are achieved. 2. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments,submit separate report for each test,complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 3. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping - until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. 4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and ' allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare test reports, including required corrective action. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Sample boiler water at one-week intervals after boiler startup for a period of three weeks, and prepare certified test report for each required water performance characteristic. Where applicable, comply with ASTM D 3370 and the following standards: 1. Silica: ASTM D 859. 2. Steam System: ASTM D 1066. 3.• Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067. 4. Iron: ASTM D 1068. 5. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126. B. Occupancy Adjustments: Within 12 months of Substantial Completion, perform two separate water analyses to prove that automatic chemical feed systems are maintaining water quality within performance requirements specified in this Section. Perform analyses at least 60 days apart. Submit written reports of water analysis. 6129-08 15189-7 1/24/03 I RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15189 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to y ' adjust,operate,and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping,troubleshooting,servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules. B. Review manufacturer's safety data sheets for handling of chemicals. C. Review data in maintenance manuals, especially data on recommended parts inventory and supply sources and on availability of parts and service. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." >-i D. Review data in maintenance manuals, especially data on recommended parts inventory and supply sources and on availability of parts and service. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." E. Schedule at least two hours of training with Owner,through Architect, with at least seven days' ;; advance notice. END OF SECTION 15189 -' al g • I 6129-08 15189-8 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15194 FUEL GAS PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fuel gas piping,specialties,and accessories within the building. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Natural Gas Distribution" for natural gas service piping, specialties, and accessories outside the building. 2. Division 15 Section"Meters and Gages"for pressure gages. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Gas System Pressure: One pressure range. 0.5 psig or less.• B. Gas System Pressures: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is more than 0.5 psig but not more than 2.0 psig,and is reduced to secondary pressure of 0.5 psig or less. C. Gas System Pressures: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is more than 2.0 psig but not more than 5.0 psig, and is reduced to secondary pressure of more than 0.5 psig but not more than 2.0 psig. D. Gas System Pressures: Three pressure ranges. Primary pressure is more than 2.0 psig but not more than 5.0 psig, and is reduced to secondary pressures of more than 0.5 psig but not more than 2.0 psig, and is reduced again to pressures of 0.5 psig or less. E. Design values of fuel gas supplied for these systems are as follows: 1. Nominal Heating Value: 1000 Btu/cu.ft.. 2. Nominal Specific Gravity: 0.6. 3. Nominal Heating Value: 2675 Btu/cu.ft.. 4. Nominal.Specific Gravity: 1.6. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Specialty valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models. 2. Pressure regulators. Include pressure rating,capacity,and settings of selected models. B. Shop Drawings: For fuel gas piping. Include plans and attachments to other Work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal,and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer- installed and field-installed wiring. 6129-08 15194-1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15194 FUEL GAS PIPING C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. D. Maintenance Data: For natural gas specialties and accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components and Devices: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and marked for intended use. B. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z223.1,"National Fuel Gas Code." C. IAS Standard: Provide components listed in IAS's "Directory of A. G. A. and C. G. A Certified Appliances and Accessories"if specified to be IAS listed. D. UL Standard: Provide components listed in UL's"Gas and Oil Equipment Directory"if specified to be UL listed. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquids from drips in existing gas piping. Handle cautiously to avoid spillage and ignition. Notify fuel gas supplier. Handle flammable liquids used by Installer with proper precautions and do not leave on premises from end of one day to beginning of next day. 1.7 COORDINATION • A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Appliance Connector Valves: a. American Valve. b. B&K Industries, Inc. c. Brass Craft Manufacturing Co. d. Cimberio Valves, S. p.A. e. Conbraco Industries, Inc.;Apollo Div. f. E. M. Plastic and Electric Products, Ltd.; Neo Valve Div. 6129-08 15194-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15194 FUEL GAS PIPING g. Frey: John M. Frey Co. h. Jomar International, Ltd. i. Key Gas Components, Inc. j. Legend Valve and Fitting, Inc. k. McDonald: A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. I. Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div. m. Newman Hattersley, Ltd.;Specialty Valve Div. n. Robert Manufacturing Co. o. State Metals, Inc. p. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div. 2. Gas Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: a. BMI Canada, Inc. b. Crane Valves. c. Dungs: Karl Dungs, Inc. d. Flow Control Equipment, Inc. e. Grinnell Corp. f. Honeywell, Inc. g. Jomar International, Ltd. h. Kitz Corp. of America. i. Legend Valve and Fitting, Inc. j. Lyall: R.W. Lyall&Co., Inc. k. McDonald: A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. I. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc. m. Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div. n. Nibco, Inc. o. Red-White Valve Corp. p. Velan Valve Corp. q. Watts Industries, Inc.;Water Products Div. 3. Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: a. Flow Control Equipment, Inc. b. Milliken Valve Co., Inc. c. Nordstrom Valves, Inc. d. Olson Technologies, Inc.; Homestead Valve Div. e. Walworth Co. 4. Automatic Gas Valves: a. ASCO General Controls. b. ASCOLECTRIC, Ltd. c. Automatic Switch Co. d. Dungs: Karl Dungs, Inc. e. Eaton Corp.;Controls Div. • f. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. g. GPS Gas Protection Systems, Inc. h. Honeywell, Inc. i. Johnson Controls, Inc. 1. 5. Electrically Operated Gas Valves: a. ASCO General Controls. 6129-08 15194-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15194 FUEL GAS PIPING b. Atkomatic Valve Co., Inc. c. Automatic Switch Co. d. Dungs: Karl Dungs, Inc. e. Eclipse Combustion Inc. f. Goyen Valve Corp. g. Magnatrol Valve Corp. h. Parker Hannifin Corp.; Climate&Industrial Controls Group; Skinner Valve Div. 6. UL-Listed Earthquake Valves: a. Energy Pacific. b. Safe T Quake Corp. c. Seismic Safety Products, Inc. d. Seismic Valve Co., Inc. e. Trembler-Tech, Inc. f. Westcoast Seismic Protection Co., Ltd. 1 7. Line Pressure Regulators: a. American Meter Co. b. Donkin: Bryan Donkin RMG Canada, Ltd. c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Equimeter, Inc. e. Fisher Controls International, Inc. f. Maxitrol Co. g. National Meter. h. Richards Industries, Inc.;Jordan Valve Div. i. Schlumberger Industries;Gas Div. 8. Appliance Pressure Regulators: a. Canadian Meter Co., Inc. b. Eaton Corp.;Controls Div. :1 c. Harper Wyman Co. d. Maxitrol Co. e. SCP, Inc. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2.3 PIPES,TUBES, FITTINGS,AND JOINING MATERIALS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53;Type E or S;Grade B; Schedule 40; black. =` 1; Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with • threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 2. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 3. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125. 4. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9,wrought steel or ASME B16.11,forged steel. 5. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 6129-08 15194-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15194 t. FUEL GAS PIPING 6. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. 7. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. 8. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas. B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Type L,water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22,wrought copper,streamlined pattern. 2. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Silver Classification BAg-1. Filler metal containing phosphorus is prohibited. • 3. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24,Class 150. 4. Gasket Material: Thickness,material, and type suitable for natural gas. C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Type L,water tube,annealed temper. 1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22,wrought copper,streamlined pattern. 2. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Silver Classification BAg-1. Filler metal containing phosphorus is prohibited. D. Transition Fittings: Type, material,and end connections to match piping being joined. E. Common Joining Materials: Refer to. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"for joining materials not in this Section. k 2.4 PROTECTIVE COATING A. Furnish pipe and fittings with factory-applied, corrosion-resistant polyethylene coating for use in corrosive atmosphere. 2.5 PIPING SPECIALTIES I I A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24,copper alloy. B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41,convenience outlets and matching plug connector. 2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe threads. B. Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel flanges and according to ASME 816.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges. C. Appliance nce Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and IAS listed. a D. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head, ball type with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless-steel P disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle;2-psig minimum pressure rating. E. Gas Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASME B16.33 and IAS-listed bronze body and 125-psig pressure rating. 1. Tamperproof Feature: Include design for locking. 5 6129-08 -15194 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15194 FUEL GAS PIPING F. Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.38 and MSS SP-78 cast-iron, lubricated plug valves,with 125-psig pressure rating. 1. Tamperproof Feature: Include design for locking. G. General-Duty Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.38, cast-iron body, suitable for fuel gas service,with"WOG"indicated on valve body,and 125-psig pressure rating. 1. Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, OS&Y type with solid wedge. 2. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, lug type with lever handle. r' H. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21, with electrical operator for actuation by appliance automatic shutoff device. I. Electrically Operated Gas Valves: UL 429, bronze, aluminum, or cast-iron body solenoid valve; . 120-V ac, 60 Hz, Class B, continuous-duty molded coil. Include NEMA ISC 6, Type 4, coil enclosure and electrically opened and closed dual coils. Valve position shall normally be closed. J. Earthquake Valves: Listed in IAS Directory as complying with ANSI Z21.70 and UL listed. Include mechanical operator. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel gas to premises or section of piping. Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all equipment is turned off in affected piping section. B. Comply with ANSI Z223.1,"Prevention of Accidental Ignition"Paragraph. 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fuel Gas Piping, 0.5 psig or Less: Use the following: 1. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: NPS 3/4 steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 2. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, copper fittings,and brazed joints. a. Option: Soft copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints may be used for runouts at individual appliances. 3. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 4. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Hard copper tube, copper fittings,and brazed joints. a. Option: Soft copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints may be used for runouts at individual appliances. 6129-08 15194-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15194 FUEL GAS PIPING 5. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 6. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: Steel pipe,steel welding fittings,and welded joints. • 7. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 8. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Steel pipe,steel welding fittings,and welded joints. 9. Larger Than NPS 4: Steel pipe,steel welding fittings, and welded joints. C. Fuel Gas Piping,0.5 to 2 psig: Use the following: • 1. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: NPS 3/4 steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 2. NPS 1/2 and Smaller: Hard copper tube,copper fittings,and brazed joints. a. Option: Soft copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints may be used for runouts at individual appliances. 3. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings,and threaded joints. 4. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1: Hard copper tube, copper fittings,and brazed joints. a. Option: Soft copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints may be used for runouts at individual appliances. 5. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 6. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. II ,; 7. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. 8. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Steel pipe,steel welding fittings, and welded joints. 9. Larger Than NPS 4: Steel pipe,steel welding fittings, and welded joints. D. Underground Fuel Gas Piping: Steel pipe, steel weldingfittings, and welded joints. Encase in 9 P� 9� P�P 9 J containment conduit. E. Gas Service Piping at Meters and Regulators, Above 5 psig: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints. 3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 psig or Less: Appliance connector valve or gas stop. B. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 to 2 psig: Gas stop or gas valve. C. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 2 to 5 psig: Gas valve. D. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve. 6129-08 15194-7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION , RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15194 FUEL GAS PIPING E. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve or general-duty valve. F. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2 and Smaller: Gas valve. G. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Plug valve. 3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation requirements. B. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent conduit to outside and terminate with screened vent cap. 1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as r ' plenums. Do not locate valves above ceilings. 2. In Floors: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in "Protective Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in floors, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Surround piping cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate. 3. In Floor Channels: Gas piping may be installed in floor channels, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction. Channels must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation. 4. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from h sical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls. physical 9 a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls. 5. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in "Protective Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in masonry walls, subject to approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 6. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. a. Exception: Accessible above-ceiling space specified above. C. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. • Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap. D. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors,and in floor channels, unless indicated to be exposed to view. 6129-08 15194-8 1/24/03 I . RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15194 FUEL GAS PIPING E. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers. F. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. G. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. H. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices. I. Install pressure gage downstream from each line pressure regulator. J. Install flanges on valves,specialties,and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger connections. K. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion- resistant insect screens in large end. L. Install containment conduits for gas piping below slabs, within building, in gastight conduits extending minimum of 4 inches outside building, and vented to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end. Prepare and paint outside of conduits with coal-tar, epoxy-polyamide paint according to SSPC- Paint 16. 3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction. B. Use materials suitable for fuel gas. 1. Brazed Joints: Make with brazing alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F. Brazing alloys containing phosphorus are prohibited. 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section"Hangers and Supports"for pipe hanger and support devices. B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches;minimum rod size,3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size,3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet;minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. C. Install hangers for horizontal hard copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 6129-08 15194-9 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION a, RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15194 FUEL GAS PIPING 1. NPS 3/8: Maximum span,48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1/2 and NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 3/4 and NPS 7/8: Maximum span, 84 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1: Maximum span,96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of fuel gas piping,fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect piping to appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream from and within 72 inches of each appliance. Install union downstream from valve. D. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance using gas. E. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 2. Do not use gas pipe as grounding electrode. 3.8 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each service meter, pressure regulator,and specialty valve. 1. Text: In addition to name of identified unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. 2. Refer to Division 15 Section"Mechanical Identification"for nameplates and signs. 3.9 PAINTING A. Use materials and procedures in Division 9 Section "Painting,""Exterior Paint Schedule"Article, "Ferrous Metal"Paragraph,"Full-Gloss,Alkyd-Enamel Finish"Subparagraph. B. Paint exterior service meters, pressure regulators,and specialty valves. 1. Color:Gray. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect, test, and purge piping according to ANSI Z223.1, Part4 "Inspection, Testing, and Purging,"and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained. 6129-08 15194- 10 1/24/03 ' II RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15194 FUEL GAS PIPING C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. - i D. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of service meters, pressure regulators, valves, and specialties. E. Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators. F. Verify that specified piping tests are complete. 3.11 ADJUSTING A. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and safety devices. END OF SECTION 15194 6129-08 15194 - 11 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements, and Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods, and other Sections in Division 15 specified herein. 1.2 SCOPE A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to,the installation of plumbing fixtures and trim. 1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 15400: Plumbing C. Section 15450: Plumbing Equipment 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to construction submit for approval all materials and equipment in accordance with Division 1. Submit manufacturer's data, colors, installation instructions, and maintenance and operating instructions for all components of this section including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Plumbing fixtures. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Toilets. 4. Urinals. 5. Lavatories. 6. Sinks. 7. Drinking fountains. D. Shop Drawings: Submit rough-in drawings. Detail dimensions, rough-in requirements, , ots Coate requirements required withclearances Architecturalandmeth ds Woodworkofassembly shopof drawingscomponen specifiedand in Danchorages.ivision 6 foro fixturerdins installed in countertops and cabinets. Furnish templates for use in woodwork shop. E. Samples: Submit samples of any piece of equipment requested by Architect for review and approval. F. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements and wiring diagrams for power supply to units. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and field installed portions. G. Color Charts: Submit manufacturer's standard color charts for cabinet finishes and fixture colors. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS 6129-08 15440- 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Uniform Plumbing Code(UPC)with Washington State Amendments. B. State of Washington Structural Specialty Code. C. Americans with Disabilities Act-ADA. D. State Energy Code. E. ARI Standard 1010: "Drinking Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking Water Coolers." 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Stock: 1. Furnish special wrenches and other devices necessary for servicing plumbing fixtures, flush valves, and trim to Owner with receipt in a quantity of one device for each 10 fixtures. 2. Furnish faucet repair kits complete with all necessary washers, springs, pins, retainers, packings, o-rings,sleeves,and seats in a quantity of 1 kit for each 10 faucets. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide fixtures as specified. Fixtures in any secure or public areas shall be vandal proofed. B. Architect/Engineer shall review and approve any substitution requested by Contractor prior to bid submittal. C. All fixtures and faucets must meet all ADA and State requirements. All fixtures and accessories must be approved for use by the State of Washington. Provide written verification of this for every item. D. Provide fixture as specified, acceptable manufacturers: 1. Vitreous China or Cast Iron Fixtures: American Standard, Crane, Commercial Enameling or Kohler. 2. Stainless Steel Sinks: Elkay,Just,or Kindred. a. All stainless steel is 18 gauge Type 302 unless otherwise specified. 3. Drinking Fountains: Elkay, Haws or Sunroc. 4. Terrazzo Service Sinks: Florestone or Stem Williams. E. Provide faucet as specified. Acceptable manufacturers: Chicago, Symmons, Delta Commercial or as indicated. F. Provide flush valve as specified. Acceptable manufacturers:Sloan or Zum. G. Provide commercial grade toilet seat as specified. Acceptable manufacturers: Beneake, Bemis, Sperzel,Church or Olsonite. H. Provide heavy duty cast iron commercial grade carrier as specified. Acceptable manufacturers:Mifab,Ancon,Jay R. Smith,Wade or Zum. No plastic parts on foundry items. 6129-08 15440-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES I. Provide heavy duty commercial grade 17-gauge P-Trap and supplies with stops as specified. Acceptable manufacturers:Sanitary Dash, Chicago, or McGuire. 1. P-trap-Lay: McGuire C8902-DF. 2. P-trap-Sink: McGuire C8912-DF. 3. Supply for Lavatory: McGuire H2165 LK. 4. Offset supply for barrier free lavatory: McGuire 155 WC. 5. Supply for Sink:McGuire H2167 LK. 6. Supply for Water Closet: McGuire H2169LK 7. Escutcheons: McGuire WE00D Series,wrought brass, bell type. 8. Lavatory grid strainer: McGuire 155A. 9. Barrier-free lavatory offset grid strainer: McGuire 158WC. 10. Sink Strainer: Elkay LK-18B. J. Provide white molded closed cell vinyl pre-fab insulation on P-Trap and on both hot and cold water supply for barrier free lavatories and exam lavatories. Acceptable manufacturers: Plumberex,True-Bro,and Pro-Wrap. Bag type insulators are not acceptable. K. Drinking fountain shall be lead-free construction only. 2.2 FIXTURE LISTING • A. LV — 1 BASIN - WALL HUNG — (BARRIER FREE DESIGN & GENERAL USE)- American Standard 'ELLISSE PETITE' #0079.146 Basin Slab, centre hole only, 24" x 21" x 5 - 7-3/8" (610mm x 533mm x 127 - 187mm) deep, wall hung, vitreous china, sculptured design, elegant sloped bowl, spacious shelf area and rear overflow. American Standard `CERAMIX' #2000.100X.002 Faucet, C.P. single hole C.C., solid cast brass lead-free body, washerless, ceramic drip-free disc valve cartridge, maximum temperature limit stop, with 1.84 GPM (8L)flow aerator outlet, less escutcheon plate for } single hole mounting, single control metal lever handle, and 3/8" (10mm) supply tubes. American Standard#7723.018.002 Drain, C.P. offset open grid. McGuire#H165LKN5 s Supplies, C.P., polished, short rigid horizontal with V.P. loose key angle stops, escutcheons, less flexible risers. McGuire#8872C-17T Trap, C.P. 17 gauge (1.5mm), 1- 1/4" (32mm) and escutcheon. ATS Spec #BF-1 `Sanitary Safti-Covers' to exposed piping as per local codes. Smith Series #0800-U-CAN Carrier, with steel pipe legs, block base feet support and heavy duty'U'plate. B. DF—1 DRINKING FOUNTAINS HI-LO - DOUBLE UNIT-WALL HUNG S.S. (BARRIER FREE DESIGN & GENERAL USEI - Haws #1011 HI-LO Fountains, wall mounted, stainless steel, 18 gauge (1.2mm) with #4 satin finish, 14" dia. (356mm) receptors, lead free, 'Soft Touch Valve'control bubblers, self-closing, automatic volume regulators, open grid strainers, #6700.4 mounting plate, and S.S. cover plate. McGuire #HST11 LK Supplies, C.P. loose key with straight stops. McGuire#8872C `p'Trap, C.P. cast brass 1-1/4" (32mm)with cleanout and escutcheon (concealed in wall). Smith Series#0823-2 Carrier,with steel pipe legs, block base feet support and double length plate. C. JS — 1 JANITOR MOP SINK - FLOOR MOUNTED (CORNER UNIT) Stem Williams . 'CRESCENT' #CRS-2200 Mop Sink, 28"x 28"x 12" (711mm x 711mm x 305mm)deep, floor mounted, corner precast terrazzo with stainless steel cast integral cap on front drop and Integral Drain with strainer. 'BP' Splash Panels, S.S. for two sides. Chicago Faucets #305VB-R-XK-Hose Faucet, C.P. 8" (203mm) C.C., wall mounted, solid cast brass lead-free body, 1/4 turn ceramic disc valve cartridges, spout body, vacuum breaker, integral stops, cast brass lever handles, 36" (915mm) hose and hanger. `p' Trap,3"(75mm). i 6129-08 15440-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON - SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES :1a D. SK— 1 THREE COMPARTMENT S.S. SINK (KITCHEN / GENERAL DUTY) - Kindred `ARISTALINE' #LBT6410P-1 S.S. Sink, 3 hole, 8" (203mm) centres, 20-9/16" x 46- 3/8" x 10" (522mm x 1178mm x 254mm) deep, counter mounted, back ledge, 18 gauge (1.2mm) grade 18-8 type 302 stainless steel, triple compartment, satin finished rim and bowl, self-rimming, with crumb cup strainers and sound deadening. Chicago Faucets #201A-L12-E29VP-XK Faucet, C.P. 8" (203mm) C.C., deck mounted, solid cast brass lead-free body, 1/4 turn ceramic disc valve cartridges, 11" (279mm) swing spout with vandal-resistant 1.84 GPM (8L) flow laminar (non-aerating) outlet and cast brass lever handles. McGuire#H2167N5 Supplies, C.P. polished rigid horizontal with wheel handle angle stops, escutcheons and flexible risers. McGuire #8904C `p' Trap, C.P. polished cast brass 2"(50mm)with cleanout, long tube length and escutcheon. E. WC—1 TOILET WALL HUNG - PRESSURE-ASSIST TANK (BARRIER FREE DESIGN f' & GENERAL USE TOILET WALL HUNG-PRESSURE-ASSIST TANK(BARRIER FREE DESIGN & GENERAL USE) American Standard `GLENWALL ELONGATED' #2093.100 `Pressure-Assist Low Consumption'Tank Toilet,wall hung,vitreous china, elongated syphon jet flush action bowl,fully glazed 2"(50mm) ball pass internal trapway, 10" x 12" (254mm x 304mm) large water surface, 'Speed Connect' P.A. tank complete, 1.3 gal. (6L)flush,with cast sanitary guard on bowl for china to china tank assembly, bolt caps. Provide floor flange, flange bolts and gasket. Centoco #820STS Seat, elongated heavy duty solid plastic open front with cover, check hinge and stainless steel posts, washers and nuts. McGuire #H166LKN3 Supply, C.P., polished, rigid horizontal with V.P. loose key angle stop, escutcheon and flexible riser. Smith Series #0410Y / #0410YD Single/Double, Thin Wall Carrier, block base feet, finishing wall frame, and factory assembled complete, bolts, cap nuts, adjustable nipple, gasket and test plug. Barrier Free Design mount fixture 16" (406mm) (or as required by local codes) above finished floor to rim of toilet, using suffix`WCH' Carrier. F. UR— 1 URINAL -WALL HUNG FLUSH VALVE American Standard `WASHBROOK' #6501.010 'Low Consumption' Urinal, wall hung for flush valve, vitreous china, wash 'f out flush action 0.84 gal. (3.8L)flush, extended sides for privacy, integral flush spreader, 3/4" (19mm) top spud, wall hangers, open trap, #047068-0070A Strainer, removable _.a stainless steel, 2" (50mm) outlet, connecting flange with gasket and bolts. Sloan `REGAL' #186-1-XL Flush Valve, C.P. low consumption, factory set flow, quiet action diaphragm type with non-hold open feature, vacuum breaker and back-check angle stop. Smith Series#SQ4-1819 Urinal Wall Access Cleanout,with round stainless steel face and V.P. screw. Smith Series #0637 Carrier, with steel pipe legs, block base feet supports and bearing plates. G. FD — 1 FLOOR DRAINS — FIN. AREAS — SHOWERS (ROUND - MED. DUTY STRAINER) Smith Series 2005A Floor Drain, all duco coated cast iron body, reversible flashing clamp with seepage openings and adjustable 5"(127mm)diameter nickel bronze 1/4" (6.35mm) thick strainer, secured with S.S. screws, 4" (100mm) throat on strainer. . (Where required by local code provide trap primer connection`P'.) H. FD—2 FLOOR DRAINS-WITH COMBINATION FUNNEL-FINISHED AREAS(ROUND STRAINER)Smith Series 2005A-3580NB Floor and Funnel Drain, all duco coated cast iron body, reversible flashing clamp with seepage openings and adjustable 5" (127mm) diameter nickel bronze 1/4" (6.35mm) thick strainer, secured with S.S. screws, with 4" (102mm) diameter nickel bronze funnel. (Where required by local code provide trap primer connection`P'.) 6129-08 15440-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES HB—1 NON-FREEZE WALL HYDRANT-BOX- EXTERIOR Smith Series 5509QT Box Type Wall Hydrant, 1/4 turn non-drip, ceramic cartridge, 3/4" (19mm) non-freeze wall type with bronze face and stainless steel with full 180 deg. cover opening box,adjustable wall-flange operating key and self-draining integral vacuum breaker. Length to suit wall thickness. J. DRWG NO.17-42 TRAP SEAL PRIMER SERVING 1 TO 2 DRAINS P.P.P. INC. Model P0-500 Automatic Trap Seal Primer Valve, serving 1 or 2 drains (primer automatically activated when there is a pressure drop in the system) with 1/2" (12.7mm) NPT (MtoF) connections with strainer and integral back flow preventer&vacuum breaker. K. DRWG NO. 17-43 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS P.P.P. INC. `Water Hammer Arrestors' Series `SC' with brass piston in a type 'K' copper casing size according to 1 manufacturer's recommendations chart below to eliminate water hammer and shock from piping system. Provide Water Hammer Arrestors on hot and cold water supplies to all quick valves, solenoids, and plumbing fixtures, and locate in an upright position between the last two fixtures on a line,or horizontally at the end of line closest to supply source. 1. SIZE FIXTURE UNITS MODEL NO. CONN.SIZE A 1 - 11 SC-500 1/2"(12mm) B 12-32 SC-700 3/4"(19mm) C 33-60 SC -1000 1"(25mm) Z D 61 - 113 SC-1250 1-1/4"(32mm) E 114—154 SC-1500 1-1/2"'(38mm) F 155-330 SC-2000 2"(50mm) r } 6129-08 15440-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all plumbing fixtures may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced standards. B. Examine rough-in for potable water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures. C. Examine walls,floors and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. D. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, rough-in drawings, and pertinent codes and regulations, the original-design, and the referenced standards. E. Comply with the installation requirements of ADA with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped. F. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports or building structure. Secure supplies behind or within wall construction to provide rigid installation. G. Install a stop valve in an accessible location in the water connection to each fixture. H. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. I. Seal fixtures to walls and floors using silicone sealant as specified in Section 07900. Match sealant color to fixture color. J. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning units,then retest. K. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures. L. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, shower valves, and flush valves to provide proper flow stream. M. Replace washers or cartridges of leaking or dripping faucets and stops. N. Clean fixtures, trim, and strainers using manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and materials. O. During construction cover all installed fixtures, sinks,and water coolers with cardboard boxes and wrap with Visqueen. END OF SECTION 15440 6129-08 15440-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15486 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS I 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following for domestic water systems: 1. Commercial, gas water heaters. 2. Accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed,and operating weights;furnished specialties; and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail water heater assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control systems. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of water heaters certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. D. Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. i E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single • manufacturer. B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water heaters and are based on specific units indicated. Other manufacturers' products complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section"Substitutions." C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. ANSI Compliance: Provide gas water heaters that comply with ANSI standards for gas water heaters and related products and that bear AGA certification label. E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water heater, hot-water storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,"Pressure Vessels,"Division 1. 6129-08 15486- 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15486 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS F. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed for the following: 1. ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings,"for commercial water heaters. 2. ASHRAE 90.2, "Energy Efficient Design of New Low-Rise Residential Buildings," for • household water heaters. 1.5 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to,and run concurrent with,other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include storage tanks,circulators,and burner assemblies. 2. Warranty Period: From date of Substantial Completion: a. Storage Tanks: 10 years. b. Circulators: Eight years. c. Burner Assemblies: Five years. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Commercial,Storage,Atmospheric-Vent, Gas Water Heaters: a. American Water Heater Co. b. Bock Water Heaters, Inc. c. Bradford White Corp. d. GSW Water Heating Co. e. HESco Industries, Inc. f. Lochinvar Corp. - g. PVI Industries, Inc. h. Rheem Manufacturing Co.; Rheem Water Heater Div. i. Rheem Manufacturing Co.; Ruud Water Heater Div. . j. Smith: A. O. Smith Water Products Co. k. State Industries. 2. Water Heater Stand and Drain Pan Units: a. Safety: W.H.Safety Products, Inc. 6129-08 15486-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15486 FUEL-FIRED,DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 2.2 COMMERCIAL, HIGH-EFFICIENCY,GAS WATER HEATERS A. Description: Sealed-combustion-chamber configuration and components complying with appropriate requirements of ANSI Z21.13 and UL 795, with nominal efficiency rating not less than 85 percent. B. Unit Construction: ASME code with 160-psig working-pressure rating. 1. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank for piping and other connections as required. Attach tappings to unit before testing and labeling. a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1,pipe threads. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges. 2. Interior Finish: Corrosion-resistant metal or materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier materials for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. 3. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE 90.1. 4. Jacket: Steel,with enameled finish. C. Burner: For use with sealed combustion chamber and natural-gas fuel, and complying with appropriate requirements of UL 795. D. Description: Condensing configuration and components complying with appropriate requirements of ANSI Z21.10.3 and UL 795, with nominal efficiency rating not less than 93 percent. } E. Shell Construction: ASME code with 150-psig working-pressure rating. 1. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank for piping connections, relief valve, pressure gage, thermometer, drain, anode rods, and controls as required. Attach tappings to tank shell before testing and labeling. a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1, pipe threads. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges. 2. Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier materials for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. 3. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except connections and controls. 4. • Jacket: Steel,with enameled finish. appropriate F. Burner: Condensing type for natural-gas fuel, complying with requirements of UL 795. 1. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. 2. Automatic Ignition: ANSI Z21.20, automatic gas-ignition system and components. 6129-08 15486-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION , RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15486 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 40 3. Automatic Damper: ANSI Z21.66,gas-fired-appliance, automatic-vent-damper device. G. Anode Rods: Factory installed, magnesium. H. Dip Tube: Factory installed. Not required if cold-water inlet is near bottom of storage tank. I. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005,corrosion-resistant metal,factory installed. 43 2.3 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: According to the following: 1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22,combination temperature and pressure relief valve. 2. Oil-Fired Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into tank. 3. Option: Separate, temperature and pressure relief valves are acceptable instead of combination relief valve.. 4. Exception: Omit combination temperature and pressure relief valve for tankless water heater, and furnish pressure relief valve for installation in piping. B. Pressure Relief Valves: According to the following: 1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22 pressure relief valve for storage tanks of 200,000 Btuh. 2. Oil-Fired Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include pressure setting less than heat-exchanger working-pressure rating. C. Vacuum Relief Valves: According to the following: 1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22. 2. Oil-Fired Water Heaters: Comply with ASME PTC 25.3. Furnish for installation in piping. 3. Exception: Omit if water heater has integral vacuum-relieving device. D. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping. E. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18, appliance type, factory or field installed. Include pressure rating, capacity, and pressure differential required for water heater and gas supply. F. Automatic Valves: ANSI Z21.21, appliance,electrically operated,on-off automatic valve. G. Water Heater Stand and Drain Pan Units: High-density-polyethylene-plastic, 18-inch- high, enclosed-base stand complying with IAPMO PS 103 and IAS No.2. Include integral or separate drain pan with raised edge and NPS 1 drain outlet with ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread. H. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated, steel stand for floor . mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. Include dimension that will support bottom of water heater a minimum of 18 inches above the floor. I. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated, steel bracket for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. 6129-08 15486-4 1/24/03 _lu RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15486 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS J. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4. K. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves for field assembly that is capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow through each water heater. L. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE 90.1 or ASHRAE.90.2. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 CONCRETE BASES A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete"and Division 15 Section"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." 3.2 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases. 1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand, bracket,suspended platform,or direct on floor is indicated. B. Install water heaters, level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and } referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible. C. Anchor water heaters to substrate. D. Install seismic restraints for water heaters. Anchor to substrate. E. Install and connect gas water heaters according to NFPA 54. 1. Install appliance, gas pressure regulators on gas-burner inlets of water heaters without pressure regulators. 2. Install vent piping from gas-train pressure regulators and valves to outside of building where required. Terminate vent piping with brass-screened vent cap fitting. Do not combine vents except with approval of authorities having jurisdiction. F. Install and connect oil-fired water heaters according to NFPA 31. G. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend relief valve outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain. I . H. Install pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters without storage. Extend relief valve outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain. I. Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping. 6129-08 15486-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15486 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS J. Install vacuum relief valves in water heater storage tanks that have copper lining. K. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 15 Section"Plumbing Specialties"for drain valves. L. Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages"for thermometers. 1. Exception: Omit thermometers for the following: a. Commercial,point-of-use,water heater inlet piping. M. Install pressure gages on water heater piping. Refer to Division 15 Section"Meters and Gages" for pressure gages. • N. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters. Fabricate, , r' modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater. Include shutoff valve,and thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each 1 ' water heater outlet. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves and Division 15 Section"Meters and Gages"for thermometers. O. Arrange for insulation on equipment and piping not furnished with factory-applied insulation. P. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps. Q. Fill water heaters with water. R. Charge compression tanks with air. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect hot- and cold-water piping with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot-water- circulating piping with shutoff valve,check valve,and union. D. Connect gas piping to gas burner with drip leg, tee, shutoff valve, and union; minimum size same as inlet connection. E. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal. F. Gas, Water Heater Vent Connections: Connect to vent system. Include draft hoods and diverters where required. Use vents same size as or larger than water heater outlets, but not smaller than indicated unless smaller vent size has been calculated according to NFPA 54. Comply with gas utility requirements for sizing. Gas vents are specified in Division 15 Section "Breechings,Chimneys,and Stacks." •:E 6129-08 15486-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15486 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS G. Electrical Connections:. Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16 Sections. Arrange wiring to allow unit service. H. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. In addition to manufacturer's written installation and startup checks,perform the following: 1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. 2. Verify that piping system tests are complete. 3. Check for piping connection leaks. 4. Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets,and drain piping. 5. Check operation of circulators. 6. Test operation of safety controls, relief valves,and devices. 7. Energize electric circuits. 8. Adjust operating controls. 9. Adjust hot-water-outlet temperature settings. Do not set above 140 deg F unless piping system application requires higher temperature. 10. Balance water flow through manifolds of multiple-unit installations. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate,and maintain water heaters. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures for starting and stopping troubleshooting,servicing,and maintaining equipment. 2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section"Contract Closeout." 3. Review date in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and • Maintenance Data." 4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice. END OF SECTION 15486 • 5486-7 6129-08 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15513 CONDENSING BOILERS I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY L � A. This Section includes packaged, factory-fabricated and -assembled, gas-fired, water-tube condensing boilers,trim, and accessories for generating hot water. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,and attachments to other Work. • 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic 4 restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. q3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power,signal,and control wiring. C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that condensing boiler, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section I "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" when anchored to a concrete base. Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term"withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b. The term"withstand"means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate • and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Source quality-control test reports. 6129-08 15513- 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15513 CONDENSING BOILERS E. ASME "A" Stamp Certification and Report: Submit "A" stamp certificate of authorization, and document hydrostatic testing of piping external to boiler. F. Startup service reports. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For condensing boilers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. ;. H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles,and dimensional requirements of condensing boilers and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, n' Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label condensing boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Condensing boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to Table 10-8. E. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency-shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Appendix N, "Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces and Boilers." F. UL Compliance: Test condensing boilers to comply with UL 726,"Oil-Fired Boiler Assemblies." G. UL Compliance: Test condensing boilers to comply with UL 795, "Commercial-Industrial Gas Heating Equipment." z 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement,and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of condensing boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period for Fire-Tube Condensing Boilers: 1. Leakage and Materials: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Stress and Corrosion: Nonprorated for five years from date of Substantial Completion. l PART 2-PRODUCTS 6129-08 15513-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15513 CONDENSING BOILERS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 FIRE-TUBE CONDENSING BOILERS A. Manufacturers: 1. AERCO International, Inc. 2. Heat Transfer Products, Inc. B. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested fire-tube condensing boiler with heat exchanger sealed pressure-tight, built on a steel base; including insulated jacket; flue-gas vent; combustion-air intake connections; water supply, return, and condensate drain connections;and controls. Water heating service only. C. Fabricate base and attachment to pressure vessel with reinforcement strong enough to resist boiler movement during a seismic event when boiler base is anchored to building structure. D. Boiler Characteristics and Capacities: Refer to Drawings E. Fire-Tube Boiler Components: 1. Heat Exchanger: Nonferrous, corrosion-resistant combustion chamber. 2. Pressure Vessel: Carbon steel with welded heads and tube connections. 3. Burner. Natural gas,forced draft. 4. Blower: Centrifugal fan to operate during each burner firing sequence and to prepurge and postpurge the combustion chamber. a. Refer to Division 15 Section"Motors"for general requirements. b. Electrical Characteristics: Refer to Schedule. 5. Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator. Include 100 percent safety shutoff with electronic flame supervision. 6. Ignition: Spark ignition with 100 percent main-valve shutoff with electronic flame supervision. 7. Casing: a. Jacket: Sheet metal,with snap-in or interlocking closures. b. Control Compartment Enclosures: NEMA 250,Type 1 A. c. Finish; Baked-enamel protective finish. • d. Insulation: Minimum 2-inch- thick fiberglass insulation surrounding the heat exchanger. e. Combustion Air Connections: Inlet and vent duct collars. 8. Mounting base to secure boiler to concrete base. 2.3 HOT-WATER BOILER TRIM 6129-08 15513-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15513 CONDENSING BOILERS A. Include devices sized to comply with ANSI B31.9,"Building Services Piping." B. Aquastat Controllers: Operating,firing rate, and high limit. ;{-E; C. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated. 45 psig. D. Altitude and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3-1/2-inch- diameter, combination water- pressure and -temperature gage. Gages shall have operating-pressure and -temperature ranges so normal operating range is at approximately 50 percent of full range. E. Boiler Air Vent: Automatic. F. Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 hose-end gate valve. G. Circulation Pump: Non-overloading, horizontal, in-line pump with rubber-mounted, split- capacitor motor having thermal-overload protection and permanently -lubricated bearings; designed to operate at specified boiler pressures and temperatures. H. Expansion Tank: Welded carbon steel, rated for operating pressure and temperature or minimum 125-psig working pressure and 240 deg F operating temperature. Separate air charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity by a flexible butyl-rubber bladder securely sealed into tank. Include hose-end gate drain valve, pressure gage with --, minimum 3-inch dial, and air-charging fitting. Factory fabricate and test tank with taps installed and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,Division 1. • 1. Tank Characteristics: Refer to Schedule 2.4 BURNER OPERATING CONTROLS A. Description: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety controls limit the operation of burner. 1. High Cutoff: Manual reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above maximum boiler design temperature. 2. Low-Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent burner operation on low water. Cutoff switch shall be manual-reset type. 3. Blocked Inlet Safety Switch: Manual-reset pressure switch field mounted on boiler combustion-air inlet. . 4. Alarm Bell: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound alarm for above conditions. 2.5 BOILER OPERATING CONTROLS A. Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features: 1. Control Transformer: 115 V. 2. ' Sequence of Operation: Electric,factory-fabricated, and factory installed panel to control burner firing rate. Contoller to have the ability to reset suply water temperature based on outside air temperature. Boiler to be set to operate at 180F HWS, 105F HWR. Coontrol panel to be wired to heating water circulation pump Variable Frequency Drives to modulate circulation pump flow rate to maintain heating water supply and return temperature setpoints. Boiler to modulate to maintain design HWS setpoint, pumps to modulate speed to maintain HWR setpoint. All control logic to be factory programmed 6129-08 15513-4 1/24/03 I. RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15513 I ', CONDENSING BOILERS into boiler control panel. Coordinate with circulation pump VFD manufacturer for Icompatability. . B. Building Management System Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable building management system to monitor set point and display boiler status and alarms Ili as well as enable/disable the heating water system. 2.6 VENTING KITS I A. Kit: ASTM A 959, Type 29-4C, stainless-steel, vertical vent terminal, roof passage thimble, indoor wall plate,vent,vent adapter,condensate trap,and sealant. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section I, for high-pressure boilers and Section IV, for low-pressure boilers. 111 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Before boiler installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, and piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting boiler performance, maintenance, and operations. 1. Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections. B. Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where boilers will be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 BOILER INSTALLATION A. Install boilers level on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Concrete Bases: Anchor boilers to concrete base. 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base. 2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete I base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. • Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 5. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3. -1 C. Vibration Isolation: Rubber pads with a minimum static deflection of 0.25 inch. Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." I 6129-08 15513-5 1/24/03 . 1 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15513 CONDENSING BOILERS a:n D. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54. E. Assemble and install boiler trim. F. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties. B. Connect piping to boilers, except safety relief valve connections, with flexible connectors of materials suitable for service. Flexible connectors and their installation are specified in Division 15 Section"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." C. Connect gas piping full size to boiler gas-train inlet with union. D. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection. E. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain. F. Install piping from safety valves to drip-pan elbow and to nearest floor drain. G. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance. H. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section"Grounding and Bonding." I. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section"Conductors and Cables." J. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test, inspect, and adjust boiler components and equipment installation and to perform startup service. B. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. D. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust air-fuel ratio and combustion. E. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. F. Adjust initial temperature set points. G. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. 6129-08 15513-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15513 CONDENSING BOILERS H. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose,without additional cost. I. Prepare written report that documents testing procedures and results. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain condensing boilers. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures " • END OF SECTION 15513 I 6129-08 15513-7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15628 MECHANICAL CHILLER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes packaged, water-cooled, electric-motor-driven, reciprocating/scroll water chillers. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Refrigerant Monitoring and Safety Equipment" for refrigerant monitors, alarms, supplemental breathing apparatus, and ventilation equipment IIinterlocks. 1.3 DEFINITIONS I A. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. B. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. 1 -'i 1.4 SUBMITTALS - , A. Product Data: Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties,and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's certified prints of water chiller assemblies, control panels,sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following: 1. Assembled unit dimensions. 2. Weight and load distribution. 3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation. 4. Size and location of piping and wiring connections. 5. Vibration Isolation Calculations and Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. I b. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails and equipment mounting frames. 6. Wiring Diagrams: Power,signal, and control wiring. C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans drawn to scale and coordinated with the following: 1. Structural supports. 2. Piping roughing-in requirements. 6129-08 15628- 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15628 MECHANICAL CHILLER Lm 3. Wiring roughing-in requirements, including spaces reserved for electrical equipment. 4. Access requirements, including working clearances for mechanical controls and electrical equipment, and tube pull and service clearances. D. Certificates: For certification required in"Quality Assurance"Article. E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that water chillers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand"means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any - parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b. The term "withstand"means"the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. F. Source quality-control test reports. G. Startup service reports. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each water chiller to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ARI Certification: Signed by manufacturer certifying compliance with requirements in ARI 550/590, "Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle." B. ASHRAE Certification: Signed by manufacturer certifying compliance with ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration. Comply with ASHRAE Guideline 3 for refrigerant __! leaks,recovery,and handling and storage requirements. C. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water chiller heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. D. Comply with NFPA 70. E. Comply with UL 1995. F. Green Seal Certification: Signed by manufacturer certifying compliance with Green Seal's GS- 31. 6129-08 15628-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15628 MECHANICAL CHILLER 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Ship water chillers from the factory fully charged with refrigerant or nitrogen. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs and roof penetrations. These items are specified in ; Division 7 Section"Roof Accessories." 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of water chillers that fail in materials or workmanship. ;f PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 Operating Conditions " I A. Provide water-cooled liquid chiller with the capacity as scheduled on drawings at job site elevation listed in Section 15050. B. Chiller shall be designed to operate using R-22 Refrigerant. C. Chiller shall be designed for parallel evaporator water flow. D. The liquid to be chilled will be water containing corrosion inhibitors. E. Chiller shall be designed to operate using volt, 3 phase,60 Hz electrical power supply. 2.2 Water-Cooled Packaged Chiller B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Scroll Water Chillers: a. Carrier; a United Technologies Company. b. Dunham-Bush. c. McQuay International. ' d. Trane Company(The). _ e. YORK International Corporation. • f. Multistack. • 6129-08 15628-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION . RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15628 MECHANICAL CHILLER B. System Description: Chiller shall incorporate Scroll-type compressors and consist of multiple 15-ton refrigerant circuits. Each refrigerant circuit shall consist of an individual compressor, condenser,evaporator,thermal expansion valve,and control system. Each circuit shall be constructed to be independent of other circuits from a refrigeration and electrical stand-point. The multi-circuit chiller must be able to produce chilled water even in the event of a failure of one or more refrigerant circuits. Circuits shall not contain more than 12 lb.of R-22 refrigerant. C. General 1. Chiller Modules shall be ETL listed in accordance with UL Standard 465, CSA certified per Standard C22.2#119, and bear the ASME UM stamp on all heat exchangers. • 2. Modules shall ship wired and charged with refrigerant. All modules shall be factory run tested prior to shipment. 3. Compressors, heat exchangers,piping and controls shall be mounted on a heavy gauge steel frame. Electrical controls, contactors,and relays for each module shall be mounted within that module. -r D. Chilled and Condenser Water Mains: Each module shall include supply and return mains for both chilled and condenser water. Grooved end connections are provided for interconnection to six inch standard (6.625 inch outside diameter)piping with Victaulic type couplings. E. Evaporators and condensers: Each evaporator and condenser shall be brazed plate heat exchangers constructed of 316 stainless :1 steel; designed,tested,and stamped in accordance with ASME code for 300 psig working pressure on the evaporator and 360 psig working pressure on the condenser. Both the condenser and evaporator heat exchanger shall be mounted below the compressor, to eliminate the effect of migration of refrigerant to the cold evaporator with consequent liquid slugging on start-up. F. Compressor: Each module shall contain two hermetic scroll compressors independently circuited and with internal spring isolation mounted to the module with rubber-in-shear isolators. Each system also includes high discharge pressure and low suction pressure manual reset safety cut-outs. G. Central Control System. 1. Scheduling of the various compressors shall be performed by a microprocessor based control system (Master Controller). A new lead compressor is selected every 24 hours to assure even distribution of compressor run time. 2. The Master Controller shall monitor and report the 6129-08 15628-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15628 MECHANICAL CHILLER following on each refrigeration system: a. Discharge Pressure Fault b. Suction Pressure Fault c. Compressor Winding Temperature d. Suction Temperature e. Evaporator Leaving Chilled Water Temp. 3. The Master Controller shall monitor and report the following system parameters: a. Chilled Water Entering and Leaving Temperature b. Condenser Water Entering and Leaving Temperature c. Chilled Water and Condenser Water Flow 4. An out of tolerance indication from these controls or sensors shall cause a fault indication at the Master Controller and shutdown of that compressor with the transfer of load requirements to the next available compressor. In the case of a System Fault the entire chiller will be shut down. When a fault occurs,the Master Controller shall record conditions at the time of the fault and store the data for recall. This information shall be capable of being recalled through the keypad of the Master Controller and displayed on the Master Controller's 2 line by 40 character back-lit LCD. A history of faults shall be maintained including date and time of day of each fault(up to the last 20 occurrences). 5. Individual monitoring of leaving chilled water temperatures from each refrigeration system shall be programmed to protect against freeze-up. 6. The control system shall monitor entering and leaving chilled water temperatures to determine system load and select the number of compressor circuits required to operate. Response times and set points shall be adjustable. The system shall provide for variable time between compressor sequencing and temperature sensing, so as to fine tune the chiller to different existing building conditions. The Master Controller shall be equipped with an RS-232 port connection for communication with a remote PC or Modem. 7. . Optionally,the Chiller shall be capable of RS-232 Communication with the Johnson Controls Company Metasys, Landis and Gyr System 6000, Novar and Automatic Logic control systems. This interface shall include remote programming of chiller setpoints. H. Chiller shall have a single point power connection and external inputs and outputs to be compatible with the building management 6129-08 15628-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15628 MECHANICAL CHILLER f system. Inputs/Outputs include: 1. Remote Start/Stop 2. Cooling Alarm C. Water Chiller Characteristics and Capacities: 1. Refrigeration Capacity: Tons. 2. Efficiency: Comply with Green Seal's GS-31 for full and part-load efficiencies. 3. Efficiency: Comply with FEMP recommendations for full and part-load efficiencies. 4. Efficiency: a. Full Load: 16 kW/ton. b. EER: 15.4. 5. Chilled-Water Flow:49 gpm. 6. Evaporator Entering-Water Temperature: 55 deg F. 7. Evaporator Leaving-Water Temperature:45 deg F. 8. Evaporator Water-Pressure Drop: 6.1 each. 9. Evaporator Fouling Factor: .0001. 10. Condenser-Water Flow: 40 gpm. 11. Condenser Entering-Water Temperature: 80 deg F. 12. Condenser Leaving-Water Temperature: 95 deg F. 13. Condenser-Water Pressure Drop: 4.9. 14. Condenser Fouling Factor: .0001. 15. Compressor Full-Load Amperes:'2 at 115. 16. Electrical Characteristics: 208/60/3. 17. Condenser Fan(s): 208/60/3. 2.3 SAFETIES,CONTROLS AND OPERATION A. Chiller safety controls system shall be provided with the unit (minimum)as follows: 1. Low evaporator refrigerant pressure 2. Loss of flow through the evaporator 3. Loss of flow through the condenser 4. High condenser refrigerant pressure 9 9 5. High compressor motor temperature 6. Low suction gas temperature 7. Low leaving evaporator water temperature B. Failure of chiller to start or chiller shutdown due to any of the above safety cutouts shall be enunciated by display of the appropriate diagnostic description at the unit control panel. This annunciation will be in plain English. Alphanumeric codes shall be unacceptable. C. The chiller shall be furnished with a Master Controller as an integral portion of the chiller control circuitry to provide the following functions: 1. Provide automatic chiller shutdown during periods when 6129-08 15628-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15628 MECHANICAL CHILLER the load level decreases below the normal operating requirements of the chiller. Upon an increase in load,the chiller shall automatically restart. 2. Provisions for connection to automatically enable the chiller from a remote energy management system. 3. The control panel shall provide alphanumeric display showing all system parameters in the English language with numeric data in English units. D. Normal Chiller Operation 1. When chiller is enabled,the factory supplied Master Controller modulates the chiller capacity from minimum to maximum as required by building load. 2. The Chiller control system shall respond to Entering Water Temperature and will have an integral reset based on entering water temperature to provide for efficient operation at part-load conditions. E. Power Phase Monitor 1. Provide a Power Phase Monitor on the incoming power supply to the chiller. This device shall prevent the chiller from operating during periods when the incoming power is unsuitable for proper operation. 2. The Power Phase Monitor shall provide protection against the following conditions: a. Low Voltage(Brown-Out) b. Phase Rotation c. Loss of Phase d. Phase Imbalance F. REMOTE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 1. The Master Controller will be provided with an RS-232 port,software and modem for remote communication with an IBM Compatible PC utilizing a Hayes Compatible modem. 2. All the functions of the Master Controller shall be available . via the Remote Management System including: a. Adjustment of all system setpoints b. Review and resetting of all "non-current"faults c. Interrogation and display of all sensor readings d. Display of chiller load profile 3. In addition the Remote Management System will provide 6129-08 15628-7 1/24/03 I .5 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15628 MECHANICAL CHILLER a time scheduling capability which provides for up to 47 individual date/time-of-day adjustments to the system operating parameters. 4. The Chiller shall be monitored weekly for a period of three months during initial operation of the system by the manufacturer's headquarters personnel. This will serve to insure proper set-up and operation of the chiller system. PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEM FLUSHING PROCEDURE . y A. Prior to connecting the chiller to the condenser and chilled water • loop,the piping loops shall be flushed with a detergent and hot water(110-130 degree F)mixture to remove previously accumulated dirt and other organic. In old piping systems with heavy encrustation of inorganic materials consult a water treatment specialist for proper passivation and/or removal of these contaminants. B. During the flushing 30 mesh (max.)Y-strainers(or acceptable equivalent)shall be in place in the system piping and examined periodically as necessary to remove collected residue.The flushing process shall take no less than 6 hours or until the strainers when examined after each flushing are clean. Old systems with heavy encrustation shall be flushed for a minimum of 24 hours and may take as long as 48 hours before the filters run dean. Detergent and acid concentrations shall be used in strict accordance with the respective chemical manufacturers instructions. After flushing with the detergent and/or dilute acid concentrations the system loop shall be purged with clean water for at least one hour to ensure that all residual cleaning chemicals have been flushed out. C. Prior to supplying water to the chiller the Water Treatment - Specification shall be consulted for requirements regarding the water quality during chiller operation. The appropriate chiller manufacturer's service literature shall be available to the operator and/or service contractor and consulted for guidelines concerning preventative maintenance and off-season shutdown procedures. 3.2 Water Treatment Requirements A. Supply water for both the chilled water and condenser water circuits shall be analyzed and treated by a professional water treatment:specialist who is familiar with the operating conditions and materials of construction specified for the chiller's heat exchangers, headers and associated piping. Cycles of concentration shall be controlled such that recirculated water Y'a quality for modular chillers using 316 stainless steel brazed plate heat exchangers and carbon steel headers is maintained within the following parameters: 1.pH Greater than 7 and less than 9 6129-08 15628-8 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15628 MECHANICAL CHILLER 2.Total Dissolved Solids(TDS) Less than 1000 ppm 3. Hardness as CaCO3 30 to 500 ppm 4.Alkalinity as Ca CO3 30 to 500 ppm 5. Chlorides Less than 200 ppm 6. Sulfates Less than 200 ppm END OF SECTION 15628 • • I i 6129-08 15628-9 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILLION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15641 OPEN-CIRCUIT, MECHANICAL-DRAFT COOLING TOWERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY • A. This Section includes factory-assembled and -tested, open-circuit, induced-draft, cooling towers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, pressure drop,fan performance data, rating curves with selected points indicated,furnished specialties,and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include handrails, ladders, and equipment mounting frame. 3. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field piping and wiring connection. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Power,signal,and control wiring. C. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Structural supports. 2. Piping and wiring roughing-in requirements (determine spaces reserved for electrical equipment). 3. Access requirements for service and maintenance. D. Product Certificates: CTI performance certification. E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that cooling towers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following: 1. . Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. • a. The term "withstand" means"the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 6129-08 15641 - 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILLION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15641 OPEN-CIRCUIT, MECHANICAL-DRAFT COOLING TOWERS 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. F. Field quality-control test reports. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cooling towers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. s H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated,that is certified by CTI,and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing,field testing, and in-service performance. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of cooling towers and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items L. are specified in Division 7 Section"Roof Accessories." 1.6 WARRANTY Y-� A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace the following components of open-circuit, mechanical-draft cooling towers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period: 6129-08 15641 -2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILLION RENTON,WASHINGTON ( SECTION 15641 OPEN-CIRCUIT, MECHANICAL-DRAFT COOLING TOWERS 1. Fan, motor,and motor supports. 2. Fan shafts,bearings, and sheaves. 3. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS • A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality;complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, and having G210 coating designation. 2.3 FORCED-DRAFT, COUNTERFLOW COOLING TOWERS A. Manufacturers: iE 1. Baltimore Aircoil Company. 2. Evapco Inc. B. Furnish and install,as shown on plans,one factory assembled cooling tower of counterflow blow-through design with single side air entry.Cooling tower shall be of unitary design with all moving parts factory mounted and aligned.All structural elements and steel panels shall be • constructed of G235(Z700 in metric), hot-dip galvanized steel c/w discharge nozzel. C. Fabricate cooling tower mounting frame and attachments with reinforcement strong enough to resist cooling tower movement during a seismic event when cooling tower mounting frame is attached to the building structure. D. Cooling Tower Characteristics and Capacities: 1. Condenser-Water Flow: 90 gpm. 2. Maximum Condenser-Water Pressure Drop: 12 psig. 3. Entering Condenser-Water Temperature: 95 deg F. 4. Leaving Condenser-Water Temperature:85 deg F. 5. Entering-Air Wet-Bulb Temperature:62 deg F. 6. Number of Fans: One. 7. Fan Motor Electrical Characteristics: 208/3/60-V ac,3 phase,60 Hz. 8. Basin Heater: Maintain 40 deg F condenser-water temperature at 18 deg F outside-air temperature. E. Fan(s): 1 6129-08 15641 -3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILLION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15641 OPEN-CIRCUIT, MECHANICAL-DRAFT COOLING TOWERS 1. The fans and motors shall be located in the dry entering airstream to provide greater reliability and ease of maintenance.The forwardly curved centrifugal fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fan housings shall have curved inlet rings for 213 efficient air entry.Fans shall be mounted on a steel fan shaft supported by heavy-duty, self-aligning,relubricatable bearings with cast iron housings. Furnish 1.5 hp, 1800 rpm drip-proof ball bearing fan motor(s)with 1.15 service factor. Motor(s)shall be suitable for outdoor service on 208 volt,60 hertz,3 phase electrical service. Motor shall be located on a heavy-duty motor base, adjustable by means of a single threaded bolt-and-nut arrangement.V-belt fan drive shall be designed for not less than 150%of motor nameplate horsepower. Drive and all moving parts shall be protected by removable hot- dip galvanized screens and panels. F. Capacity-Control Dampers: Galvanized sheet steel, fan-discharge dampers, with linkages, electric operator, controller, limit switches,transformer,and weatherproof enclosure. G. Water Distribution System: 1. Evenly distribute water over fill material,with gravity-feed nozzles. 2. Pipes: Schedule 40, PVC. 3. Nozzle Materials:Schedule 40, PVC. H. Casing: 1. The heat transfer section shall be integral to the pan section to facilitate rigging and shall include serpentine, PVC wet deck surface below a spray-type water distribution system, all encased by galvanized steel panels.The wet deck surface shall consist of serpentine sheets of polyvinyl chloride(PVC).The PC sheets shall be impervious to rot, decay, fungus or biological attack and have a flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM Standard E84- 77a.The surface shall be manufactured and performance tested by the cooling tower manufacturer to assure single source responsibility and control of the final product. I. Collection Basin Material: 1. The pan section shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel utilizing double break flanges for maximum strength and rigidity and reliable sealing of watertight joints. Standard pan accessories shall include large circular access doors, large area lift-out strainer of anti-vortexing design, and solid brass make-up value large diameter polystyrene filled plastic float arranged for easy adjustment. J. Fill Material: Schedule 40 PVC; resistant to rot, decay, and biological attack; with maximum _ flame-spread index of 5 according to ASTM E 84; and fabricated, formed, and installed by manufacturer to ensure that water breaks up into droplets. K. Drift Eliminator Material: PVC. L. Water-Level Control: Manufacturer's standard mechanical makeup water valve and plastic or bronze float with an adjustable linkage. M. Water-Level Control: Electric float switch; characteristics coordinated with solenoid-operated, makeup water valve. N. Water-Level Control: Electric float switch and solenoid-operated,makeup water valve. 6129-08 15641 -4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILLION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15641 OPEN-CIRCUIT,MECHANICAL-DRAFT COOLING TOWERS O. Discharge Hood Material:Galvanized sheet steel with polymer coating. P. Inlet Screen Material: Galvanized-steel mesh, hot-dip galvanized-steel mesh with polymer coating,or stainless-steel mesh mounted in removable frames. - Q. Inlet Screen Material: Galvanized-steel mesh with polymer coating mounted in removable frames. R. Inlet Screen Material: Stainless-steel mesh mounted in removable frames. S. Basin Heater: Electric-resistance coil. 2.4 MOTORS A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section"Motors." B. Enclosure Type:Totally enclosed,air over. C. Motor Speed:Two speed,single winding. 2.5 HANDRAILS, LADDERS,AND PLATFORMS A. Handrails: Galvanized steel or aluminum complyingwith 29 CFR 1910.23. Pipe-rail materials and fabrication are specified in Division 5 Section"Pipe and Tube Railings." B. Ladders and Safety Cages: Galvanized_steel or aluminum complying with 29 CFR 1910.27. C. Platforms: Galvanized steel with a bar grating floor. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Test and certify cooling tower performance according to CTI's STD 201, "Certification Standard for Commercial Water-Cooling Towers Thermal Performance." PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ( A. Examine roughing-in for concrete bases, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, and electrical to verify actual locations and sizes before cooling tower installation and other conditions affecting cooling tower performance,maintenance,and operation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install cooling towers on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Concrete Bases: Anchor cooling tower to concrete base. 6129-08 15641 -5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILLION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15641 OPEN-CIRCUIT, MECHANICAL-DRAFT COOLING TOWERS 4.3 1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of the base. 2. For equipment supported on structural slab, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions,and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 5. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3. C. Vibration Isolation: Mount water cooling towers on a vibration isolation equipment base as specified in Division 15 Section"Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." D. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. E. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not factory mounted. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to cooling towers to allow service and maintenance. C. Install flexible pipe connectors at final connections of towers mounted on vibration isolators. D. Connect overflow drain and bleed lines to sanitary sewage system. E. Domestic Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping." Connect to water-level control with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection. F. Condenser-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section Yz "Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return cooling-tower connections with shutoff valve, flow-control valve, and union or flange on supply connection to the tower and shutoff valve and union or flange to return connection from the tower to the chiller. G. Hot-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return basin-heater tappings with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange on supply connection and union or flange and balancing valve on return connection. H. Condensate Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15 Section Condensate Piping. Connect steam supply to basin heater with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange and condensate piping with union or flange, shutoff valve, strainer, and an appropriate steam trap. I. Ground cooling towers according to Division 16 Section"Grounding and Bonding." J. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section"Conductors and Cables." 6129-08 15641 -6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILLION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15641 - OPEN-CIRCUIT, MECHANICAL-DRAFT COOLING TOWERS k K. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections according to CTI's ATC 105, "Acceptance Test Code for Water Cooling Towers," and prepare test reports. 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for proper assemblies, installations,and connections. C. Obtain performance tables from manufacturer. , D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following: 1. Clean entire unit including basins. 2. Verify that accessories are properly installed. 3. Check makeup water float. 4. Verify clearances for airflow and for cooling tower servicing. 5. Check for vibration isolation and structural support. 6. Lubricate bearings on fans and shafts. 7. Verify fan wheel rotation for,correct direction and for vibration or binding. Correct vibration and binding problems. 8. Adjust belts to proper alignment and tension. 9. Verify water level in tower basin. Fill to proper startup level. 10. Verify operation of tower basin, makeup line, automatic freeze protect dump, and controlling device. Replace defective and malfunctioning units. 11. Verify operation of basin heater and control thermostat. Replace defective and malfunctioning units. 12. Verify that tower discharge is not recirculating into air intakes. Recommend corrective action. E. Check HVAC water treatment system for proper operation, and measure chemical treatment levels. Verify operation of tower basin automatic blowdown,and controlling device. F. Start cooling tower and condenser-water pumps. Follow manufacturer's written starting procedures. G. Prepare a written startup report that records the results of tests and inspections. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Set and balance condenser-water flow to each tower inlet. B. Adjust water-level control for proper operating level. 6129-08 15641 -7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILLION j RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15641 OPEN-CIRCUIT, MECHANICAL-DRAFT COOLING TOWERS .v� C. Occupancy Adjustment: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION ti A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain cooling towers. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 15641 • 6129-08 15641 -8 1/24/03 I ' RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15721 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME(VAV)AIR HANDLING UNITS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS A. All work to be furnished and installed under this section shall comply with all the requirements of General Conditions,Supplemental Conditions, Division 1 -General Requirements,and Section 15050-Basic Materials and Methods,and other Sections in Division 15 specified herein. 1.2 SCOPE A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements of Division 1,and shall include, but not necessarily be limited to,the following: 1. Air Handling Units 2. Fans 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 15080: Mechanical Insulation '� C. Section 15880: Air Distribution D. Section 15900: Controls and Instrumentation E. Section 15950: Testing,Adjusting and Balancing F. Division 16: Electrical 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide air handling units that are the standard product of an equipment manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such units who issues complete catalog information on such products. Units shall not be fabricated by the Contractor. B. Certifications: Provide certified ratings of units based on tests performed in accordance with ARI 430, "Central-Station Air Handling Units." C. Codes and Standards: Provide air handling units conforming to the requirements of the latest addition of the following: 1. Air Movement and Control Association(AMCA): a. 99Standards Handbook b. 210Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating[Unit shall bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal] • c. 300Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans [Unit shall bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal] d. 301 Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data e. 500Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters 2. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): a. 9Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings b. 11 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings ' c. 900Test Performance of Air Filter Units 6129-08 15721 - 1 1/24/03 1 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15721 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME(VAV)AIR HANDLING UNITS 3. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute(ARI): a. 410Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils b. 430Central-Station Air-Handling Units 4. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): a. 15Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Except for motors, provide electrical components required as part of air handling units,which comply with NEMA Standards. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Provide air handling unit internal insulation having flame spread rating not higher than 25 and smoke developed rating not higher than 50: a. 70National electrical Code b. 90AStandard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems c. 90BStandard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems 7. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'National Association, Inc. (SMACNA): Comply with applicable SMACNA standards including"HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible." 8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Except for motors, provide electrical components required as part of air handling units,which have been listed and labeled by UL. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air handling units showing dimensions,weights,capacities,ratings,fan performance with operating point clearly indicated, motor electrical characteristics,and finishes of materials, installation instructions, sound and vibration test report,and bearing life calculations. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing unit dimensions,weight loadings, required clearances,field connection details and methods of support. Draw to a scale of one half inch to one foot. Include field fabricated mixing boxes, dampers and duct connections. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement,and spare parts lists. Include this data, _- product data,shop drawings,and wiring diagrams in operating and maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated,and fan has been test run under observation. 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. . Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1. Deliver unit to the site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed. B. Store/protect products under provisions of Division 1. Protect unit against dirt,water, chemical,and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged unit-remove from project site. 1.8 WARRANTY 6129-08 15721 -2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15721 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME(VAV)AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Provide one year(12 months)warranty under provisions of Division 1. The warranty shall include parts,labor,travel costs,and living expenses incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory authorized service. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Silent-Aire Mfg.or approved equal Haakon Industries or Scott Springfield. Listed • manufacturers do not imply that their standard construction is approved or that they are equal. All manufacturers must meet,or exceed, minimum requirements of these specifications. 2.2 GENERAL A. Sectional draw-thru type variable air volume air-handling units suitable for medium pressure operation. Unit to be delivered in sections and assembled on site. B. Supply fan shall be centrifugal plenum type with airfoil shaped backward inclined blades in an Arrangement#3 for belt drive operation.. Fans shall be selected for VAV operation. Return fan shall be DWDI-FC blower for Arrangement#3 mounting on a steel inertia base. C. Fabricate unit with fan and coil sections plus accessories, including cooling coil section, mixing box section,filter section,and inlet/outlet plenums. D. Factory fabricate and test air handling units of sizes, capacities, and configuration as indicated and specified. E. All major components used to assemble air-handling units with the exception of electrical devices,drives, bearings and controls shall be manufactured by the air handler manufacturer. ' F. Motors shall be premium efficiency TEFC type. Designed for use with variable frequency drives. G. Filter section shall include space for face load-in filters with 2"pre-filters and 12"rigid final filters with an average efficiency of 85%per ASHRAE Standard 52-76 test. • H. The flow measuring device shall include a mounted cfm readout gauge and produce a 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 ma output signal proportional to cfm for interface with the controls system. Coordinate signal output with controls installer. In addition,analog airflow gauge shall be mounted on the side of the each fan housing to provide direct analog readout in cfm. By section 15900 controls. 2.3 UNIT CASING A. •Casings, including dividing panels between components, shall be of inter-plenum lock construction 16 ga.satin coat material. Panels shall be caulked and riveted together on 6 inch or less centers. All blind fastening shall be with 3/16"rivets on 6"centers. Sheet metal screws are not acceptable. All panels are not to exceed 18" in width,and are to be 4"in depth. 6129-08 15721 -3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION J RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15721 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME(VAV)AIR HANDLING UNITS B. All casing parts, including fan wheel and housing,shall be cleaned and painted with one coat of epoxy primer with two coats of two component acrylic enamel on the outside cabinet. Paint system shall meet ASTM B116 Salt Spray test for 500 hours. j C. All sections and joints shall be caulked and gasketed air and water tight. Total housing leakage shall not exceed 1%of the rated CFM at 125%of system static pressure. Certified factory test report on each unit to be available to Mechanical Engineer if requested before units are shipped from factory. D. The structural frame shall be a C8 x 11.5lbs/ft"C"channel,with and cross-channel reinforcing. Floor to be minimum 12 gauge checker plate, primed and painted with epoxy primer. Under floor shall be insulated with 2"acoustic 3#insulation and clad with 22 ga. Galvanized sheet metal. - ' E. Provide 10"viewing windows with marine lights in all fan sections. Access doors shall be hinged,double skinned type, provided for all sections and of the same gauge material as the casing. Door entrance shall not be less than 20"wide. Door hinges shall be full length stainless steel piano hinge.All doors shall open against fan pressure. Gasket shall be minimum of neoprene, automotive type bulb seal. Handles shall be Vent-lock 310. y 2.4 FANS A. Fan performance shall be rated and certified in accordance with AMCA standard 210 for fans mounted inside cabinets. All fan blades shall be fully welded to wheel assembly. Fan wheel and shaft shall be statically and dynamically balanced at rated speed in the factory and given a final test with motor and drive in place after installation in air handler. B. Bearings shall be mounted on structural steel framework integral with the fan housing. The bearinglife bearings shall be selected for a minimum L10 life of 100 000 hours. Submit bea , 9 analysis calculations to show compliance for each fan. C. Fan and motor shall be mounted internally in the fan cabinet on an integral structural steel base. The fan discharge shall be isolated from the casing with a factory installed neoprene flexible connection. The flexible connection shall have not air gaps or spaces where air could leak through. This entire assembly shall be mounted inside the casing and laterally stable open spring isolators selected for efficiency of not less than 99%. Seismic snubbing devices shall be factory installed and provide resistance to lateral seismic forces of no less than 100%of the operating weight of the isolated assembly. Snubbers shall be adjustable -, to within 1/4"of the assembles leveled operating position. All fan shafts shall be selected for operation not to exceed 75%of the first critical speed. D. Fan and motor shall be mounted on an internal structural steel inertia base with 4 point, 1" deflection spring isolation,and seismic snubbers. Fan shall be isolated from unit casing with minimum 6"x 1/8"neoprene flex connector. E. V-belt drives shall be fixed on motors 7.5 hp and larger,variable pitch on 5 hp and lower. • All drives shall be selected for 150%of nameplate horsepower and shall have matching belts. 2.5 COILS -; A. All coils shall be fabricated of 5/8"O.D. seamless copper tubing of 0.020 wall thickness minimum mechanically expanded into aluminum fins of 0.008 minimum thickness. All return bends shall be 0.035 copper minimum. Casings shall be of hot dipped galvanized 6129-08 15721 -4 1/24/03 1 i RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15721 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME(VAV)AIR HANDLING UNITS steel with structural support. Headers shall be of seamless copper. Coils shall be tested at 300 psi and shall be of the size,circuiting and fins spacing as shown on drawings. Multiple coil banks shall be supported and braced with galvanized steel angles with provisions for individual coil removal. Unit shall have double wall,304 stainless steel, insulated drain pans with one stainless steel connections. All coils shall be ARI certified and rated. Coil penetrations through cabinet shall be grommeted and air tight. All supply and return connections shall be plainly marked. All cooling coils shall be counter flow design. Auxiliary drains shall be installed in the unit floor down stream of coils. 2.6 UNIT INSULATION A. The units walls and roof shall be insulated with 2"thick 3 lb per cubic foot density,neoprene coated fiberglass insulation. A mastic adhesive conforming to ASTM E84-74 Dry Flame Spread criteria shall be applied to all insulation seams such that all edges are rendered smooth to air flow. Insulation shall meet NFPA 90A smoke and flame spread requirements. Walls and ceiling of units shall be insulated on the interior of the unit. Walls and roof shall be lined with 22 ga. Perf liner in fan plenums and 22 ga. Galvanized solid liner throughout the rest of the unit. 2.7 DAMPERS A. Dampers shall be of airfoil extruded aluminum construction. Blade width shall be a maximum of 6"and mounted in extruded aluminum frames. Linkage shall be for opposed - blade type with hex-drive rod. Dampers shall be low leak type. Maximum leakage shall be 1%at 10"we static pressure. Equal to Tamco. B. All damper linkages shall be connected for easy installation of damper control motors. All damper sections shall have access doors. 2.8 SOUND POWER LEVELS A. Air handling unit sound power levels shall be submitted for review. Sound power data shall be given at the supply connections and return connections in addition to radiated sound power from the cabinet. Raw fan sound power data shall be derived from testing on the identical fans as used in the units. Data extrapolated from different fans is not acceptable. B. Attenuation assumed for cabinet configuration,type of insulation,opening location and sizes shall be verified through actual test measurements. All measurements shall be performed in an AMCA certified laboratory in accordance with AMCA standard 300 of ASHRAE 12.12. These test reports will be submitted to the Architect before units ship from the factory. 2.9 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES(By division 15900) A. Both supply and return fans are to be powered by drives complete with bypass starter section. See Section 15960 for requirements. Provide air handler with motors rated for . service with VFD and with shaft grounding devices for bleed off of induced currents. Acceptable manufacturer of ground system is SGS. 2.10 FLOW MEASURING ARRAYS (By division 15900) A. Provide a minimum outside airflow measuring station in a straight duct section upstream from the minimum outside air dampers and interfacing control for providing a velocity pressure signal for use by the control contractor in controlling a minimum outside airflow. 6129-08 15721 -5 1/24/03 I RENTON PAVILION t. RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15721 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME(VAV)AIR HANDLING UNITS B. Air flow measuring station to be by Ebtron, Inc. EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Examine site to verify if site is ready to receive work. Provide a layout drawings of air ' handler and fan locations to electrical installer. C. Install minimum 30%efficiency air filters in unit during installation phase. Do not operate the unit without filters in place. D. Install condensate drain piping and traps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the drawings. E. Install a new set of pre-filters and final filters prior to final air balance and substantial completion. F. Control installers shall install all wiring associated with control signals into the air handlers. G. Electrical installer shall install all line voltage power wiring and conduit. Coordinate with Division 16 work. 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S START-UP SERVICES A. The manufacturer shall provide start-up service in the form of a factory trained service technician. The service technician shall verify correct installation,verify unit mounting, verify fan rotation,verify spring isolator adjustments,verify control wiring,verify power wiring,start-up the fans,and check for proper operation. The service technician shall provide final adjustments to meet the specified performance requirements. Fully staffed parts and service personnel shall be within four hours travel from the job site. END OF SECTION 15721 . 6129-08 15721 -6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15761 AIR COILS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hot-water coils 2. Chilled-water coils. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Control Systems Equipment" for coil temperature-control valve requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities of selected models; pressure drop; shipping, installed, and operating weights; installation instructions; and startup instructions for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating coil location and ceiling-mounted access panels. D. Maintenance Data: For air coils to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with ARI 410, "Standard for Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils," for components,construction,and rating. 1. Certify coils to ARI 410, "Standard for Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils." PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 6129-08 15761 - 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15761 AIR COILS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Water Coils: a. Aerofin Corporation. b. Carrier Corporation. c. Coil Company Inc. d. Dunham-Bush, Inc. e. Heatcraft Inc.; Heat Transfer Division. f. Super Radiator Coils. _ g. Trane Co. (The). h. USA Coil and Air. 2.2 HOT-WATER COILS A. Description: Continuous circuit coil fabricated to ARI 410 Self-draining coil fabricated to ARI 410. B. Dampers: Arrangement of coil segments with face-and-bypass dampers and downstream damper. 1. Arrangement:Vertical coils. 2. Dampers: Extruded-aluminum blades with full-length drive rod. C. Piping Connections:Threaded, on opposite ends. D. Tubes: Copper, complying with ASTM B 75. 1. Tube Diameter:0.375 inch. E. Tubes: Red brass, complying with ASTM B 111. 1. Tube Diameter.0.625 inch. 2. Minimum Tube Thickness: 0.020 inch. F. Tubes: Stainless steel, 0.625-inch diameter. G. Tubes: Carbon steel,0.75-inch diameter. H. Fins:Copper with fin spacing 0.125 inch. I. Fin and Tube Joint: Silver brazed. J. Headers: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints, prime coated. K. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame,0.064 inch. L. Frames: Stainless steel, 0.0625 inch. 6129-08 15761 -2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15761 AIR COILS M. Ratings: Design tested and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410. 1. Working Pressure Ratings: 200 psig,325 deg F. N. Source Quality Control: Test to 300 psig, and to 200 psig underwater. 2.3 CHILLED-WATER COILS A. Description:Self-draining coil fabricated to ARI 410. B. Piping Connections:Threaded, on same end. C. Tubes: Copper,complying with ASTM B 75. 1. Tube Diameter:0.50 inch. D. Tubes: Red brass, complying with ASTM B 111. 1. Tube Diameter:0.625 inch. 2. Minimum Tube Thickness: 0.020 inch. E. Tubes: Stainless steel, 0.625-inch diameter. F. Tubes: Carbon steel,0.75-inch diameter. G. Fins: Copper with fin spacing 0.125 inch. H. Fin and Tube Joint: Silver brazed. I. Headers: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints, prime coated. J. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame,0.052 inch. K. Frames: Stainless steel,0.0625 inch. L. Ratings: Design tested and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and ARI 410. 1. Working Pressure Ratings: 200 psig,325 deg F. M. Source Quality Control: Test to 300 psig, and to 200 psig underwater. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine ducts, plenums, and units to receive air coils for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting coil performance. B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before coil installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 6129-08 15761 -3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15761 AIR COILS 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install coils level and plumb. nl B. Install coils in metal ducts and casings constructed according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible." - 19 C. Install stainless-steel drain pan under each chilled-water coil. 1. Construct drain pans to comply with ASHRAE 62. 2. Construct drain pans to extend beyond coil length and width and to connect to condensate trap and drainage. 3. Extend drain pan 5 inches upstream from coil face. 4. Extend drain pan 10 inches downstream from coil face. 5. Extend drain pan under coil headers and exposed supply piping. D. Install moisture eliminators for chilled-water and refrigerant coils. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to coils to allow service and maintenance. C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow coils to be disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and specialty arrangements. D. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. C. Straighten bent fins on each air coil. 3.5 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs,dirt,and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. B. Clean coils using materials and methods recommended in writing by manufacturers, and clean inside of casings and enclosures to remove dust and debris. END OF SECTION 15761 6129-08 15761 -4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15767 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes propeller unit heaters. 1.3 SUBMITTALS I' I A. Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration. B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each unit type and configuration: 1. Plans,elevations, sections, and details. 2. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. 3. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. ( 4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;furnished specialties;and accessories. C. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. D. Maintenance Data: For propeller unit heaters to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of propeller unit heaters and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment,fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 6129-08 15767- 1 1/24/03. RENTON PAVILION - RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15767 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS • B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Airtherm Manufacturing Company. 2. Carrier Corp. 3. Dunham-Bush, Inc. 4. Engineered Air. 5. International Environmental Corp. 6. McQuay International. 7. Rosemex Products. 8. Ruffneck Heaters, Starozik Industries Ltd. 9. Trane Company(The); North American Commercial Group. 10. USACoil &Airinc. 2.2 UNIT HEATERS A. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in vertical discharge configuration with radial louver diffuser in draw-through configuration and horizontal discharge configuration with horizontal, adjustable louvers in blow-through configuration. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Casing: Galvanized steel,with removable panels. B. Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer and manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested propeller unit heater before shipping. 2.4 COILS A. Hot-Water Coil: Copper tube, 0.031-inch wall thickness, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering water temperature of 325 deg F, with manual air vent. Test for leaks to 375 psig underwater. 2.5 FAN A. Propeller with aluminum blades directly connected to motor. 2.6 FAN MOTORS A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section"Motors." B. Multispeed motor with integral thermal-overload protection. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A Horizontal Configuration: Louver fin diffuser. 2.8 CONTROLS A. Control Devices: Unit-mounted fan-speed switch and wall-mounting thermostat. 6129-08 15767-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15767 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test propeller unit heater coils according to ASHRAE 33. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive propeller unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before propeller unit heater installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb. JJ B. Install propeller unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A. C. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber hangers). Vibration isolators are specified in Division 15 Section"Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints? D. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings, and specialties. B. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange on each connection. C. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. D. Ground equipment. E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing: 1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 6129-08 15767-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15767 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made. 3.5 CLEANING A. After installing units,inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and other spots,dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. B. After installing units, clean propeller unit heaters internally according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Install new filters in each propeller unit heater within two weeks after Substantial Completion. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain propeller unit heaters. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping,troubleshooting, servicing,and maintaining equipment. 2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer •to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." 3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." 4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice. END OF SECTION 15767 • 6129-08 15767-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15815 • METAL DUCTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY • A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ducts include the following: 1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall, round spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings. 3. Duct liner. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings for mechanical equipment. 2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct- mounting access doors and panels,turning vanes,and flexible ducts. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic. B. NUSIG: National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and - distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Drawn to 1/8 inch equals 1 foot scale. Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts. 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. ' Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes. 3. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts. 4. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 5. Fittings. 6. Reinforcement and spacing. 7. Seam and joint construction. 8. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 6129-08 15815-1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS 9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 10. Duct accessories,including access doors and panels. 11. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibration isolation,and seismic restraints. B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts. 3. Ceiling- and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide access to dampers and other operating devices. 4. Ceiling-mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. 5. Floor mounted items,including diffusers. C. Welding certificates. D. Field quality-control test reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code- -Steel," for hangers and supports AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code—Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. B. NFPA Compliance: 1. NFPA 90A,"Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B,"Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. 6129-08 15815-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G60 coating designation;ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view. C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts. D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.3 DUCT LINER A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124. 1. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville International, Inc. c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. d. Owens Coming. • 2. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent erosion of glass fibers. _ a. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches. b. Thermal Conductivity(k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature. c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke- ' l developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84. d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct. 1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-Ib- tensile, dead-load test perpendicular to duct wall. 2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream. 3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard classification of duct liner system. B. Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. 1. Manufacturers: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Materials: Unicellular polyethylene thermal plastic, preformed sheet insulation complying with ASTM C 534,Type II, except for density. a. Thickness:3/4 inch. 6129-08 15815-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS b. Thermal Conductivity(k-Value): 0.24 at 75 deg F mean temperature. c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke- developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM C 411. d. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. 2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term"sealant"is not limited to materials of adhesive or • mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics. B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide;glass-fiber-reinforced fabric. C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard,durable, airtight seal. D. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts. E. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids. F. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C 920,Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O. G. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. 2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod. 1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threadspainted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. 2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards— Metal and Flexible"for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. 3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted with zinc-chromate primer. C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 6129-08 15815-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials. PP pP 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are electrolytically separated from ducts. 2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible" and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class. 2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible." B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Nexus Inc. c. Ward Industries, Inc. C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's"HVAC Duct Construction Standards— Metal and Flexible,"Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt,cleat,and gasket details. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Lockformer. 2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class. 3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant. D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined. 2.7 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited. B. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing. C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive. D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping. 6129-08 15815-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS E. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary. F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm. G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely;at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally. H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or"Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations: 1. Fan discharges. 2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. 3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than 2500 fpm (12.7 m/s)or where indicated. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer 1 shell without compressing insulation. 1. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent. J. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections)or other buildout means are optional;when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. 2.8 ROUND DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION A. Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct. B. Round, Spiral Lock -Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's"HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible." 1. Manufacturers: a. McGill AirFlow Corporation. b. SEMCO Incorporated. C. Duct Joints: 1. Ducts up to 20 Inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before and after fastening,attached with sheet metal screws. 2. • Ducts 21 to 72 Inches in Diameter: Three-piece,gasketed,flanged joint consisting of two internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket. 3. Ducts Larger Than 72 Inches in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2. 4. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped, EPDM rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer's tolerances. 6129-08 15815-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS a. Manufacturers: 1) Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2) Lindab Inc. b. Manufacturers: 1) Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2) McGill AirFlow Corporation. 3) SEMCO Incorporated. D. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal-seam straight ducts. E. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance. F. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die- formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated,fabricate elbows as follows: j t 1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated. 2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from minus 2-to plus 2-inch wg: a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch. 3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from 2-to 10-inch wg: a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch. 4. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material- handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes. 5. Round Elbows 8 Inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. 6. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction. 7.• Round Elbows Larger Than 14 Inches in Diameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. 8. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches in Diameter and All Pressures 0.040 inch thick with 2-piece welded construction. 9. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above. 10. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches in Diameter and Pressures through 10-Inch wg: 0.022 inch. 6129-08 15815-7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION • RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following: 1. Supply Ducts: 1-inch wg. 2. Supply Ducts(before Air Terminal Units): 1-inch wg. 3. Supply Ducts(after Air Terminal Units): 1-inch wg. 4. Supply Ducts(in Mechanical Equipment Rooms):2-inch wg. 5. Return Ducts(Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg. 6. Exhaust Ducts(Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg. 3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's"HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible,"unless otherwise indicated. B. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by fittings. C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size,and shape and for connections. E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches,with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling. F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines;avoid diagonal runs. • - G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent • enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unless specifically indicated. J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work. K. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws. L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. 6129-08 15815-8 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section 'Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." O. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, seismic force required by applicable building codes. Refer to SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."- P. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow SMACNA's"Duct Cleanliness for New Construction." Q. Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches upstream of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. I ,! 3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards— Metal and Flexible"for duct pressure class indicated. 1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg,seal transverse joints. B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied. 3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor. C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof-test)load. D. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete. E. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 6129-08 15815-9 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual"and prepare test reports: 1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. 2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days'advance notice for testing. 3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than and equal to 2-inch wg(both positive and negative pressures),and Leakage Class 6 for pressure classes from 2-to 10-inch wg. 4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum allowable. 3.7 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS A. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and perform cleaning before air balancing. B. Use service openings, as required,for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection. 1. Create other openings to comply with duct standards. • 2. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process. 11 C. Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed from HVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets(registers,grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and drive sshafts, baffles, dampers, return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, and assemblies. • 3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts,dampers,actuators,and turning vanes. E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants • from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts,duct liner,or duct accessories. 6129-08 15815- 10 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS 4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. 5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. F. Cleanliness Verification: 1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants. 2. Where contaminants are discovered,re-clean and reinspect ducts. END OF SECTION 15815 6129-08 15815-11 1/24/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Volume dampers. 3. Motorized control.dampers. 4. Combination fire and smoke dampers. 5. Turning vanes. 6. Duct-mounting access doors. 7. Flexible connectors. 8. Flexible ducts. 9. Duct accessory hardware. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 13 Section"Fire Alarm"for duct-mounting fire and smoke detectors. 2. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for electric and pneumatic damper actuators. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Volume dampers. 3. Motorized control dampers. 4. Combination fire and smoke dampers. 5. Turning vanes. 6. Duct-mounting access doors. 7. Flexible connectors. 8. Flexible ducts. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Manual-volume damper installations. 2. ' Motorized-control damper installations. 3. Fire and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounting access doors. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal,and control wiring. C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounting items. Show ceiling-mounting access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories. 6129-08 15820-1 1/24/03 1 ' RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS . A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers a` offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. , 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless 'otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view. C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M. O. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts. - E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221,alloy 6063,temper T6. F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. CESCO Products. 2. Duro Dyne Corp. 6129-08 15820-2 1/24/03 - RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15820 i DUCT ACCESSORIES 3. Greenheck. 4. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 5. Prefco Products, Inc. 6. Ruskin Company. 7. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action counter balanced, with blades of maximum 6-inch width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings,and axles;adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. C. Frame:0.052-inch-thick,galvanized sheet steel,with welded corners and mounting flange. D. Blades: 0.025-inch-thick,roll-formed aluminum. E. Blade Seals: Neoprene. F. Blade Axles:Galvanized steel. G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. H: Return Spring: Adjustable tension. 2.4 VOLUME DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow Corporation. 3. METALAIRE, Inc. 4. Nailor Industries Inc. 5. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 6. Ruskin Company. B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. 1. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with • axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, standard leakage rating,with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch ' thick,with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch-thick,galvanized or stainless sheet steel. 3. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch-thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch-thick aluminum sheet. 6129-08 15820-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES 5. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch-thick extruded aluminum. 6. Blade Axles:Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze, Molded synthetic. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. D. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple-or single-blade, parallel-or opposed-blade design as indicated, low-leakage rating,with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick,with mitered and welded corners;frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch-thick,galvanized sheet steel. 3. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch-thick aluminum sheet. 5. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch-thick extruded aluminum. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze thrust or ball. 8. Blade Seals: Neoprene. 9. Jamb Seals: Cambered aluminum. 10, Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. E. Jackshaft: 1-inch- diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. 1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly. F. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.5 MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. CESCO Products. 2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Greenheck. 4. METALAIRE, Inc. 5. Nailor Industries Inc. 6. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 7. Ruskin Company. B. General Description: AMCA-rated, parallel-blade design; minimum of 0.1084-inch- thick, galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting; minimum of 0.0635-inch- thick, galvanized-steel damper blades with maximum blade width of 8 inches. 1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 6129-08 15820-4 1/24/03 � I • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES 2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 3. Provide closed-cell neoprene edging. 2.6 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. CESCO Products. 2. Greenheck. 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 5. Ruskin Company. B. General Description: Labeled according to UL 555S. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555 for 1-1/2-hour rating. C. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated. D. Frame and Blades: 0.064-inch-thick,galvanized sheet steel. E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed,0.052-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application. F. Damper Motors: Modulating and two-position action. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section"Motors 1- 2. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear trains. 3. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in.x lbf. 4. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with 0-ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F. 5. Nonspring-Retum Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running torque rating of 150 in.x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x Ibf. 6. Electrical Connection: 115 V,single phase, 60 Hz. 2.7 DUCT SILENCERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Industrial Noise Control, Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow Corporation. 3. Ruskin Company. 4. • Vibro-Acoustics. B. General Description: Factory-fabricated and -tested, round or rectangular silencers with performance characteristics and physical requirements as indicated. 6129-08 15820-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES C. Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealants, packing materials, and accessory materials shall have fire ratings not exceeding 25 for flame-spread index and 50 for smoke-developed index when tested according to ASTM E 84. : D. Rectangular Units: Fabricate casings with a minimum of 0.034-inch- thick, solid galvanized sheet metal for outer casing and 0.022-inch- thick, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90, perforated galvanized sheet metal for inner casing. E. Sheet Metal Perforations: 1/8-inch diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet metal. F. Fill Material: Moisture-proof nonfibrous material. 1. Erosion Barrier: Polymer bag enclosing fill and heat-sealed before assembly. G. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwise react to system pressure variations. 1. Do not use nuts, bolts, or sheet metal screws for unit assemblies. _- 2. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints. .7 3. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame in quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion. 4. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension. H. Source Quality Control: 1. Acoustic Performance: Test according to ASTM E 477. 2. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self-noise power levels with an airflow of at least 2000-fpm face velocity. 3. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan static pressure or 6-inch wg static pressure,whichever is greater. 2.8 TURNING VANES A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible" 4 9 for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes. B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- wide, double-vane, curved blades of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.;and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. - 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Duro Dyne Corp. c. METALAIRE, Inc. d. Ward Industries, Inc. C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill. 2.9 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 6129-08 15820-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. I I 1. Manufacturers: a. American Warming and Ventilating. b. CESCO Products. c. Ductmate Industries, Inc. d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. e. • Greenheck. f. McGill AirFlow Corporation. g. Nailor Industries Inc. h. Ventfabrics, Inc. i. Ward Industries, Inc. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel,with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows: a. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks. b. Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches. d. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches and Larger: One additional hinge. C. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and 1-inch thickness. Include cam latches. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel,with spin-in notched frame. D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber. • E. Insulation: 1-inch-thick,fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board. I. 2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc. B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1. • C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts. 6129-08 15820-7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq.yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 Ibf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. E. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq.yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F. • F. High Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber. 1. Minimum Weight: 16 oz./sq.yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 285 lbf/inch in the warp and 185 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F. G. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical-resistant coating. 1. Minimum Weight 14 oz./sq.yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 450 lbf/inch in the warp and 340 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F. 2.11 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. Hart&Cooley, Inc. 3. McGill AirFlow Corporation. B. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire. 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. - 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. C. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire;fibrous-glass insulation;aluminized vapor barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3.' Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F. D. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size. 6129-08 15820-8 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES 2.12 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength,quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible"for metal ducts. B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts. C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner;avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner. E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from branch takeoff. - F. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. G. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions. H. Install duct silencers rigidly to ducts. I. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units as follows: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from volume dampers and equipment. 3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links. 4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum 50-foot spacing. 5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available. J. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. 6129-08 15820-9 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES K. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter. 2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter. 3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches in diameter. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches in diameter. 5. Body Access: 24 inches in diameter. L. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, pressure relief access doors: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access:7 inches in diameter. 2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter. 3. Head and Hand Access: 13 inches in diameter. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 19 inches in diameter. M. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section"Mechanical Identification." N. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators. O. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and higher, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal"straps. P. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. Q. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct damped or strapped in place. R. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. S. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings. B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action. C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting,and Balancing." END OF SECTION 15820 • 6129-08 15820- 10 1/24/03 I ' RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15837 CENTRIFUL FANS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes centrifugal fans and vent sets. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on sea-level conditions. B. Operating Limits:Classify according to AMCA 99. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer- installed and field-installed wiring. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights. C. Coordination Drawings: Show fan room layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements. D. Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 6129-08 15837-1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15837 CENTRIFUL FANS B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. .stand rd A C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering. B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members. B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete? • C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section"Roof Accessories." 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS • A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective hovering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Belts: One set for each belt-driven unit. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ABB Garden City Fan Company. 2. Acme Engineering& Mfg.Corp. 3. Aerovent;a Twin City Fan Company. 4. Airmaster Fan Co. 5. Ammerman Company, Inc./General Resource Corp. 6. Bayley Fans, Lau Commercial Industrial Fans/Lau Industries. 7. Buffalo Forge Co./Howden Fan Co. 8. Carrier Corp. 9. Central Blower Co. 10. Chicago Blower Corp. 6129-08 15837-2 1/24/03 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15837 CENTRIFUL FANS 11. Cincinnati Fan &Ventilator Co. 12. CML Northern Blower, Inc. 13. Cook, Loren Company. 14. Industrial Air Division, Lau Commercial Industrial Fans/Lau Industries. 15. Madison Manufacturing/Peerless-Winsmith, Inc. 16. New Philadelphia Fan Co. 17. New York Blower Company(The). 18. Strobic Air Corp./Metpro Corp. 19. Trane Co.(The). 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing,wheel,fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure. 2.3 HOUSINGS A. Materials and Fabrication: Formed and reinforced steel panels to make curved scroll housings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and doors or panels to allow access to internal parts and components. 1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll,wheel, motor, and accessories. 2. Fabrication Class: AMCA 99,Class II. 3. Horizontal Flanged Split Housing: Bolted construction. 4. Plug Fans: Fabricate without fan scroll and volute housing,with steel cabinet. 5. Tubular Centrifugal Fans: Fabricate tubular housing from formed and reinforced steel panels with welded seams and the following: -: a. Outlet guide vanes. b. Motor and disconnect switch. c. Spun inlet cone with flange. d. Outlet flange. e. Brackets suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting. B. Coatings: Powder-baked enamel. 2.4 WHEELS A. Backward-Inclined Fan Wheels: Steel construction with curved inlet flange, back plate, backward-inclined blades and fastened to shaft with set screws. B. Forward-Curved Fan Wheels: Black-enameled or galvanized steel construction with inlet flange, back plate, shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow, mechanically secured to flange and back plate; cast-steel hub swaged to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws. C. Airfoil-Fan Wheels: Steel construction with smooth-curved inlet flange; heavy back plate; hollow die-formed, airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange and back plate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws. D. Coatings: Powder-baked enamel;. 6129-08 15837-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15837 CENTRIFUL FANS 2.5 SHAFTS 6� A. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. B. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective coating of . lubricating oil. C. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range. 2.6 BEARINGS A. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings. 1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, Lio of 120,000 hours. - 2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, Lio of 120,000 hours. B. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, tapered roller bearings with double-locking collars and two-piece,cast-iron housing. • 1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, Lio of 120,000 hours. 2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, Lio of 120,000 hours. C. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller bearings with adapter mount and two-piece,cast-iron housing. 1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L,o of 120,000 hours. 2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, Lio of 120,000 hours. 2.7 BELT DRIVES A. Description: Factory mounted,with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.5. B. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split,tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. C. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp;fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. D. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. 1. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements; 0.1046-inch- ' thick, 3/4-inch diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place. E. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning. 6129-08 15837-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15837 CENTRIFUL FANS 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll,with quick-opening latches and gaskets. B. Companion Flanges: Galvanized steel,for duct connections. C. Variable Inlet Vanes: Steel,with blades supported at both ends with two permanently lubricated bearings. Variable mechanism terminating in single control lever with control shaft for double- width fans. • D. Discharge Dampers: Heavy-duty steel assembly with parallel opposed blades constructed of two plates formed around and welded to shaft, channel frame, sealed ball bearings,with blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever. E. Inlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid screen. F. Scroll Drain Connection: NPS 1 steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll. G. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate heat from shaft. H. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99. I. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans. J. Weather Cover. Enameled-steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to.housing. 2.9 MOTORS A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." B. Enclosure Type: Guarded dripproof. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating." PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install centrifugal fans level and plumb. B. Support floor-mounting units using spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration- and seismic-control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints." 6129-08 15837-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15837 CENTRIFUL FANS 1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in - concrete base. C. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." D. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, the seismic force required by authorities having jurisdiction. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." E. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers. Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints." 1. In seismic zones,restrain support units. F. Install un its with clearances for service and maintenance. G. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." B. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment. D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Equipment Startup Checks: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors,starters,and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4.' Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan ;f wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 6129-08 15837-6 1/24/03 ' -1 ' RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15837 CENTRIFUL FANS B. Starting Procedures: 1. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm. 2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage. C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. F. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. G. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. H. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Adjust belt tension. C. Lubricate bearings. 3.5 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's written instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan wheel and cabinet. B. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt,and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing,and maintaining equipment and schedules. 2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." 3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." 4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice. END OF SECTION 15837 6129-08 15837-7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15840 AIR TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fan-powered air terminal units. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include rated capacities, furnished specialties,sound-power ratings,and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,and location and size of each field connection. 1. Include a schedule showing unique model designation, room location, model number, size,and accessories furnished. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power,signal,and control wiring. C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 2. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section " Operation and Maintenance Data,"include the following: 1. Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes. 2. Instructions for adjusting software set points. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air terminal units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, • Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. NFPA Compliance: Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 6129-08 15840- 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION , RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15840 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of air terminal units and suspension system with other construction thatpenetrates ceilings or is supported bythem, including light fixtures, HVAC 9 PP equipment,fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 FAN-POWERED AIR TERMINAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Anemostat;a Mestek Company. 2. Cames. 3. Environmental Technologies, Inc.; Enviro-Air Div. 4. Krueger. 5. METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc. 6. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. 7. Price Industries. 8. Titus. 9. Trane Co. (The);Worldwide Applied Systems Group. 10. Tuttle&Bailey. 11. Enirotec. B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly and fan in series or in parallel arrangement inside unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud. C. Casing:0.034-inch steel. 1. Casing Lining: 1/2-inch- thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071;secured with adhesive.Cover liner with nonporous foil. 2. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 3/4-inch- thick, polyurethane foam insulation complying with UL 181 erosion requirements, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84. 3. • Air Inlets: Round stub connections or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment. 4. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections. 5. Access: Removable panels for access to dampers and other parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance;with airtight gasket and quarter-turn latches. - D. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings. 6129-08 15840-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15840 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 3 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg inlet static pressure. 2. Damper Position: Normally open. E. Fan Section: Galvanized-steel plenum, with direct-drive, forward-curved fan with air filter and backdraft damper. 1. Lining: 1/2-inch-thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071; secured with adhesive.Cover liner with nonporous foil.Cover liner with nonporous foil and perforated metal. 2. Motor: [Multispeed] <Insert other type>. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section"Motors." a. Speed Control: Infinitely adjustable electronic controls. b. Fan-Motor Assembly Isolation: Rubber isolators. 3. Air Filter: 1-inch-thick,fiberglass throwaway. F. Hot-Water Heating Coil: Copper tube, mechanically expanded into aluminum-plate fins; leak tested underwater to 200 psig; and factory installed. G. Factory-Mounted and -Wired Controls: Electrical components shall be mounted in control box with removable cover. Incorporate single-point electrical connection to power source. 1. Control Transformer: Factory mounted for control voltage on electric and electronic control units with terminal strip in control box for field wiring of thermostat and power source. 2. Wiring Terminations: Fan and controls to terminal strip, and terminal lugs shall match - - quantities, sizes, and materials of branch-circuit conductors. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box that is sized according to NFPA 70. 3. Disconnect Switch: Factory-mounted, fused type. H. Control Panel Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1, with access panel sealed from airflow and mounted on side of unit. I. Electronic Controls: Bidirectional damper operator and microprocessor-based controller with integral airflow transducer and room sensor shall be compatible with temperature controls specified in Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and shall have the following features: 1. Proportional, plus integral control of room temperature. 2. Time-proportional reheat-coil control. 3. Occupied and unoccupied operating mode. 4. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points. 5. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal. 6. Communication with temperature-control system specified in Division 15 Section "HVAC • Instrumentation and Controls." J. Control Sequence: 1. With central system fan operating in occupied mode, sequence the controls as follows: 6129-08 15840-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15840 AIR TERMINAL UNITS a. When primary duct is pressurized, modulate volume damper to maintain room temperature. b. On reduced-cooling demand,close volume damper. At a field-adjustable point, air terminal fan is energized. c. As cooling demand increases, increase air terminal fan speed. d. If central duct system pressure varies, modulate volume damper to maintain constant primary airflow. e. If no cooling or heating demand,control enters field-adjustable, no-load band. f. On heating demand, energize heating coil. 2. With central system fan operating in unoccupied mode,sequence the controls as follows: a. On heating demand, energize air terminal unit fan and heating coil. b. Maintain field-adjustable setback temperature. c. Close volume damper. 3. With central system fan operating in occupied mode,sequence the controls as follows: a. On cooling demand, modulate volume damper to proportion airflow from central system. - b. On reduced-cooling demand, close volume damper. Electric or damper-position switch energizes fan. c. Speed control adjusts air terminal fan speed to match downstream resistance. d. On heating demand, energize heating coil. 4. With central system fan operating in unoccupied mode,sequence the controls as follows: a. Cycle air terminal fan to maintain room temperature. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Identification: Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum factory-set airflows,coil type,and ARI certification seal. B. Verification of Performance: Rate air terminal units according to ARI 880. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to air terminal units to allow service and maintenance. C. Hot-Water Piping: In addition to requirements in Division 15 Section"Hydronic Piping,"connect • heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union or flange. 6129-08 15840-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15840 AIR TERMINAL UNITS D. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Division 15 Section"Metal Ducts." E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section"Conductors and Cables." F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections,and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following: a. Verify that•inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer to achieve proper performance. b. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible. c. Verify that control connections are complete. d. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible. e. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units. Refer to Division.1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 15840 6129-08 15840-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS,AND GRILLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ceiling-and wall-mounted diffusers, registers,and grilles. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents"for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts. 2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size,and accessories furnished. B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. 5. Duct access panels. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following.requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be • incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 6129-08 15855- 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS,AND GRILLES 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 GRILLES AND REGISTERS(REFER TO SCHEDULES ON DRAWINGS FOR SELECTION) A. Adjustable Bar Register: 1. Products: a. Carnes. b. Krueger. c. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.. d. Price Industries. e. Titus. 2. Material: Steel or Aluminum or Stainless steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel,color selected by Architect. 4. Face Blade Arrangement:Adjustable horizontal 3/4 inch apart. 5. Rear Blade Arrangement:Adjustable vertical spaced 3/4 inch apart. 6. Frame: 1 inch wide. 7. Mounting Frame: Standard . 8. Mounting: Concealed. 9. Damper Type:Adjustable opposed-blade assembly or Opposed blade with spring-closing and UL-listed fusible link for 160 deg F. 10. Accessories: Front blade gang operator. B. Fixed Face Grille or Register: (Refer to Schedule on drawings) 1. Products: a. Carnes. 'w b. Krueger. c. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. d. Price Industries. e. Titus. 2. Material:Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 4. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch grid core. 5. Frame: 1 inch wide. 6. Mounting Frame: . 7. Mounting: Concealed. 8. Damper Type:Adjustable opposed-blade assembly or Opposed blade with spring-closing and UL-listed fusible link for 160 deg F. 2.3 LINEAR SLOT OUTLETS A. Linear Bar Grille or Diffuser(Refer to Schedule on Drawings) tom+ 1. Products: a. Carnes. b. Krueger. 6129-08 15855-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS,AND GRILLES c. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. d. Price Industries. e. Titus. 2. Material:Steel or Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel,color selected by Architect. 4. Narrow Core Spacing Arrangement: 1/8-inch- thick blades spaced 1/4 inch apart, 15- degree deflection. 5. Wide Core Spacing Arrangement: 1/8-inch- thick blades spaced 1/2 inch apart, 15- degree deflection. 6. Pencil-Proof Core Spacing Arrangement: 3/16-inch-thick blades spaced 7/16 inch apart, 15-degree deflection. 7. One or Two-Way Deflection Vanes: Extruded construction fixed louvers with removable core. 8. Frame: 1/2 inch wide. 9. Mounting Frame: 10. Mounting:Concealed bracket. 11. Damper Type:Adjustable opposed-blade assembly. B. Linear Slot Diffuser: 1. Products: a. Cames. b. Krueger. c. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. d. Price Industries. e. Titus. p. 2. Material-Shell:Steel or Aluminum, insulated. 3. Material-Pattern Controller and Tees: Aluminum. 4. Finish-Face and Shell:To suit Architect. 5. Finish-Pattern Controller: Baked enamel,black. 6. Finish-Tees: Baked enamel,color selected by Architect. 7. Slot Width:To meet flow requirements. 8. Number of Slots:To meet flow requirements. 9. Length: Refer to Drawings. 2.4 FLOOR DIFFUSER OUTLETS A. Round Floor Diffuser: (Refer to Schedule on Drawings) 1. Products: a. Cames. b. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. • c. Price Industries. d. Titus. e. Trox f. Kranss 2. Furnish and install aluminum floor diffusers as indicated on plans. Diffusers shall incorpo- rate a removable core section,which consists of a series of concentric rings and deflec- tion vanes to distribute the air in a 360 degree"swirl"pattern. 6129-08 15855-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION >;.� RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15855 DIFFUSERS,REGISTERS,AND GRILLES 3. An integral carpet flange shall support the diffuser core and prevent fraying of the carpet, providing a minimum'/2 inch overlap. This flange shall mount to the floor system by means of a threaded mounting ring, allowing location upon completion of the raised y` floor/carpet installation without the removal of carpet or floor tiles. 4. A catch basin shall be furnished to facilitate removal of dust,spills and other objects that penetrate the outlet face. 5. Outlet airflow rates shall be limited to those resulting in a maximum terminal velocity of 50 fpm four feet directly above the diffuser face. 6. The diffuser core and trim ring shall be constructed of aluminum, and their furnish shall be brushed aluminum no painted surfaces subject to wear. The catch basin and mounting ring shall be constructed of steel material. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers,and grilles level and plumb. B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume,noise criteria, airflow pattern,throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers,air extractors,and fire dampers. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. • END OF SECTION 15855 6129-08 15855-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15890 AIR DUCT CLEANING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS j A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cleaning of the following existing duct systems: 1. Supply system. 2. Return system. 3. Exhaust system. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ASCS: Air system cleaning specialist. B. NADCA: National Air Duct Cleaners Association. C. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'National Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that products comply with requirements. B. Field quality-control test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. ASCS Qualifications: A member of a nationally recognized nonprofit industry organization dedicated to the cleaning of HVAC systems. 1. Certification: Employ a staff of ASCSs certified by a nationally recognized certification program. 2. Supervisor Qualifications: Certified by a nationally recognized program and organization. • 3. Experience: Submit records of experience in the field of HVAC systems cleaning. 4. Equipment, Materials, and Labor: Have equipment, materials, and labor required to perform specified services. B. Comply with current published standards of NADCA. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 6129-08 15890- 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION ;a RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15890 AIR DUCT CLEANING 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. LIN 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for • acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G90 coating designation;ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.3 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. B. Rectangular Duct Door: Double wall;fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1- by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. 1. Manufacturers: a. American Warming and Ventilating. b. Cesco Products. c. Ductmate Industries, Inc. d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. e. Greenheck. f. McGill AirFlow Corporation. -I g. Nailor Industries Inc. h. Ventfabrics, Inc. i. Ward Industries; Inc. 2. Frame: Galvanized-steel sheet;with bendover tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows: a. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks. b. Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. ' c. Up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches. d. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches and Larger. Four hinges and two compression latches. 2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: 6129-08 15890-2 1/24/03 a • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15890 AIR DUCT CLEANING 1. Duro Dyne Corp. 2. Ventfabrics, Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc. B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1. C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts. D. Indoor-System, Flexible-Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 Ibf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. E. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber. 1. Minimum Weight: 16 oz./sq.yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 285 Ibf/inch in the warp and 185 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F. 2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. r! 3. Hart&Cooley, Inc. 4. McGill AirFlow Corporation. B. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound,spring-steel wire. 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. C. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire;fibrous-glass insulation; and polyethylene aluminized vapor barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F. D. Flexible-Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size. 2.6 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated. 6129-08 15890-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15890 AIR DUCT CLEANING 6 B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based,waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3- EXECUTION iG 3.1 EXAMINATION E A. Examine systems to determine appropriate methods, tools, and equipment required for performance of work. B. Prepare written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. C. Proceed with work only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. _ Y 3.2 CLEANING A. Engage a qualified ASCS to clean the following systems: 1. Supply system. 2. Return system. 3. Exhaust system. B. Perform cleaning before air balancing or mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning. C. Use duct-mounted access doors, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection. 1. Install additional duct-mounting access doors to comply with duct cleaning standards. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for additional duct-mounting access doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. Replace damaged and deteriorated flexible ducts.Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section"Duct Accessories"for flexible ducts. 3. Disconnect and reconnect flexible connectors as needed for cleaning and inspection. Replace damaged and deteriorated flexible connectors. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section"Duct Accessories"for flexible connectors. 4. Replace damaged fusible links on fire and smoke dampers. Replacement fusible links shall be same rating as those being replaced. Comply with requirements in Division 15 - Section"Duct Accessories"for fusible links. 5. Remove and reinstall ceiling components to gain access for duct cleaning. Clean ceiling components after they have been removed and replaced. D. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and restore to their marked position on completion. E. Clean the following metal-duct system components by removing visible surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets(registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 6129-08 15890-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15890 AIR DUCT CLEANING 3. Air-handling-unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections,and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators, except in ceiling plenums and mechanical room. 6. Supply-air ducts,dampers,actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components. F. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal-duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of ducts so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts or duct liner. 4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment, and do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material,mold,or fungus growth. 5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. 6. Provide operative drainage system for washdown procedures. 7. Biocidal Agents and Coatings: Apply biocidal agents if fungus is present; use according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. G. Cleanliness Verification: 1. Verify cleanliness after mechanical cleaning and before application of treatment, including biocidal agents and protective coatings. 2. Visually inspect metal-duct systems for contaminants. 3. Where contaminants are discovered, reclean and reinspect duct systems. 3.3 DUCT ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMAAH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards,"for fibrous-glass ducts. B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install duct-mounting access doors where access doors do not currently exist to allow for the cleaning of ducts,accessories,and terminal units as follows: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from volume dampers and equipment. 3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers; reset or install new fusible links. 4. Before and after each change in direction, at maximum 50-foot spacing. 5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available. 6129-08 15890-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15890 AIR DUCT CLEANING D. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 'i 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. E. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter. 2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter. 3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches in diameter. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches in diameter. 5. Body Access: 24 inches in diameter. F. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, pressure relief access doors: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access:7 inches in diameter. 2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter. 3. Head and Hand Access: 13 inches in diameter. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 19 inches in diameter. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Reconnect ducts to fans and air-handling units with existing flexible connectors after cleaning ducts and flexible connectors. Replace existing damaged and deteriorated flexible connectors. B. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and higher, cover replacement flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. C. Reconnect terminal units to supply ducts with existing flexible ducts or replace damaged and deteriorated existing flexible ducts with maximum 12-inch lengths of new flexible duct. D. Reconnect diffusers or light troffer boots to low-pressure ducts with existing flexible ducts or replace damaged and deteriorated existing flexible ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. E. Reconnect existing and new flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. II 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Coil Cleaning: Cleaning shall restore coil pressure drop to within 10 percent of pressure drop measured when coil was first installed. If original pressure drop is not known, coil will be considered clean only if it is free of foreign matter and chemical residue, based on thorough visual inspection. B. Report results of tests in writing. END OF SECTION 15890 6129-08 15890-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. General: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 - General Require- ments, Section 15050-Basic Material &Methods and others Sections in Division 15 listed in index to Specifications apply to work under this Section. B. The intent of this specification section is to insure provision of a Direct Digital Control System that will allow for cost effective expansion and optimal system integration. System shall be a complete BACnet-based system including a Microsoft Windows 98 / NT operator's worksta- tion.The operator's terminal,all global controllers and all programmable logic controllers shall communicate using the protocols and local area network (LAN) standards as defined by ANSI/ASHRAETM' Standard 135-1995, BACnet. C. The Control System shall utilize DDC control for all mechanical equipment as specified in the sequence of operation and points list. { ! D. The system shall be complete in all respects including all labor, material, equipment, pro- gramming,engineering,and services as required for a complete and operational system. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All automatic temperature control equipment manufactured by Alerton, Technologies Inc. or Delta Controls approved. All manufacturers not specifically named must seek prior approval (in writing) from the mechanical engineer 10 days prior to bid date. B. Automatic Temperature Controls Subcontract: Provide all installation labor, operating soft- ware, calibration and adjustment labor, operator training, warranty and all other necessary t- = material and labor to furnish a complete and operating system. C. Qualifications of Installing Contractor: Manufacturer's authorized installing contractor. At a minimum the installing contractor shall have the following qualifications: 1. In-house application engineering and drafting personnel to provide submittal informa- tion,installation diagrams,programmers and start-up technicians. 2. In-house personnel trained and supported by equipment manufacturer. 3. Licensed contracting ability to properly install electronic, electric, and pneumatic con- trol systems as demonstrated by a minimum of two previous successfully completed projects of comparable size. D. Control Wiring: 1. All Control wiring in connection with the automatic temperature control system shall be furnished and installed by the control contractor in accordance wit applicable na- tional,state and local codes. 2. All control wiring installed in mechanical or electrical equipment rooms and all ex- posed wiring shall be installed in conduit. E. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 15050 and Division 16. F. Provide all software programming necessary including, at the minimum,the following. 6129-08 15900-1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 1. Time and holiday schedules 2. Alarm limits 3. Morning warm-up 4. Optimal start of each zone 5. Summary of all zone temperatures 6. All DDC control loops 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS -) A. Product Data: Submit for review the manufacturer's technical product data for each compo- ,1 nent furnished as part of the control system. Data shall include dimensions, capacities, per- formance characteristics, electrical requirements, and material finishes. Include installation and startup requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for review control drawings detailing the following: 1. Network Block Diagrams or System Riser Diagrams: Drawings shall depict all DDC components that make up the network. Provide specific detail on network termina- tions and panel power requirements, stating from where the DDC panels are to be powered, and list the equipment being controlled. 2. Point-to-point Termination Detail: Drawings shall be created for each unique control = application type. Drawings that are typical of one another shall state the quantity that they represent, and the specifics for each. All wiring and piping required to install and operate the system shall be represented in these details. For terminations that are unknown at the time of submittal, properly designate these as"Field determined terminations," and include in the Record Drawings after completion. All wiring and piping shall be either number or color-coded on the drawings. . 3. Control Type: Provide individual details for each control type. 4. Damper and Valve Schedules: Show sizes, characteristics, model numbers, and specific locations. 5. Prefabricated Control Panels: Provide panel interior and exterior layout details de- picting the equipment layout and detailing the panel wiring and piping. C. Database Information: Submit for engineers review a flow chart (using oraahical format) detailing all sequences of operation for each mechanical system or application. Flow chart diagrams shall be graphical using standard graphic symbols. Provide flow chart diagram for each programmable controller. 1.4 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Upon completion of the installation and prior to training, provide manuals containing the fol- lowing information: 1. Installation and Service Instructions on all products and components 2. Calibration Instruction and troubleshooting Procedures for all equipment and compo- nents 3. Location of all controllers,sensors,transformers and other components 4. Control Drawings as specified above with all modifications, changes and wiring de- tails that depict actual installation 5. Sequence of Operation 6. Preventative Maintenance Proposal 7. DDC Flow Chart for each system (graphical format) 8. Listing of the entire DDC database,software and programs 9. Valve, damper,well, and tap schedules B. Provide laminated control diagrams in each control panel for each air handling system and other major controlled equipment. Ib 6129-08 15900-2 1/24/03 III RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15900 i HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS C. Backup disk(s)shall be left on-site that will allow the Owner to fully download the entire DDC System software, including programming point database and configuration and graphic screens. D. Operator's Manual: Provided graphic and text explanations of keyboard use for all operator _ i functions including graphic mode. E. Programmer's Manual: Provided graphic and text descriptions of all keyboard functions re- quired for software modifications and developments. The use and installation of high-level programming language shall be included in this manual. The manual shall include computer generated listingof all DDC programs. _ F. Computerized printouts of all data file construction including all point information, physical terminal relationships, scales and offsets, alarm limits,messages,schedules, etc. 1.5 SYSTEM COMMISIONING A. All Points connected to the Building Automation System (BAS) shall operate fully in accor- dance with this specification before final completion is determined. B. Equipment Startup: Upon completion of installation, start all controlled equipment and test on site including: 1. Verify that all inputs are properly being read. 2. Measure, calibrate, and adjust all analog inputs, including temperature sensors. 3. Stroke all analog outputs from 0%to 100% and verify all linkage adjustments are ac- curate. 4. Valves and dampers shall fully close and provide tight shutoff with no leakage. 5. Verify all digital outputs are properly energizing the controlled device. 6. Adjust set points so equipment can run properly. Temporary set points and sched- ules are acceptable for this phase of commissioning. C. Communication Network Startup: Verify from a host computer that all the controllers are be- ing addressed from the host. Verify communication speed is acceptable and meets the re- quirements of this specification. D. Software Verification: All Programs and software functions shall be verified for proper se- quence of operation. E. Submit any recommendations for system modification in writing to the Architect. F. Coordination: Work with the air balancing contractor, mechanical contractor, and electrical contractor to provide complete system commissioning. G. Commissioning Report: Provide a report detailing the dates, times and person(s) performing the startup. H. Demonstration: Upon request from the Architect the Controls Contractor shall demonstrate system operation, including but not limited to: 1. Demonstrate menu functions 2. Override specific points 3. Modify set points and observe control loop response 4. Demonstrate alarm response time 1.6 TRAINING A. Provide BAS training for up to six (6) Owner personnel, as determined by Owner's manage- ment. Upon completion of each phase of training, a work order shall be signed by both the Controls Contractor and the Owner's personnel. B. All training shall be scheduled in writing with the Owner and shall occur only during normal working hours/days. 6129-08 15900-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS C. Initial training shall occur during System Commissioning. The Controls Contractor shall per- - mit and encourage the Owner to observe the commissioning process. D. Immediately after commissioning is complete as specified, the Controls Contractor shall pro- vide two (2) separate four (4) hour; on site sessions detailing the layout of the BAS. This shall include network wiring routes, control panel locations, transformer locations, sensor lo- cations,etc. E. Within fifteen (15)working days from the time of system commissioning, one set of Operation and Maintenance manuals shall be turned over to the Owner. The Controls Contractor shall then provide another on-site training session (allow 8 hours) to review the entire manual(s) with the Owner,including: 1. Explanation of drawings,operations and maintenance manuals. 2. Walk-through of the job to locate control components. 3. Operator workstation and peripherals. 4. DDC controller and ASC operation/function. 5. Operator control functions including graphic generation and field panel. 6. Programming, including multilevel password access protection. 7. Operation of portable operator's terminal. 8. Explanation of adjustment,calibration, and replacement procedures. 9. Student binder with training modules. F. Provide additional operator training to owner representatives as follows: 8 hour training ses- sion within 3 months of final acceptance and an additional 8 hour training session within 6 months of final acceptance. Training shall include all aspects of operator interface including graphical modifications, scheduling, trending, troubleshooting and monitoring of additional system devices. G. Provide telephone support and answer questions throughout the warranty period. H. Since the Owner may require personnel to have more comprehensive understanding of the hardware and software, additional training may be required by the Owner and shall be con- sidered additional services. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warranty for the entire control system shall commence upon owner acceptance of beneficial use.Warranty shall cover all items considered to be associated with factory defects. arJ B. Provide a two-year warranty on all DDC controllers, host control panel and PC equipment in- eluding color monitors,valves and actuators. C. Provide a one-year warranty on all other components. D. Proved a one-year warranty on all workmanship and labor. E. On-Site Services: Upon failure to resolve reported problem and/or if problem is a physical part failure, contractor shall dispatch appropriate personnel to the project site within 24 hours of the reported problem to make corrections. 1.8 PRQTECTION OF SOFTWARE RIGHTS A. Prior to delivery of software,the Owner and the control contractor will enter into a software li- cense agreement with provisions for the following: 1. Limiting use of software to equipment provided under these specifications. 2. Limiting copying. 3. Preserving confidentiality 6129-08 15900-4 1/24/03 .It RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 4. Prohibiting transfer to a third party. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 GLOBAL CONTROLLER A. General 1. Global controller shall provide battery-backed real-time (hardware) clock func • - tions. It shall also provide communications via BACnet standard protocols to all field controllers. Global controller shall interface with operator terminal(s) via BACnet protocols for information display. 2. Global controller shall incorporate as a minimum, the functions of a 3-way BAC- net router. Controller shall route BACnet messages between the high-speed LAN (Ethernet 10/100MHz), at least 4 master slave token passing (MS/TP) LANs, a point-to-point(PTP—RS-232)connection and an on-board modem. a. Each MS/TP LAN must be configurable from 9.6 to 76.8Kbps. b. The RJ-45 Ethernet connection must accept either 10Base-T or 100Base-TX BACnet over twisted pair cable(UTP). c. The direct access port must be a female DB-9 connector supporting BACnet temporary PTP connection of a portable BACnet operator termi- nal at 9.6 to 115.2 Kbps over RS-232 null modem cable. Must also sup- port an external modem. Global controller shall be capable of deciding global strategies for the system based on information from any objects in • the system regardless if the object is directly monitored by the controller or by another controller. The program that implements these strategies shall be completely flexible and user definable. Any systems utilizing factory pre-programmed global strategies that cannot be modified by field personnel on-site or downloaded via remote communications are not acceptable. Changing global strategies via firmware changes is also unacceptable. Program execution at global controller shall be a minimum of once per second. 3. Programming shall be object-oriented using control program blocks, using up to 1000 DDC functions, 1000 Analog Values and 1000 Binary Values. Documentation in flow- chart form for all programming shall be provided as part of the final system as-built documentation. Samples of flowchart documentation shall be included in submittals. All flowcharts shall be generated and automatically downloaded to controller. No re- entry of database information shall be necessary. 4. Provide means to graphically view inputs and outputs to each program block in real- time as program is executing. This function may be performed via the operator's terminal,field computer,or modem. 5. Controller shall have a minimum of 128K SRAM and 32 MB dynamic RAM for pro- gram execution, along with 16 MB CompactFlash and 64K FLASH ROM to ensure high performance and data reliability. Battery shall retain static RAM memory and real-time clock functions for a minimum of 1.5 years (cumulative). Battery shall be a field-replaceable (non-rechargeable) lithium type. Unused battery life shall be 10 years. Coin-cell type BR1225 or equivalent 6. The onboard,battery-backed real time clock must support schedule operations,trend logs and timed DDC functions. 7. Global control algorithms and automated control functions should execute via 32-bit/ 50 MHz processor with minimum 32 MB SDRAM. 8. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all stand alone DDC panels to prevent the loss of database or operating system soft- 6129-08 15900-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS ware. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configura- tion data, and battery back-up shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all RAM memory. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC panel shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention. Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading the DDC panel via the local area network,via the local RS-232C port,or via telephone line dial-in. 9. Controller shall have a six-layer circuit design with separate ground plane and shock-resistant,flame-retardant case to ensure the highest level of reliability. B. BACnet Conformance 1. Global Controller shall as a minimum support Point-to-Point (PTP), MS/TP and Ethernet BACnet LAN types. It shall communicate directly via these BACnet LANs as a native BACnet device and shall support simultaneous routing functions between all supported LAN types. Global controller shall be a BACnet conformance class 3 de- vice and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional groups: a. Clock Functional Group b. Files Functional Group c. Reinitialize Functional Group d. Device Communications Functional Group e. Event Initiation Functional Group 2. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum: Analog Value, Binary Value, Calendar, Device, File, Group, Notification Class, Program and Sched- ule object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be thor- oughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information. 3. The Global Controller shall comply with Annex J of the BACnet specification for IP connections. This device shall use Ethernet to connect to the IP intemetwork,while using the same Ethernet LAN for non-IP communications to other BACnet devices on the LAN. Must support interoperability on wide area networks (WANs) and campus ., area networks (CANs) and function as a BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD). C. Remote Communications 1. Provide all functions that will allow remote communications via modem to off-site lo- cations. Include modem along with all cabling necessary for installation. It shall be possible to use the onboard modem or a separate modem connected via the PTP / RS-232 connection. 2. Provide Windows 98/2000 software for off-site computer that allows operator to view and change all information associated with system on color graphic displays. Opera- tor shall be able to change all parameters in this section from off-site location includ- ing all programming of global controllers and all programmable logic controllers in- cluding all terminal unit controllers. 3. Global controller shall have capability to call out alarm conditions automatically. Alarm message and site description shall be sent to off-site computer or serial printer. If desired, controller may also send encoded message to digital pager. If an alpha- numeric pager is in use by the operator, global controller shall be capable of sending a text or numeric string of alarm description. All global controllers connected to the local LAN shall be capable of calling out alarm messages through one or more shared modems connected to one or more of the global controllers on the local LAN. 6129-08 15900-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 4. Global controller shall have capability to call a minimum of 20 different phone num- bers. Numbers called may be controlled by type of alarm or time schedule. 5. Owner shall provide standard voice-grade phone line for remote communication function. 6. Global controller and internal modem shall be capable of modem-to-modem baud rates of 33.6 Kbps minimum over standard voice-grade phone lines. Lower baud rates shall be selectable for areas where local phone company conditions require them. D. Schedules 1. Each global controller shall support the minimum required for proper operation and control of BACnet Schedule Objects and BACnet Calendar Objects. E. Logging Capabilities 1. Each global controller shall log as minimum 2000 trendlogs. Any object in the system (real or calculated) may be logged. Sample time interval shall be adjustable at the op- erator's terminal. 2. Logs may be viewed both on-site or off-site via remote communication. 3. Global controller shall periodically upload trended data to operator's terminal for long term archiving if desired. 4. Archived data stored in database format shall be available for use in third-party spreadsheet or database programs. F. Alarm Generation 1. Object change of values and change of states may be identified as alarm conditions. When such conditions exist,the global controller identifies each alarm through BAC- net Get Alarm Summary Service.This summary of active alarms (Event State prop- erty value not equal to NORMAL) is presented to and displayed at the operator's terminal for system user action. 2. Alarms maybe generated within the system for any change of value or state Y object9 either real or calculated.This includes things such as analog object value changes, binary object state changes,and various controller communication failure. 3. Each alarm may be dialed out as noted in paragraph 2 above. 4. Alarm log shall be provided for alarm viewing. Log may be viewed on-site at the op- erator's terminal or off-site via remote communications. 5. Controller must be able to handle up to 4000 alarm setups stored as BACnet event enrollment objects—system destination and actions individually configurable. G. Demand Limiting 1. System shall monitor energy demand. Energy demand may be from any type of en- ergy source such as electrical or gas. Provide a demand-limiting routine which shall shed appropriate system objects to prevent the demand from exceeding preset limits. Demand-limiting routine shall be a priority shed type allowing automatic override of specified object type sheds when assigned analog object (temperature sensor) ex- ceeds limits as set by system user at operator's terminal. Routine shall be able to change between sets of demand limit and restore setpoints based on BACnet Schedule Objects or system user manual commands at operator's terminal. 2. Zone shed method shall be by either preventing zone heating and cooling operations, or by shifting zone heating and cooling setpoints. 3. All parameters of the demand limiting routine shall be modifiable from the operator's terminal or via remote communications. 6129-08 15900-7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 2.2 BOILER PLANT AND AIR HANDLER LOGIC CONTROLLERS A. Provide one or more native BACnet logic controllers for each air handler and provide native BACnet logic controllers as needed for boiler plant control that adequately cover all objects listed in object list. All controllers shall interface to global controller via MS/TP LAN using BACnet protocol. No gateways shall be used. Controllers shall include input, output and self- contained logic program as needed for complete control of units. Controllers shall be fully programmable using graphical programming blocks or line programming. No auxiliary or non- BACnet controllers shall be used. • B. BACnet Conformance 1. Logic controllers shall as a minimum support MS/TP BACnet LAN types. They shall communicate directly via this BACnet LAN at 9.6, 19.2,38.4 and 76.8 Kbps, as native BACnet devices. Logic controllers shall be of BACnet conformance class 3 and sup- port all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional groups: a. Files Functional Group b. Reinitialize Functional Group c. Device Communications Functional Group 2. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum—Analog Input, Analog Output,Analog Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value, Device, File, and Program object types.All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information. C. Logic controllers shall include universal inputs with 10-bit resolution that accept 3K and 10K thermistors, 0-10VDC, 0-5 VDC, 4-20 mA and dry contact signals. Any input on controller may be either analog or digital. Controller shall also include support and modifiable pro- gramming for interface to intelligent room sensor with digital display. Controller shall include binary and analog outputs on board. Analog outputs shall be switch selectable as either 0- 10VDC or 0-20mA. Software shall include scaling features for analog outputs. Logic controller shall include 24VDC voltage supply for use as power supply to external sensors. D. All program sequences shall be stored on board logic controller in EEPROM. No batteries shall be needed to retain logic program. All program sequences shall be executed by con- troller 10 times per second and capable of multiple PID loops for control of multiple devices. All calculations shall be completed using floating-point math and system shall support display of all information in floating-point nomenclature at operator's terminal. E. Programming of logic controller shall be completely modifiable in the field over installed BAC- net LANs or remotely via modem interface. Operator shall program logic sequences by graphically moving function blocks on screen and tying blocks together on screen. Logic con- troller shall be programmed using programming tools as described in operator's terminal sec- tion. F. All programming tools shall be provided as part of system. Provide documentation in flow- chart form of all programming as part of the final system as-built documentation. Include samples of flowchart documentation in submittals. G. Logic controller shall include software scheduling functions on board without depending on any external device. Scheduling shall be via a BACnet schedule object for seven-day of-the- week scheduling. Controller shall include interface capability for optional plug-in hardware 6129-08 15900-8 1/24/03 1 ' RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS clock with battery back up. Provide optional hardware clock as shown on object list given in drawing set. H. Logic controller shall include support for intelligent field sensor (see section 2.9.B.) Display on field sensor shall be programmable at logic controller and include an operating mode and a field service mode. All button functions and display data shall be programmable to show specific controller data in each mode based on which button is pressed on the sensor. See sequence of operation for specific display requirements at intelligent field sensor. 2.3 PERSONAL COMPUTER OPERATOR WORKSTATION HARDWARE A. Provide operator's terminal(s) at location(s) as noted on the plans. Operator's terminal(s) shall include the following as a minimum: a. Intel Pentium 850 Mhz processor(minimum) b. 10 GB hard disk drive. c. 128 MB of RAM. d. One 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD. e. Two serial ports. f. Two parallel ports g. Built-in real time clock and battery back up. h. SVGA graphics. i. 19"SVGA video display unit. j. 101-key keyboard and mouse. k. Hewlett Packard (HP)LaserJet 6P compatible laser printer. I. 24X CD ROM drive. B. The computer shall be equipped with applicable communications interface(s) that allow con- nection to the remote devices via dedicated twisted pair wiring,telephone modem links, radio modem links, fiber optic links or microwave data links. The interface(s) shall be configurable as either COM1, COM2, or both, and be capable of supporting the required number of DDC controllers. 1. System operator interface shall consist of the screen and keyboard of the personal computer workstation. 2. The operator interface shall: a.Be menu-driven. b.Have a graphics display. c.Have user-designed graphic display screens. , d.Have audible alarms,which are graphically enunciated. e.Log all operator control and configuration commands. C. The workstation software shall consist of: 1. Windows 2000 or Windows 98. 2. BAS manufacturers system software. 2.4 WORKSTATION OPERATOR INTERFACE A. Basic Interface Description: 1. Operator workstation interface software shall minimize operator training through the use of English language prompting, English language point identification and indus- 6129-08 15900-9 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS try-standard PC application software. The software shall provide, as a minimum, the following functionality: a. Scheduling and override of building operations. b. Collection and analysis of historical data and dynamic data (trend plot). c. Definition and construction of dynamic color graphic displays. d. Editing, programming,storage,and downloading of controller databases. 2. Provide for a graphical user interface, which shall minimize the use of keyboard through the use a mouse or similar pointing device and "point and click"approach to menu selection. Users shall be able to start and stop equipment or change set points from graphical displays through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device. 3. The software shall provide a multi-tasking type environment that allows the user to run several applications simultaneously. The mouse shall be used to quickly select and switch between multiple applications. This shall be accomplished through the use of a standard, current operating system, such as Windows 98 or 2000, that sup- ports concurrent viewing and controlling of systems operations. The operator shall be able to work in Microsoft Word, Excel, and other Windows-based software pack- ages while concurrently annunciating on-line BAS alarms and monitoring information. a. Provide functionality such that any of the following may be performed si- multaneously on-line, and in any combination,via user-sized windows. 1. Dynamic color graphics and graphic control. 2. Alarm management routing to designated locations, and customized messages. 3. Week-at-a-glance time-of-day scheduling. 4. Trend data definition and presentation. 5. Graphic definition and construction. 6. Program and point database editing on-line. b. If the software is unable to display several different types of displays at the same time, the BAS controller shall provide at least two operator worksta- tions. 4. Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to limit workstation control, display and database manipulation capa- bilities as deemed appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password. A minimum of three levels of access and ten passwords shall be supported. 5. Operator Activity Tracking: Provide an audit trail report for system changes allowing for accounting of operator-initiated actions, changes made by a particular person or changes made to a specific piece of equipment, and designated time frame. Report -' shall be archived for future use. 6. Reports shall be generated and directed to either CRT displays, printers or disk. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of re- ports: a. A general listing of all points in the network. b. List of all points currently in alarm. c. List of all points currently in override status. d. List of all disabled points. e. List of all points currently locked out. f. DDC controller trend overflow warning. g. List all weekly schedules. 6129-08 15900- 10 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS h. List of holiday programming. i. List of limits and dead bands. j. Excel reports. 7. Scheduling: Provide a graphical spreadsheet type format for simplification of time-of- day scheduling and overrides of building operations. Provide the following spread- sheet graphic types as a minimum: a. Weekly schedules. b. Zone schedules. c. Monthly calendars. 8. Collection and analysis of Historical Data: a. Provide trending capabilities that allow the user to easily monitor and pre- ,� serve records of system activity over an extended period of time. Any such point may be trended automatically at time-based intervals or changes of value, both of which shall be user-definable. Trend data may be stored on hard disk for future diagnostics and reporting. b. Trend data reports shall be provided to allow the user to view all trended point data. Reports may be customized to include individual points or pre- defined groups of at least six points. Provide additional functionality to al- low predefined groups of up to 250 trended points to be easily transferred on-line to Microsoft Excel or Lotus 123. DDC contractor shall provide cus- tom-designed spreadsheet reports for use by the owner to track energy usage and cost,equipment run times, equipment efficiency,and/or building environmental conditions. c. Provide additional functionality that allows the user to view trended data on. trend graph displays. Dynamic graphs shall represent real-time point data. Any point or group of points may be graphed, regardless of whether they have been predefined for trending. The graphs shall continuously update point values. At any time the user may redefine sampling times or range scales for any point. In addition, the user may pause the graph and take "snapshots"of screens to be stored on the workstation disk for future recall and analysis. Exact point values may be viewed and the graphs may be printed. B. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays: 1. Create color graphic floor plan displays and system schematics for each piece of me- chanical equipment, including air handling units,chilled water systems, and hot water boiler systems, shall be provided by the BAS contractor as indicated in the point I/O summary of this specification to optimize system performance analysis and speed alarm recognition. 2. The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, or text based com- mands. Graphics software shall permit the importing of AutoCAD drawings for use in the system. 3. Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values, and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations and shall automatically update to repre- sent current conditions with operator intervention. 4. The windowing environment of the PC operator workstation shall allow the user to simultaneously view several graphics at a time to analyze total building operation or 6129-08 15900- 11 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS to allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to be viewed without inter- rupting work in progress. 5. Provide graphic software to allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays. C. System Configuration and Definition: 1. Network-wide control strategies shall not be restricted to a single DDC controller but shall be able to include data from any and all other network panels to allow the de- velopment of global control strategies. 2. Provide automatic back up and restore of all system databases on the workstation hard disk. In addition, all database changes shall be performed while the workstation is on-line without disrupting other system operations. Changes shall be automatically recorded and downloaded to the appropriate DDC controller. Changes make at the DDC controllers shall be automatically uploaded to the workstation, ensuring system continuity. 3. System configuration, programming, and graphics generation shall be performed on- line. If programming and system back up shall be done with the PC workstation off- line,the BAS contractor shall provide at least two operator workstations. D. DDC Controller Communications: 1. Provide automatic dial-up communications for buildings as specified. Automatic dial- up communications shall include the following features as a minimum: a. Dial-out: Manual dial-out from the workstation to remote networks shall be accomplished using only a mouse to select and request the desired remote connection. b. Dial-in: 1. Alarms shall automatically dial into the workstation for display at the terminal and for hard copy printout at the associated event printer. 2. Alarms shall,at the operator's option, dial into a stand-alone modem- printer to provide for real-time alarm printouts even when the work- station is off-line (such as when it is being used to run operator- K' selected third party software). 3. Trend data shall be scheduled for automatic updating to the worksta- tion at operator-selected times. The operator shall also have the op- tion of manually collecting trend data at any time. 2.5 TEMPERATURE SENSORS A. Digital Display Zone Temperature Sensor 1. Sensor shall contain a backlit LCD digital display and user function keys along with temperature sensor. Controller shall function as room control unit, and shall allow oc- cupant to raise and lower setpoint, and activate terminal unit for override use—all within limits as programmed by building operator. Controller shall also allow service technician access to hidden functions as described in sequence of operation. 2. The DWC shall simultaneously display room setpoint, room temperature, outside air temperature, and fan status (if applicable) at each controller. This unit shall be pro- grammable, allowing site developers the flexibility to configure the display to ma tch their application. The site developer should be able to program the unit to display time-of-day, room humidity and outdoor humidity. Unit must have the capability to show temperatures in Fahrenheit or Centigrade. 6129-08 15900-12 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 3. Override time may be set and viewed in half-hour increments. Override time count down shall be automatic, but may be reset to zero by occupant from the DWC. lime remaining shall be displayed. Display shall show the word "OFF" in unoccupied mode unless a function button is pressed. _l B. Thermister temperature sensors shall be 10,000 ohm at 77 deg. C with Precon type-3 mate- rial. Accuracy shall be+/-0.36 deg. F/0.20 deg. C between the range of 32.0 deg./0.0 deg. C to 158.0 deg. F/70.0 deg.C. 1. Duct Sensors: a. Single point duct mounted sensors shall have a minimum 9" (22.9 cfm) rigid probe and be used when the duct size is less the 24"(61 cm.) b. Averaging duct mounted sensors shall have a minimum 12.5' (3.8 m) long averaging element and be used when the duct size is greater than 24" (61 cm). 2. Well Sensors: Liquid immersion sensors shall have a stainless steel probe and a brass well. Length of the sensor well shall be selected based on the diameter of the pipe to provide accurate,reliable sensing of the liquid temperature. 3. Outside Sensors: The sensing element shall be sheathed in a stainless steel tube and mounted inside a ventilated,treated, PVC sun shield to minimize the radiant en- ergy and wind effects. 2.6 INPUT/OUTPUT SENSORS A. Static Pressure Sensors: 1. Unidirectional with ranges not exceeding 150 percent of maximum expected input. 2. Temperature compensate with typical thermal error of 0.06 percent of full scale in temperature range of 40 to 100 degrees F(5 to 40 deg. C). 3. Accuracy: One percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.3 percent. 4. Output: 0 to 5 VDC with power at 12 to 28 VDC. B. Equipment Operation Sensors: 1. Status Inputs for Fans / Pumps / Electric Motors: Current Sensing Relays ( CSR ) with field adjustable trip point rated to measure to minimum frequency of 6hz C. Freezestats: 1. Shall be heavy duty temperature controls that incorporate a vapor charged sensing element. 2. Low temperature cut-out shall be field adjustable. 3. The sensor shall have a 4-wire, 2 circuit contact that is designed to close when the main contact opens. 4. Must be wired in series with the fan and provided with a contact to EMS for alarming. H. Smoke Detectors: 1. Provided under Division 16. I. Air Proving Switches: 1. The air proving switches shall have an operating range of 0.15 to 0.5" WC (3.8 to 12.7 mm)and have a setpoint adjustment. 6129-08 15900- 13 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 2. Wiring connections shall be 3 screw type, common, normally open and normally closed. 3. Static pressure high-limit shall be of the manual reset type and provided with a con- tact to EMS for alarming. J. Liquid Proving Switches: 1. The proving switch shall measure the difference in pressure exerted upon it sensing elements and operated a SPDT switch at the differential pressure setpoint. 2. The differential pressure setpoint must be adjustable between the ranges of 8 to 60 psig 55 to 414 kPa)and the switch differential shall be 1.5 psi(10kPa). K. Transformers: • 1. Selected and sized for appropriate VA capacity and installed and fused according to applicable Codes. Provide wiring to nearest suitable power source as required. See Division 16 for junction box. 2.7 VALVES AND ACTUATORS A. VALVE SPECIFICATIONS 1. BALL VALVES (two-way 3" and smaller screwed and three way 2-1/2" and smaller screwed). • a. Valves shall be of industrial quality with bronze bodies and female NPT threads. Valve bodies may also be stainless steel. b. All valves shall have blowout proof stem design; reinforced Teflon thrust seal washer and stuffing box. Packing gland screw shall be adjustable for wear. c. Use chromium-plated bronze ball or where specified, stainless steel ball and stem.All valves shall be provided with reinforced Teflon seats. 3. BALL VALVES(three way 2-1/2"through 6"flanged) • a. Valves shall be of industrial quality with flanged ends in accordance with ANSI B16.5 150.Valve bodies may be specified stainless steel. 4. GLOBE VALVES(two-&three-way 0.5-2"screwed) a. Valves bodies shall be bronze. b. Valve stems shall be stainless steel and highly polished to decrease friction and improve response. Valve plugs shall be brass with guides to insure a perfect seating. c. Stem packing shall be spring loaded EP rings for water application, and Teflon • rings for steam applications. 5. GLOBE VALVES(two-&three-way 0.5-6"flanged) a. Valves shall be cast iron flanged. b. Valve stems shall be stainless steel and highly polished to decrease friction and improve response. Valve plugs shall be brass with guides to ensure a perfect - - seating. Stem packing shall be Teflon,spring loaded EP rings. j 6. BUTTERFLY VALVE 6129-08 15900- 14 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS a. Valve shall full lug-wafer style, drilled and tapped for isolation and re- moval of downstream piping. Flanges shall meet ANSI Standards 125 and 150. The body shall have an extended neck to allow for sufficient flange and piping insulation clearance. b. Valves shall feature a single, through-shaft design for high strength and positive disc control. c. The disc seat shall be heavy duty with molded-in 0-rings, creating a positive seal between flange face and valve body. Gaskets between the valve and flange faces shall not be permitted. The resilient shall provide a tight flow shutoff in either direction with the disc closed. Seat isolates body and stem from flowing liquid.The seat shall be easily replaceable in the field. d. Stem bearings shall be isolated from flowing liquid. B. ELECTRONIC VALVE ACTUATORS a. Actuator shall be fully modulating, floating (tri-state), two position, and/or spring return as indicated in the control sequences. Specified fail-safe actuators shall require mechanical spring return. b. Modulating valves shall be positive positioning, responding to a 2-10VDC _- ` or 4-20mA signal.There shall be a visual valve position indicator.The actuator shall have the capability of adding auxiliary switches or feed- back potentiometer if specified. c. Floating Point Control ( tri-state) zone valves are permitted for use in terminal unit applications only. d. Actuator shall provide minimum torque required for proper valve close- off. The actuator shall be designed with a current limiting motor protec- tion. A release button—clutch or handle on the actuator—shall be pro- vided to allow for manual override (except when actuator is spring return type). e. Actuators shall be UL listed. 2.8 DAMPERS and ELECTRONIC DAMPER ACTUATORS A. DAMPERS 1. Provide 5100 model parallel or opposed blade control dampers as manufactured by Vent Products. Blades to be 16 ga. V-reinforced galvanized steel. Welded frame to be Fasten E/Z press formed 14 ga. galvanized steel complete with fully adjustable linkage and control rods. Blades to be custom sized for maximum free area without blank-offs. B. ELECTRONIC DAMPER ACTUATORS 1. Actuator shall be direct coupled (over the shaft), enabling it to be mounted directly to the damper shaft without the need for connecting linkage. The actuator-to-shaft clamp shall use a "V" bolt and "V" shaped, toothed cradle to attach to the damper shaft for maximum holding strength. Single bolt or set screw type fasteners are not acceptable. 2. Actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator. End switches to de- activate the actuator at the end of rotation or magnetic clutch are not acceptable. 3. For power-failure/safety applications, a mechanical,spring return mechanism shall be used. 6129-08 15900- 15 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 4. Actuators with spring return mechanisms shall be capable of either clockwise or counterclockwise spring return operation by simply changing the mounting orienta- tion. 5. Proportional actuators shall accept a 2-10VDC, 4-20mA signal, or be of the 2-point floating type and provide a 2-10VDC actuator position feedback signal. 6. All actuators shall have an external manual gear release (clutch) or manual crank to aid in installation and for allowing manual positioning when the actuator is not pow- ered. 7. All actuators shall have an external direction of rotation switch to aid in installation and to allow proper control response. 8. Actuators shall be provided with a factory-mounted 3-foot electrical cable and conduit fitting to provide easy hook-up to an electrical junction box. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING —' A. Unless noted otherwise, all electrical wiring required to interconnect the components of the control system shall be furnished and installed by the Controls Contractor. Perform all wiring in accordance with the requirements listed below,code requirements and Division 16. B. Power wiring required for controllers and control panels shall be furnished and installed by the Controls Contractor. Power for these components shall be dedicated power circuits for the express use of the individual controller or control panel. Circuits shall be furnished and designated by the Electrical Contractor. All circuit breakers and other electrical components required to provide this dedicated circuit shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contrac- tor. - C. All line voltage wiring shall be installed within EMT conduit. Conduit shall be adequately sup- ported in accordance with the local codes and Division 16. D. All low voltage wiring shall be installed within EMT conduit, except when ran in ceiling or floor spaces. Low voltage wiring installed in ceiling or floor spaces must be plenum rated wiring in accordance with local codes. All wiring in ceiling or floor spaces must be properly supported to the building so as not to droop. Install wiring as close to the deck as possible to avoid damage from the trades or materials. E. All conduit and wiring shall be installed in parallel lines to the building structure,corridors, and hallways. F. Communication wiring shall be installed using shielded cable. The communication network wiring shall be clearly marked with a specific color code. Communication wiring shall not be installed near noise producing equipment,such as ballasts, magnetic starters,etc. G. All analog inputs and analog outputs shall be wired using shielded cable. H. All digital outputs shall be wired using 18 guage stranded wire. I. All wiring in mechanical rooms, walls shall be installed in EMT conduit. Concealed conduit - and wiring is required in all finished spaces. 3.2 DDC EQUIPMENT A. All components shall be installed in protective enclosures. All wiring within the DDC enclo- sure shall be either number coded or color coded. Both the enclosure and the controller shall 1 24/03 6129-08 15900- 16 / RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS be properly grounded in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Documentation shall be firmly attached to the enclosure within a plastic envelope. Documentation shall state point-to-point termination detail, description of each individual point, location of power source for the controller and ID number or address within the network. B. All DDC Controllers shall be mounted on walls within equipment rooms, custodial closets or electrical rooms. Only application-specific controllers (ASCs) for rooftop units or package units may be mounted on the equipment. 3.3 SENSING DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Freezestats: Provide where indicated in the sequences on discharge side of the first coil downstream of the filter section. Serpentine the element across the face of the coil and fas- ten using support rods. B. Space Sensors/Transmitters: Provide as required by the sequences and shown on the drawings. Mount at 60 inches above finished floor. Wire to respective PUC or ASC to pro- vide stand-alone control. C. Duct Mounted Sensors/Transmitters: Provide as required by the sequences. Averaging type sensors shall be supplied for all mixed air and discharge air locations. Serpentine across the duct opening at even increments and provide proper fastening. D. Liquid Immersion Sensor/Transmitter: Provide as required by the sequences. All wells shall be installed by the piping contractor, and sensor installed by the Controls Contractor using thermal conductive compound. Strap on sensors are not acceptable,except for aqua-stats. 3.4 CONTROLLED DEVICES A. Dampers: Dampers shall be installed by the sheet metal contractor, and any linkage assem- -1 bly shall be performed by the Controls Contractor. Dampers shall operate smoothly through- out their entire stroke. B. Valves: Valves shall be installed by the piping contractor. Coordinate locations so that valves are piped properly and installed in an acceptable location. Valves shall provide proper shutoff as specified in this section. C. Actuators: All actuators shall be installed by the Controls Contractor, unless specified other- wise. All power wiring shall be the responsibility of the Controls Contractor. END OF SECTION 15900 6129-08 15900- 17 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15940 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. B. Contractor to review drawing set to provide separate pricing for all three options. This section is to be used for all option however not everything will apply. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems,subsystems,and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control equipment and devices and submittal requirements. • 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. DDC: Direct-digital controls. B. VAV: Variable air volume. I 1.4 PRIMARY HEATING-WATER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE-CONTROL SEQUENCES A. Heating-Water Supply Temperature Control: System modulates control valve to maintain heating-water supply temperature. Reset heating-water supply temperature according to outside temperature. 1. Reset Schedule: Control heating-water supply temperature in straight-line relationship for the following conditions: a. 180 deg F heating water when outside temperature is 40 deg F or less. b. 130 deg F heating water when outside temperature is 75 deg F. 2. Control of Primary Circulating Pumps: Energize pumps at outside temperatures below 65 deg F. 3. Operator Workstation: Display the following data: a. Outside temperature. b. Heating-water supply temperature. c. Heating-water supply temperature set point(180 deg F SWT, 105 deg F RWT). d. Operating status of primary circulating pumps. e. Control-valve position. 1.5 CENTRAL REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT SEQUENCES 0- 1 1594 1/24/03 6129 08 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15940 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS A. Operate chillers on lead-lag, alternating each startup. System starts and stops condenser water pump. Signal alarm if unit fails to start as commanded. Allow condenser water pump to start when the following conditions are met: 1. Immersion thermostat proves water is in cooling tower sump. 2. System detects outside temperature is above 50 deg F. 3. System indicates cooling demand from ventilation system. B. Chilled-Water Pump: Energize when condenser water pump is started. • C. Cooling Tower: Energize fans when condenser water pump is started. D. Refrigeration Machine: Flow switches shall prove chilled-water and condenser water flow before allowing refrigeration machine to start. E. Condenser Water: Maintain condenser water supply temperature by modulating tower bypass valve and cycling cooling tower fans. 1. Operate bypass valve to maintain 65 deg F sump temperature. 2. Operate cooling tower fans to maintain 70 deg F sump temperature. 3. Close valve when unoccupied. F. Operator Station Display: Indicate the following on operator workstation display terminal: 1. System graphic. 2. Condenser water pump on-off indication. 3. Chilled-water pump on-off switch. 4. Chiller on-off indication. 5. Chiller condenser water supply and return temperature. 6. Chiller chilled-water supply and return temperature. 7. Chiller condenser water control-point adjustment. 8. Common chilled-water control-point adjustment. 9. Low-level cooling tower sump alarm. 10. Expansion tank low-level alarm. v� 11. Cooling tower fan on-off indication. 12. Cooling tower sump heater on-off indication. — 13. Cooling tower dump indication. 14. Chilled-water control-point adjustment. 15. System capacity in tons. 1.6 PRIMARY CHILLED-WATER TEMPERATURE-CONTROL SEQUENCES A. Control of Primary Chilled-Water and Condenser Water Circulating Pumps: System starts pumps and proves flow through chiller before allowing chiller to start. B. Chilled-Water Supply Temperature Control: Integral chiller controls maintain constant leaving chilled-water temperature. Load analyzer resets chilled-water supply temperature according to highest cooling demand. 1. Adding and Dropping Chillers on Line: C. Condenser Water Temperature Control: System modulates valve and cycles fans. 6129-08 15940-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15940 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 1. Sequence: As condenser water temperature rises, modulate control valve open to cooling tower and closed to bypass, cycle tower fans on to low speed and then to high speed. D. Operator Workstation: Display the following data: 1. Outside temperature. 2. Chillers on-off status. 3. Entering chilled-water temperature. 4. Entering chilled-water temperature set point. 5. Leaving chilled-water temperature. 6. Chilled-water pressure drop through chiller. 7. Entering condenser water temperature. 8. Leaving condenser water temperature. 9. Leaving condenser water temperature set point. 10. Condenser water control-valve position. 11. Condenser water pressure drop through chiller. 12. Location of primary chilled-water pumps. 13. Operating status of primary chilled-water pumps. 1.7 SINGLE ZONE, SINGLE-DUCT,VAV,AIR-HANDLING UNIT CONTROL SEQUENCES A. Supply-Fan Control: System starts fan to run continuously during occupied periods. Modulate inlet guide vanes to maintain supply duct static pressure. 1. Signal alarm if fan fails to start as commanded. 2. Static-pressure controller located in floor plenum stops fan and signals alarm when static pressure rises above excessive-static-pressure set point. 3. Set variable-speed drive to minimum speed when fan is stopped. B. Return-Air Fan Control: System starts fan to run continuously during occupied periods. System modulates return-air fan variable-speed fan drive to maintain duct static pressure. Reference static pressure to the outside. C. Freeze Protection: Duct-mounted thermostat, located before supply fan, signals alarm, stops fan, and closes outside-air dampers when temperature falls below 37 deg F. D. High-Temperature Protection: Duct-mounted thermostat, located in return air, signals alarm, stops fan,and closes outside-air dampers when temperature rises above 300 deg F. E. Smoke Control: Smoke detector, located in return air, signals alarm, stops fan, and closes smoke dampers when products of combustion are detected in airstream. F. Preheat Coil: During occupied periods, when fan is running, duct-mounted. thermostat modulates control valve and cycles coil circulating pump to maintain supply-air temperature. Run circulating pump continuously when outside temperature falls below 35 deg F. Duct thermostat on discharge side of preheat coil stops fan when temperature falls below 33 deg F. G. Mixed-Air Control: During occupied periods, when fan is running, supply-air thermostat modulates outside-air, return-air, and remote relief-air dampers to maintain supply-air temperature. 6129-08 15940-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15940 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 1. During occupied periods, when fan is running, open outside-air dampers to minimum position. 2. During heating sequence,set outside-air dampers to minimum position. 3. When outside-air temperature exceeds return-air temperature, set outside-air dampers to minimum position. 4. When outside-air enthalpy exceeds return-air enthalpy, set outside-air dampers to minimum position. 5. During unoccupied periods, position outside-air and relief-air dampers closed and return- air dampers open. H. Filters: During occupied periods, when fan is running, differential air-pressure transmitter signals alarm when low-and high-pressure conditions exist. Hydronic Heating Coil: During occupied periods,when fan is running,duct-mounted thermostat modulates control valve to maintain supply-air temperature. 1. System resets supply-air temperature set point from return-air temperature. 2. During unoccupied periods,when fan is off, return valve to closed position. 3. During unoccupied periods,when fan is on, enable normal control. J. Hydronic Cooling Coil: During occupied periods,when fan is running, duct-mounted thermostat modulates control valve to maintain supply-air temperature. 1. Load analyzer resets supply-air temperature in response to greatest cooling demand. 2. During unoccupied periods,when fan is off,return valve to open or closed position. 3. During unoccupied periods,when fan is on, enable normal control. K. Coordination of Air-Handling Unit Sequences: Ensure that preheat, mixed-air, heating-coil, and cooling-coil controls have common inputs and do not overlap in function. L. Operator Station Display: Indicate the following on operator workstation display terminal: 1. System graphic. r , 2. System on-off indication. 3. System occupied/unoccupied mode. 4. System fan on-off indication. 5. Return fan on-off indication. 6. Outside-air-temperature indication. 7. Preheat-coil air-temperature indication. 8. Preheat-coil air-temperature set.point. 9. Preheat-coil pump operation indication. 10. Preheat-coil control-valve position. 11. Mixed-air-temperature indication. 12. Mixed-air-temperature set point. 13. Mixed-air damper position. 14. Filter air-pressure-drop indication. 15. Filter low-air-pressure set point. 16. Filter high-air-pressure set point. 17. Heating-coil air-temperature indication. 18. Heating-coil air-temperature set point. 19. Heating-coil control-valve position. 20. Supply-fan-discharge air-temperature indication. 21. Supply-fan-discharge air-temperature set point. 22. Cooling-coil control-valve position. 6129-08 15940-4 1/24/03 1 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15940 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 23. Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure indication. 24. Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure set point. 25. Supply-fan airflow rate. 26. Supply-fan speed. 27. Return-air static-pressure indication. 28. Return-air static-pressure set point. 29. Return-fan airflow rate. 30. Return-fan speed. 31. Building static-pressure indication. 32. Building static-pressure set point. 1.8 TERMINAL UNIT OPERATING SEQUENCE ( STORAGE, CHILLER, AND GARBAGE ROOMS) A. Cabinet Unit Heater, Hydronic: Room thermostat cycles fan. 1. Thermostat stops fan when space temperature falls below set point is reached. B. Radiators and Convectors, Hydronic: Room thermostat modulates control valve. C. Constant-Volume, Terminal Air Units, Hydronic: Room thermostat modulates control valve. Room sensor reports temperature. 1. Operator Workstation: Display the following data: a. Room/area served. b. Room temperature. c. Room temperature set point, occupied. d. Room temperature set point, unoccupied. e. Control-valve position as percent open. 1.9 VENTILATION SEQUENCES A. Exhaust Fan:Occupancy Schedule cycles fan. B. GARBAGE ROOM VENTILATION C. A.Exhaust Fan Occupancy Schedule cycles fan on and open outside air intake damper. D. TERMINAL UNIT OPERATING SEQUENCE (SPACE HEATING) E. A. Room Thermostat Modulates Control Valve 1. Room Sensor to report and display the following: a. Room/Area served ' b. Room Temperature c. Room Temperature setpoint, occupied d. Room Temperature setpoint, unoccupied e. Control Valve possition as percent open 1.10 OUTSIDE AIR TERMINAL UNIT OPERATING SEQUENCE(VENTILATION) A. CO2 Sensor to Modulate outside air damper. One sensor per intake. 1.11 PRESSURE SENSOR 6129-08 15940-5 1/24/03 } RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15940 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS A. Floor Plenum Pressure Sensor to control variable frequency drive unit. One sensor per AHU. B. Building Pressure Sensor to modulate remote relief air damper to maintain building pressure. One sensor per AHU. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Applicable) -}I PART 3-EXECUTION(Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 15940 • ` 4 6129-08 15940-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following: 1. Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Dual-duct systems. c. Variable-air-volume systems. d. Multizone systems. e. Induction-unit systems. 2. Hydronic Piping Systems: a. Constant-flow systems. b. Variable-flow systems. c. Primary-secondary systems. 3. Steam systems. • 4. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings. 5. Kitchen hood airflow balancing. 6. Laboratory fume hood airflow balancing. 7. Exhaust hood airflow balancing. 8. Space pressurization testing and adjusting. 9. Vibration measuring. 10. Sound level measuring. 11. Stair-tower pressurization testing and adjusting. 12. Smoke-control systems testing and adjusting. 13. Indoor-air quality measuring. 14. Existing systems TAB. 15. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 16. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper. B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals,according to indicated quantities. C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors, and other pollutants. 6129-08 15950- 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated. E. NC: Noise criteria. F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results. G. RC: Room criteria. H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order. I. Smoke-Control System: An engineered system that uses fans to produce airflow and pressure differences across barriers to limit smoke movement. J. Smoke-Control Zone: A space within a building that is enclosed by smoke barriers and is a part of a zoned smoke-control system. K. Stair Pressurization System: A type of smoke-control system that is intended to positively pressurize stair towers with outdoor air by using fans to keep smoke from contaminating the stair towers during an alarm condition. L. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a - dosed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump. M. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side. N. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. O. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested. P. TAB: Testing,adjusting,and balancing. Q. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system. -- R. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment. S. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and reporting TAB procedures. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Within [15] [30] [45]days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed,submit[2] [4] [6] copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in"Quality Assurance"Article. 1 6129-08 15950-2 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within [15] [30] [45] days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit [2] [4] [6] copies of the Contract Documents review.report as specified in Part 3. C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within [30] [60] [90]days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit [2] [4] [6] copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation"Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project. D. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm. E. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms. F. Warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by [AABC] [NEBB] [either AABC or NEBB]. B. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. 1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following: a. Submittal distribution requirements. b. The Contract Documents examination report. __ ' c. TAB plan. d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements. e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow. C. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from [AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating,Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems."] [NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."] [SMACNA's "HVAC Systems -Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing."] [TAB firm's forms approved by Architect.] E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in [AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems] [NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification]." 6129-08 15950-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION ;2 RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer. 4 1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities. B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. - z' 1.8 WARRANTY A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's"National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating,Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems"forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions: B. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in . completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions: 1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Applicable) .�I PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems'designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. 6129-08 15950-4 1/24/03 j RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of Contract. 2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow- control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents." D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements;including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems—Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions. F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning,adjusting,and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed. G. Examine system and equipment test reports. H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing. J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. L. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed. M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations. 6129-08 15950-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING N. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. P. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: 1. Dampers,valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals. 4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing �' and diverting valves, are properly connected. 5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. 6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 8. Controller set points are set at indicated values. 9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values. S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean,and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance,smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. • 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in [AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems'] [NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and 6129-08 15950-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING Balancing of Environmental Systems' [SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing']and this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project. C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed- control levers, and similar controls and devices,to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) metric (SI) inch- pound(IP)and metric(SI)units. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems'"as-built"duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems,develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return-and exhaust-air dampers,through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches,electrical interlocks,and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components. L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system. 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. 6129-08 15950-7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible,upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and-treating equipment. a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters. 3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment,and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. 5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes. 6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan- motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 6129-08 15950-8 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR DUAL-DUCT SYSTEMS A. Verify that the cooling coil is capable of full-system airflow, and set mixing boxes at full-cold airflow position for fan volume. B. Measure static pressure in both hot and cold ducts at the end of the longest duct run to determine that sufficient static pressure exists to operate mixing-box controls and to overcome resistance in the ducts and outlets downstream from mixing box. 1. If insufficient static pressure exists, increase the airflow at the fan. C. Test and adjust the constant-volume mixing boxes as follows: 1. Verify both hot and cold operations by adjusting the thermostat and observing the air temperature and volume changes. 2. Verify sufficient inlet static pressure before making volume adjustments. 3. Adjust mixing box to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. Measure the airflow by Pitot-tube traverse readings,totaling the airflow of the outlets; or by measuring static pressure at mixing-box taps if provided by box manufacturer. D. Remeasure static pressure in both hot and cold ducts at the end of the longest duct run to determine that sufficient static pressure exists to operate mixing-box controls and to overcome resistance in the ducts and outlets downstream from mixing box. E. Adjust variable-air-volume, dual-duct systems in the same way as constant-volume dual-duct systems,and adjust each mixing-box maximum-and minimum-airflow settings. 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS !' 'i A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set-point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted,adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. 3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the • designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems. 5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems. 6129-08 15950-9 1/24/03, RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow. Si 6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems. 7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8. Record the final fan performance data. ;! C. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted,adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Balance systems similar to constant-volume air systems. 2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition. 3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of the static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems. 4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings. 5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan, if one is ` installed,and verify operation of the static-pressure controller. 6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller. 7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 8. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as 1 described for constant-volume air systems. D. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have been adjusted,adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. 2. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow controller set at maximum airflow. 3. Set terminal units at full-airflow condition. 4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to . indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems. , 5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow. 6. Measure static pressure at the sensor. 7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as t described for constant-volume air systems. 1 6129-08 15950- 10 1/24/03 r. RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON I i ADJUSTING,SECTIONI TESTING, AND BALANCING 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR MULTIZONE SYSTEMS A. Set unit at full flow through the cooling coil if coil has that capacity. B. Adjust each zone damper to indicated airflow. 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR INDUCTION-UNIT SYSTEMS A. Balance primary-air risers by measuring static pressure at the nozzles of the top and bottom units of each riser to determine which risers must be throttled. Adjust risers to indicated airflow within specified tolerances. B. Adjust each induction unit. 3.10 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems'"as-built"piping layouts. C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level. 3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. 3.11 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-displacement pumps: 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve dosed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. 2. • Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved. 3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. 6129-08 15950- 11 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING A 4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design. B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed,at calculated presettings. s` C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust,where necessary,to obtain first balance. 1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device. D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow. E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows: 1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. _ 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices. F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage,rpm, pump heads, and systems'pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature. G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at.the conclusions of balancing. 3.12 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS fi A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. 3.13 PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY-SECONDARY-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance the primary system crossover flow first,then balance the secondary system. 3.14 PROCEDURES FOR STEAM SYSTEMS A. Measure and record upstream and downstream pressure of each piece of equipment. B. Measure and record upstream and downstream steam pressure of pressure-reducing valves. C. Check the setting and operation of automatic temperature-control valves, self-contained control valves,and pressure-reducing valves. Record the final setting. D. Check the settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings. E. Verify the operation of each steam trap. y 3.15 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Measure water flow through all circuits. B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances. 6129-08 15950- 12 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures. D. Measure inlet steam pressure. E. Check the setting and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings. 3.16 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer, model,and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage,each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage,each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying } from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data. 3.17 PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances of indicated flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating-in a multiple chiller installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design conditions: 1. Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop,and water flow. 2. If water-cooled chillers, condenser-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop,and water flow. 3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments furnished by chiller manufacturer. 4. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatt. 5. Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatt. 6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling. 7. If air-cooled chillers, verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan and motor data including number of fans and entering-and leaving-air temperatures. 3.18 PROCEDURES FOR COOLING TOWERS A. Shut off makeup water for the duration of the test, and verify that makeup and blowdown systems are fully operational after tests and before leaving the equipment. Perform the following tests and record the results: 1. Measure condenser-water flow to each cell of the cooling tower. 2. Measure entering-and leaving-water temperatures. 3. Measure wet-and dry-bulb temperatures of entering air. 4. Measure wet-and dry-bulb temperatures of leaving air. 5. Measure condenser-water flow rate recirculating through the cooling tower. 6129-08 15950- 13 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 6. Measure cooling tower pump discharge pressure. 7. Adjust water level and feed rate of makeup-water system. 3.19 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS A. Verify proper rotation of fans. B. Measure entering-and leaving-air temperatures. C. Record compressor data. 3.20 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS A. If hydronic, measure entering-and leaving-water temperatures and water flow. B. If steam, measure entering-water temperature and flow and leaving steam pressure, temperature, and flow. 3.21 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Entering-and leaving-water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop. B. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Nameplate data. 2. Airflow. 3. Entering-and leaving-air temperature at full load. 4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage. 5. Calculated kilowatt at full load. 6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection. • C. Steam Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Airflow. 3. Air pressure drop. 4. Inlet steam pressure. D. Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 3. Airflow. 4. Air pressure drop. 5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature. 6129-08 15950-14 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION I TESTING,ADJUSTING, NAND BALANCING 3.22 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system. B. Measure indoor wet-and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied. C. Measure outside-air,wet-and dry-bulb temperatures. 3.23 PROCEDURES FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS A. Measure, adjust,and record the airflow of each kitchen hood. For kitchen hoods designed with integral makeup air, measure and adjust the exhaust and makeup airflow. Measure airflow by duct Pitot-tube traverse. If a duct Pitot-tube traverse is not possible, provide an explanation in the report of the reason(s)why and also the reason why the method used was chosen. 1. Install welded test ports in the sides of the exhaust duct for the duct Pitot-tube traverse. Install each test port with a threaded cap that is liquid tight. B. After balancing is complete,do the following: 1. Measure and record the static pressure at the hood exhaust-duct connection. 2. Measure and record the hood face velocity. Make measurements at multiple points across the face of the hood. Perform measurements at a maximum of 12 inches between points and between any point and the perimeter. Calculate the average of the measurements recorded. Verify that the hood average face velocity complies with the Contract Documents and governing codes. 3. Check the hood for capture and containment of smoke using a smoke emitting device. Observe the smoke pattern. Make adjustments to room airflow patterns to achieve optimum results. C. Visually inspect the hood exhaust duct throughout its entire length in compliance with authorities having jurisdiction. Begin at the hood connection and end at the point it discharges outdoors. Report findings. 1. Check duct slopes as required. 2. Verify that duct access is installed as required. 3. Verify that point of termination is as required. 4. Verify that duct air velocity is within the range required. 5. Verify that duct is within a fire-rated enclosure. D. Report deficiencies. 3.24 PROCEDURES FOR LABORATORY FUME HOODS A. Before performing laboratory fume hood testing, measure, adjust and record the supply airflow and airflow patterns of each supply air outlet that is located in the same room as the hood. Adjust the air outletflow patternto mi nimize turbulence and to achieve the desired airflow patterns at the face and inside the hood. Verify that adequate makeup air is available to achieve the indicated flow of the hood. - 6129-08 15950- 15 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING B. Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each laboratory fume hood by duct Pitot-tube traverse with the laboratory fume hood sash in the design open position. 1. For laboratory fume hoods installed in variable exhaust systems, measure, adjust, and record the hood exhaust airflow at maximum and at minimum airflow conditions. 2. For laboratory fume hoods designed with integral makeup air, measure, adjust, and record the exhaust and makeup airflow. C. For laboratory fume hoods that are connected to centralized exhaust systems using automatic dampers,adjust the damper controller to obtain the indicated exhaust airflow. D. After balancing is complete, do the following: 1. Measure and record the static pressure at the hood duct connection with the hood operating at indicated airflow. 2. Measure and record the face velocity across the open sash face area. Measure the face velocity at each point in a grid pattern. Perform measurements at a maximum of 12 inches between points and between any point and the perimeter of the opening. a. For laboratory fume hoods designed to maintain a constant face velocity at varying sash positions, also measure and record the face velocity at 50 and 25 percent of the design open sash position. b. Calculate and report the average face velocity by averaging all velocity measurements. c. Calculate and report the exhaust airflow by multiplying the calculated average face velocity by the sash open area. Compare this quantity with the exhaust airflow measured by duct Pitot-tube traverse. Report differences. d. If the average face velocity is less than the indicated face velocity, retest the average face velocity and adjust hood baffles, fan drives, and other parts of the system to provide the indicated average face velocity. 3. Check each laboratory fume hood for the capture and containment of smoke by using a hand-held emitting device. Observe the capture and containment of smoke flow pattern across the open face and inside the hood. Make adjustments necessary to achieve the desired results. `"` E. With the room and laboratory fume hoods operating at indicated conditions, perform an "as- installed"performance test of the laboratory fume hood according to ASHRAE 110. Test[each] <insert number> laboratory fume hood(s)and document the test results. it 3.25 PROCEDURES FOR EXHAUST HOODS A. Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each exhaust hood. Measure airflow by duct Pitot- tube traverse. If a duct Pitot-tube traverse is not possible, explain why, in the report, and explain the test method used. B. After balancing is complete, do the following: 1. Measure and record the static pressure at the hood exhaust-duct connection. 2. Check the hood for capture and containment of smoke using a smoke emitting device. Observe the smoke pattern. Make adjustments to achieve optimum results. 3.26 PROCEDURES FOR SPACE PRESSURIZATION MEASUREMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS 6129-08 15950- 16 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING A. Before testing for space pressurization, observe the space to verify the integrity of the space boundaries. Verify that windows and doors are closed and applicable safing, gaskets, and sealants are installed. Report deficiencies and postpone testing until after the reported deficiencies are corrected. B. Measure, adjust, and record the pressurization of each room, each zone, and each building by adjusting the supply, return,and exhaust airflows to achieve the indicated conditions. C. Measure space pressure differential where pressure is used as the design criteria, and measure airflow differential where differential airflow is used as the design criteria for space pressurization. 1. For pressure measurements, measure and record the pressure difference between the intended spaces at the door with all doors in the space closed. Record the high-pressure side, low-pressure side,and pressure difference between each adjacent space. 2. For applications with cascading levels of space pressurization, begin in the most critical - space and work to the least critical space. • 3. Test room pressurization first,then zones,and finish with building.pressurization. D. To achieve indicated pressurization,set the supply airflow to the indicated conditions and adjust the exhaust and return airflow to achieve the indicated pressure or airflow difference. E. For spaces with pressurization being monitored and controlled automatically, observe and adjust the controls to achieve the desired set point. 1. Compare the values of the measurements taken to the measured values of the control system instruments and report findings. 2. Check the repeatability of the controls by successive tests designed to temporarily alter the ability to achieve space pressurization. Test overpressurization and underpressurization, and observe and report on the system's ability to revert to the set point. 3. For spaces served by variable-air-volume supply and exhaust systems, measure space pressurization at indicated airflow and minimum airflow conditions. F. In spaces that employ multiple modes of operation, such as normal mode and emergency mode or occupied mode and unoccupied mode, measure, adjust, and record data for each operating mode. G. Record indicated conditions and corresponding initial and final measurements. Report deficiencies. 3.27 PROCEDURES FOR VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS A. Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria: 1. Solid-state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer. 2. • Velocity range of 0.1 to 10 inches per second. 3. Displacement range of 1 to 100 mils. 4. Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz. 5. Capable of filtering unwanted frequencies. B. Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing. 6129-08 15950- 17 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 1. Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter. 2. Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer's calibration procedures. C. Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration sources are at a minimum level and will not influence measurements of equipment being tested. 1. Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with testing. 2. Clear the space of people. D. Perform vibration measurements after air and water balancing and equipment testing is ' complete. E. Clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration transducer. F. Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer's written instructions and to avoid interference with the operation of the equipment being tested. G. Measure and record vibration on rotating equipment over 3 hp. H. Measure and record equipment vibration, bearing vibration, equipment base vibration, and building structure vibration. Record velocity and displacement readings in the horizontal, vertical, and axial planes. 1. Pumps: a. Pump Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. c. Pump Base: Top and side. d. Building: Floor. e. Piping: To and from the pump after flexible connections. 2. Fans and HVAC Equipment with Fans: a. Fan Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. c. Equipment Casing: Top and side. d. Equipment Base: Top and side. e. Building: Floor. f. Ductwork: To and from equipment after flexible connections. g. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections. 3. Chillers and HVAC Equipment with Compressors: a. Compressor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. c. Equipment Casing: Top and side. • d. Equipment Base: Top and side. e. Building: Floor. f. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections. For equipment with vibration isolation, take floor measurements with the vibration isolation blocked solid to the floor and with the vibration isolation floating. Calculate and report the differences. 6129-08 15950-18 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING J. Inspect, measure, and record vibration isolation. 1. Verify that vibration isolation is installed in the required locations. 2. Verify that installation is level and plumb. 3. Verify that isolators are properly anchored. 4. For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring OD, and the travel-to-solid distance. 5. Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or concrete base below. Verify that there is unobstructed clearance between the bottom of the inertia • base and the floor. 3.28 PROCEDURES FOR SOUND-LEVEL MEASUREMENTS A. Perform sound-pressure-level measurements with an octave-band analyzer complying with ANSI S1.4 for Type 1 sound-level meters and ANSI S1.11 for octave-band filters. Comply with requirements in ANSI S1.13,unless otherwise indicated. B. Calibrate sound meters before each day of testing. Use a calibrator provided with the sound meter complying with ANSI S1.40 and that has NIST certification. C. Use a microphone that is suitable for the type of sound levels measured. For areas where air -, velocities exceed 100 fpm, use a windscreen on the microphone. D. Perform sound-level testing after air and water balancing and equipment testing are complete. E. Close windows and doors to the space. F. Perform measurements when the space is not occupied and when the occupant noise level from other spaces in the building and outside are at a minimum. G. Clear the space of temporary sound sources so unrelated disturbances will not be measured. Position testing personnel during measurements to achieve a direct line-of-sight between the sound source and the sound-level meter. H. Take sound measurements at a height approximately 48 inches above the floor and at least 36 inches from a wall,column,and other large surface capable of altering the measurements. I. Take sound measurements in dBA and in each of the 8 unweighted octave bands in the frequency range of 63 to 8000 Hz. J. Take sound measurements with the HVAC systems off to establish the background sound levels and take sound measurements with the HVAC systems operating. 1. Calculate the difference between measurements. Apply a correction factor depending on the difference and adjust measurements. K. Perform sound testing at<Insert number> locations on Project for each of the following space types. For each space type tested, select a measurement location that has the greatest sound level. If testing multiple locations for each space type, select at least one location that is near and at least one location that is remote from the predominant sound source. 1. Private office. 2. Open office area. 6129-08 15950- 19 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 3. Conference room. 4. Auditorium/large meeting room/lecture hall. 5. Classroom/training room. 6. Patient room/exam room. - 7. Sound or vibration sensitive laboratory. 8. Hotel room/apartment. 9. Each space with a noise criterion of RC or NC 25 or lower. 10. Each space with an indicated noise criterion of RC or NC 35 and lower that is adjacent to a mechanical equipment room or roof mounted equipment. 11. Inside each mechanical equipment room. 12. <Insert other spaces.> • 3.29 PROCEDURES FOR STAIR-TOWER PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM MEASUREMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. Before testing, observe the stair tower to verify that construction is complete. Verify the following: 1. Walls and ceiling are free of unintended openings and are capable of achieving a pressure boundary. 2. Firestopping and sealants are installed. 3. Doors,door closers,and door gaskets are installed and adjusted. 4. If applicable,window installation is complete. B. Measure and record wind speed and direction, outside-air temperature,and relative humidity on each test day. C. Test each stair tower as a single system. If multiple fans serve a single stair tower, operate the fans together. D. Air Balance: 1. Open the doors indicated to be open and measure,adjust,and record the airflow of each: a. Stair-tower fan. b. Air outlet supplying the stair tower. 2. For ducted systems, measure the fan airflow by duct Pitot-tube traverse. E. Pressurization Test 1. After air balancing is complete,perform stair-tower pressurization tests. 2. Establish a consistent procedure for recording data throughout the entire test. Set the stair-tower side of the doors as the reference point and.the floor side of the doors with positive pressure when higher than the stair tower, and negative pressure when lower than the stair tower. 3. • With the HVAC systems operating in their normal mode of operation and the stair-tower pressurization systems off, measure and record the following: ; a. Pressure difference across each stair-tower door with all doors in the stairwell closed. b. Force necessary to open each door, using a spring-type scale. 6129-08 15950-20 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 4. With the HVAC systems operating and the stair-tower pressurization system activated, perform the following: a. Place building HVAC systems in their normal operating mode including equipment not used to implement smoke control, such as air-handling units, toilet exhaust fans,fan coil units, and similar equipment. b. Measure and record the pressure difference across each stair-tower door with all doors in the stair tower closed. Adjust the stair-tower pressure relief to prevent overpressurization. c. Use a spring scale to measure and record the force needed to open the door closest to the fan. With the initial door held in the open position, measure and record the pressure difference across each remaining closed stair-tower door. d. Open additional doors (up to the number indicated) one at a time, and measure and record the pressure difference across each remaining dosed stair-tower door after the opening of each additional door. e. Open the doors indicated to be open and measure and record the direction and velocity through each of the open doors by a traverse of every 1 sq.ft. grid of door opening. f. Calculate the average of the door velocity measurements. Compare the average velocity to the Contract Documents and governing code requirements. 5. Repeat the pressurization tests with the smoke-control systems and the HVAC systems operating. 6. Criteria for Acceptance: a. The opening force on any door shall not exceed 30 lbf. b. Code requirements: c. <Insert velocity,pressure,and other criteri .> ' F. Operational Tests: 1. Check the proper activation of the stair-tower pressurization system(s) in response to all means of activation, both automatic and manual. 2. Verify that each initiating occurrence produces the proper system response under each of the following modes of operation: a. Normal. b. Alarm. c. Manual override of normal mode and alarm. d. Return to normal. 3. Verify that the smoke detector at the stair pressurization fan inlet de-energizes the fan and doses the damper at the fan. 4. If standby power is provided for stair pressurization systems, test to verify that the stair pressurization systems operate while on both normal and standby power. 5. Conduct additional tests required by authorities having jurisdiction. G. Prepare a complete report of observations, measurements, and deficiencies. 3.30 PROCEDURES FOR SMOKE-CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING A. Before testing smoke-control systems, verify that construction is complete and verify the integrity of each smoke-control zone boundary. Verify that windows and doors are closed and 6129-08 15950-21 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING that applicable safing, gasket, and sealants are installed. Report deficiencies and postpone testing until after the reported deficiencies are corrected. B. Measure and record wind speed and direction, outside-air temperature, and relative humidity on each test day. C. Measure,adjust,and record airflow of each smoke-control system with all fans that are a part of the system operating as intended by the design. D. Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each fan. For ducted systems, measure the fan airflow by duct Pitot-tube traverse. E. After air balancing is complete, perform the following pressurization testing for each smoke- control zone in the system: 1. Verify the boundaries of each smoke-control zone. 2. With the HVAC systems in their normal mode of operation and smoke control not operating, measure and record the pressure difference across each smoke-control zone. Make measurements after closing doors that separate the zones. Make one measurement across each door. Clearly indicate the high and low pressure side of each door. 3. With the system operating in the smoke-control mode and with each zone in the smoke- control system activated,perform the following: a. Measure and record the pressure difference across each door that separates the smoke zone from adjacent zones. Make measurements with doors that separate the smoke zone from the other zones closed. Clearly indicate the high and low pressure side of the door. Doors that have a tendency to open slightly due to the pressure difference should have one pressure measurement made while held closed and another measurement made with the door open. b. Continue to activate each separate zoned smoke-control system and make _ pressure difference measurements. c. After testing a smoke zone's smoke-control system, deactivate the HVAC systems involved and return them to their normal operating mode before activating another zone's smoke-control system.d. Verify that controls necessary to prevent excessive pressure differences are functional. F. Operational Tests: 1. Check the proper activation of each zoned smoke-control system in response to all means of activation, both automatic and manual. 2. Check automatic activation in response to fire alarm signals received from the building's fire alarm and detection system. Initiate a separate alarm for each means of activation to ensure that the proper operation of the correct zoned smoke-control system occurs. 3. Check and record the proper operation of fans, dampers, and related equipment as • outlined below for each separate zone of the smoke-control system. a. Fire zone in which a smoke-control system automatically activates. b. Type of signal that activates a smoke-control system, such as pull station, sprinkler water flow, or smoke detector. c. Smoke zone(s) where maximum mechanical exhaust to the outside is implemented and no supply air is provided. 6129-08 15950-22 1/24/03 _ r 1 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING d. Positive pressure smoke-control zone(s) where maximum air supply is implemented and no exhaust to the outside is provided. e. Fan(s) "ON" as required to implement the smoke-control system. Multiple- or variable-speed fans should be further noted as "MAX. VOLUME" to verify that the intended control configuration is achieved. f. Fan(s)"OFF"as required to implement the smoke-control system. g. Damper(s)"OPEN"where maximum airflow must be achieved. h. Damper(s)"CLOSED"where no airflow should take place. i. Auxiliary functions to achieve the smoke-control system configuration such as changes or override of normal operating pressure and temperature-control set points. j. If standby power is provided for the smoke-control system, test to verify that the system functions while operating under both normal and standby power. G. Conduct additional tests required by authorities having jurisdiction. Unless required by authorities having jurisdiction, perform testing without the use of smoke or products that simulate smoke. H. Prepare a complete report of observations,measurements,and deficiencies. 3.31 PROCEDURES FOR INDOOR-AIR QUALITY MEASUREMENTS A. After air balancing is complete and with HVAC systems operating at indicated conditions, perform indoor-air quality testing. B. Observe and record the following conditions for each HVAC system: 1. The distance between the outside-air intake and the closest exhaust fan discharge, cooling tower,flue termination, or vent termination. 2. Specified filters are installed. Check for leakage around filters. 3. Cooling coil drain pans have a positive slope to drain. 4. Cooling coil condensate drain trap maintains an air seal. 5. Evidence of water damage. 6. Insulation in contact with the supply,return,and outside air is dry and clean. C. Measure and record indoor conditions served by each HVAC system. Make measurements at multiple locations served by the system if required to satisfy the following: 1. Most remote area. 2. One location per floor. 3. One location for every 5000 sq.ft.. D. Measure and record the following indoor conditions for each location two times at two-hour intervals, and in accordance with ASHRAE 113: 1. Temperature. 2. • Relative humidity. 3. Air velocity. 4. Concentration of carbon dioxide(ppm). 5. Concentration of carbon monoxide(ppm). 6. Nitrogen oxides(ppm). 7. Formaldehyde(ppm). 3.32 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS 6129-08 15950-23 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION .y RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 4,52 A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused. 1. ' Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan. 2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. 3. Check the refrigerant charge. 4. Check the condition of filters. 5. Check the condition of coils. 6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate drain trap. 7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies. B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. 1. New filters are installed. 2. Coils are clean and fins combed. 3. Drain pans are clean. 4. Fans are clean. 5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. ' a 6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected. C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work. 1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows and determine the new fan,speed,filter, and coil face velocity. 2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer. • .1' 3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated airflow and water flow rates. If 5 percent or less,equipment adjustments are not required. 4. Air balance each air outlet. 3.33 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned. B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions. C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements. D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high-and low-temperature controllers). E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators. F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes. 6129-08 15950-24 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems. I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations. J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply. K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations. 3.34 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return,and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. I I 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent. 3.35 REPORTING A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. ( B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.36 FINAL REPORT A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder,tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 1. Include a list of instruments used forprocedures,alongwith proof of calibration. C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data,include the following: 1. ' Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers'test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data. 6129-08 15950-25 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION t RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report,as applicable: .c� 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. s - b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units,including manufacturer,type size,and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil,wet-and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air,static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outside,supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct,outlet,and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following: 1. Unit Data: Include the following: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. 6129-08 15950-26 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 • TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number of belts, make,and size. k. Number of filters,type, and size. 2. Motor Data: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. { c. Volts, phase,and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make,size in inches,and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center,and amount of adjustments in inches. 3. Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. i. Outside airflow in cfm. j. Return airflow in cfm. k. Outside-air damper position. I. Return-air damper position. m. Vortex damper position. G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: 1. Coil Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq.ft.. h. Tube size in NPS. i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement. 2. Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. c. Air pressure drop in inches wg. d. Outside-air,wet-and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. 6129-08 15950-27 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING e. Return-air,wet-and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering-air,wet-and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Leaving-air,wet-and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm. i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j. Entering-water temperature in deg F. k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. I. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig. n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F. o. Inlet steam pressure in psig. H. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Fuel type in input data. g. Output capacity in Btuh. h. Ignition type. i. Burner-control types. j. Motor horsepower and rpm. k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. I. Motor full-load amperage and service factor. m. Sheave make, size in inches,and bore. n. Sheave dimensions,center-to-center,and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. "9 b. Entering-air temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. d. Air temperature differential in deg F. ' e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg. f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg. g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Low-fire fuel input in Btuh. i. High-fire fuel input in Btuh. j. Manifold pressure in psig. k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F. I. Operating set point in Btuh. . m. Motor voltage at each connection. n. Motor amperage for each phase. o. Heating value of fuel in Btuh. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in central-station air-handling units,include the following: 1. Unit Data: 6129-08 15950-28 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil identification. d. Capacity in Btuh. e. Number of stages. f. Connected volts, phase,and hertz. g. Rated amperage. h. Airflow rate in cfm. i. Face area in sq.ft.. j. Minimum face velocity in fpm. 2. Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): a. Heat output in Btuh. b. Airflow rate in cfm. c. Air velocity in fpm. d. Entering-air temperature in deg F. e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. f. Voltage at each connection. g. Amperage for each phase. J. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return,and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make,size in inches,and bore. h. Sheave dimensions,center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Motor Data: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts,phase,and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make,size in inches,and bore. f. Sheave dimensions,center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number of belts,make,and size. 3. Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): • a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg. K. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 6129-08 15950-29 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 1. Report Data: a. System and air-handling unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq.ft.. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig. L. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: • 1. Unit Data: _g a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Test apparatus used. d. Area served. e. Air-terminal-device make. f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram. g. Air-terminal-device type and model number. h. Air-terminal-device size. i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq.ft.. 2. Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. 3 ti b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F. M. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: • a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. • e. Flowmeter type. 2. Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering-water temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig. 6129-08 15950-30 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING e. Entering-air temperature in deg F. f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. N. Packaged Chiller Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Make and model number. • c. Manufacturer's serial number. d. Refrigerant type and capacity in gal.. e. Starter type and size. f. Starter thermal protection size. g. Compressor make and model number. 1 h. Compressor manufacturer's serial number. 2. Water-Cooled Condenser Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): a. Refrigerant pressure in psig. Ij b. Refrigerant temperature in deg F. c. Entering-water temperature in deg F. d. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. e. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. 3. Air-Cooled Condenser Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): a. Refrigerant pressure in psig. b. Refrigerant temperature in deg F. c. Entering-and leaving-air temperature in deg F. 4. Evaporator Test Reports (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Refrigerant pressure in psig. b. Refrigerant temperature in deg F. c. Entering-water temperature in deg F. d. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. e. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. 5. Compressor Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Suction pressure in psig. b. Suction temperature in deg F. • - ' c. Discharge pressure in psig. d. Discharge temperature in deg F. • e. Oil pressure in psig. f. Oil temperature in deg F. g. Voltage at each connection. h. Amperage for each phase. i. Kilowatt input. j. Crankcase heater kilowatt. k. Chilled-water control set point in deg F. I. Condenser-water control set point in deg F. 6129-08 15950-31 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING m. Refrigerant low-pressure-cutoff set point in psig. n. Refrigerant high-pressure-cutoff set point in psig. 6. Refrigerant Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): a. Oil level. b. Refrigerant level. c. Relief valve setting in psig. d. Unloader set points in psig. e. Percentage of cylinders unloaded. :.m' f. Bearing temperatures in deg F. g. Vane position. h. Low-temperature-cutoff set point in deg F. O. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-alone refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled condensing units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Unit make and model number. d. Compressor make. e. Compressor model and serial numbers. f. Refrigerant weight in lb. g. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg F. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg. , b. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg. c. Entering-air,dry-bulb temperature in deg F. d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F. e. Condenser entering-water temperature in deg F. f. Condenser leaving-water temperature in deg F. g. Condenser-water temperature differential in deg F. h. Condenser entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. i. Condenser leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig. j. Condenser-water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. k. Control settings. I. Unloader set points. m. Low-pressure-cutout set point in psig. n. High-pressure-cutout set point in psig. o. Suction pressure in psig. p. Suction temperature in deg F. • q. Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig. r. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F. s. Oil pressure in psig. t. Oil temperature in deg F. u. Voltage at each connection. v. Amperage for each phase. w. Kilowatt input. x. Crankcase heater kilowatt. 6129-08 15950-32 1/24/03 . rl RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING y. Number of fans. z. Condenser fan rpm. aa. Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm. bb. Condenser fan motor make,frame size,rpm,and horsepower. cc. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection. dd. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase. P. Cooling Tower or Condenser Test Reports: For cooling towers or condensers, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Make and type. c. Model and serial numbers. d. Nominal cooling capacity in tons. e_ Refrigerant type and weight in lb. f. Water-treatment chemical feeder and chemical. g. Number and type of fans. h. Fan motor make,frame size, rpm,and horsepower. i. Fan motor voltage at each connection. j. Sheave make, size in inches,and bore. k. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center,and amount of adjustments in inches. I. Number of belts,make,and size. m. Pump make and model number. n. Pump manufacturer's serial number. o. Pump motor make and frame size. p. Pump motor horsepower and rpm. 2. Pump Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): a. Voltage at each connection. b. Amperage for each phase. c. Water flow rate in gpm. 3. Water Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): a. Entering-water temperature in deg F. b. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. c. Water temperature differential in deg F. d. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. e. Leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. g. Water flow rate in gpm. h. Bleed water flow rate in gpm. 4. • Air Data(Indicated and Actual Values): a. Duct airflow rate in cfm. b. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg. c. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg. d. Average entering-air,wet-bulb temperature in deg F. e. Average leaving-air,wet-bulb temperature in deg F. f. Ambient wet-bulb temperature in deg F. 6129-08 15950-33 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING Q. Heat-Exchanger/Converter Test Reports: For steam and hot-water heat exchangers, include the following: 2 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and type. • e. Model and serial numbers. f. Ratings. 2. Steam Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): a. Inlet pressure in psig. b. Condensate flow rate in lb/h. 3. Primary Water Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): a. Entering-water temperature in deg F. b. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. c. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. d. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. e. Water flow rate in gpm. 4. Secondary Water Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): a. Entering-water temperature in deg F. b. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. c. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. d. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. 1,23 e. Water flow rate in gpm. T. I R. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and ix include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model and serial numbers. f. Water flow rate in gpm. g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig. • i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches. -' k. Motor make and frame size. I. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type. 6129-08 15950-34 1/24/03 i i RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 1 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 2. Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): a. Static head in feet of head or psig. b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig. c. Actual impeller size in inches. d. Full-open flow rate in gpm. e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig. g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig. _ h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig. i. Final water flow rate in gpm. j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase. S. Boiler Test Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and type. i e. Model and serial numbers. f. Fuel type and input in Btuh. g. Number of passes. h. Ignition type. i. Burner-control types. j. Voltage at each connection. f k. Amperage for each phase. 1 1 2. Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): 1 a. Operating pressure in psig. b. Operating temperature in deg F. c. Entering-water temperature in deg F. d. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. e. Number of safety valves and sizes in NPS. f. Safety valve settings in psig. g. High-limit setting in psig. h. Operating-control setting. i. High-fire set point. j. Low-fire set point. - k. Voltage at each connection. I. Amperage for each phase. m. Draft fan voltage at each connection. n. Draft fan amperage for each phase. . o. Manifold pressure in psig. T. Air-to-Air Heat-Recovery Unit Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. 6129-08 15950-35 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING c. Service. d. Make and type. e. Model and serial numbers. 2. Motor Data: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase,and hertz. d. Full load amperage and service factor. r' e: Sheave make, size in inches,and bore. f. Sheave dimensions,center-to-center,and amount of adjustments in inches. 3. If fans are an integral part of the unit, include the following for each fan: a. Make and type. b. Arrangement and size. c. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. d. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches. 4. Test Data(Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total exhaust airflow rate in cfm. b. Purge exhaust airflow rate in cfm. c. Outside airflow rate in cfm. d. Total exhaust fan static pressure in inches wg. e. Total outside-air fan static pressure in inches wg. f. Pressure drop on each side of recovery wheel in inches wg. g. Exhaust air temperature entering in deg F. h. Exhaust air temperature leaving in deg F. i. Outside-air temperature entering in deg F. j. Outside-air temperature leaving in deg F. k. Calculate sensible and total heat capacity of each airstream in MBh. U. Vibration Measurement Reports: 1. Date and time of test. 2. Vibration meter manufacturer, model number,and serial number. 3. Equipment designation, location, equipment, speed, motor speed, and motor horsepower. 4. Diagram of equipment showing the vibration measurement locations. 5. Measurement readings for each measurement location. 6. Calculate isolator efficiency using measurements taken. 7. Description of predominant vibration source. V. Sound Measurement Reports: Record sound measurements on octave band and dBA test forms and on an NC or RC chart indicating the decibel level measured in each frequency band for both "background"and "HVAC system operating"readings. Record each tested location on a separate NC or RC chart. Record the following on the forms: 1. Date and time of test. Record each tested location on its own NC curve. 2. Sound meter manufacturer,model number,and serial number. 3. Space location within the building including floor level and room number. 4. Diagram or color photograph of the space showing the measurement location. 6129-08 15950-36 1/24/03 �, I RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 5. Time weighting of measurements,either fast or slow. 6. Description of the measured sound: steady,transient,or tonal. 7. Description of predominant sound source. W. Indoor-Air Quality Measurement Reports for Each HVAC System: 1. HVAC system designation. 2. Date and time of test. 3. Outdoor temperature,relative humidity,wind speed,and wind direction at start of test. 4. Room number or similar description for each location. 5. Measurements at each location. 6. Observed deficiencies. X. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 3.37 INSPECTIONS A. Initial Inspection: 1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the Final Report. 2. Randomly check the following for each system: a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to the set point. d. Measure sound levels at two locations. e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations. f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report. B. Final Inspection: 1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by[Owner] [Architect]. 2. • TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of [Owner] [Architect]. 3. [Owner] [Architect] shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day. 6129-08 15950-37 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15950 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING 4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." 5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. 6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report. 7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in • accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the final payment. 3.38 ADDITIONAL TESTS • A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. ;;s B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions. END OF SECTION 15950 6129-08 15950-38 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15960 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Variable Frequency Drive(VFD). 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16195-Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA ICS 3.1 -Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of Variable Frequency Drive Systems. B. NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum). C. UL,and cUL Approved D. IEEE Standard 444(ANSI-C343) E. IEEE Standard 519 F. I EC: 146A G. UL 508C(Power Conversion) H. CSA 22.2 No.14-95(Industrial Control Equipment) I. UL 1995(Plenum rating) J. EN 50178(LVD) K. EN 61800-3 L. IEC 529 M. FCC CFR 47 Part 15 Subpart B 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340. B. Shop Drawings shall include: Wiring diagrams, electrical schematics, front and side views of enclosures, overall dimensions, conduit entrance locations and requirements, nameplate legends,physical layout and enclosure details. C. Product Data: Provide data sheets showing; voltage, ratings of customer use switching and over-current protective devices,short circuit ratings,and weights. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions and Technical Manuals: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of adjustable speed drive. Document the sequence of operation, cautions and warnings, trouble shooting procedures, spare parts lists and programming guidance. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. VFD shall have a minimum MTBF (mean time between failure) rating of 28 years (245,280 Hours). 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. , B. Include instructions for starting and operating VFD, and describe operating limits, which may 6129-08 15960- 1 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15960 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES result in hazardous or unsafe conditions. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS -' A. Manufacturer must have a minimum of 25 years of documented experience, specializing in variable frequency drives. 1.8 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver,store, protect and handle products to site,under provisions of Section 01610. B. Accept VFD on site in original packing. Inspect for damage. C. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping, or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover, to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. D. Handle carefully, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, to avoid damage to components,enclosure,and finish. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide VFD warranty, for one year from date of startup, not to exceed 18 months from date of shipment.Warranty shall include parts,and labor allowance for repair hours. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. VFD shall be manufactured by Yaskawa Electric Model E7 w/mechanical bypass B. Allen Bradley w/mechanical bypass C. Square D w/mechanical bypass D. Drives and motors shall be by the same manufacturer.Motors should be inverter duty rated,per NEMA MG1 parts 30 and 31,for motor-drive compatibility. 22 DESCRIPTION A. Provide enclosed variable frequency drives suitable for operation at the current, voltage,and horsepower indicated on the schedule.Conform to requirements of NEMA ICS 3.1. 2.3 RATINGS A. VFD must operate, without fault or failure, when voltage varies plus 10% or minus 15% from rating,and frequency varies plus or minus 5%from rating. B. VFD shall be 208 volts,60 Hz,3 Phase C. Displacement Power Factor: 0.98 over entire range of operating speed and load. D. Operating Ambient Temperature: -10 degrees C to 40 degrees C (14 degrees F to 104 degrees F) E. Humidity: 0%to 95%non-condensing. F. Altitude: to 3,300 feet, higher altitudes achieved by derating. G. Minimum Efficiency: 96%at half speed;98%at full speed. H. Starting Torque: 100%starting torque shall be available from 0.5 Hz.to 60 Hz. I. Overload capability: 110% of rated FLA(Full Load Amps)for 60 seconds; 150% of rated FLA, instantaneously. 6129-08 15960-2 1/24/03 � I RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON • SECTION 15960 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES J. The VFD must meet the requirements for Radio Frequency Interference(RFI)above 7 MHz as specified by FCC regulations,part 15,subpart J,Class A devices. K. Total Harmonic Distortion(THD)compliance: Given the information provided by the customer's electric power single line diagram and distribution transformer data,the VFD manufacturer shall carry out an analysis of the system. The analysis reviews the potential for the proposed equipment,and any existing equipment,to meet IEEE 519(tables 10.2 and 10.3)recommendations at the Point of Common Coupling (PCC).The result of the analysis shall determine if additional power quality improvement measures should be included in the proposal to meet the THD recommendations of IEEE 519. The PCC shall be at the primary side of the main distribution transformer. L. VFDs must have a minimum short circuit rating of 65K amps RMS(100K amps RMS with a DC bus reactor)without additional input fusing. 2.4 DESIGN A. VFD shall employ microprocessor based inverter logic,isolated from all power circuits. B. VFD shall include surface mount technology with protective coating. C. VFD shall employ a PWM(Pulse Width Modulated)power electronic system,consisting of: 1. Input Section: a. VFD input power stage shall convert three-phase AC line power into a fixed DC voltage via a solid state full wave diode rectifier,with MOV(Metal Oxide Varistor)surge protection. 2. Intermediate Section: a. DC bus as a supply to the VFD output Section shall maintain a fixed voltage with filtering and short circuit protection. b. DC bus shall be interfaced with the VFD diagnostic logic circuit,for continuous monitoring and protection of the power components. c. 25 HP to 150 HP @ 208 VAC,30 HP to 150 HP @ 240 VAC,and 40 HP to 500 HP 480 VAC,VFDs shall include a 3%DC bus reactor to minimize reflected harmonics. 3. Output Section a. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors(IGBTs)shall convert DC bus voltage to variable frequency and voltage. b. The VFD shall employ PWM sine coded output technology to power the motor. D. The VFD must be selected for operation at carrier frequencies at or above 5 kHz without derating to satisfy the conditions for current,voltage,and horsepower as indicated on the equipment schedule. Exception to this requirement is allowed only for VFDs providing 506 amps or more. E. VFD shall have an adjustable carrier frequency:The carrier frequency shall have a minimum of six settings to allow adjustment in the field. F. VFD shall have embedded Building Automation System(BAS)protocols for network communications;Johnson Metasys N2,Siemens System 600 APOGEE,and Modbus/Memobus.These protocols shall be accessible via an RS-422/485 communication port. G. VFD shall have a quick disconnect,removable control I/O terminal block to simplify control wiring procedures. H. VFD shall include two independent analog inputs.One shall be 0-10 VDC. The other shall be programmable for either 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA.Either input shall respond to a programmable bias and gain. I. VFD shall include a minimum of seven multi-function digital input terminals,capable of being programmed to determine the function on a change of state. These terminals shall provide up to 30 functions, including,but not limited to: 6129-08 15960-3 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15960 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 1. Remote/Local operation selection 2. Detection of external fault condition 3. Remote Reset 4. Multi-step speed commands - 5. Run permissive 6. Floating control J. VFD shall include two 0-10 VDC analog output for monitoring,or"speed tracking"the VFD.The analog output signal will be proportional to output frequency, output current, output power, PID (Proportional, Integral, Derivative control)feedback or DC bus voltage. K. VFD shall provide terminals for remote input contact closure, to allow starting in the automatic mode. L. VFD shall include at least one external fault input, which shall be programmable for a normally open or normally dosed contact. These terminals can be used for connection of firestats, freezestats,high pressure limits or similar safety devices. M. VFD shall include two form"A"contacts and one form"C"contact,capable of being programmed to determine conditions that must be met in order for them to change state. These output relay contacts shall be rated for at least 1A at 250 VAC and shall provide up to 18 functions,including, but not limited to: 1. Speed agree detection. 2. Low and high frequency detection. 3. Missing frequency reference detection. 4. Overtorque/Undertorque detection 5. Drive Running 6. Drive Faulted N. VFD shall include a power loss ride through of 2 seconds. O. VFD shall have DC injection braking capability,to prevent fan`wind milling"at start or stop, adjustable,current limited. P. VFD shall have a motor preheat function to prevent moisture accumulation in an idle motor. Q. VFD shall have a digital operator with program copy and storage functions to simplify set up of multiple drives.The digital operator shall be interchangeable for all drive ratings. R. VFD shall include a front mounted,sealed keypad operator,with an English language(or one of 6 additional international languages)illuminated LCD display.The operator will provide complete programming,program copying;operating,monitoring,and diagnostic capability. Keys provided shall include industry standard commands for Hand,Off,and Auto functions. S. VFD plain language display shall provide readouts of;output frequency in hertz,PID feedback in percent,output voltage in volts,output current in amps,output power in kilowatts,D.C.bus voltage in volts,interface terminal status,and fault codes.All displays shall be viewed in an easy-to-read illuminated LCD with International language selectability. T. VFD unit shall include the following meters to estimate use of energy: 1. Elapsed Time Meter 2. Kilowatt Meter 3. IGlowatt Hour Meter U. VFD shall include PI control logic,to provide closed loop setpoint control capability,from a feedback signal,eliminating the need for closed loop output signals from a building automation system.The PI controller shall have a differential feedback capability for closed loop control of fans and pumps for pressure,flow or temperature regulation in response to dual feedback signals. V. An energy saving sleep function shall be available in both open loop(follower mode)and dosed loop(PI)control,providing significant energy savings while minimizing operating hours on driven 6129-08 15960-4 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15960 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES equipment.When the sleep function senses a minimal deviation of a feedback signal from setpoint,or low demand in open loop control,the system reacts by stopping the driven equipment. Upon receiving an increase in speed command signal deviation,the drive and equipment resume normal operation. W. VFD shall include loss of input signal protection,with a selectable response strategy including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed. X. VFD shall include electronic thermal overload protection for both the drive and motor.The electronic thermal motor overload shall be approved by UL. If the electronic thermal motor overload is not approved by UL,a separate UL approved thermal overload relay shall be provided in the VFD enclosure. Y. VFD shall include the following program functions: 1. Critical frequency rejection capability: 3 selectable,adjustable deadbands. 2. Auto restart capability: 0 to 10 attempts with adjustable delay between attempts. 3. Ability to close fault contact after the completion of all fault restart attempts. 4. Stall prevention capability. 5. "S"curve soft start capability. 6. Bi-directional"Speed search"capability,in order to start a rotating load. 7. 14 preset and 1 custom volts per hertz pattern. 8. Heatsink over temperature speed fold back capability 9. Terminal status indication. 10. Program copy and storage in a removable digital operator. 11. Current limit adjustment capability,from 30%to 200%of rated full load current of the VFD. 12. Motor pre-heat capability . s 13. Input signal or serial communication loss detection and response strategy. 14. Anti"wind-milling"function capability. 15. Automatic energy saving function. 16. Undertorque/Overtorque Detection. Z. VFD shall include factory settings for all parameters,and the capability for those settings to be reset. AA.VFD shall include the capability to adjust the following functions,while the VFD is running: 1. Speed command input. 2. Acceleration adjustment from 0 to 6000 seconds. 3. Deceleration adjustment from 0 to 6000 seconds. 4. Select from 5 preset speeds. 5. Analog monitor display. 6. Removal of digital operator. 2.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Manual Bypass shall be provided. VFD and bypass components shall be mounted inside a common NEMA 1 enclosure, fully pre-wired, and ready for installation as a single UL listed device. Bypass shall include the following: 1. Input,output,and bypass contactors,to disconnect power to the VFD,when the motor is running in the bypass mode. 2. 115 VAC control transformer,with fused primary. 3. Thermal overload relay,to protect the motor while operating in the bypass mode. 4. Circuit breaker/disconnect switch,with a pad-lockable through-the-door handle mechanism. 5. Control and safety circuit terminal strip. 6129-08 15960-5 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15960 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 6. Drive/Bypass selector switch,Hand/Off/Auto selector switch, Normal/Test selector switch 7. Switch selectable smoke purge,auto transfer to bypass and remote transfer functions. 8. Pilot lights(22 mm)for"Control Power","Drive Fault","Drive Run","Bypass Run","OUSafety Fault"and"Smoke Purge". 9. Normal/Test selector switch,shall allow testing and adjustment of the VFD,while the motor is running in the bypass mode. 10. Damper control circuit shall be provided. 11. Hand/Off/Auto selector switch shall provide the following operation: • Hand Position-The drive is given a start command,operation is via the local speed input(digital operator or speed pot).If in bypass mode,the motor is running. • Off Position-The start command is removed,all speed inputs are ignored,power is still applied to the drive. If in bypass mode,the motor is stopped. • Auto Position-The drive is enabled to receive a start command and speed input from a building automation system.If in bypass mode,the motor start/stop is controlled by the building automation system 12. Annunciation contacts for drive run,drive fault,bypass run and motor OUsafety fault. B. Soft start on transfer to bypass shall be provided. C. Enclosure: 1. NEMA 1 extended enclosure,to house additional equipment within the VFD enclosure for VFDs not requiring Bypass. 2. NEMA 12 FVFF(Forced Ventilation inlet Filter and outlet Filter)enclosures with filters and blower. 3. NEMA 3R enclosures for outdoor installations. NEMA 4 enclosures for indoor`Wash down"installations D. Current limiting input fusing for short circuit protection of VFD semiconductor devices shall be provided. E. Pressure transducer(3 to 15 PSI input=0 to 10 V DC output),to convert a pneumatic signal into an VFD Speed Command Input shall be provided. F. Line reactors shall be provided on the input side of the drive for harmonic suppression. G. Output reactors shall be provided on the output side of the dive for motor protection in long motor lead length situations. H. DC bus reactor,to attenuate harmonic distortion shall be provided on:20 HP and below @ 208 VAC, 25 HP and below @ 240 VAC,and 30 HP and below @ 480 VAC. I. 12-Pulse phase shifting transformer shall be provided on: 25 HP to 150 HP @ 208 VAC,30 HP to 150 HP @ 240 VAC,and 40 HP to 500 HP @ 480 VAC models to minimize THD generated by the VFD. J. V/I(voltage to current)output converter module(0-10 VDC to 4-20 mA),shall be provided to make available two additional analog current outputs. K. Multiple motor operation;Two motor"OR"control; Multiple motor"AND"control shall be provided. 1. Two motor"OR"control allows local or remote motor operation selection between two individual motors(pump#1 "OR"auto"OR"pump#2). 2. Multiple motor"AND"control allows the operation of several motors from one drive(pump#1, pump#2,"AND"pump#3 are operated at the same speed via the output from one drive). L. Serial communication gateway for Echelon LonWorks shall be provided via an isolated RS-422/485 circuit board with the following features: 1. Command and monitor in excess of 64 points. 2. Ability to integrate into BYPASS configuration without losing end switch and/or safety interlock functionality. 6129-08 15960-6 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON ` SECTION 15960 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 3. Serial communication board self test. 4. Drive parameter storage within communication board. 5. Drive parameter download capability. 6. Drive parameter comparison feature. 7. 5 Indication LEDs to indicate power,reception,transmission,fault,and service of serial communications(Power,Rxd,Txd,Fault,Service). 8. Polarity insensitive. 9. Alternate network connection through RJ-4J plug(phone-jack). M. PC software and cable for parameter upload/download shall be provided. 2.6 FABRICATION A. All standard and optional features shall be included in a single NEMA 1,plenum rated enclosure with a UL certification label. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL i A. In-circuit testing of all printed circuit boards shall be conducted,to insure the proper mounting and correct value of all components. B. All printed circuit boards shall be burned in for 96 hours,at 85 degrees C. C. Final printed circuit board assemblies shall be functionally tested,via computerized test equipment.All tests and acceptance criteria shall be preprogrammed. All test results shall be stored as detailed quality assurance data. D. All fully assembled controls shall be functionally tested,with fully loaded induction motors.The combined test data shall then be analyzed,to insure adherence to quality assurance specifications. E. Inspect and production test,under load,each completed VFD assembly. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surface is suitable for VFD installation. B. Do not install VFD until the building environment can be maintained,within the service conditions required by the manufacturer. 32 INSTALLATION • A. Install VFD where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and NEMA ICS 3. B. Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after placing VFD. C. Provide a nameplate label on each VFD, identifying rated horsepower,full load amperes,model number,service factor and voltage/phase rating. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing to be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES 6129-08 15960-7 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 15960 • VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 01400. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Carry out adjusting work under provisions of Section 01700. Make final adjustments to installed VFD,to assure proper operation of HVAC systems. END OF SECTION 15960 6129-08 15960-8 1/24/03 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Bidding documents including Division 1 General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Published Addenda and related work in other Divisions form an integral part of these Specifications and shall be binding on the Division 16 Contractor for all work performed under Division 16,Electrical. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. The term"provide"shall mean furnish,install and connect equipment and materials complete in operating condition. B. The term "approved"as used herein shall mean the written approval of the Engineer. C. The term "Contractor" as used herein shall mean the organization responsible for accomplishing all work within the contract documents. The plural term"contractors"as used herein shall include all of the trade organizations that comprise the project workforce. D. The term"drawings"as used herein shall mean all contract drawings for all divisions of work. E. NEC means National Electrical Code. F. The term"code"'as used herein shall mean all applicable National,State and local codes. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Electrical work consists of furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory operation all equipment, materials, devices and appurtenances, necessary to provide complete systems according to the intent of the Drawings and Specifications. In general this includes all labor,materials,equipment,tools,etc.to complete the electrical work. B. Electrical requirements are not limited to electrical drawings and specifications_ There is additional electrical work required to be included in the bid, indicated on the architectural, landscape,civil and mechanical drawings. Additional electrical work required in the bid is also located in the specification. Contractor shall review all civil, architectural, structural, mechanical drawings and specifications for additional electrical information. 1.4 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. The Electrical drawings are intended to serve as working drawings for general layout. Equipment, receptacles,tele/data, switches, panels, lights, disconnects and raceways are partially diagrammatic and do not necessarily indicate actual routings or all appurtenances required for a complete installation. B. The drawings and specifications are complementary. What is called for in either is binding as if called for in both. In case of conflict within the drawings,specifications or between drawings and specifications the Architect/Engineer will select the method to be taken. 02059.100 16010-1 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS C. Take all working dimensions, device heights, door swings and the like from architectural drawings and check them against those shown or scaled on the electrical drawings. In the event of conflict, report discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before proceeding with the work. D. Minor changes in the locations of raceways,devices and the like,from those shown on the plans, shall be made without extra charge if so directed by the Architect/Engineer before installation. E. Motor horsepower and apparatus wattages indicated on the plans are estimated requirements of equipment furnished under other Divisions of this contract. Advise the Architect/Engineer in writing of any deviations in actual equipment supplied that affect the electrical installation. 1.5 MANUFACTURERS'RECOMMENDATIONS A. Make all installations in strict accordance with manufacturers'published recommendations and details. All equipment and materials recommended by them shall be considered as part of this contract. 1.6 WORK RELATED TO OTHER DMSIONS A. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION POWER&LIGHTING 1. Arrange with the serving Utility for 120240 Volt or 208Y/120 Volt service adjacent to construction site. 2. Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with setup and removal of the temporary construction service meter. 3. Provide, maintain and remove, when no longer required, temporary electrical construction wiring from the construction service meter to and within the building for the number of lights and receptades required. Wring to construction sheds,outdoor construction machinery,and temporary exterior work areas shall be the responsibility of individual contractors. 4. Provide and maintain construction lighting with portable wiring and temporary energization of the permanent building wiring, complete with lamps. Suitable construction lighting shall be provided in each room where lighting is required for any of the contractors on the job. See NEC ARTICLE 305. Temporary wiring. 5. Contractor is responsible for relamping construction lighting alter the initial lamping. 6. Provide adequate feeders, circuit breakers and duplex 15-ampere 120-volt receptacles at locations as required. Note: 120 volt construction receptacles shall provide Ground Fault circuit protection in accordance with applicable WISHA safety standards. 02059.100 16010-2 12/11/02 RENTON'PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS , 7. Portable power cords from the outlets specified herein shall be the responsibility of individual contractors using the cords. 8. Responsibilities outfined in the Paragraph Temporary Construction Power and Lighting are delineated herein to avoid conflicts between the various contractors. Assume all responsibility for safety,Electrical and Safety Code compliance, performance and adequacy of the construction power and lighting installation. The Architect and Engineer assumes no responsibility for the performance or safety and will not inspect nor design this temporary installation as it is not part of the completed structure. B. MECHANICAL CONTROL WIRING 1. See Division 15. C. EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS 1. All electrical equipment furnished for this project shall be coordinated with the drawings to insure correctness of Voltage,Phase and Ampacity. Equipment served by single circuit or feeder shall be provided with appropriate internal wiring including fusing of multiple circuits as required by code. 2. Contractors supplying equipment that is incompatible with the designed electrical service shall be responsible for arranging and providing necessary changes in their supply wiring to suit the equipment. 3. Verify dimensions of equipment to be furnished by others to insure correct clearances and connections. 4. Control Voltages shall not exceed 120 volts. Provide control transformers for higher line voltages. Control transformers shall be connected from phase to neutral. 1.7 SUPERVISION AND COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with local power and telephone utilities to ensure compliance with their specific requirements. Before starting work,contact both power and telephone utilities and make arrangement for their services to this project B. Contact Electrical Inspection and obtain permit before starting work. C. Maintain adequate supervision of the Division 16 work and have a responsible person in charge at the site any time work is in progress or when necessary for coordination with other trades. D. Schedule work to best serve the interests of the Owner. Lay out work by referring to Architectural.Mechanical and other Contractors to anticipate their movements. Cooperate with the other contractors on the job and coordinate work to avoid interference with them. E. Determine a satisfactory space allocation arrangement where electrical material is installed in proximity to work of other trades. No extra payments will be allowed to relocate work that interferes with that of other trades. 02059.100 16010-3 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 1.8 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. All work shall conform to current applicable National,State and local Codes;these shall be regarded as the minimum standard of quality for material and workmanship. Contractor shall provide all Labor and Material that may be required for compliance with Code Requirements or Code Interpretations, although not specifically detailed on the Drawings or in the Specifications. Contractor shall become familiar with all the following codes prior to bidding. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code — State Electrical Code NESC National Electrical Safety Code NEMA National Electric Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association UL Underwriters Laboratories,Inc. ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Associations CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers — Federal,State and Local Building Codes ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories — Local Electrical Code — Service Policies of the Serving Electrical Utility and Telephone Company B. Nothing in these Drawings and Specifications shall be construed as permitting work not conforming with governing codes. C. The Contractor shall not be relieved from complying with any requirements of these contract documents which may exceed,but not conflict with,requirements of the governing codes. D. Contractor shall include in bid all costs to have a Department of Labor&Industries approved firm to evaluate the installation safety,and compliance with code as required per WAC 296- 40-100 for any equipment specified or furnished that is not UL labeled. 1.9 PERMITS&FEES A. Obtain and pay all fees for licenses,permits and inspections required by laws,ordinances and rules governing work specified herein. Arrange for inspection of work and provide inspectors with all necessary assistance. 1.10 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be done by competent craftsmen skilled in the specific work to be done. Equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner following the best practice of the trade. 1.11 ITEMIZED COST BREAKDOWN A. Furnish the Engineer with an itemized contract cost breakdown to allow evaluation of partial payment requests. The cost breakdown shall categorize major items of the contract such as: 02059.100 16010-4 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS Job organization and setup, conduit system, primary switchgear, transformers, secondary panelgear,service and feeder wiring, branch circuit wiring, lighting fixtures,wiring devices, trim,fire alarm and special systems. 1.12 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Fully instruct the Owner's designated representatives in the operation and maintenance of all components of the electrical system upon completion of the work and after all tests and final inspection(s) by the Authority(s)Having Jurisdiction. B. Provide scheduled instruction as follows: 1. Lighting Control&Distribution System 2 hours _ 2. Fire Alarm System 2 hours All costs for contractor's instruction are to be included in the bid proposal. C. Instructors shall be contractor's superintendents or foreman knowledgeable in each system and equipment suppliers representatives for special systems. 1.13 AS-BUILT RECORD DRAWINGS A. Continuously maintain a set of AS-Built Drawings to indicate all significant deviations from the original design and the actual placement of equipment and underground conduits. (Location of conduit stubouts shall be dimensioned from accepted reference lines). Changes shall be shown with red colored pencil while work is in progress. This"As-Built"set shall I be clearly o9 marked: "AS-BUILT RECORD DRAWINGS-Do Not Remove From Office." B. Final "As-Built" prints shall be prepared by a competent drafter on a clean set of blueline drawings. Date,firm name,and drafter's name shall be inducted with title"CORRECTED AS- BUILT"on each drawing. If there are no changes,drawing shall be marked"NO CHANGES, INSTALLATION PER PLAN." C. "As-Built Record Drawings" and "Corrected to As-Built" prints shall be delivered to the Engineer for transmittal to the Owner. 1.14 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE(O&M)MANUALS A. Prepare four(4)copies of 0&M manuals that contain operating and maintenance information, replacement parts list, shop drawings, wiring diagrams and equipment test data for all equipment and systems installed under this contract. Manuals shall be organized as follows: 1. All information contained in the manuals shall be grouped by specification section categories. Manual shall be provided with a typewritten index identifying divider tabs to facilitate future references. 2. Maintenance Information shall pertain to the exact equipment installed, not to the complete"line"of a manufacturer. Actual installed equipment shall be neatly and clearly identified on catalog sheets that show other equipment as well. All equipment in the 0&M manuals shall be identified in exactly the same manner as used in the contract documents. 02059.100 16010-5 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 3. Parts list shall give original manufacturers ordering information. Parts information that has been relabeled or renumbered by the equipment supplier will not be acceptable. The following information shall be provided as a minimum for each item: a. Manufacturer's name,address and phone number. b. Local supplier's name,address and phone number. c. Complete parts lists including quantities and manufacturers part numbers. d. Installation instructions. e. Maintenance recommendations including maintenance procedure and recommended maintenance intervals listed in hours of operation,calendar ' units or similar time units. 4. Shop drawings and wiring diagrams shall be complete for the specific system installed 1 under the contract. "Typical"drawings and diagrams will not be acceptable unless properly marked to indicate the exact field installation. Equipment control diagrams shall be accompanied by written descriptions to familiarize maintenance personnel with proper equipment operation. Diagnostic"trouble-shooting"information shall be included where applicable. 5. Provide electrical equipment test data, as applicable, for all motors according to Section 16060 - 'Testing." Tabulation shall be in columnar format; equipment designations shall correspond to those used on actual identification nameplates. 6. Each 0&M manual shall be assembled in a loose leaf,3 ring hard cover binder. a. The covers shall have a typewritten adhesive label with the name of the Project, Owner, Electrical Engineer, Division 16 Contractor and year of completion. The back edge shall have a typewritten adhesive label with the e and year of completion. name of the Project,Owner np 7. Submit a preliminary copy, complete except for the bound cover, for review and comments 20 days prior to completion of the project. a. Deliver four(4) complete, approved 0 & M manuals to the Engineer for transmittal to Owner at least 10 days prior to the specified scheduled instruction periods. 1.15 FINAL INSPECTION A. The electrical foreman or superintendent shall accompany the Engineer on the Final Inspection,and on any necessary Post-Final Inspections,to confirm that all work has been satisfactorily completed. B. Defects and deficiencies found during this Final Inspection shall be corrected within 15 days of Contractor's receipt of Engineer's final punch list. 02059.100 16010-6 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 1.16 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. These items are a prerequisite for final acceptance and payment 1_ Four(4) Electrical Equipment operation and Maintenance Manuals which will also include the items listed below. 2. Certificates of Final Inspection a) Electrical Inspector b) Fire Department 3. Guarantee to Owner 4. Motor test data S. As-Built record drawings including"field"and clean sets. B. Satisfactory Final Inspection and Transmittal of these items to the Engineer will indicate that the Contractor has fulfilled all the requirements of the project documents and that final retainage can be released. 1.17 GUARANTEE A. The Division 16 Contractor shall provide written guarantee to repair or replace (without additional expense)any defective materials or workmanship which become evident within a period of one(1)year after final acceptance or for such longer period as elsewhere specified. All warranty work shall be to the satisfaction of the Owner. B. Any material guaranteed by a specific manufacturer for a period in excess of one year shall be specifically noted on the Owner's written guarantee. C. The Division 16 Contractor will not be expected to perform normal maintenance, such as replacement of incandescent lamps,etc.,60 days beyond date of Beneficial Occupancy by Owner or Final Acceptance,whichever date is earlier. END OF SECTION 16010 02059.100 16010-7 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS &METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. General requirements for materials and installation methods. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials shall be new, free from defects, of the quality specified herein and on the drawings. Materials shall be designed to insure satisfactory operation and rated fife in the prevailing environmental conditions where they are being installed. They shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories or a recognized testing laboratory for use under 1he a conditions. B. Each type of material shall be of the same make and quality throughout the job. The materials furnished shall be the latest standard design products of manufacturers regularly engaged in their production. 2.2 TECHNICAL DATA A. Technical information contained herein relies entirely on tests and ratings provided by manufacturers who are solely responsible for their accuracy. The Engineer, by use of this information in no way implies the results of published manufacturer's information has been verified. 2.3 AS SPECIFIED EQUIPMENT A. This specification generally lists only one make and model number for each item of equipment or material required for the project. This is not intended to be restrictive tut is intended to indicate the standard of quality, design and features required. In addition, the listed product is the basis of the design regarding physical size, electrical power -requirements and'performance. The product so idenVfled is designated"as specified." 2.4 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. Listing of approved materials is not intended to prevent acceptance of other mateiiEds provided the substitute products are submitted for approval and have been approved in accordance with the Substitution of Materials requirements. B. Approval Prior to Installation 1. All substitution requests shall be made on the substitution request form. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for a substitute item suiting the space limitations shown and for any additional installation costs incurred by the substitution. 02059.100 16050-1 12/11/02 ..1 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 3. Approval of substitute materials shall not be construed as authorizing any deviation from the contract drawings and specifications except where such deviation is clearly described in writing on the substitution request form and is approved in wining by the Engineer. 4. Requests shall clearly define and describe the proposed substitute product. Such requests shall be accompanied by samples, record of performance, certified test reports and such additional information as the Engineer may require to satisfactorily evaluate the substitute product(s). C. Approval Prior to Bid Opening• 1. Bidders or vendors may submit prior approval requests for substitute materials that are similar in appearance, quality and performance to those specified herein or on the drawings. 2. All requests shall be made in writing at least ten (10) days prior to date of bid opening using the substitution request form. Telephone requests and written requests for approval received in the engineer's office less than ten (10) days prior to bid opening will not be accepted. 3. Approved substitute materials will normally be included in addenda published prior to bid opening. D. Approval After Contract Award: Substitute products will be considered after contract award only under these conditions: 1. Non-Availability of Specified Materials: The Contractor shall have placed orders for specified materials within ten days after notice to proceed and received written confirmation of non-availability from the supplier(s). The mason of non- availability shall be beyond the contractor's control such as: discontinuation of manufacture, strikes and acts of God. 2. Contract Price Adjustments: The Contractor may submit substitution requests --- for Owner cost savings. All substitute request forms submitted after award of contract shall clearly indicate the proposed contract price change or the request will not be considered. 3. Where Permitted in the Specifications: For items where "approval prior to bidding" is not required in these specifications. It shall be the contractors' responsibility to show that a substitute item is equal or superior in performance and quality to the specified item. E. No Substitute: 1. It is the intent of this specification to require specific materials to be compatible with the existing installation. Certain materials and systems, consequently, are indicated "No Substitute" and shall be provided as specified. 02059.1 00 16050-2 12/11/02 it RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS &METHODS 2.5 COMPLETE SYSTEMS A. All systems specified herein and shown on the drawings shall be complete and operational in every detail. Mention of certain materials in bidding documents shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor from furnishing such additional materials and performing all labor required tol provide a complete and operable system. 2.6 SUBMITTALS A. Purpose of Submittals 1. Submittals processed by the Engineer are not change orders. The Contractor, by the submittal process, demonstrates an understanding of the design concept by indicating equipment and materials intended to be provided and fabrication/installation methods intended to be utilized to meet all requirements of the contract documents. 2. The Engineer's review is for general conformance with the design concept and the contract documents. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the contract documents. B. General Requirements: The Contractor shall provide five (5) submittal brochures as follows: 1. Material Lists and Catalog Data: Submit, within 10 days after contract award, complete lists of materials, marked catalog sheets, dimensions and other information necessary to properly identify each item. Submittals shall include the most significant materials for each section of these Division 16 specifications. 2. Shop Drawings: Submit, within 20 days after contract award, shop drawings for equipment and materials unique to this installation. C. Submittal items: Submittals shall include, but not be limited to the following items: Raceways Switchboards Panels Meter Centers Lighting Fixtures Fire alarm Wiring Devices Disconnects Fused Disconnects Fuses Lighting Controls Nameplates Time Switch Pre-cast Concrete Vaults/Covers Items Requested by Engineer D. Submittal Format 1. A transmittal letter with reference identification (i.e., Electrical Submittal No. 1, material lists and catalog data, etc.) shall accompany all submittals. 02059.100 16050-3 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 2. Submittal brochures shall be separately bound in ACCO fastened or 3-ring type binders appropriate for the quantity of submittal items. Provide typewritten adhesive identification labels on each cover that include Project Name, Electrical Submittal Reference and Contractor's Name. 3. All information contained in the brochures shall be grouped by specification sections. Provide a typewritten index and identifying divider tabs for all project submittal items to facilitate future reference. E. Submittal Completeness 1. The Contractor shall make every effort to ensure the completeness of the initial submittal. Availability of certain shop drawings and catalog materials, however, may prevent this. Submittal shall not be delayed past specified time periods to await delivery of the missing items. The Contractor, instead, shall identify missing items on the transmittal letter and provide index listings and divider tabs for later insertion of these materials into the completed submittal brochure. F. Engineer's Selection of Materials for Installation: The Engineer may select specified items that the Contractor shall provide, without change in contract price or time of completeness, under these circumstances: 1. Late and/or Unqualified Partial Submittals: Submittals must be made within the specified time periods; all partial submittals shall 'indicate manufacturer(s) catalog numbers, pertinent technical information and status of missing items. 2. Failure to follow Re-submittal Procedures: Contractor, within 14 days after the Engineer rejects any items, shall re-submit new materials for approval. 3. Materials have been submitted and rejected twice by the Engineer. G. Contractor's Responsibilities: The Contractor is responsible for all submittal details, accuracy of quantities and dimensions, selection of fabrication processes and techniques of assembly. 1. The Contractor shall furnish equipment/material suppliers with all Drawings and Specifications pertinent to their work. 2. The Contractor shall review, stamp and sign all submittals and shop drawings, prior to submitting shop drawings to the Engineer for review. Contractor shall correct them to insure compliance with the specifications and drawings. Obtain Engineer's written approval before manufacture is started on any special equipment. • 3. Deviation from Shop Drawings in fabrication and/or installation of equipment is not permitted unless proposed changes are clearly noted in writing by the Contractor and approved in writing by the Architect/Engineer at the time of submittal. . 02059.100 16050-4 12/11/0 2 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON. SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 4. Maintain at least one complete approved submittal brochure on the jobsite for reference during construction. 2.7 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. General: These items shall be provided with nameplates: 1. All motors, motor starters, pushbutton stations, control panels and time switches. 2. Disconnect switches, switchboards, panelboards, time clocks, low voltage control panels and circuit breakers, contactors, and relays in separate enclosures. 3. Wall switches controlling receptacles, lighting faures or equipment where the receptacles are not located within sight of the controlling switch. 4. Special systems shall be properly identified at outlets, junction and pull boxes, terminal cabinets and equipment racks. B. Nameplate Inscription 1. All nameplates shall adequately describe the function or operation of the identified equipment as required. 2. Panelboanl and Switchgear nameplates shall include equipment designation, voltage and phase of supply, i.e., Panel A, 208/120V, 3 phase, 4 wire. 3. Nameplate designations shall be consistent for all components of a particular piece of equipment, such as starter, disconnect switch, Push Button control station(s) and the like. 4. Contractor shall submit a complete list of nameplates for approval. • C. Nameplate Construction 1. Nameplates shall be laminated phenolic plastic with minimum 3/16" high black engraved characters on white background (alternate background colors shall be provided as noted in the specifications or drawings for special applications). 2. Nameplates shall be securely fastened to the equipment with No. 4 round-head phillips, cadmium plated steel, self-tapping screws. Contact cement adhesive only is not acceptable. 3. Motor nameplates may be non-ferrous die-stamped metal, minimum 0.03 inch thick, in lieu of separate phenolic nameplate. Device plates may be identified by engraving directly on the plate. All engraved or stamped lettering shall be filled with contrasting enamel. 02059.100 16050-5 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect all work, wire, cable, materials and equipment installed under this division against damage by other trades, weather conditions or any other causes. Equipment found damaged or in other than new condition wilt be rejected as defective. B. Switchgear, panels, light figures and electrical equipment shall be kept covered or enclosed to exclude moisture, dust, dirt, plaster, cement, or paint and shall be free of all such contamination before acceptance. Enclosures and trims shall be in new condition, free of rust, scratches or other finish defects. Properly refinish in a manner acceptable to the Engineer if damaged. C. Keep conduit and raceways closed with suitable plugs or caps during construction to prevent entrance of dirt, moisture, concrete or foreign objects. Raceways shall be clean and dry before installation of wire and at the time of acceptance. D. Make up and insulate wiring promptly after installation of conductors. Wire shall not be pulled-in until raceways are complete, all bushings are installed, and raceway terminations are completed. Wire shall not be pulled into conduit embedded in concrete until after the concrete is placed and forms are removed. 3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Obtain permission from the Architect/Engineer prior to cutting. Locate cuttings so they will not weaken structural components. Cut carefully and only the minimum amount necessary. Cut concrete with diamond core drills or saws except where space limitations prevent the use of such equipment. B. Penetrations of fire rated elements shall be carefully made to maintain that rating after the installation is complete. C. All construction materials damaged or cut into during the installation of Division 16 work must be repaired or replaced with materials of like kind and quality as original materials by skilled labor experienced in that particular building trade. 3.3 EXCAVATIONS A. The contractor shall be fully responsible for the location and protection of all eAsting utilities. The contractor shall verify all utility locations prior to construction by calling the underground locate line at 1-800-424-5555 a minimum of 48 hours prior to any excavation. The contractor will also be responsible for maintaining all locate marks once the utilities have been located. B. All excavations are to be so conducted that no walls or footings shall be disturbed or injured in any way. C. Remove all surplus earth not needed for backfilling and dispose of same as appropriate at a licensed disposal facility. 02059.100 16050.6 12/11/02 { RENTON PAVILION RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 3-.4 PAINTING A. Painting in general will be covered under another Division of this specification. Items firmished under'this-DVision That are scratched or manned in Shipment or installation are to be refinished by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.5 CLEAN UP A. Contractor shall continuallyremove. debris, cuttings, crates, cartons, etc., created by his work. Such dean up Shell-be done at suificierit frequency to minimum"hazard"To the public, other workmen, the building and the Owner's employees. Before acceptance of the installation, Contractor shall carefully clean cabinets, panels, wiring devices, coverplates, etc., to remove dirt, cuttings, paint, piaster, mortar, concrete, etc. Blemishes to finished surfaces or apparatus shall be removed and new finish equal to the original applies. 'LABEL1SIG" A. Clearly and properly label the complete electrical system, as specified herein, to indicate the loads served or the function of each item of equipment connected under this contract B. Control circuits shall utilize combinations of colors with each conductor identified throughout using wrap around numbers or letters. Identification shall be consistent with the contract drawing requirements and operation and maintenance shop drawings. } 3.7- 'MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete electrical connections for all Items of equipment, including incidental s.and'tabor necessary for a llri"rshed wonting.in 1tation. winrrg, materials, device ry B. Mechanical/Electrical equipment connection coordination shall be as follows: 02059.100 16050-7 12/11/02 I -RENTON PAVILION 7 RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS&METHODS FURNISHED INSTALLED POWER CONTROL ITEM BY BY WIRING BY WIRING BY Mechanical Equipment ' Motors MC MC EC — Fused &Unfused Disconnect Switches, Thermal Overload & Heaters EC EC EC — ', a:s7 Motor Starter& Overload Heaters MC EC EC MC Manual Operating & Speed Switches MC EC EC EC Control Relays & Control Transformers MC MC EC MC , Low Voltage Thermostats MC MC EC MC Line Voltage Thermostats Specified In Division 16 EC EC EC EC Temperature Control Panels MC MC EC MC DDC Panels MC MC EC MC Motor&Solenoid 1 Valves, Damper Motors, PE &EP Switches MC MC — MC Fire/Smoke Dampers (Actuators) MC MC EC MC/EC* , Duct-Mounted Smoke MCC, Detectors EC/MC** MC — MC = Division 15 EC = Division 16 * Motor interlock by MC, Fire Alarm System Interconnection by EC. **When there is no budding fire alarm system present in the project. I-r 02059.100 16050-8 12/11/02 RENTONP`AVIUON RENTON, WASHINGTON SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 3.8 SUPPORT AND ALIGNMENT A. Each fastening device and support for electrical equipment, fixtures, panels, outlets and cabinets shall be capable of supporting not less than four times the ultimate weight of the objects fastened to.or suspended from the building structure. 3. *Install panels, cabinets and equipment level, plumb, and parallel With structural building lines. Switchgear, panels and all electrical enclosures shall fit neatly without gaps, openings or distortion. Properly and neatly dose all unused openings with approved devices. C. Fit surface panels, devices and receptacles with neat, appropriate trims, plates or covers, (without over-hanging edges, protruding corners or raw edges) to leave a finished appearance. D. All junction boxes, pull boors or other conduct*terminating 'housings located above a suspended ceiling shall be securely suspended from structure or ceiling grid system to prevent sagging or swaying. 3.9 -NOISE CONTROL A. Back-to-back or straight-through installation of wall or partition boxes is not permitted to minir ize noise transmission between occupied spaces. B. Contactors, transformers, starters and similar noise producing devices shall not be placed on walls which are common to occupied spaces. Where such devices must be mounted on walls common to occupied spaces, they shall be shock mounted or isolated in such a manner as to effectively prevent the transmission of their inherent noise to the occupied space. C. Ballasts, contactors, starters, transformers and like equipment which are found to be noticeably noisier than other similar equipment on the project will be deemed defective and shall be replaced. END OF SECTION 16050 02059.100 16050-9 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16052 EXISTING SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL A. The existing electrical service panels,contactors,time docks,enclosures,etc currently serving the park lights,receptacles,fountains,etc shall be relocated to position shown on the electrical drawings. Contractor shall provide new conduit,wire,and vaults to extend existing circuits to new location. All park equipment shall be completely operational at completion of job. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 EXISTING MATERIALS A. All materials which are part of the building shall remain the property of the Owner. 2.2 EXISTING MATERIALS REINSTALLED e. A. Existingmaterials and equipment that are removed as a part of the work may be reinstalled where noted on the drawings as part of the'new system subject to approval by the Architect/Engineer. The requirements of the specifications (i.e. installation,warranty, testing,etc.)shall apply as if the materials were new,supplied by the Contractor. 2.3 EXISTING MATERIALS NOT TO BE REINSTALLED A. In coordination with the Architect/Engineer, these materials shall be made available for inspection and decision as to whether the Owner will retain possession. Items selected for retention shall be delivered to a location on the premises selected by the Owner and turned over to.Take reasonable care to avoid damage to this material. If the Contractor fails to conform to this requirement,contractor shall purchase and turn over to the Owner replacement materials of like kind and quality. B. All material not selected for retention by the Owner and debris shall be disposed of by the Contractor. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Examine the structure, building, and conditions under which Division 16 work is to be installed for conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until deficiencies encountered in installation have been corrected. Report any delay or difficulties encountered in installation of Division 16 work which might be unsuitable to connect with work by other Divisions in this specification. Failure to • report conditions shall constitute acceptance of other work as being fit and proper for the installation of Division 16 work. 02059.100 16052-1 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16052 EXISTING SYSTEMS 3.2 DEMOLITION A. Switchboards, panelboards, signaling systems, other electrical equipment free standing (or surface mounted), raceway(exposed) and conductors no longer of service as a result of this contract shall be removed. Unused raceways or sleeves shall be cut flush at ceiling,floor or wall and filled with grout. 3.3 NEW DEVICES IN REMODELED AREAS A. Where existing boxes are indicated to be reused, extend box as necessary and provide new devices and plates. END OF SECTION 16052 02059.100 16052-2 12/11/02 � \I RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16060 TESTING 'PART I-GENERAL i G i s 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. -Perform tests of-the electrical system to assure code compliance and proper system operation according to the intent of the contract documents. Retain the services of approved testing agency(s)to comply with the requirements of this section. B. Applicable Codes,Standards&References for Tests: All inspections and tests shall be in accordance with the following applicable codes and standards except as provided otherwise herein. 1. National Electrical Code-NEC G 2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association-NEMA -3; American Society forTesting and-Materials-ASTM 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers-IEEE 5. National Electrical Testing Association-NETA 6. American National Standards Institute-ANSI 7. -State and-Local-Codes andOrdinances 8. Insulated Cable Engineers Associate-ICEA 9. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies-AEIC 12 CIRCUIT TESTS A. The Contractor shall perform routine insulation resistance, continuity and grounding tests for all distribution and utilization equipment prior to their connection and energization. A standard megger-type instrument shall be used to demonstrate that insulation values are acceptable, ground system is continuous and the neutral system is isolated from the grounding system except at the systems'single ground point B. System defects, indicated by the circuit tests,shall be corrected. Tests shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. 1:3 GROUNDING 1 ES A. Measure the ohmic value of the Electrical Service Entrance "System Ground" with reference'to-"Earth Ground"using multiple terminal,fail of potential methods and salable test instruments. 02059.100 16060-1 12111/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16060 • TESTING B. Maximum resistance to ground shall be less than 10 ohms unless lower values are specified in the contract documents. Notify the Architect/Engineer if this resistance value is not obtained for the initially installed system; and then provide corrective measures as required to reduce ground resistance to less than 10 ohms. 1.4 MOTOR AND EQUIPMENT TESTS A. Verify proper rotation of all motors before placing into service. B. Measure and record electrical data for each motor installed under this contract. Data shall include these items: 1. Motor description 2: Controller description 3. Motor nameplate amperes 4. ActuaT measured motor.running amperes 5. Overload heater manufacturer and catalog numbers 6. Overload heater ampere range 7. Voltage(measured)and phase C. Motor controller overload heaters shall be sized to the actual motor nameplate full load current;do not oversize overload heaters. 1'.5-PHASE-BALANCE TESTS A. Verify the balance of the electrical system's phase currents. Reassign load connections if necessary to obtain a balance that is acceptable to the Engineer. 1.6 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEMS TEST A. -Visual and Meclianicalihspection 1. Inspect neutral main bonding connection to assure: a. Zero sequence is grounded upstream of sensor. - - b. Ground connection is made ahead of neutral disconnect link. 2. Inspect control power transformer to insure adequate capacity for system. 02059.100 16060-2 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16060 • TESTING 3. Monitor panels(if present)shall be manually operated for. a. Trip test b. No trip test c. Non-automatic reset _ Proper operation and-sequence shalt recorded: 4. Zero sequence systems shall be inspected for symmetrical alignment of core balance transformers about all current carrying conductors. 5. Ground fault device circuit nameplate identification shall be verified by device operation. • 6. Pickup and time delay settings shall be set in accordance with Engineer's instructions oras Shown. B. Ground Fault System Electrical Tests T. System neutral*insulation resistant shall be measured'to insure no shunt ground. paths east, neutral-ground disconnect link shall be removed, neutral insulation resistance measured and link replaced. 2. The relay pickup current shall be determined by currerifirijeclion the sensor and the circuit interrupting device operated. 3. The relay timing shall be tested by injecting one hundred fifty percent(150%) and three hundred percent(300 %) of pickup current into sensor. Total trip time shall IC be electrically measured. 4. System operation shall be tested at fifty five percent(55%)rated-voltage. 5. Zone interlock systems shall be tested by simultaneous sensor current injection and monitoring zone blocking function. C. Test Parameters fi. System neutral insulation resistance shall- comply With applicable industry standards. 7. Relay Pickup current shall be wain ten percent (10%) of device dial or foxed setting. 3. Relay timing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published time-current characteristic curves. 02059.100 16060-3 12/11/02 RI34TNN PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16060 TESTING D. Four Ground Fault System Testing, Contractor shall retain the services of a National Electrical Testing Association member firm,or a firm approved by the Engineer. E. Apply label certifying satisfactory test completion in accordance with NETA Labeling Procedure. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND INSTRUMENTATION A. Contractor and/or testing agency shall supply all apparatus and materials required for indicated tests. B. Contractor shall include all costs associated with testing in bid proposal. 22 TEST REPORT(S) A. Furnish four (4) bound copies of test reports, as specified herein, for inclusion into the project operation and maintenance manuals. Each test report shall include the following items: 1". Name,address and telephone number of the testing agency. 2. Name(s)of personnel conducting the tests 3: Type of test 4. Description of test procedure ' 3: Lit of items tested 6. List of actual test equipment including make, model(s), serial number(s) and calibration dates)as applicable. 7. Test results 8. Conclusion and recommendations 9. Append'a,including appropriate test forms B. ' Provide certified test reports for all tests listed above in paragraphs 1.02, 1.03, 1.04, 1.06 and 1.07. 02059.100 16060-4 12/11/02 'RENTON-PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16060 TESTING PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING PROCEDURE A. Submit a copy of test procedure(s)to the Engineer prior to testing. B. All tests shall be conducted according to applicable industry standards. 32- SCHEDULING A. Notify Architect/Engineer and Owner at least five (5)working days prior to performance of anylest 3.3 TRANSMITTAL OF REPORTS A. Transmit test reports to the Architect/Engineer per Section 16010,"FINAL ACCEPTANCE". l END OF SECTION 16060 -if • 02059.100 16060-5 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all raceways for a complete electrical system. Include all fittings, hangers and appurtenances required for a complete installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS A. Galvanized Rigid Steel,thick wall(GRS) B. Intermediate Metal Conduit(IMC) C. Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT) D. Flexible Metal Conduit with and without polyvinyl chloride jacket E. Non-metallic, polyvinyl chloride(PVC),schedule 40 2.2 FITTINGS A. GRS and IMC couplings and connectors shall have threaded connections. Galvanized malleable iron or non-corrosive alloy compatible with galvanized conduit.Running thread or set screw type fittings are not permitted. B. EMT-Couplings and connectors shall be raintight,steel or malleable iron, utilizing a split corrugated compression ring and lightening nut or stainless steel locking disk. Set screw fittings are permitted in dry locations.Set screw fittings are not permitted in wet locations or in concrete. Zinc,pot metal,die cast fittings and indenter fittings are not acceptable. C. Flexible Metal Conduit 1. Dry Locations: malleable iron or steel,Thomas&Betts"Squeeze"type or equal. 2. Damp or Wet Locations: Thomas&Betts"Super Liquid-Tight"with external ground lug. D. PVC Fittings shall be solvent welded types unless otherwise noted. E. Sealoff fittings shall be with filler fiber,poured compound and removable cover. F. Expansion Couplings shall be OZ.type EX with ground jumper. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install raceways concealed in construction of finished spaces. 02059.100 16110-1 12/11/02 { RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS B. Cut conduit ends square,ream smooth and extend maximum distance into all couplings and connectors. C. Provide and install manufactured end caps on all conduit ends during construction to prevent the entrance of water or dirt. Tape,as a cover,is not acceptable. D. Pull a properly sized mandrel through each conduit prior to installation of conductors or pull- lines to remove any materials trapped within the conduit run. E. All PVC elbows shall be factory made. F. Field made elbows are acceptable for steel conduits when made with approved bending tools. Bends that show conduit flattened or deformation are unacceptable and shall be replaced. G. Conduits shall maintain a minimum 12"clearance from any high temperature surface. H. The conduit layout shall be carefully planned by the contractor to ensure neat and workmanlike installation. I. Any work showing inadequate planning may be ordered removed by the Architect/Engineer and shall be replaced in a neat and proper manner at no additional cost to the owner. 32 CONDUIT SIZING A. Conduits shall be sized per code for conductors with type THW insulation, although thinner insulation types are permitted in some cases. Conduit size shall not be reduced if large size is specified on the drawing. Minimum conduit size shall be% trade diameter. Conduit 1A" trade diameter may be used for dead end receptacles and switch runs. • 3.3 GRS AND IMC A. Install GRS or IMC for all conduits in wet locations, concrete, underground, exposed to weather,hazardous locations,where subject to physical damage and as noted on drawings. B. Connections shall be watertight in damp locations. 3.4 EMT A. EMT may be installed for wiring in masonry block,frame construction,furred ceilings,above suspended ceilings and in dry location concrete,exposed dry location unfinished spaces not subject to physical damage. EMT shall not be installed underground,under concrete slabs- on-grade,in concrete slabs-on-grade,exposed to weather,on exterior of buildings or on roofs. B. ' Contractor shall coordinate assembly and installation of EMT in masonry block construction to avoid construction delays. Avoid surface cut masonry units wherever such masonry units are to remain unplastered or exposed. 02059.100 16110-2 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS 3.5 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT A. IProvide flexible conduit connection to motors and equipment subject to vibration with at least a 60 degree loop to allow for isolation and flexibility. Use liquid-tight for pumps, equipment which is regularly washed down, and for equipment in damp locations. Provide bonding jumper as required by N.E.C. 3.6 PVC CONDUIT A. PVC conduit may be used underground when permitted by code and where designated as an acceptable substitute for GRS or IMC on the drawings. Field bends, less than 45 degrees, when necessary,shall be formed with factory recommended heater. PVC bends 45 degrees or greater shall be factory made. 3.7 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY A. Install only in locations shown on the plans or where conduits cannot be concealed in finished - spaces because of existing construction encountered. Install raceways parallel to a building surface, (i.e. wall, ceiling, floor) and fasten to the surface as recommended by the manufacturer. Mount exposed raceway in the least obvious location. 3.8 UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS A. Burial depth of underground raceways shall be not less than NEC minimums and shall be deeper where so noted herein or required to avoid conflicts. ( B. Arrange and slope conduits entering buildings to drain away from the point of entry. C. Conduits passing through the exterior walls below grade and/or bridging areas of naturally unstable soil conditions or previously filled areas shall be placed in a manner to avoid crushing from ground settlement. Backfill under conduit shall be thoroughly compacted. Provide approved deflection fittings on conduits. 3.9 CONDUITS IN FOUNDATION AREA A. Conduits in foundation areas shall be installed so as not to undermine the footings. Check structural drawings for any specific instructions. Backfill over conduits under footings and concrete slabs shall conform to the requirements of the Architect/Structural Engineer. 3.10 STUBUPS THROUGH CONCRETE SLABS A. Conduits through concrete slabs shall be steel. Install at such depth that the exposed conduit is vertical and curved section of the elbow is not visible. 3.11 INSERTS AND SLEEVES A. Furnish and install all inserts and sleeves necessary for Division 16 installation prior to pouring of concrete slabs and walls. 02059.100 16110-3 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS B. In existing concrete slabs and walls utilize drilled-in threaded inserts, installed as recommended by the manufacturer,where additional supports are required. Neatly core drill openings where additional sleeves are required. 3.12 SEALING RACEWAY PENETRATIONS A. Exterior Wall Surface Above Grade For concrete construction above grade,cast raceway or sleeve in wall or core drill wall and hard pack with a mixture of equal parts of sand and cement. Seal around all penetrations, with caulking approved by Architect/ Engineer. B. Exterior Surface Below Grade Cast raceway into wall/floor or use manufactured seal assembly cast in place. OZ type"FSK" or equal. Change from PVC to steel conduit(couplings or bushings) where necessary to obtain a watertight seal in poured concrete wall or floors. C. Roof Conduits passingthrough buildingroof shall be flashed usinga 4 lb. per square foot lead 9 plumbing vent flashing extending not less than 10"from the conduit under the roofing,and not less than 10"above the roof around the conduit. Flashing shall be attached by an approved galvanized or stainless steel damping band. D. Fire Rated Construction 1. All seals must meet with the approval of the local Fire Marshal. 2. Concrete or Masonry Q. a. Seal around raceway with an approved firestop compound that passes UL test 1479(ASTM E814) DOW CORNING 3-6548,T&B FLAME SAFE,3M Fire Barrier Caulk,3M#Fire Barrier Putty,or equal. 3. Plaster or Gypsum Wallboard a. Seal around raceway penetration with plaster and approved fire tape. E. Acoustical Sealing 1. Provide Acoustical Sealing of all wiring and raceway openings in ceilings,walls and floors which are critical barriers for noise transfer. Acoustical sealing shall consist of • resilient caulking to seal all openings around wiring and electrical raceways. • 02059.100 16110-4 12/11/02 I - RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS 3.13 :SEALING CONDUITS A. Seal interior of all conduits which enter the building through floor,roof or outside walls and may carry water into the building. Seal on the end inside the building, using duct sealing mastic,non-hardening compound type,specifically designed for such service. Pack around wires in the conduit. . B. For exterior wall penetrations below grade,install OZ type"CSB"sealing bushing at interior end of penetrating conduit. Threaded fittings-only are permitted in entering conduits ahead of the sealing bushing. C. Provide for water drainage so no electrical problems will result if seals leak. 3.14 CONDUIT HANGERS A. General 1. Provide for supporting all conduits from the building structure. Space supports per NEC. Contractor shall provide supports adequate for the loads and resistant to earthquake forces. B. With Suspended Ceiling Areas 1. Contractor may attach 12" and 3/4" EMT conduits to ceiling suspension systems provided such systems are structurally suitable. Attachment to suspension systems shall be made with clips specifically manufactured for this purpose. (CADDY or equal) C. Conduits not attached to the ceiling suspension system shall be fastened with approved pipe straps or separate suspension hangers to ceiling metal inserts and/or structural members. D. Hangers for Direct Mounted Conduits 1. Hangers attached directly to building surface shall be two hole sheet steel or one hole malleable iron,all galvanized,pipe damps. (Thomas&Betts or approved equal). 2. Hangers for ground cable and PVC conduit supporting ground cable shall not encircle the cable or conduit in metal,but shall be 2-hole plastic or 1-hole metal clamps. E. Hangers for Single Suspended Conduit 1. Hangers suspended below ceilings shall utilize steel rods and malleable iron pipe rings sized for the application(Grinnell No.97 or approved equal). Provide concrete • hanger inserts as required. F. Trapeze Type Suspended Supports 1. Trapeze type supports shall be used where two or more conduits use the same routing. Such hangers shall utilize steel rods,structural steel channels,and clamps of Kindorf,Unistrut or approved equal,sized for the application. 02059.100 16110-5 12/11/02 i ', RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS G. Support of Conduit in Steel Stud Walls 1. Attach conduits to studs with approved straps or 18 gauge steel wire secured to steel bars. 3.15 CONTINUITY OF CONDUIT SYSTEM A. Conduits shall be assembled continuous and secured to boxes, panels,etc.,with appropriate fittings to maintain electric continuity. 3.16 PULL-LINES A. Provide 150 pound plastic pull-lines in conduit-only systems and spare conduits to facilitate future conductor installation. END OF SECTION 16110 • • 02059.100 16110-6 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLES SECONDARY VOLTAGES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all wire,cable and terminations for a complete installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PACKAGING A. Conductors shall be delivered to the job site in approved original cartons, or on reels as recommended by the manufacturer,and shall bear the Underwriter's Label. Reels shall be provided with suitable protection to prevent fork-lift damage to conductors during shipment or storage prior to use. 2.2 SPECIALIZED CONDUCTORS I A. Conductors for specialized systems shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. 2.3 CONDUCTORS-600 VOLTS A. Copper,insx l"atedfor'600 volts. IF B. Insulation types THW,THHN,THWN,XHHW,RHH, RHW,or as required to suit installation conditions. C. Conductors No.1/0 and larger shall have type RHH/RHHW/USE thick wall insulation unless noted otherwise. Smaller wire sizes shall have insulation suited to installation. D. Thru wiring in fluorescent fixtures shall be rated for 90 degree C minimum. E. Aluminum: Not allowed 2.4 CONNECTORS-600 Volts A. Branch circuit conductor splices: Pre-insulated"twist-on"type or"crimped-on"type as approved (Scotch-lok,Ideal or equal). B. -Cable-Splices:' Split-bolt or tool applied sleeves with pre-formed insulated cover, heat shrinkable tubing or approved plastic insulating-tape. C. Terminator lugs of No. 12'wire and smaller. Spade,insulated type to be tool applied. D. Terminator lugs for No. 10 wire or larger: Two bolt(or approved positive restraint),tool applied compression type (Bumdy or equal). 02059.100 16120-1 12/11/02 } RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLES SECONDARY VOLTAGES 2.5 INSULATING MATERIALS A. Insulating tape or heat shrink tubing shall have the equivalent rating of the applicable conductor insulation(Scotch 3M,RAYCHEM or equal). 2.6 PLASTIC CABLE TIES A. Nylon,or equivalent,locking type(TMB or equal). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL • A. Install all wiring in raceway. 32 MINIMUM WIRE SIZE Lighting and Power System No. 12 AWG • Fixture Wire No. 14 AWG Wiring in Fluorescent Fixture Troughs...No.12 AWG Control Circuits for Motors,etc. No. 14 AWG Fire Alarm Line Voltage Wiring No. 14 AWG Low Voltage Wiring As recommended by Mfgr CONDUCTOR TYPES,, REFERENCED ON PLAN A. Conductors shall be copper. B. Aluminum may be substituted for copper conductors size#0 and larger unless specifically noted as copper only on the drawings. All ground conductors shall be copper. Comply with 3.04 below. 3.4 CONDUCTOR COLORING CODE Conductor color coding shall be as follows: A. 208/120 volt system A Phase-Black B Phase-Red Phase-Blue Neutral—White Grounding—Green Switched wires—Other colors • B. 480/277 volt system A Phase-Brown B Phase-Orange C Phase-Yellow Neutral-Gray Grounding—Green with yellow strip Other Colors-Switched Wires 02059.100 16120-2 12/11/02 jl RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLES SECONDARY VOLTAGES C. Conductors shall have colored insulation except wires larger than #8 may be black with colored tape identification at all terminations and splices. D. Additional colors maybe used where such colors will help in identifying wires and different systems. 35 CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION A. Raceways shall be complete,clean and free of burrs before pulling conductors. B. U.L.approved pull ing pu tng compounds may be used with the residue cleaned from the conductors and raceway entrances after the pull is made. 'C. Contractor shall obtain the manufacturers published recommendations for the handling, pulling and terminating of the cable. Contractor shall perform work in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and accept all responsibility for work not in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Pulleys or blocks shall be used for alignment of the conductors when pulling. Pulling shall be - - in accordance With manufacturer's specification regarding pulling tensions,bending radius of the cable and compounds. No mechanical pulling means shall be used for wires No. 8 AWG and smaller. Cables shall be pulled by the conductor,not by the insulation or shielding. 3.6 MOISTURE PROTECTION A. Cable ends shall be protected at all times from moisture. Provide approved heat-shrink end caps or equivalent for all unterminated cable ends. 3.7 CONDUCTORS IN PANELS AND SWITCHBOARDS A. Conductors in panels,switchboards and terminal cabinets shall be neatly grouped and formed in a manner to"fan"into terminals with regular spacing. 3.8 CABLE SUPPORTS A. Provide conductor support devices as required by code in vertical cable runs. 3.9 INSULATION REMOVAL A. Insulation shall be removed with approved wire stripping tools. Conductors that are nicked or ringed are unacceptable and shall be cut off and re-stripped. 3.10 INSULATION OF ENERGIZED TERMINATIONS A. 'Insulate all exposed energized connections and splices with approved tape or teat'shrink tubing. Tape,if used,shall be half-lapped in two directions. 02059.100 16120-3 12/11/02 RENTONPAVILTON RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLES SECONDARY VOLTAGES 311 -TERMINATIONS-COPPER CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS ' A. Control and special systems wires shall be terminated with a crimped on lug when terminating at a screw connection. B. All screw and bolt type connectors shall be made up tight and retightened after an eight hour period. Tighten all bolted connections with a ratcheting type torque wrench per manufacturer's standards. C. All tool applied crimped connectors shall be applied per manufacturer's recommendations and physically checked for tightness. END OF SECTION 16120 02059.100 16120-4 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16130 OUTLET&PULL BOXES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide outlet and pull boxes as required to enclose devices, permit pulling conductors, for wire splices and branching. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide boxes suitable for the location.Boxes shall meet NEMA Standards for various types. 2.2 INTERIOR WIRING,NEMA 1 A. Flush and concealed outlet boxes shall be galvanized stamped steel with screw ears,knock- out plugs,mounting holes,and fixture stud. B. Surface outlet boxes shall be galvanized stamped steel same as above for use on ceilings and in accessible locations. Contractor shall provide cast iron galvanized for use on walls below 8 feet. C. Boxes exceeding 4-11/16 inches square shall be welded steel construction with screw cover 'j and factory painted. D. Surface Metal Raceway boxes shall be of same manufacture to match raceway. Boxes shall accommodate standard devices and device plates. E. Boxes for casting in concrete or mounting in masonry walls shall be galvanized steel (not aluminum or zinc die castings),specifically designed and listed for that purpose. 2.3 SPECIAL LOCATIONS A. For indoor use provide NEMA 12 boxes B. For indoor damp or dusty locations provide NEMA 4 boxes C. For corrosive locations provide NEMA 4X boxes D. For outdoor equipment where a drain is appropriate provide NEMA 3R boxes. E. For outdoor locations requiring dust and water protection provide NEMA 4 or 4X boxes. F. . For hazardous locations, provide boxes rated for the class and division, as defined in the National Electrical Code. 2.4 BELOW GRADE A. Where exposed to earth,boxes(handholes or vaults)shall be constructed of precast concrete with size,configuration,hinged and locking cover.Structural loading shall be minimum H2O traffic rating. 02059.100 16130-1 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16130 OUTLET&PULL BOXES PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 ANCHORING A. All interior boxes shall be firmly anchored directly or with concealed bracing to building studs or joints. Boxes must be so attached that they will not"rock" or"shift" when devices are operated. B. Exterior boxes shall be fastened to approved hot dipped galvanized mounting supports and a" racking appropriate for size of enclosure. 32 FLUSH MOUNTING A. All boxes shall have front edge(box or plaster ring)even with the finished surface of the wall or ceiling.Use of long screws with spacers or shims will not be acceptable. 3.3 RECEPTACLES,SWITCHES,VOICE/DATA OUTLETS A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the work of other Sections and trades. Study all drawings that form a part of this contract and confer with the various trades involved to eliminate conflicts between the work of this Section and the work of other trades. Check and verify locations with respect to door swings,installation details,cabinet work,and suspended ceilings indicated on contract drawings. Review and coordinate locations of all plumbing, heating,and ventilating equipment and other equipment indicated on the contract drawings of all trades. B. Centered on Built-In Work: In the case of doors and cabinets,where devices are centered between two such features, rough-in these device locations exact. Relocate an y ca devices which are located off center at no additional cost to the owner. C. Where more than one device is shown or specified to be at the same elevation or one above the other,align them exactly on centerlines horizontally or vertically. Relocate as directed all such devices including light switch receptacles, voice/data, signal and thermostat devices which are not so installed,at no additional cost to Owner. D. Device Outlet Height Measure from the finished floor to the centerline,unless otherwise noted on electrical or architectural drawings,or required to serve specific equipment. Switches 42 inches,set vertically Receptacles 18 inches set vertically Voice/Data 18 inches,set vertically;verify pay-phone height with telephone company Other As shown on the plans or as directed by the Architect/Engineer 3.4 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Locate in accordance with approved architectural ceiling layout plans so light fixtures replace • full size lay-in ceiling tiles wherever possible.Notify Architect/Engineer of any conflicts between plans prior to rough-in.Contractor shall relocate light fixtures at no additional charge if field coordination is not done prior to installation. 02059.100 16130-2 12/11/02 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16130 OUTLET&PULL BOXES 3.5 ELECTRICAL WORK IN COUNTERBACKS,MILLWORK AND CASEWORK A. Provide templates, where required, to other trades for drilling and cutting to insure accurate location of electrical devices as field verified prior to rough-in wah the Architect. 3.6 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT A. Provide device back boxes of size and at locations necessary to serve equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the specifications or by others. A device box is required if equipment has pigtail wires for external connection,does not have space to accommodate circuit wiring or requires wire different from circuit wiring used. Study equipment details to assure proper coordination. 3.7 BLANK COVERS A. Provide blank cover or plate over all boxes. 3.8 JUNCTION BOXES OR PULL BOXES IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS A. Shall be supported from structure independently from ceiling suspension system. 3.9 DEVICES BOXES CONTAINING EMERGENCY AND NORMAL DEVICES A. Permitted only with steel barrier manufactured especially for that purpose of dividing the box into two completely separate compartments. 3.10 DEVICE BOXES CONTAINING MULTIPLE DEVICES FOR SYSTEMS RATED OVER 150 VOLTS TO GROUND A. Permitted only with steel barrier manufactured specifically for the purpose of dividing the box into separate compartments for each device having exposed live parts. END OF SECTION 16130 02059.100 16130-3 12/11/02 _ i, RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES&PLATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all wiring devices and plates for a complete installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hubbell B. Arrow Hart C. Leviton D. Pass&Seymour 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wiring devices shall be specification grade, and the product of a nationally recognized manufacturer regularly engaged in their production. B. All wiring devices specified in this section shall be the product of one manufacturer. Each type shall have identical appearance and characteristics. { 2.3 DEVICE COLOR A. Switch handles and receptacles: Grey. B. Orange for isolated ground receptacles. C. Red for Emergency Systems. D. Paint or other surface finish treatments are not acceptable. Verify actual colors with project Architect for special installation conditions. 2.4 SWITCHES A. Switches shall be 20 ampere,277 volt,quiet type with plastic handle. Single pole,double pole, 3-way,4-way or locking type as required. Provide matching styles and color in other devices as required for the conditions of installation. E. . Momentary Contact line voltage switch: Single pole,double throw, 3 wire, normally open. Rating same as above. 2.5 RECEPTACLES A. Duplex NEMA 5-20R configuration(20 amp, 125V) 02059.100 16140-1 12/1 1ro2 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES&PLATES B. GFCI Receptacles 1. Interior. 20A-125V duplex receptacle with trip indicator light. 2. Exterior. 20A-125V duplex receptacle with single NEMA 3R"In Use"cover,mounted • horizontally. 2.6 DEVICE PLATES A. Stainless steel grade 302 plates(for gray devices).Provide pressed steel plates for surface devices in equipment and storage areas. B. Identification Provide engraved device plates with amperage and voltage for all receptacles above 125V, 20 ampere rating. 2.7 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLY ` I A. Provide assemblies complete, including necessary fittings and hardware with circuits as indicated on plans and receptacle spacing at 18 inches on center or as indicated. All assemblies shall contain ground wire. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOUNTING A. Rigidly fasten each device to the box at proper position with the wall to bring device flush with plate or switch handle the proper distance through the plate. 32 ORIENTATION A. Set switches vertical with handle operating vertically,up position"ON"and+42"above finished floor. B. Set interior receptacles vertical with ground slot up;+18"above finished floor. C. Set interior receptacles above counters,horizontal,centered in backsplash or as directed by Architect. Verify prior to rough-in. D. Set exterior receptacles horizontal-at+t8"above finished grade. E. Devices and finish plates shall be installed plumb with building lines. 3.3 RECEPTACLE GROUNDING A. Provide bare bonding wire between receptacle grounding terminal and box. Plaster ear screws connecting the receptacle frame to the box will not be acceptable for grounding. 3.4 HANDICAPPED ACCESS A. Comply with requirements of Washington State handicapped access code. 02059.100 16140-2 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES&PLATES 3.5 TRIM OUT A. Provide device plate for each wiring device. Trim plates and devices shall not be installed until final painting is completed. Scratched or splattered plates and devices will not be acceptable. B. Provide covers on existing outlet boxes that are reused or abandoned under this contract. C. All wiring device plates in correctional center installation shall be fastened with approved tamperproof security screws. 3.6 RECEPTACLE TESTS A. Receptacles shall be checked to insure proper line to neutral,line to ground and neutral to ground voltages. END OF SECTION 16140 • I • • ' 1 02059.100 16140-3 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16160 PANELBOARDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all panelboard equipment complete. All equipment shall be dead front type construction and shall bear the U.L.label. Load centers will not be acceptable. B. All panels provided for service entrance locations as defined by the NEC shall be provided with a UL label as Suitable for Use as Service Entrance Equipment(SUSE). 12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit for review prior to manufacture. Include front view,dimensions,device sizes and layout, list of nameplates and all other information required to demonstrate conformance with contract documents. B. Dimensions of panelboards shall not exceed those noted on or scaled from the contract documents. Conform to 16470,Switchboard Dimensions,when dimensions exceed those allowed by contract documents. - PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Siemens B. General Electric C. Square D D. Challenger 22 PANELBOARD DESCRIPTION A. Voltage, arrangement, and capacity of bus and overcurrent protective devices shall be as shown on the drawings. Bus shall extend behind all spaces ready for future overcurrent protective devices. B. Buss bars shall be plated aluminum or copper with ampere density not-to-exceed 1200/1000 amperes per square inch. Bussing will generally be 3 phase,4 wire,100 percent neutral,200 percent for lighting and computer equipment panels,braced to match the interrupting rating of the breakers. C. ' Provide multiple lugs where parallel or"feed-through" connections are shown on drawings. D. Provide separate neutral and ground buses at the bottom of each panelboard. 02059.100 16160-1 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16160 PANELBOARDS 2.3 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Provide thermal-magnetic type circuit breakers. Where breakers serve receptacles in sleeping areas provide arc-fault circuit-interrupting(AFC!)breakers in compliance with NEC 210-12(6). B. The AIC rating of the panel shall be as specified on the drawings. C. Mount breakers in all panelboards so that breaker handles operate in a horizontal plane. Provide common trip on all multiple pole breakers. D. 120/240 volt circuit breakers shall be the plug-in type;480277 volt circuit breakers may be either plug-in or bott-in type. E. Circuit Breakers rated 15A through 30A shall be U.L.rated for 60/75 degree centigrade wire. Breakers 35A and larger shall be rated for 75 degree centigrade. -, F. Circuit breakers intended for switching 120 volt loads shall be switching duty rated (SWD). G. Provide"Spare"overcurrent devices,where noted on the drawings,complete and ready for future circuit connections. Provide S a "H. P e" p ce for future overcurrent devices,where noted on the drawings. Space shall include all bussing and device mounting hardware. Provide approved coverplates or overcurrent devices in all spaces.Open spaces in the panel are not permitted. 2.4 ENCLOSURE GENERAL CONSTRUCTION A. Provide cabinets of sufficient dimensions to allow future expansion and addition of overcurrent �m- devices within the panelboards. All panelboards shall be provided with door-in-door construction. Provide increased enclosure width required for installation of conduits. B. Provide factory primer coat for cabinets located in finished areas. Where cabinets are located in unfinished areas, standard lacquer or enamel finish, gray or blue-gray color, shall be substituted for factory primer coat C. All electrical distribution equipment locks shall be keyed identically. D. Fasten panelboard front with machine screws with oval counter-sunk heads,finish hardware quality,with escutcheons or approved trim clamps. Clamps accessible only when dead front door is open are acceptable. E. Surface mounted panelboards with fronts greater than 48 inches vertical dimension shall be hinged at right side in addition to hinged door over dead front Provide three point latching • mechanism with one T-handle operator. F. Provide matchingtrim of same height ht for panels or control devices in finished areas. e+9 adjacent 02059.100 16160-2 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16160 PANELBOARDS G. Special remote control switches,contactors,or TVSS equipment where shown integral to a panelboard,shall be mounted on the same frame as the panelboard interior. Provide screw retained access door in the dead front shield. A common enclosure door shall cover both special integral device(s)and panelboard overcurrent protective devices. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Secure panelboards in place with top of cabinet at 6'-0",above finished grade unless otherwise noted. Top of cabinet and trim shall be level; trim and door shall fit neatly without gaps, openings or distortion. B. Top edges of adjacent panels shall be even. C. Securely anchor panelboards to structural framing or walls with approved fasteners and concealed bracing as required. Provide steel channel support framing where panelboard is free standing. Submit support rack shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication. D. Install panelboard interiors only after building structure is completely enclosed. 3.2 CIRCUIT INDEX A. Each panelboard shall be provided with a typewritten index listing each circuit in the panel by number,with its proper designation. Listing shall match circuit breaker arrangements,typically with odd numbers on the left and even numbers on the right. Room numbers shall be the final room numbers used in the building as verified with the Owner. Mount index with a transparent protective cover inside the cabinet door. 3.3 PANELBOARD NAMEPLATE A. Provide phenolic engraved nameplate for each panelboard. See Section 16050 3.4 CABINET PAINTING A. Cabinets furnished as prime painted shall be field painted to match color of adjacent wall. (See Division-Painting). 3.5 SPACE A. Verify space available with equipment sizes and code required working clearances prior to submittal of shop drawings. • END OF SECTION 16160 02059.100 16160-3 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16170 DISCONNECTS&FUSED SWITCHES PART f-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all disconnect switches required by NEC for equipment furnished under this and other divisions of these specifications and by the Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Siemens B. General Electric C. Square D D. Challenger 22 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Switches shall be NEMA type HD (heavy duty), quick make, quick break, dual rated with electrical characteristics as required by the system voltage and the load served. Switches shall be single throw and have blades to open all ungrounded conductors. B. Enclosure shall have interlocking cover to prevent opening door when switch is closed. Interlock shall include a defeating scheme for authorized service work. C. Operator handle shall be lockable in the"off"position. D. Disconnect enclosures shall be suitable for mounting locations. Provide NEMA 1 for dry i locations,NEMA 3R for damp or exterior locations. Provide other NEMA ratings to suit area requirements. E. All disconnect switches shall be the product of one manufacturer to facilitate future maintenance. 2.3 FUSIBLE DISCONNECTS A. Fusible disconnect switches provided shall be per 2.02 above with the addition of fuse space and clips to accept only Class R fuses. 2.4 TOGGLE SWITCHES A. . Motor rated toggle type disconnect switches are acceptable for fractional horsepower equipment. Switches shall be suitable for the intended load and provided with handle guard/lock-off feature(similar to Square D Class 2510). 02059.100 16170-1 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16170 DISCONNECTS&FUSED SWITCHES 2.5 NAMEPLATES A. Provide nameplates on all disconnects and fused switches. Nameplates shall be engraved laminated phenolic mounted with screws. Adhesive only will not be acceptable. Each nameplate shall include this information: Load served,voltage,phase,panel,circuit number, . fuse size and type. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 DISCONNECT LOCATIONS A. Install disconnects in the same relative location as the equipment being served.unless that location is difficult to access or is in an unsuitable environment Discrete disconnect switches of similar size may be grouped in a central location. 32 SUPPORT A. Secure disconnect switches to building structure,equipment unit or approved mounting frame. Support by conduit system only is not acceptable. 3.3 SPLICES A. Wiring space within disconnect switches shall not be used for splicing; provide suitable wire gutters or junction boxes for this purpose. . END OF SECTION 16170 02059.100 16170-2 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16450 GROUNDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide a complete grounding system that complies with the current edition of the National Electrical Code(NEC),and all applicable regulatory codes. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUND RODS A. Minimum size:3/4"diameter by 8'-0"long,copper dad steel rods,or as noted on the drawings. 22 GROUND CONDUCTORS A. Grounding conductors shall be soft drawn,bare,stranded copper unless otherwise noted. Size as shown on the plans and per the National Electrical Code(NEC)Article 250. 1. GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS FOR A.C.SYSTEMS: See NEC table 250-94 2. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: See NEC table 250-95 Equipment grounding conductors may be insulated;provide green insulation and/or approved permanent identification for conductors larger than No.6 AWG. 1; 2.3 GROUND ELECTRODE CONNECTORS A. Connectors for grounding electrode conductor to ground rod shall be of the thermal fusion type; conductor-to- conductor connections may be either thermal fusion or approved hydraulically applied compression type. 2.4 GROUNDING BUSHINGS A. Grounding bushings shall be matched to the ampacity of the grounding conductor and shall have approved set-screw type grounding lug connectors. 2.5 GROUNDING CONNECTORS A. Shall meet the requirements of ground bushings,cast,set-screw or bolted type. 2.6 GROUNDING CLAMPS A. • Clamps shall be matched to the ampacity of the grounding conductor. Provide approved raceway hub where grounding conductor is shown protected by conduit or armored cable. Clamps shall be U-bolt type for connection to waterpipes. 02059.100 16450-1 1 11 02 2l l RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16450 GROUNDING PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GROUND CONTINUITY A. Maintain ground continuity throughout the entire electrical system. B. Permanently connect the electrical system neutral to the water service.The system shall be grounded only at transformer secondaries and at the main distribution board. Branch panel neutrals must be isolated from additional points of grounding. C. Provide approved grounding bushings or locknuts on all conduits terminating in panelboards, pullboxes or other enclosures to insure continuity of conduit grounding connections. D. Securely ground lighting fixtures via the conduit system or by a separate suitable grounding conductor where flexible conduit is used. E. Provide a separate grounding conductor in all non-metallic conduits and in all flexible metallic conduit runs. Connect to the grounding system in an approved manner. F. Cable trays used as equipment grounding conductors shall be specifically approved for that purpose. Special bolted mechanical connectors and/or bonding jumpers shall be utilized to ensure system ground continuity. G. All plug-in receptacles shall be bonded to the box and raceway ground system unless specific isolated ground connections are shown on the drawings. H. Provide a ground conductor in all drop cords and properly connect to grounding type wiring devices or equipment. I. Welding stations shall have a ground wire system of adequate ampacity for welding return current Minimum ampacity 200 amperes per station. USe welding cable for these grounds and run it with the welding stinger cables where applicable. Also, bond adjacent welding stations metal work together. J. Provide a separate ground wire to all devices mounted in wiremold. 3.2 GROUNDING CONNECTIONS A. All grounding connections shall be carefully made to insure low system impedance. Locate grounding connections to allow future servicing and expansion. • 3.3 PREPARATION A. Prior to making mechanical or thermal connections, all conductors shall be clean,dry and • bright with the bonding surface thoroughly cleaned of any oxides,mill,scale or other foreign matter. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Ground conductors shall be protected from mechanical injury during construction. Provide protective coverings or rigid non-ferrous conduit. 02059.100 16450-2 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16450 GROUNDING 3.5 GROUND RODS A. Ground rods shall be driven into undisturbed soil to full depth. Provide additional rods,ionic salt solutions and the like where special low-resistant grounds are specified. 3.6 CONCEALED GROUND ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. Concealed ground electrode systems,shall be installed,inspected,tested and certified for low resistance connections and low resistance to earth ground prior to being covered. 3.7 THROUGH-SLAB GROUND PENETRATIONS A. Ground conductors extending through the slab shall be protected by a rigid conduit sleeve;the void portion of the sleeve shall be packed with a non-hardening type duct seal. 3.8 HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE GROUNDS A. Metallic shielding components,such as tapes,wires or braids,and their associated conducting or semiconducting components shall be grounded per NEC Article 250. Ground terminations shall be made according to the manufacturer's written specifications. 3.9 TESTING A. Shall conform to Section 16060. END OF SECTION 16450 . 02059.100 16450-3 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON ' SECTION 16500 LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide the lighting system complete and operational. All light futures shall be provided complete with lamps,mounting hardware and accessories required for operation. B. Furnish lighting fixtures of types,sizes and finish as listed on the drawings. Light Fixtures shall be complete assemblies constructed to ensure full life of components and minimize amplification and transmission of component generated noise. C. Contractor shall include in his bid lighting control commissioning costs. Contractor shall provide the owner a complete report of test procedures and results indicating all lighting controls have been tested, adjusted and operate in accordance with approved plans and specifications per the authority having jurisdiction. I 12 REFERENCES A. Shall be as follows: National Electrical Manufacturer's Association(NEMA): it LE 5-1993 Procedure for determining luminaire efficiency ratings. Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.(UL): UL 496 Edison Base Lampholders UL 542 Lampholders,Starter Holders for Fluorescent Lamps UL 924 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment UL 935 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts UL 1029 HID Lamp Ballasts UL 1570 Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures UL 1571 Incandescent Lighting Fixtures UL 1572 High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures B. Provide UL labels on all new fixtures. Lighting fixtures installed in damp or wet locations in • interior or exterior areas shall have label`Suitable for Damp Locations"or'Suitable for Wet Locations." 02059.100 16500-1 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16500 LIGHTING FIXTURES 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Light fixture schedule series numbers are a design series reference and do not necessarily represent the exact catalog number,size,voltage,wattage,type of lamp,ballast,finish trim, ceiling type,mounting hardware,ceiling trim or special requirements as specified hereinafter or as required by the particular installation(s). Provide complete fixtures to correspond with the number of lamps, wattage and/or size specified. Refer to light fixture schedule, and Architectural drawings for additional requirements. B. Light fixture voltage shall match voltage of circuit serving the light fixture. Contractor as part of the billing and submittal process shall verify each light fixture and notify engineer in writing of any conflicts. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be neatly and dearly marked to indicate the light fixture(s),lamps and ballasts fully comply with contract documents. When substitute light fixtures are submitted (if permitted)the data shall clearly cross reference(written and highlighted)that the substitute light fixture complies with ever detail of the specified light fixture. Light fixtures not fully complying with contract documents are not permitted. B. Submittals shall have light fixture types and project name clearly indicated and shall be prepared by the authorized manufacturer's representative serving the project area. A list of manufacturer's representatives(including address,telephone and fax numbers)identifying which fight fixture types they represent shall be included with submittals. Submittals not meeting these requirements will be rejected. C. For modified fight fixtures or linear fluorescent fight fixtures mounted in continuous rows,submit scaled drawings prepared by the manufacturer showing all details of construction,lengths of runs, pendant and power feed locations, accessory pieces, finishes and list of materials. Contractor to provide manufacturer with field dimensions where required. • D. Provide test results and demonstration of re-strike illumination for Dual-Arc tube HPS lamps at Engineer's office in Tacoma. • 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All light fixtures and components shall be new and listed by Underwriters Laboratories(UL) or other testing lab acceptable to the Engineer. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Ballasts: Provide manufacturer's warranty for a period of not less than five years. Warranty shall include parts and labor to replace defective ballasts. B. Exit signs Utilizing LED Lamp Technology: Provide manufacturer's warranty for a period of not less than 5 years including parts and labor for full replacement of defective product. 02059.100 16500-2 12/11/02 RENTON PAVIUON RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16500 UGHTING FIXTURES 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Ballasts: Provide one case(12)or 10%(whichever is less)of each type used on the project. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. B. Lamps: Provide one case(12)or 10% (whichever is less)of each type used on the project. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. C. Fuses: Provide one case (12)or 10% (whichever is less)of each type used on the project. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL PARTS A. Interior Fixtures: Steel or aluminum with 300 Degrees F., Baked enamel finish, brushed aluminum with baked acrylic clear lacquer finish, or stainless steel with a brushed finish, manufacturer's standard color unless specified otherwise. B. Exterior Fbctures:Corrosion resisting metal,a(non-ferrous,stainless steel or special finish)and in all cases suitable for outdoor service without tarnishing or other damage due to exposure. C. Recessed Type:Incandescent fixtures shall have housing containing an integral thermal device pursuant to NEC 410-65c. 2.2 LIGHT TRANSMITTING COMPONENTS Virgin acrylic plastic (1.25-inch thick minimum) contained in a hinged steel frame which remains attached to the fixture when door is in open position. 2.3 SPECIAL PARTS Adapters; Plates, Brackets and Anchors: Provide where required by construction features of the building to suitably mount lighting fixture.All such appurtenances and mounting methods shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer prior to fabrication and installation. 2.4 LAMPS A. General Electric,Sylvania or Philips.All lamps supplied shall be by the same manufacturer. B. Provide for each light fixture in the exact number and type for which the light fixture is designed. C. Incandescent Type:Inside frosted, 125V,filament lamps rated for 2500 hours of life(extended service type). • D. Reflector Incandescent Type: 125V,filament lamps rated for 2000 hours of life. E. Fluorescent Type: 1. Bi-pin,T-8 rapid start;color temperature of 3500 K;CRI 82; average life of 20,000 hours. 02059.100 16500-3 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16500 LIGHTING FIXTURES F. Compact Fluorescent Type: 1. Twin tube,double twin tube,triple cube;4-pin,amalgam, color temperature of 3500 K;CRI 82;average life of 10,000 hours.(Sylvania-Dulux T/E/IN). 2. Biax;4-pin,color temperature of 3500 K;CRI 82;high lumen output.(Sylvania-Dulux L) G. High Intensity Discharge Type: 1. Metal Halide: Coated or clear (verify with Engineer prior to ordering), vertical or horizontal bum position,high output color temperature of 3200 K;CRI 82 and better, average life of 10,000 hours of life minimum.All lamps up to 150 watts shall be the "master color"series as manufactured by Phillips. a. 70 watt-Initial umen 5800 b. 100 watt-Initia lumen 9000 c. 150 waft-India lumen 14000 d. 175 watt-Initia lumen 14000 e. 250 watt-India lumen 20500 f. 400 watt-India lumen 36000 2 Metal Halide Pulse Start Coated;color temperature of 3600 K;CRI 70;average life of 20,000 hours. H. Lamps shall have less than 10 mg of mercury. All lamps of specific type are to be of the same manufacturer. There shall be no perceptible color difference between lamps. 2.5 SOCKETS Porcelain,medium base except where mogul base lamps are standard for the fixture specified. 2.6 BALLASTS-FLUORESCENT(Electronic) A. Suitable for lamp type employed.Contractor shall be responsible as part of the shop drawing submittal to proved a ballast that matches the service voltage being provided to the light fixture. Contractor shall also verify quantity of ballasts matches switching shown on drawing. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Advance 2. Magnatek 3. Osram/Sylvania C. ULJETL and CBM labels. D. Ballast output frequency to the lamps shall be above 42 Khz to minimize interference with infrared control systems. 02059.100 16500-4 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16500 LIGHTING FIXTURES E. Electronic ballasts shall be high power factor,greater than 95%and total harmonic distortion (THD)less than 10%. Provide for operation with T-5,T-8,T-12 and BIAX lamps."A"sound rating. Neutral wire to be used in Lighting circuit associated with electronic ballasts shall be #10 AWG CU. F. All ballast shall be designed for use with occupancy sensors and provide up to 30,000 lamp starts.The ballast shall heat the lamp cathodes to 650 degree C with no glow current before applying arc voltage to the lamp. G. Where fluorescent light fixtures are located outside or in non-heated areas,the ballast shall be capable of 0 degree F.lamp ignition. H. Ballasts for (2) 18W & 26W Quad and (1) 26W, 32W & 42W "triple" 4-pin Rapid Start Fluorescent Lamps:Electronic ballasts shall comply with FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 18,concerning EMI and RFI.Ballast output frequency to the lamps shall be above 42 Khz.The power factor shall be 98%or higher.Total harmonic distortion(THD)of the input current shall be less than 20%when used with primary lamp.Ballast shall have lamp end-of-life detection and shut-down circuitry that meets proposed ANSI/IEC standards. For all modular ballasts, the lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.7 for rapid start ballasts. 2.7 EMERGENCY BATTERY BACKUP LIGHT FIXTURES A. Each fluorescent light fixture unit shall consist of an automatic power failure device,test switch operable from outside of the fixture,pilot light visible from outside the fixture,automatic code- ' compliance testing,and fully automatic solid-state charger in a self-contained power pack. Battery shall be electrolyte type with power to supply two T-8 or T-12 lamps at 1100 lumens each or two compact fluorescent lamps at 300 to 750 lumens each for a period of 90 minutes. Emergency unit shall operate unattended and require no maintenance for a period of 5 years. 2.8 BALLAST-HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE A.Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Advance 2. MagnaTek B. All 120 volt ballasts shall have single fusing.All other ballast shall have double fusing. C. All ballasts shall be high power factor type. D. All ballasts 70 W and above shall be provided as multi-tap ballasts,120V208V24OV277V. E. Encapsulated core and coil.Class A noise rating up to 175 watts and Class B noise rating for 250 and 400 watts. F. . All metal halide ballasts shall be pulse-start with no starting electrodes.The lamps shall utilize an"ignitor"to provide a high voltage starting pulse directly across the main electrodes.Once the lamp's arc is established,the ignitor automatically stops delivering pulses. Provide long range ignitor for ballasts when ballasts are located more than 2'-0"away from lamp.When pulse-start ballast with long range ignitor is not available due to distance of ballast from lamp, provide core&coil ballast-probe start. 02059.100 16500-5 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16500 LIGHTING FIXTURES 2.9 HANGING FOR PENDANT FIXTURES A. Rigid type,with not less than 5 thread engagement at each end,consisting of iron pipe,with brass or aluminum tubing casing,or painted tubing not less than 0.040 inches thick B. Provide a swivel canopy for each fixture hanger except where fixture conceals the outlet box directlywithout a canopy. i PY 2.10 EXIT SIGNS A. Unless shown otherwise shall be universal mounting,universal arrows,green letters with single or double face as required. PART 3-EXECUTION �I 3.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES-GENERAL Verify mounting provisions prior to the ordering of fixtures.Fixtures shall be UL listed for the location, and application in which they are installed. 32 DIFFUSERS AND ENCLOSURES Install lighting fixture diffusers only after construction work,painting and clean up are completed. Prior to final acceptance,remove all lamps,reflectors and diffusers,wash, rinse and reinstall. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT OF FIXTURES Make all final spotlight and adjustable light settings under the direction of the Architect/Engineer during a scheduled period of time prior to the completion of the project. 3.4 SUPPORT OF INCANDESCENT FIXTURES A. Surface or Pendant Type:Attach to heavy formed steel straps attached to the outlet box by means of threaded stems with locknuts, or directly to the outlet box where the fixture is specifically so designed_ B. Recessed Type:Mount in frames suitable for the ceiling,with the recessed portion of the fixture securely supported from the ceiling framing. For fixtures supported by a ceiling suspension system,provide as a minimum or as required by AHJ,two safety chains secured to structural members above suspended ceiling. 3.5 SUPPORT OF FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. Recessed Downlight Type:Mount in frames suitable for the ceiling,with the recessed portion • of the fixture securely supported from the ceiling framing. For fixtures supported by a ceiling suspension system,provide as a minimum or as required by ARJ,two safety chains secured to structural members above suspended ceiling. 02059.100 16500-6 12/11/02 '0. i • RENTON PAVIUON RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16500 LIGHTING FIXTURES B. Surface and Pendant Mounted Type: 1. Where mounted on accessible ceilings,hang from structural members by means of hanger rodthrough ceiling or as approved. 2. Continuous Runs of Fixtures:Straight when sighting from end to end,regardless of irregularities in the ceiling. Where fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections. For surface pendant mounted fixtures of three or more provide a unistrut channel for mounting fixtures. Provide 3/8-inch thread rod secured to structural members for support of unistrut channel. 3. Provide surface mounted fluorescent fixtures with UL approval for direct mounting on the various ceilings used. Spacers will not be approved where mounted on lay- in ceilings, support fixtures by at least two positive devices which surround the ceiling runner, and which are supported from the structure above by a No. 12 gauge wire. Spring clips or clamps that connect only to the runner are not acceptable. 3.6 FIRE-RATED ENCLOSURES A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide 5/8"plasterboard minimum,taped box enclosures for all recessed fluorescent and incandescent fixtures in 1 or 2-hour fire-rated ceilings,as required by local building or fire codes. Enclosure to provide minimum 3"air space around fixture. Electrical Contractor to verify with the Architect areas where this provision is applicable. 3.7 SUPPORT OF HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMPED FIXTURES A. As specified for incandescent fixtures,except where special provisions are required for ballast arrangements;provide access to ballast in all cases. 3.8 CEILING TYPES • A. Refer to Architecture drawings. Provide flange trim where fixtures are installed in GWB ceilings. B. The Contractor prior to submitting shop drawings to the Engineer for review shall review the Architectural drawings to verify and coordinate the ceiling systems and lighting fixture frame requirements as well as proper ballast voltage. 3.9 SWITCHING FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES Provide two level switching on all three and four lamp fluorescent figures such that the center lamp(s) are on one switch and the outer lamps are on another. Required switchlegs in fixture flex connection "whips"are not shown on the drawings. • 3.14 SPARE FIXTURES • A. Provide(two eight additional type Xl,X2,X3 light fixtures. 02059.100 16500-7 12/11/02 RENTON PAVIUON RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16500 UGHTING FIXTURES B. Spare fixtures shall include 100'of conduit and wiring as required for a complete installation. Location of these fixtures to be determined by the Owner's representative at the site. Unused fixtures are to be turned over to the Owner. _ I END OF SECTION 16500 02059.100 16500-8 12/11/02 t RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM FYI Intelligent/Addressable loops-2 Intelligent Detectors per loop-99 Addressable Modules per loop-99 Total Intelligent Detectors-198 Total Addressable Monitor of Control Modules-198 Total Intelligent/Addressable devices per system-396 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL Conform to General Conditions,Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and place in operating condition an electrically operated, electrically supervised fire alarm system as described herein. The system shall include, but not be limited to, control unit, power supplies, alarm initiating and indicating devices, conduit, wire, fittings, and accessories required to provide a complete operating system. All units shall be located in accordance with the plans. 1.2 TYPE OF SYSTEM The system shall operate as low voltage, addressable, non-coded,general evacuation fire alarm system. Initiating circuits shall be wired as Class B. These specifications are based on equipment from Notifier (by Sound Electronics) to set a standard for design and quality. Substitutions of the specified equipment and/or supplier will be considered providing that sufficient documentation is provided to the Engineer which certifies that the equipment and/or supplier qualification meets the requirements of this specification. Any request for substitutions shall be submitted by the Contractor in writing so as to be received by the Architect not later than ten(10)days prior to the date set for the bid opening. Approval by the Engineer will be issued by addendum prior to the bid date. 1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification. The system shall fully comply with the latest issue of these standards,if applicable. A. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA)-USA: No.12 CO2 Extinguishing Systems(low and high) No.12B Halon 1211 Extinguishing Systems No. 13 Sprinkler Systems • No. 13A Halon 1301 Extinguishing Systems No. 15 Water Spray Systems No. 16 Foam/Water Deluge and Spray Systems No. 17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems No. 17A Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems Clean Agent Extinguishing Systems No.72 National Fire Alarm Code No.101 Life Safety Code 02059.100 16721-1 12/11102 I ' RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM is B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)- USA: No.268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No.864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No.268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications No.521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No.464Audible Signaling Appliances No.38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes No.346 Waterfiow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 1076 Control Units for Burglar Alarm Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems No. 1971 Visual Notification Appliances C. Local and State Building Codes. r:� 1.4 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prior to installation of any equipment, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with 7 copies of submittals for approval. Submittals shall include floor plans with fire alarm equipment only and wire layout, zoning, battery calculations, one-line risers and equipment specification sheet. The Contractor is responsible for assuring that the conduit size and wire quantity, size, and type is suitable for the equipment supplied. The Contractor shall review the proper installation of each type of device with the manufacturers representative. B. Submission to Authority Having Jurisdiction: In addition to routine submission of the above material, make an identical submission to the Authority having jurisdiction. Include three(3)copies of annotated Contract drawings as required to depict component locations to facilitate review. Upon receipt of comments from Authority, submit them for Engineers review. Make resubmissions if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. 1.5 SERVICE The equipment manufacturer representative shall have a local office staffed with trained,full-time employees who are capable of performing testing, inspection, repair maintenance services and inventory parts for the life of the fire alarm system. This organization must have a minimum of ten (10) years of experience servicing fire alarm systems. Prior to completion of the installation, the manufacturers representative shall provide a preventative maintenance agreement which shall at the owners option become effective at the end of the 12 month warranty period. AI ti'fl 02059.100 16721-2 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 1.6 CONTROL PANEL REQUIREMENTS The control panel shall provide the following capacities: Intelligent/Addressable loops-2 Intelligent Detectors per loop-99 Addressable Modules per loop-99 Total Intelligent Detectors-198 Total Addressable Monitor of Control Modules- 198 Total Intelligent/Addressable devices per system-396 1.7 GENERAL OPERATION Upon actuation of any initiating device (manual stations, automatic detectors, etc.) all alarm indicating units (horns, visual alarm lamps, etc.) shall operate continuously until such time as the manual station or automatic detector is restored to normal and the fire alarm control unit reset. Alarm signals shall be annunciated by zone at the control panel. As per plans,the following additional functions shall be performed in the event of an alarm: 1) Alarms shall be annunciated at a (the)remote annunciator(s). _ • 2) Alarms shall trip the municipal system,and/or remote central station system. 3) Magnetic door holders shall release self-closing fire and smoke doors(where applicable). 4) All air handling systems of 2000 CFM or larger shall be shutdown. Alarm circuits shall remain energized and the zone annunciation LED will continue to flash until the acknowledge switch is operated at which time the audible signaling devices will be de- energized. Should an alarm be initiated in a subsequent zone after an alarm has been acknowledged, the alarm signals shall be re-energized. The control panel shall be restored to normal by operation of a reset switch after the initiating device has been restored to normal. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL A. The FACP shall be a NOTIFIER Model AFP-400 or equal and shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU).The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up the system: intelligent addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors, addressable modules, printer, annunciators,and other system controlled devices. • B. Operator Control 1. Acknowledge Switch: a. Activation of the control panel acknowledge switch in response to new alarms and/or troubles shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the alarm and trouble LEDs from flashing mode to steady- 02059.100 16721-3 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ON mode. If multiple alarm or trouble conditions exist, depression of this switch shall advance the 80-character LCD display to the next alarm or trouble condition. b. Depression of the Acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote annunciator piezo sounders. 2. Alarm Silence Switch: Activation of the alarm silence switch shall cause all programmed alarm notification appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of notification circuits and relays that are silenceable by this switch shall be fully field programmable within the confines of all applicable standards. The FACP software shall include silence inhibit and auto-silence timers. 3. Alarm Activate(Dn11)Switch: The Alarm Activate switch shall activate all notification appliance circuits.The drill function shall latch until the panel is silenced or reset 4. System Reset Switch: Activation of the System Reset switch shall cause all electronically-latched initiating devices, appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits,to return to their normal condition. 5. Lamp Test: The Lamp Test switch shall activate all system LEDs and light each segment of the liquid crystal display. C. System Capacity and General Operation 1. The control panel shall provide, or be capable of expansion to 396 intelligent/addressable devices. 2. The control panel shall include Form-C alarm, trouble, supervisory, and security relays rated at a minimum of 3.0 amps @ 30 VDC. It shall also include four Class B (NFPA Style Y) or Class A (NFPA Style Z) programmable Notification Appliance Circuits. 3. The system shall support up to 8 additional output modules (signal, speaker, telephone, or relay), each with 8 circuits for an additional 64 circuits. These circuits shall be either Class A(NFPA Style D) or Class B(NFPA Style Y) per the project drawings. 4. The fire alarm control panel shall include a full featured operator interface control • and annunciation panel that shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), individual color coded system status LEDs, and an alphanumeric keypad for the field programming and control of the fire alarm system. 02059.100 16721-4 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 5. All programming or editing of the existing program in the system shall be achieved without special equipment and without interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the fire alarm control panel.The system shall be fully programmable, configurable, and expandable in the field without the need for special tools, PROM programmers or PC based programmers. tt shall not require replacement of memory lCs to facilitate programming changes. 6. The system shall allow the programming of any input to activate any output or group of outputs. Systems which have limited programming (such as general alarm), have complicated programming (such as a diode matrix), or require a laptop personal computer are not considered suitable substitutes. 7. The FACP shall provide the following features: a. Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy over life. Drift compensation shall also include a smoothing feature, allowing transient noise signals to be filtered out. b. Detector sensitivity test,meeting requirements of NFPA 72, Chapter 7. c. Maintenance alert, with two levels (maintenance alert/maintenance urgent),to warn of a cessive smoke detector dirt or dust accumulation. d. Nine sensitivity levels for alarm, selected by detector. The alarm level range shall be 1 to 2.35 percent per foot for photoelectric detectors and 0.5 to 2.5 percent per foot for ionization detectors. The system shall also include up to nine levels of prealarm,selected by detector,to indicate to maintenance personnel of impending alarms. e. The ability to display or print system reports. • f. Alarm verification, with counters and a trouble indication to alert maintenance personnel when a detector enters verification 20 times. g. PAS presignal,meeting NFPA 72 3-8.3 requirements. • h. Rapid manual station reporting (under 3 seconds). i. Non-alarm points for general(non-fire)control. j. Periodic detector test,conducted automatically by the software. k. Self optimizing pre-alarm for advanced fire warning, which allows each • detector to learn its particular environment and set its prealarm level to just above normal peaks. I. Cross zoning with the capability of counting: two detectors in alarm,two software zones in alarm, or one smoke detector and one thermal detector. m. Walk test,with a check for two detectors set to same address. 02059.100 16721-5 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM n. Control-by-time for non-fire operations,with holiday schedules. o. Day/night automatic adjustment of detector sensitivity. p. Device blink control for sleeping areas. q. UL-1076 security monitor points. 8. The FACP shall be capable of coding notification circuits in march time (120 PPM),temporal (NFPA 72 A 2-2.2.2. Main panel notification circuits (NAC 1,2,3 and 4) shall also support special two and three stage operations. The two-stage feature allows 20 Pulses Per Minute (PPM) on alarm and 120 PPM after 5 minutes or when a second device activates. The three-stage option provides 20 PPM with one detector in alarm, 120 PPM with two detectors in alarm, and steady on with release. D. Central Microprocessor 1. The microprocessor shall be a state-of-the-art, high speed, 16 bit RISC device and it shall communicate with, monitor and control all external interfaces. It shall include an EPROM for system program storage, non-volatile memory for building-specific program storage, and a "watch dog" timer circuit to detect and report microprocessor failure. 2. The microprocessor shall contain and execute all control-by-event programs for specific action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the system. Control-by-event equations shall be held in non-volatile programmable memory, and shall not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure occurs. 3. The microprocessor shall also provide a real-time clock for time annotation of system displays, printer, and history file. The time-of-day and date shall not be lost if system primary and secondary power supplies fail.The real time clock may also be used to control non-fire functions at programmed time-of-day, day-of- week, and day-of-year. 4. A special program check function shall be provided to detect common operator errors. 5. An auto-program (self-learn) function shall be provided to quickly install initial functions and make the system operational. 6. For fieyibllity and to ensure program validity, an optional Windows(TM) based program utility shall be available. This program shall be used to off-line program the system with batch upload/download. This program shall also have a • verification utility which scans the program files, identifying possible errors. It shall also have the ability to compare old program files to new ones, identifying differences in the two files to allow complete testing of any system operating changes.This shall be in incompliance with the NFPA 72 requirements for testing after system modification. 02059.100 16721-6 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM E. Display 1. The display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the system operator and may also be used to program all system operational parameters. 2. The display shall include status information and custom alphanumeric labels for all intelligent detectors, addressable modules, internal panel circuits, and software zones. 3. The display shall include an 80-character back-lit alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display(LCD). It shall also provide 8 Light-Emitting-Diodes (LEDs), that indicate the status of the following system parameters: AC POWER, FIRE ALARM, PREALARM WARNING, SECURITY ALARM, SUPERVISORY SIGNAL, SYSTEM TROUBLE, DISABLED POINTS,and ALARM SILENCED. 4. The display keypad shall be an easy to use QWERTY type keypad, similar to a PC keyboard.This shall be part of the standard system and have the capability to command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, and field programming. Two different password levels shall be provided to prevent unauthorized system control or programming. 5. The display shall include the following operator control switches: ACKNOWLEDGE, ALARM SILENCE, ALARM ACTIVATE (drill), SYSTEM RESET,and LAMP TEST. 6. The system shall support an optional battery ammeter/voltmeter display. F. Signaling Line Circuits(SLC) 1. The system shall include two SLCs. Each SLC interface shall provide power to and communicate with up to 99 intelligent detectors (ionization, photoelectric or thermal) and 99 intelligent modules(monitor or control) for a system capacity of 396 devices. Each SLC shall be capable of NFPA 72 Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 (Class A or B)wiring. 2. The Loop Interface Board (LIB) shall receive analog information from all intelligent detectors to be processed to determine whether normal, alarm, prealarm, or trouble conditions exist for each detector. The software shall automatically maintain the detector's desired sensitivity level by adjusting for the effects of environmental factors, including the accumulation of dust in each detector.The analog information shall also be used for automatic detector testing and for the automatic determination of detector maintenance requirements. 3. The detector software shall meet NFPA 72, Chapter 7 requirements and be • certified by UL as a calibrated sensitivity test instrument. Thedetectorsoftware shall allow manual or automatic sensitivityadjustment. 4. 1 02059.100 16721-7 12111/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM <E G. Serial Interfaces 1. The system shall include two serial EIA 232 interfaces. Each interface shall be a means of connecting UL Listed Electronic Data Processing(EDP)peripherals. 2. The system shall include an EIA-485 port for the serial connection of optional annunciators and remote LCD displays. 3. The EIA-485 interface may be used for network connection to a proprietary receiving unit. H. Notification Appliance Circuit(NAC) Module 1. The Notification Appliance Circuit module shall provide four fully supervised Class A or B(NFPA Style Z or Y) notification circuits.An expansion circuit board shall allow expansion to eight circuits per module. 2. The notification circuit capacity shall be 3.0 amperes maximum per circuit and 6.0 amperes maximum per module. 3. The module shall not affect other module circuits in any way during a short circuit condition. � dl 4. The module shall provide eight green ON/OFF LEDs and eight yellow TROUBLE LEDs. 5. The module shall also provide a momentary switch per circuit that may be used to manually turn the particular circuit on or off or to disable the circuit. 6. Each notification circuit shall include a custom label inserted to identify each circuits location. Labels shall be created using a standard typewriter or word processor. 7. The notification circuit module shall be provided with removable wiring terminal blocks for ease of installation and service. The terminal strips shall be UL listed for use with up to 12 AWG wire. 8. Each circuit shall be capable of,through system programming, deactivating upon depression of the signal silence switch. Control Relay Module 1. The control relay module shall provide four Form-C auxiliary relay circuits rated at 5 amperes,28 VDC.An expansion circuit board shall allow expansion to eight Form-C relays per module. • 2. Each relay circuit shall be capable of being activated (change in state) by any initiating device or from any combination of initiating devices. 3. The expansion module shall provide 8 green ON/OFF LEDs and 8 yellow LEDs (indicates disabled status of the relay). 02059.100 16721-8 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 4. The module shall provide a momentary switch per relay circuit that may be used to manually turn the relay ON/OFF or to disable the relay. 5. Each relay circuit shall include a custom label inserted to identify its location. Labels shall be created using a standard typewriter or word processor. 6. The control relay module shall be provided with removable wiring terminal blocks for ease of installation and service.The terminal blocks shall be UL listed for use with up to 12 AWG wire. J. Enclosures: • 1. The control panel shall be housed in a UL-listed cabinet suitable for surface or semi-flush mounting.The cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime coat, and manufacturer's standard finish. 2. The back box and door shall be constructed of 0.060 steel with provisions for electrical conduit connections into the sides and top. 1 The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent opening for viewing of all indicators. For convenience, the door may be selected for either right or left hand hinging. K Power Supply: 1. The main power supply for the fire alarm control panel shall provide 6.0 amps of available power for the control panel and peripheral devices. 2. Provisions will be made to allow the audio-visual power to be increased as required by adding modular expansion audio-visual power supplies. 3. Positive-Temperature-Coefficient (PTC) thermistors, circuit breakers, or other over-current protection shall be provided on all power outputs.The power supply shall provide an integral battery charger for use with batteries up to 55 AH or may be used with an external battery and charger systems. Battery arrangement may be configured in the field. 4. The main power supply shall continuously monitor all field wires for earth ground conditions,and shall have the following LED indicators: Ground Fault LED Battery Fail LED AC Power Fail LED 5. The main power supply shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz, and shall provide all necessary power for the FACP. 6. The main power supply shall provide a battery charger for 24 hours of standby using dual-rate charging techniques for fast battery recharge. 02059.100 16721-9 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 7. The main power supply shall provide a very low frequency sweep earth detect circuit, capable of detecting earth faults. 8. The main power supply shall provide meters to indicate battery voltage and charging current. 9. All circuits shall be power-limited,per 1995 UL864 requirements. ' L. Field Charging Power Supply:The FCPS is a device designed for use as either a remote 24 volt power supply or used to power Notification Appliances. 1. The FCPS shall offer up to 6.0 amps (4.0 amps continuous) of regulated 24 volt power. It shall include an integral charger designed to charge 7.0 amp hour batteries and to support 60 hour standby. 2. The Field Charging Power Supply shall have two input triggers.The input trigger shall be a Notification Appliance Circuit (from the fire alarm control panel) or a relay. Four outputs (two Style Y or Z and two style Y) shall be available for connection to the Notification devices. 3. The FCPS shall include an attractive surface mount backbox 4. The Field Charging Power Supply shall include the ability to delay the AC fail delay per 1993 NFPA requirements. 5. The FCPS include power limited circuitry,per 1995 UL standards. M. Specific System Operations 1. Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: A means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity of any or all addressable intelligent detectors in the system from the system keypad. Sensitivity range shall be within the allowed UL window and have a minimum of 9 levels. 2. Alarm Verification: Each of the intelligent addressable smoke detectors in the system may be independently selected and enabled to be an alarm verified detector. The alarm verification delay shall be programmable from 5 to 30 seconds and each detector shall be able to be selected for verification. The FACP shall keep a count of the number of times that each detector has entered the verification cyde. These counters may be displayed and reset by the proper operator commands. 3. Point Disable: Any addressable device or conventional circuit in the system may be enabled or disabled through the system keypad. 02059.100 16721-10 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 4. Point Read:The system shall be able to display or print the following point status diagnostic functions: a. Device status b. Device type c. Custom device label d. View analog detector values e. Device zone assignments f. All program parameters 5. System Status Reports:Upon command from an operator of the system,a status report will be generated and printed,listing all system status. 6. System History Recording and Reporting: The fire alarm control panel shall contain a history buffer that will be capable of storing up to 1000 events. Up to 200 events shall be dedicated to alarm and the remaining events are general purpose.Each of these activations will be stored and time and date stamped with the actual time of the activation. The contents of the history buffer may be manually reviewed,one event at a time,or printed in its entirety. The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems that use volatile memory for historystorageacceptable are not acce table substitutes. 7. Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert The fire alarm control panel shall automatically interrogate each intelligent detector and shall analyze the detector responses over a period of time. If any intelligent detector in the system responds with a reading that is above or below normal limits, then the system will enter the trouble mode, and the particular detector will be annunciated on the system display,and printed on the optional printer. This feature shall in no way inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system, nor shall it require any special hardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform. 8. Pre-Alarm Function:The system shall provide two levels of pre-alarm warning to give advance notice of a possible fire situation. Both pre-alarm levels shall be fully field adjustable. The first level shall give an audible indication at the panel. The second level shall give an audible indication and may also activate control relays. The system shall also have the ability to activate local detector sounder bases at the pre-alarm level,to assist in avoiding nuisance alarms. 9. Software Zones: The FACP shall provide 99 software zones and 10 additional special function zones. 10. The fire alarm control panel shall include a walk test feature. It shall include the • ability to test initiating device circuits and notification appliance circuits from the field without returning to the panel to reset the system. Operation shall be as follows: a. Alarming an initiating device shall activate programmed outputs, which are selected to participate in walk test,for 3 seconds. 02059.100 16721-11 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ._d b. Introducing a trouble into the initiating device shall activate the programmed outputs for 8 seconds. c. Walk test shall be selectable on a per device/circuit basis. All devices and circuits which are not selected for walk test shall continue to provide fire protection and if an alarm is detected,will exit walk test and activate all programmed alarm functions. d. All devices tested in walk test shall be recorded in the history buffer. 11. Waterflow Operation An alarm from a waterflow detection device shall activate the appropriate alarm message on the 80 character display, turn on all programmed notification appliance circuits and shall not be affected by the signal silence switch. 12. Supervisory Operation An alarm from a supervisory device shall cause the appropriate indication on the 80 character display, light a common supervisory LED, but will not cause the system to enter the trouble mode. 13. Signal Silence Operation The FACP shall have the ability to program each output circuit(notification, relay, -, speaker etc)to deactivate upon depression of the signal silence switch. 14. Non Alarm Input Operation Any addressable initiating device in the system may be used as a non-alarm input to monitor normally-open contact type devices. Non-alarm functions are a lower priority than fee alarm initiating devices. 15. Combo Zone A special type code shall be available to allow waterflow and supervisory devices to share a common addressable module. Waterfiow devices shall be wired in parallel,supervisory devices in series. N. PRINTER The printer shall provide hard-copy printout of all changes in status of the system and • shall time stamp such printouts with the current time-of-day and date. The printer shall be wide carriage with 80 characters per line and shall use standard pin-feed paper. The printer shall be enclosed in a separate cabinet suitable for placement on a desk top or table. The printer shall communicate with the control panel using an interface complying with Electrical Industries Association standard RS-232C. Power to the printer shall be 120 VAC 60 Hz. Notifier Model PRN-4(Provide 1) 02059.100 16721-12 12/11/02 II ' RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 2.2 FIELD DEVICES A. INTELLIGENT AND ADDRESSABLE PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTORS The intelligent photoelectric detectors shall be intelligent and addressable, and shall connect with two wires to one of the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit loops. The detectors shall use the photoelectric principle to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel,send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density. The detectors shall be ceiling mount and shall include a twist-lock base. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself, by activating a magnetic switch, or may be activated remotely on command from the control panel. The detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using rotary decimal switches. The detectors shall also store an internal identifying code which the control panel shall use to identify the type of detector. The detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. Both LEDs may be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. If required, the flashing mode operation of detector LEDs shall be controlled through the system field program. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED. The detector sensitivity shall be set through the fire alarm control panel, and shall be adjustable in the field through the field programming of the system. Notifier Model FSP-751 B. INTELLIGENT HEAT DETECTORS The intelligent heat detectors shall connect with two wires to one of the control panel loops. The detectors shall use an electronic sensor to measure thermal conditions caused by a fire and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of such thermal measurements. The detectors shall be ceiling mount and shall include a twist-lock base. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself, by activating a magnetic switch, or may be activated remotely on command from the control panel. • Notifier Model FST-751 Series. 02059.100 16721-13 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM C. Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector The smoke detector housing shall accommodate either an intelligent ionization detector or an intelligent photoelectric detector, of that provides continuous analog monitoring and alarm verification from the panel. Notifier Model DHX-501 or DHX-502 with SDX 551 H Head. D. MONITOR MODULES Monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional alarm indicating devices (any N.O. dry contact devices, including 4-wire smoke detector(s)),to one of the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit(SLC)loops. The monitor module shall mount in a 4-inch square, 2-1/8" deep electrical box, to a surface mounted back box,or directly into the fire alarm control panel. The IDC zone may be wired for Style D or Style B operation. The monitor module shall provide address-setting means using rotary decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code which the fire alarm control panel shall use to identify the type of device. An LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions, indicating r' that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. Notifier Model FMM-1 E. CONTROL MODULE The control module shall be used to connect a conventional indicating appliance circuit of 24 VDC compatible polarized audio-visual indicating appliances to one of the SLC loops. ! The control module shall mount in a standard 4-inch square, 2-1/8" deep electrical box The control module may also be wired as a dry contact (form C) relay. Power for the relay coil shall be provided by the SLC loop to reduce wiring connection requirements. Audio-visual power shall be provided by a separate loop from the main control panel or from supervised remote power supplies. Notifier Model FCM-1 or FRM-1 F. ISOLATOR MODULE The isolator module may be used to isolate wire-to-wire short circuit on an SLC loop in order to limit the number of other modules or detectors that are incapacitated by the short circuit fault. If a wire-to-wire short occurs,the isolator shall automatically open circuit the • SLC loop. When the short is corrected, the isolators shall automatically reconnect the isolated section of the SLC loop. Notifier Model ISO-X 02059.100 16721-14 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM G. ADDRESSABLE MANUAL STATIONS Addressable manual stations shall be provided to connect one addressable, supervised manual station to one of the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit (SLC) loops. The manual station shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch. Manual fire alarm stations shall be breakglass type with a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designated so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation that cannot be reset without the use of a key. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting on matching back box, or semi-flush mounting on a standard single gang box The manual stations shall provide address-setting means using rotary decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code which the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. An LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the manual station is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. The LED may be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. The station shall provide a key reset. The key shall be the same as used for the fire control panel. Notifier Model NBG-I2LX H. HORN/STROBE COMBINATION Hom/strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert series listed to UL 1971 and UL 464 and shall be approved for fire protective service. Horn/strobe shall be wired as a primary signaling notification appliance and comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act requirements for visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over its entire operating voltage range. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. The horn shall have two-tone options, two audibility options (at 24volts) and the option to switch between a temporal 3 pattern and a non temporal continuous pattern. Strobes shall be powered independently of the sounder with the removal of f rctoryinstalle power supply. Notifier SpectrAlert Series or Equal.(Size for proper Candela Rating) STROBE ONLY Strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Series listed to UL 1971 and be approved • for fire protective service. The strobe shall be wired as a primary signaling notification appliance and comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act requirements for visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over the strobe's entire operating voltage range. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. Notifier SpectrAlert Series or Equal. (Size for proper Candela Rating) 02059.100 16721-15 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM J. SYNCHRONIZATION MODULE Module shall be listed to UL 464 and shall be approved for fire protective service. The module shall synchronize strobes at 1 Hz and horns at temporal 3. Also, the module shall silence the horns on horn/strobe models,while operating the strobes, over a single pair of wires.The module shall be capable of mounting to a 4-11/16° x 4-11/16"x 2-1/8° backbox and shall control two Style Y(class B) or one Style Z (class A) circuit. Module shall be capable of multiple zone synchronization by daisy-chaining multiple modules together and resynchronizing each other along the chain.The Module shall NOT operate on a coded power supply. K WEATHERPROOF GRAPHIC ANNUNCIATOR Graphic annunciator shall be 24VDC, UL listed,tamper resistant, custom, weatherproof, LED backlit, and shall be a minimum 23"x 23"in size. The annunciator shall contain the custom outline of the budding and provide one lamp per zone indication. Annunciator shall be suitable for surface mounting on matching backbox or semi-flush mounting as directed by the engineer. Submit shop drawings and custom graphic proofs to engineer/architect prior to manufacture. The annunciator shall communicate with CPU utilizing EIA-485 communication standards and shall be provided with local lamp test feature and a green LED indicator to indicate AC power availability. Automation Displays Incorporated/Space Age L. SPRINKLER FLOW SWITCHES r I The sprinkler waterfiow alarm switches shall be connected to the fire alarm system. The sprinkler contractor shall provide the switches and the electrical contractor shall provide monitor module and wire them into the system. "- M. SPRINKLER SUPERVISORY DEVICES Sprinkler supervisory devices shall be connected to the fire alarm system such that the movement of a valve from the normal (open) position shall sound a supervisory trouble signal. The devices shall be provided by the sprinkler contractor and the monitor module and switch wired by the electrical contractor. 1, 1 PART 3-EXECUTION • 3.1 APPROVED EQUIPMENT AND PERMIT No equipment shall be delivered to the job site until shop drawings have been reviewed and AHJ approved. A reviewed and AHJ approved shop drawing set shall be continuously available at the job site during construction. z Obtain a permit as required from local AHJ prior to installation of equipment. 02059.100 16721-16 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 3.2 WIRING All wiring shall be contained in metal raceways. Wiring insulation shall be one of the types required by NEC 725-16 and shall be consistently color-coded throughout the system. Permanent wire markers shall be affixed to all conductors at terminations and splices. Numbering system shall be consistent with shop drawings. All terminations shall be T& B "Sta-Kon" (or equivalent) self insulated,flanged or forked tongue lugs where connected at screw type terminals. Wiring in main control cabinet shall be neatly a_ arranged and bundled with wire ties(or equivalent). Install wiring equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. No wire other than the detector circuit shall be permitted in conduit feeding detectors unless approved. Minimum wire size for initiating alarm circuit, i.e.,pull stations, heat and smoke detectors, shall be minimum#16. Minimum wire size for indicating circuit, i.e., horns,strobes,shall be minimum#14. 3.3 AUXILIARY CONTROLS Conductors and power supplies of sufficient size shall be installed to minimize voltage drop consistent with the proper operation of all devices. Destructible link smoke dampers shall not be connected to the fire alarm system. Fah shutdown control circuits and smoke removal circuit electrically supervised (subject to NFPA 72A and 72E requirements) and may by incorporated into the fire alarm raceway system, except that limited energy circuits shall be routed separately from line voltage circuits as required by code(NEC article 725). 3.4 AIR DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS Coordinate installation with Division 15 and sheetmetal installer. provide remote indicator lights (for duct smoke detectors)where the detector is located above a suspended ceiling in an area which is not readily accessible. 3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Provide Owner with three (3) sets of detailed operations and maintenance manuals in a hard bound binder prior to completion of the job and formal training. 3.6 AUTOMATIC DETECTORS Locate detectors not less than two(2)feet from a supply or exhaust ventilation grille. 3.7 DEVICE LOCATIONS Device locations may be changed within 15 feet without extra charge, if so desired by the Engineer before installation. • 02059.100 16721-17 12/11/02 1 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16721 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 1 8 3.8 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ::fl Three sets of as-built drawings shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor to the Architect which clearly indicates: 1) Actual muting of all raceways. 2) Actual cable type,numbers,and routing. 3) Actual system wiring diagrams, connection diagrams and interface of all components in the system. 3.9 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A) Detectors in ceiling. B) Manual Stations Per ADA Requirements C) Homs/Strobes Per ADA Requirements 3.10 WARRANTY All components, parts,and assemblies supplied by the manufacturer shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a period on 12 months. Warranty service shall be provided by a trained specialist of the equipment manufacturer. The specialist shall be based in a fully staffed office located within a reasonable distance from the job site. Contractor shall replace or repair defects in material or workmanship for a period of 12 months after the certification of final acceptance. 3.11 TEST AND DEMONSTRATION Upon completion on the system installation,manufacturers representative shall conduct a system test for the Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Authority Having Jurisdiction (Fire Marshal) or their appointed representatives. This test shall be conducted by a factory trained equipment manufacturers representative and verify to those present satisfactory operation of the system. After completion of the test/demonstration, the manufacturer's representative shall obtain written approval on an accepted form from the AHJ that the system is approved. • 3.12 INSTRUCTION The manufacturer's representative shall conduct an instruction session during which all maintenance and operational aspects of the system will be described and demonstrated to personnel selected by the Owner. 0 & M manual information regarding the system shall be turned over to the Architect prior to scheduling the instruction session. END OF SECTION 16721 • JJ , 02059.100 16721-18 12/11/02 ' L RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16930 LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS it PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of lighting control system work is indicated by drawings, and by the requirements of this section. It is defined to include low voltage lighting control panels, switch inputs, and wiring. A. Contractor shall coordinate all of the work in this section with all the trades covered in the other sections of the specification to provide a complete and operative system. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The control panels shall be tested and listed under the U.L. 916 Energy Management Equipment standards or by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. B. NEC Compliance: The control system shall comply with all applicable National Electrical Codes regarding electrical wiring standards. C. NEMA Compliance: The control system shall comply with all applicable portions of the NEMA standards regarding the types of electrical equipment enclosures. D. Component Pre-testing: The equipment shall be previously tested and burned-in at the factory prior to installation. E. System Checkout: A factory trained technician or factory authorized personnel shall functionally test the control system and verify performance after installation. e rience in low voltage of10years 9 F. Manufacturer. Manufacturer shall have a minimumone lighting control systems. Manufacturer shall provide off the shelf control products from its inventory.Control systems that require custom panel sizing are not be acceptable. 1. Approved Manufacturers: A. PCI Lighting Control Systems B. Douglas C. ILC D. As Approved • 2. Product shall be SwitchKeeper control panel or approved equal. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:Submit manufacturer's data on lighting control system and components. 02059.100 16930-1 12/11/02 I• , RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16930 ,© LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings of lighting control system and accessories including, but not necessarily limited to the low voltage relay panels,power wiring,and switch inputs. 1. Riser Diagram/System Diagram ®` 2. Switch Input Wiring C. Spare Parts Submittals shall also include recommended spare parts list. PART 2-PRODUCTS. 2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. System Description z 1. The lighting control system shall consist of low voltage relay control panels with 32 programmable switch inputs and shall offer a mwamum 32 relays. /r' 2. Each low voltage lighting control panel shall be microprocessor controlled with an integral display and programming keypad. r_f, 3. Programmable intelligence shall include Time Of Day control, 32 holiday dates, warn occupants of an impending off,timed inputs,preset control,and local control. TOD 12 programs for Monday- Friday, 7 programs for Saturday, 7 programs for Sunday, and 6 programs for Holidays Holiday 32 holiday dates Warn Off Flash lights and provide odra 10 minutes of illumination Preset Pre-programmed switch patterns Timed Switch input timers 0-240 minutes Inputs Local From alpha-numeric keypad Control Soft- Default limes and group linking for Linking rapid programming. 4. Masking of control inputs permits customizing of switch inputs, and telephone override control. Masking permits the user to determine how his control inputs shall function. Inputs may be customized to "restrict offs, restrict on's, no timer, and ignored."A mask determines lithe control input is available or unavailable for a defined times,specific days and holidays. 5. Each control panel shall provide a Warn Off (flash the lights) to inform the occupants of an impending Off command.The Warn Off command will allow 10 extra minutes for the occupants to override their lights or eat the premises. This option occurs with the switch inputs, telephone ovenide control, and the Time Of Day schedules. 02059.100 16930-2 12/11/02 I• RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16930 LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS 6. Control panels shall permit lighting to be overridden On for after hours use or cleaning. These overrides shall be hard-wired inputs or voice guided touch-tone telephone control. 7. Programming the control system shall be through the local integral keypad or' through a PC running the Supervisor software on anyMS-DOS PC. pe 8. Each low voltage lighting control panel shall have the following hardware features. B. HARDWARE FEATURES - 1. Operator Interface The control panel programming interface resides in firmware in the control panel. The programming interface shall consist of a circuit board mounted keypad capable of linking switch inputs to relay outputs and schedule assignments. Systems that utilize blocking diode technology for relay assignments shall not be acceptable. The integral keypad shall provide access to the main programming features. The keypad shall permit the user to manually command any or all relays individually. Each panel shall control its own loads from internal memory.A control system that relies on a central control computer/processor or exdemal time clocks shall not be permitted. 2. Contact inputs: The control system shall allow dry contacts (Digital Inputs) for override purposes. Momentary or maintained contacts shall be supported as a 3 wire (Momentary) or 2 wire(SPST)inputs respectively. Inputs shall be dry contacts (24 VDC @ 12 ma. internally supplied to the inputs). An input shall be software link-able to any number of relays for override control. The control system shall accept 32 dry contact switch inputs.Software linking of inputs between panels shall eliminate the use of blocking diodes.Up to 5 control panels may share switch inputs. The controller shall provide timers for each switch input. Each switch input timer shall be capable of 0-240 minutes. Software shall enable or disable switch inputs based on day and time(masking). 3. Relay Type: The system shall utilize control relays that are rated to at least 20 amps at 277 VAC. The relays shall be magnetically held. Relays that are latched or mechanically held are not acceptable.A limited 10 year warranty shall be provided on the individual relay's. 02059.100 16930-3 12/11/02 _1 RENTON PAVILION 2 RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16930 LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS i 4. Photocell Control: The controller shall accept user adjustable ambient light sensors. Sensors shall provide for both outdoor and indoor applications. The sensor shall provide user adjustable dead band control. <50 5. Modular Design The control system shall employ all modular connectors to avoid repeat wiring in case of component failure. The system CPU board shall be mounted on quick release spring pins that shall permit an entire change out of the processor and input board in less than 1 minute. 91 All connections for the switch inputs shall incorporate modular connectors. The relay board shall be modular and designed for rapid field replacement or upgrading. Systems that do not employ modular connectors shall not be acceptable. r` 6. Hardware Options a. Lighted Switch Card(LSC) The controller shall provide an option for pilot light wall switch annunciation.A modular card shall connect into the controller board and shall provide power to illuminate pilot light switches. This option shall confirm relay operation. When a relay is in the"ON"position the pilot light switch shall be illuminated. b. Remote Relay Card(LRC) The controller shall provide an option for remote placement of the control relays.A modular card shall connect into the relay compartment.Twisted (3)conductor cable shall power and control the remote mounted relays. c. PowerLine Carrier Card(PLC) The controller shall provide an option for power line carrier control. The option card shall convert relay commands into power line carrier commands. This modular card shall connect into the relay compartment of the controller.The line carrier commands shall be superimposed onto the building's electrical wiring. The PLC option shall eliminate control wiring between the control panel and distant points of control.The control panel shall send individual control signals to intelligent receivers coded to receive a specific address. 02059.100 16930-4 12/11/02 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16930 LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS d. Mechanical Relay Card(MRC) The control system shall provide an option for mechanical override relays. This option card shall provide a hybrid electro/mechanical switching design for application specific lighting control. A manual override on the relay housing shall provide redundant override control. The manual override shall also provide a visual indication of relay status. This relay card shall provide an alternative control relay for lighting areas such as retail, institutional, and broadcasting that require overriding in power loss scenarios. e. Fluorescent Dimming Card(FDC) The controller shall provide an option card for fluorescent dimming control.The Fluorescent Dimming Card (FDC) shall provide sixteen 1-10 volt signal outputs per controller. Each output shall drive an entire lighting circuit ballast load. The outputs may be programmed to provide TOD dimming with adjustable fade rates.Photocell inputs may provide thresholds to create dimming set points and fade rates. 7. Diagnostic Aids Each control panel shall incorporate diagnostic aids for confirmation of proper operation, or in case of failure these aids shall guide the individual in rapid troubleshooting of the system. The control panels shall employ Light Emitting Diodes(LED's)that visibly indicate: - POWER SYSTEM OK - ONIOFF STATUS OF EACH RELAY SYSTEM CLOCK PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION(TOD, Holiday,ON/OFF,&PRESET) Control systems that do not provide visual self help diagnostics shall not be acceptable. 8. Memory Back-up . The system shall utilize a memory back-up device that is system integrated and shall be non- serviceable. The data in RAM shall be protected against power interruptions lasting as long as 10 years. The power interrupt protection circuit shall be entirely maintenance-free. 02059.100 16930-5 12111/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16930 LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS g 9. Multi-tapped Transformer The control panel shall incorporate the use of a multi-tapped transformer. The ;d3 panel shall not require specification of voltage for each control location. The voltages of 120&277 VAC shall be available with each control panel. 10. Status Indication of Relays The system shall provide visible status indication of all relays through the window of each control panel.The visual indication shall disclose ON/OFF status and relay number. . 11. Service Override The control panel shall provide a three position master-service override for the entire panel.The service override shall not be accessible from the exterior. The master service override provides a single three position switch with the option of "ALL ON, "AUTO", and "ALL OFF", respectively. This master switch shall operate all of the relays in the controller.This switch shall override and supersede all commands from the logic board when the switch is in the"ALL ON(green LED) or ALL OFF (red LED)" position. The master switch shall function to override all the relays should the logic board be removed. • The system shall remember the last command to the individual relay. Upon returning the master override switch to the"AUTO" position,the relays shall return to the most recent command state. This will occur even if the last command happened during the master override condition. 12. Lockable Enclosure Each control panel shall be enclosed in a lockable NEMA class 1 enclosure. The enclosure shall be manufactured out of 1/16"steel and shall provide pre-punched knockouts for efficient installation. • 13. Panels The low voltage control system shall consist of panels that may be configured in groups of eight relays.A control panel may be configured to have 8, 16,24, &32 20 amp rated relays at 277 VAC. Controller shall permit panels to share input information between panels.Up to five panels shall share switch input data. • 14. Telephone Overrides(TIM) The control system shall provide intelligent software for the Telephone Interface Module (TIM) option.The TIM unit shall allow modem communications and touch • tone overrides from any touch tone phone.The control system shall permit one TIM per lighting control panel. 02059.100 16930-6 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16930 LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS Modem Operation:The modem shall utilize the Hayes compatibility standard and enable modem access as defined by the Bell 212A and CCITT V.22 protocol standards. Override Operation:Touch-tone interface shall permit the control panel to override the pre-assigned control points "ON/OFF" accordingly. All user interface shall be through the twelve Touch-tone keys on the telephone.All entries into the override system shall be prompted by a digitized voice. Systems not employing voice guided override instruction are not acceptable. The TIM shall provide individual control passwords. Each password shall allow a preset group control for after hour overrides. 15. Modem The control system shall be capable of modem communications. Each control panel shall provide a serial communications port for external communications.The modem shall utilize the Hayes compatibility standard and enable modem access as defined by the Bell 212A and CCITT V.22 protocol standards. The system shall permit: Full screen Video Display Terminal (VDT), Local Area Network (LAN), On-Site & Off-Site communications. The system shall be a multi-tasking system and permit more than one modem in operation at a time communicating on the network. Communication speed shall be a minimum of 2400 baud. ,i 16. PC Interface(Supervisor) The lighting control panels shall be programmable through a PC. The PC connection shall be an RS-232 direct connection to the lighting control panel at 9600 baud. The optional software package shall also allow individual panel programming to be executed remotely through a 2400 baud modem. Individual files shall be programmable in either an "off-line" fashion. The software shall store all programmed data and archive on magnetic media for added backup protection. The software package shall provide a vehicle to upload and download data files. The software functions shall be enhanced by color pop up menus for clarity of use. Specific programming printouts shall be available for user documentation. Masking, switch timers, and alpha-numeric descriptors are available through the Supervisor software. The Supervisor software package shall be capable of operating on any MS-DOS • PC (3.0 or greater) operating system. Minimum computer requirements shall be an RS-232 asynchronous serial port, printer port, monitor, keyboard, 640K of internal RAM,and a hard disk,20 Meg is recommended. 02059.100 16930-7 12/11/02 RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16930 LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS The software package shall permit the PC to perform other functions (i.e. word processing,data-base, etc.)than strictly lighting control programming. Software is 1009. IBM PC compatible. Systems that require an"on-line"dedicated computer for control system operation ` shall not be acceptable.Systems using third party software are not acceptable. C. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS 1. Product: SwitchKeeper lighting control product manufactured by PCI Lighting Control Systems,Inc. 7 Green Tree Drive,Complex#701,So. Burlington,VT 05403-6025 ; , rig PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 Equipment Installation and Documentation A. Installation:The control system shall be installed and fully wired as shown on the plans by the installing contractor. The contractor shall complete all electrical connections to all control circuits,and override wiring. B. Documentation:The contractor shall provide accurate "as built"drawings to the owner for correct programming and proper maintenance of the control system.The "as-builts"shall indicate the load controlled by each relay and the relay panel number. C. Operation and Service Manuals:The factory shall supply all operation and service manuals as related to the design of the control system. 32 PRODUCT SUPPORT AND SERVICE A. Factory Support: Factory telephone support shall be available at no cost to the owner. Factory assistance shall consist of solving programming or application questions • concerning the control equipment. The factory shall maintain toll free numbers for technical support for their customers. 3.3 SYSTEM DELIVERY AND ACCEPTANCE A. Delivery • • Delivery of the control system shall be 4 weeks of the"notice to proceed".The contractor is responsible for complete installation of the entire system according to strict factory standards and requirements. The following items shall constitute factory standards and ; requirements: 02059.100 16930-8 12/11/02 • RENTON PAVILION RENTON,WASHINGTON SECTION 16930 LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS 1) All system equipment shall operate in accordance with specification and industrial standard procedures. 2) An operational user program shall exist in the control system. The program shall execute and perform all functions required to effectively operate the site according to the requirements. 3) Demonstration of program integrity during normal operation and pursuant to a power outage. 4) Contractor shall provide a minimum of two hours training on the operation and use of the control system.Additional support services shall be negotiated between the contractor and the building owner or manager. 3.4 WARRANTY A. Warranty Manufacturer shall supply a one-year warranty on all hardware and software.A limited 10- year warranty shall be provided on the individual relays. Manufacturer shall provide 800 number customer service and support 12 hours per day Monday through Friday. Manufacturer shall guarantee next working day replacement of defective components. END OF SECTION 16930 02059.100 16930-9 12/11/02 '�F